: ' : : Ns b . ©. ae eae c* eet
. “4, 4 seas
' ‘ . ® bd ae 7
a ita
1 = ‘ . > . v . . . = a N
oe = ‘ nd sd % eo a Se ad
: . : ‘ EE er
: . . I won . : 2 oan)
a > 4 . : eee ¥ Les
’ Ar ae... ie : pag
= ‘ : : . : : ‘ A a]
4 ’ . 4 : en} 2
. “Aa 5 F wW i | . s) v4
. . ms A . . u a aa | vor
. . . . . . ‘ “ 1 OP a ea
: $ ‘ - . “¢ i J a
. af 8 . we n 2 .
7 % . , . eee . a RA ts
\ on ae 3 . . ts a
‘ io. tees nr
. J > or ‘ . an Sg, e"s .
4 . : . aor Sad Sean, " + 4 ‘ vee
h A ; “4 : ’ ar F
5 . ‘ ” Me © WreeQsh <a
F o8 re Terie mores Pe Oaths Ming ‘i =D. eel Vives
. 4 . ‘ ty . ar ” ‘I a ay ‘ ‘ U BAe Wray ’ ’ oY
; af F ‘ PL ties ey ’ Lehtonen * Rast bays eens
NOILMLILSNI
NOILNLILSNI
NOILMLILSNI
a
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
Ji4yVYsIT INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31uVY
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION
Xt
ti
NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS
S S3IYVYSIT LIBRARIES
INSTITUTION
SAIYVUaIT LIBRARIES
le
g
%
NVINOSHLINS S3I¥VYdIT LIBRARIES
NVINOSHLINS S3IUVUGIT_ LIBRARIES
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIW
SMITHSONIAN
Yy
lh
SMITHSONIAN
ry i i
J1uvagir_ LIBRARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS | S32 1yVvya |
a = Me & ss a NK us KuSva >
= «. (fg = a = oc
c = yf UY c < = <
4 «x GY 4 = = ee
5 Be es wz 5 m
Fa 7 ty z al > $0 oe
ISTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I14¥VYSIT SMITHSONIAN
= - = = r = ca
S : z —
- a he - Se)
= > vie > ~ is >
= oe _ 2 E “a
Ee es < Es =
= o z OD a ty o
LIBRA INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31IYNVUE
= ” Zhe ” z n a
= . = =a = < =
= = =
- zl S z 8 2
2 3 y 8 ‘2 2
E Wo 2 - z = 2
~~ = = =
= SS > = OS = s =
NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS Saiuvag iol BRARIES SMITHSONIAN
us Z wy z 2 Fa
= ae ” w
= + =< =
fad - co = oO aus
< = < = < ia
a 4 a = ce =
= a z ae J z ar = Zz
aluvug ryt BRARIES _oMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI~ NVINOSHLIWS S31yVvy
= Be = i z
9) = : -e] = re =
= es 5 E a = |
— Fe pa = ar =
m ee ee z : 2.
NSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYSIT LIBRARIES ~ INSTITU
K 2 < = 42 Ge eS ZX.
NAS par z = nf z = Zz SS
~ 2 , a = | a 2 a
aiuvyug Pia LIBRARI ES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNINVINOSHLINS $3 1yvy
a .
. ve
VLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYSIT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
\
_—————
N\
Sh
S!
ew
es
ARIES SMITHSONIAN
NOILNLILSNI
NOILNLILSNI
LIBRARIES
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS
S3INVUdIT LIBRARIES
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION
ALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31YVUGIT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
oe
NVINOSHLINS S31u¥Vvasli
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
a aie SS
ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINWS
NVINOSHLINS
LIBRARIES
LIBRARIES
Sa3iuvugdit LIBRARIES
4
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
saiuvudl
S3Iuvuaiy
INSTITUTION NOILALILS
S3IUVUGIT LIBRARI
N'
NI
ES
SJlyvagl
SMITHSONIAN
NSTITUTION NOILNLI:
LIBRAR
VYSIT LIBRARIES SI
INSTITUTION. NOILNLI
NVINOSHLINS S314&
saiuvugit
NOILALILSNI
INSTITUTION NOILNLI
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOALILSNI NVINOSHLINS SAIYVUSIT_LIBRAF
INSTITUTION
= z =| ra = =
we 8 . ig = 5 N\
fe) =m - Oo = e) = NX
= Le z ad ca i A
> = ad \N
z a hil = = = = os
_NVINOSHLINS S31YVUGIT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION | NOILNL
é 0 a : 5 z
qc WN Ft c cS: ‘ce =
+ RS NN & ox ec ., par
7 ao. . 2 3° 2 5 =
= = ; cee 3 2 : a= > mr
ZARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS Sa1uvudi7 LIBRA
E 2 = 2 NS OE =
=: > = > WS 2 =
alg 2 = Fe) = ed
w = — x
Z o zZ o ee ye
& pod! UVUGITLLIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION,
= = = : = < W& =
= : : : Z :
9 = : re wo ° wn
= O 3 x ve) = fe)
= 2 iE 2 i z
a 2 a ae 2 2
RARIES SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION
” “n = ees
e am ASaag SIN W CK
<x ", < S % i . WN \
yo ee oad a te arn ee z= ce NN
NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31uVY
RARIES
gi
nee
z
. Ad
we.
fi os
| ee =
=f
oe ad
Gil
"g y i
~< 4
9 ‘4
|
! m|
y
@) 4
“nas
STITUT
i,
:)
uv
a
2
2)
(a
condi f
4A
os
v
Fingse
SGT:
€ 3
STITUTI
NS ‘
SN
\
6
ANNALS OF THE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
VOLUME 79
ANNALE VAN DIE
SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
BAND 79
y a
Ae
pe
La
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 79 BAND
THE TRUSTEES OF THE DIE TRUSTEES VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN KAAPSTAD
1979-1980
& SET, PRINTED AND BOUND IN THE REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA BY
THE RUSTICA PRESS (PTY.) LTD., WYNBERG, CAPE
209
LIST OF CONTENTS
Cook, P. L. see HAYWARD, P. J.
GENTRY, A. W.
Fossil Bovidae (Mammalia) from ee South Africa. (Published April
1980.) é He su me be
GRIFFITHS, C. L.
A redescription of the kelp curler Ampithoe humeralis (Crustacea, Amphipoda)
from South Africa and its relationship to eg es (Published
September 1979.) Me cee oe a
HAYWARD, P. J. & Cook, P. L.
The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude cruises. Part 9. Bryozoa. (Published
September 1979.) Me ae iy an er st ue i
KENSLEY, B.
A second genus in the marine isopod family Bathynataliidae. (Published July 1979.)
Mies, G. A. see SIESSER, W. G.
SALMON, D. see SIESSER, W. G.
SANTA Luca, A. P.
The postcranial skeleton of Heterodontosaurus tucki (Reptilia, Ornithischia) from
the Stormberg of South Africa. (Published February 1980.) ..
SIESSER, W. G. & MILES, G. A.
Calcareous nannofossils and planktic foraminifers in Tertiary limestones, Natal
and eastern Cape, South Africa. (Published December 1979.) ..
SIESSER, W. G. & SALMON, D.
Eocene marine sediments in the pee South West Africa. (Published July
1979.) a ; : a8 a me s iy
SIMPSON, G. G.
Tertiary penguins from the Duinefontein site, Cape Province, South Africa.
Published July 1979.)
Page
213
131
43
35
159
139
NEW GENERIC NAMES PROPOSED IN THIS VOLUME
Page
Damalacra Gentry, 1980 age ‘ zi oa aye Ee me a un. 2264
Inversiscaphos Hayward & Cook, 1979 ae are mr ee = = ag 76
Leiosalpinx Hayward & Cook, 1979 se ae abe ay SH ss oe 66
Naudea Kensley, 1979 a : ae 2 ae se aS if ae 36
Notocoryne Hayward & Cook, 1979 ee aie ae an a te be 54
Nucleornis Simpson, 1979... ae on ar pe oa aie ae a: 2
VOLUME 79 PART 1 JULY 1979
S 907. 63
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
7
,
f
JAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents EtvnE hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should: be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of mee illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes... .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; aoe ae
‘As described (Haughton & Broom eg
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927) .
Note: no comma separating name sities year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100—140.
FIsCcHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull, Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 79 Band
July 1979 Julie
Part 1 Deel
TERTIARY PENGUINS FROM THE DUINEFONTEIN
Behe, CAPE PROVINCE, SOUTH AFRICA
By
GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheidvan stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t—p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t—p.i.), 70-4), 8, 91-2, 7), 101-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 77 7
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
TERTIARY PENGUINS FROM THE DUINEFONTEIN SITE,
CAPE PROVINCE, SOUTH AFRICA
B
GEORGE eee SIMPSON
The Simroe Foundation, 5151 East Holmes Street, Tucson, Arizona 85711
(With 3 figures and | table)
[MS. accepted 17 May 1979}
_ ABSTRACT
Penguin bones of possible Miocene age were found in excavations for a nuclear power
plant about 25 km north of Cape Town. At least two species are present, but the smaller
species cannot be more precisely identified than as spheniscid. The larger species is represented
by tarsometatarsi with a single metatarsal foramen between the second and third metatarsals,
an arrangement hitherto unknown among penguins. A new genus and species Nucleornis
insolitus is based on these specimens.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction . 1
Systematics . 2;
Acknowledgements 6
References F
INTRODUCTION
In 1978 penguin bones were found in excavations for the Koeberg Nuclear
Power Station on the farm Duinefontein a few kilometres north of Melkbos
(or Melkbosstrand), which is about 25 km north of Cape Town. These bones
came from two excavations, one for the reactor and one for a pump station.
The stratigraphic section is essentially the same in the two excavations. Between
about 5 and 9,4 metres above mean sea-level there are fine quartzose dune sands
and a palaeosol calcrete of late Pleistocene age from which vertebrate fossils and
Palaeolithic artefacts were recovered (Hendey 1968; Klein 1976). From about
three metres above sea-level down to Precambrian bedrock at eleven metres
_ below that level there is a complex of marine deposits. In this complex at about
8,2 to 8,5 metres below sea-level there is a bed of coarse quartzose sand in which
were found whale debris, sharks’ teeth and other fish debris, and the penguin
bones described in this paper. The age of this bed has not yet been determined,
but Hendey (pers. comm.) suggests that it may correlate with late Tertiary
deposits elsewhere in the general vicinity and tentatively considered Miocene in
age, for example at Ysterplaat, where penguin bones were also found (Simpson
1973).
The specimens here described are in the South African Museum and they
are designated as in that museum’s catalogue, prefixed by SAM-PQ.
Measurements are in millimetres.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 79 (1), 1979: 1-7, 3 figs, 1 table.
Ds ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SYSTEMATICS
Order SPHENISCIFORMES
Family Spheniscidae
Nucleornis gen. nov.
Etymology
Nucle- is a reference to the serendipitous association of this discovery with
a nuclear power station. Ornis is the common neo-Latin use of the Greek word
for ‘bird’. The generic name is masculine.
T ype-species
Nucleornis insolitus sp. nov.
Included species
Type only.
Known distribution
?Miocene at the Koeberg Nuclear Power Station, Cape Province, South
Africa.
Diagnosis
Tarsometatareus short and stout. A single intermetatarsal foramen
between the second and third metatarsals, plantar opening immediately distal
to the inner calcaneal ridge.
Discussion
This position of a single intermetatarsal foramen is not known to occur in
any other penguin, living or fossil. In all six living genera there are usually two
such foramina, one inner or medial foramen between the second and third
metatarsals, and one outer or lateral between the third and fourth metatarsals.
In Aptenodytes and Pygoscelis the two are approximately equal and both open
on the plantar surface, the medial foramen just distal to the inner calcaneal
ridge, and the lateral foramen at the same level and below the less salient outer
prominence or ridge. In the other living genera, Megadyptes, Spheniscus,
Eudyptes, and Eudyptula, the inner foramen is smaller than the outer foramen
and is a small, comparatively long canal that does not open on the plantar
surface, strictly speaking, but on the medial surface of the bone and, here,
between the inner calcaneal ridge and the shaft of the second metatarsal.
According to Watson (1893) the small inner foramen or canal is sometimes
absent in Spheniscus, and according to Marples (1952) it is also sometimes
absent in Eudyptula. There is then only one such foramen, the outer or more
lateral of the two. (This variant does not occur in specimens of those genera that
have been examined.)
In the two genera named from the late Tertiary of Cape Province, Inguza
TERTIARY PENGUINS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 3
has the foramina about as in Pygoscelis, and Dege has it intermediate in position
between those of Pygoscelis and of Spheniscus (Simpson 1975, 1979). Among
older known fossil penguins some have two foramina differing only in detail
from those of Aptenodytes and Pygoscelis. That is true, for instance, of
Paraptenodytes from the early Miocene of Argentina (Simpson 1946) and
Archaeospheniscus from the early Oligocene of New Zealand (Simpson 1971a),
and the probable late Eocene of Seymour Island, Antarctica (Simpson 19716).
Others, however, have a lateral foramen present and the medial or inner foramen
small or, more commonly, absent, notably Palaeeudyptes from the early
Tertiary of New Zealand (Marples 1952; Simpson 1971a) and Palaeospheniscus
from the early Miocene of Argentina (Ameghino 1905; Simpson 1972). Until
now no spheniscid tarsometatarsus was known to have a single medial or inner
foramen. Some fossil genera have been named on the basis of bones other than
the tarsometatarsus, usually the humerus, and for some of those the tarso-
metatarsus is not known. It is possible that some had a single medial foramen,
but no such occurrence has been known hitherto.
The presence of such an unpenguin-like character in what is clearly a
penguin tarsometatarsus seemed almost unbelievable on beginning this study.
The possibility that a lateral foramen had been mistaken for a medial one had
to be considered. That would be possible if a left tarsometatarsus were taken for
a right or if the plantar face were taken for the dorsal or anterior face, but in this
case that is not possible. In other respects the tarsometatarsus of Nucleornis is a
mere variant of a completely spheniscid pattern. The shaft of the second meta-
tarsal is curved, that of the fourth straight. The prominent inner calcaneal ridge
is medial, and the much less prominent ridge is lateral. There are deep grooves
between the metatarsals on the dorsal or anterior face, none on the plantar face.
The proximal articulation for the tibiotarsus is also asymmetrical exactly as on
the right tarsometatarsus of other penguins. The holotype of the type-species is
certainly a right tarsometatarsus and its single foramen is certainly medial. The
possibility that this is an unusual variant or perhaps teratological is also
effectively ruled out by the fact that there are two specimens surely of different
individuals and exactly alike in this remarkable character. The functional
significance, if any, is unknown.
The type-species Nucleornis insolitus may be within the possible size range
of Palaeospheniscus ? huxleyorum Simpson 1973, also from the Cape Province
and possibly of about the same geological age. The latter species was based on
humeri and its tarsometatarsus is unknown. The humerus of Nucleornis insolitus
_ is unknown. Thus the possibility that the species are synonymous cannot be
entirely ruled out. That does not affect the validity of the genus Nucleornis,
which cannot be synonymous with Palaeospheniscus or any other genus in which
the tarsometatarsus is known. The clearly valid generic name must be linked
with a type-species known to have its generic characters. Under these circum-
stances a new specific name must be proposed despite the slight possibility that
it could be synonymous with P. ? huxleyorum.
4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Nucleornis insolitus sp. nov.
Etymology
Insolitus, Latin, ‘unusual’, ‘strange’, because of the unusual presence of a
single medial intermetatarsal foramen.
Holotype
MBD4, right tarsometatarsal lacking the distal ends of the second and
third metatarsals (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1. Nucleornis insolitus, type, tarsometatarsus SAM—PQ-MBD4.
Proximal, dorsal and plantar views.
Hypodigm
The holotype and MBD3, right tarsometatarsal lacking the part proximal
to the fourth metatarsal and the distal end of the second metatarsal (Fig. 2).
Known distribution 7
As for the genus.
Diagnosis
Only known species of the genus. Measurements as in Table 1.
TABLE |
Measurements of Tarsometatarsi of Nucleornis insolitus
MBD4,
holotype MBD3
Width across proximal end : : : ; eS Z 19,9 —
Width about one-fourth of distance from proximal end . ; : 19,9 21,6
Width of distal end of third metatarsal : 2 ; : é 4 —— 9,0
Length of third metatarsal to distal groove : : : : —
Length of fourth metatarsal to distal groove. , : ; ‘ 31,3 —
TERTIARY PENGUINS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 2)
Fig. 2. Nucleornis insolitus, tarsometatarsus SAM—PQ-MBD3.
Dorsal and plantar views.
Discussion
Although MBD3 is somewhat more nearly complete, MBD4 has crucial
structure better preserved and is therefore selected as the holotype. MBD4 is
slightly smaller than MBD3 but the morphology is almost identical in the two
and the difference in size is well within the expected size range of this bone in a
single species of penguins.
MBD7 from the same deposit is a right radius of size appropriate for this
species and probably belonging to it. It lacks the distal end. The part preserved
is characteristically spheniscid but does not clearly show any particularly
distinctive features. As reference to the species is not certain and it would add
no diagnostic characters, it is not included in the hypodigm.
Gen. et sp. indet.
Material
MBD70, left humerus, proximal and distal ends incomplete. This bone is
from the excavation for the reactor and all the others are from that for the pump
station, but as noted above all are from the same bed (Fig. 3).
MBD10, right humerus, so badly abraded as to have little remaining
character.
MBD1, left tibiotarsus, lacking proximal end.
MBD2, left coracoid, lacking posterior end.
Discussion
These bones could all belong to a single species, although there is no
assurance that they do so. None can be confidently identified to genus or species.
They are all definitely too small to belong to Nucleornis insolitus.
6 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
MBD70 is a short, relatively light humerus, probably with a bipartite
tricipital fossa, with a gently but definitely curving shaft distinctly wider toward
the distal end and without a preaxial angulation. This specimen falls just short
of permitting identification but suggests that it represents a distinct species. It is
not referable to Palaeospheniscus? huxleyorum, based on a humerus and of
possibly near the same age at Ysterplaat, MBD70 being somewhat smaller, with
shaft more distinctly curved and with a greater difference between proximal and
distal widths. The very poorly preserved humerus MBD10 might be of the same
species as MBD70.
Fig. 3. Spheniscidae indet., humerus SAM
Medial view.
The coracoids of penguins are often characteristic at a generic or even a
specific level. This is seldom of diagnostic use for fossil penguins because
articulated or associated skeletons of fossil penguins are extremely rare, almost
all named taxa are based on the humerus or the tarsometatarous, and few fossil
coracoids are definitely referable to a defined genus or species. It has frequently
been noticed (e.g. Marples 1952; Zusi 1975) that in living penguins there are two
quite distinct patterns of coracoids, one, in Pygoscelis and Aptenodytes, without
a fenestra, and one, in the other living genera, with a fenestra. Although because
of breakage this is not quite certain, MBD2 seems to have had a fenestra.
As with many other spheniscid characters it is not yet clear which, if either, of
these states was primitive and which is derived or whether both are.
There are three other specimens in the collection that are probably bre
ments of penguin bones but are entirely unidentifiable: MBD8, MBD9, and
MBD11.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Once more I am greatly indebted to the South African Museum and to
Dr Q. B. Hendey who arranged the loan of the fossil specimens for my study,
provided the locality and stratigraphic data, and reviewed the manuscript of this
paper. The field data include a geological section by Dr J. Rogers of the
Geological Survey of South Africa. Study was carried out at the Simroe
Foundation with support from the Department of Geosciences of the University
of Arizona, Tucson, U.S.A.
TERTIARY PENGUINS FROM SOUTH AFRICA ¥
The illustrations were prepared by Miss J. Nolte of the South African
Museum.
REFERENCES
AMEGHINO, F. 1905. Enumeracién de los Impennes fosiles de Patagonia y de la Isla Seymour.
Buenos Aires: Juan A. Alsina.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1968. The Melkbos site: an upper Pleistocene fossil occurrence in the south-
western Cape Province. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 52: 89-119.
KLEIN, R. G. 1976. A preliminary report on the ‘Middle Stone Age’ open-air site of
Duinefontein 2 (Melkbosstrand,. south-western Cape Province, South Africa). S. Afr.
archaeol. Bull. 31: 12-20.
Marp Les, B. J. 1952. Early Tertiary penguins of New Zealand. Palaeont. Bull., Wellington
20: 1-66.
Simpson, G. G. 1946. Fossil penguins. Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 87: 1-100. :
Simpson, G. G. 197la. A review of the pre-Pleistocene penguins of New Zealand. Bull. Am.
Mus. nat. Hist. 144: 319-378.
Simpson, G. G. 19716. Review of fossil penguins from Seymour Island. Proc. R. Soc. (B) 178:
357-387.
Simpson, G. G. 1972. Conspectus of Patagonian fossil penguins. Am. Mus. Novit. 2488: 1-37.
Simpson, G. G. 1973. Tertiary penguins (Sphenisciformes, Spheniscidae) from Ysterplaats,
Cape Town, South Africa. S. Afr. J. Sci. 69: 342-344.
Simpson, G. G. 1975. Notes on variation in penguins and on fossil penguins from the Pliocene
of Langebaanweg, Cape Province, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 59-72.
SIMPSON, G. G. 1979. A new genus of late Tertiary penguin from Langebaanweg, South Africa.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78: 1-9.
WATSON, M. 1893. Report on the Spheniscidae collected during the voyage of H.M.S.
*“Challenger’’. Challenger Rep. Zool. 7.
Zusi, R. L. 1975. An interpretation of skull structure in penguins. Jn: STONEHOUSE, B., ed.
The biology of penguins: 59-86. London and Basingstoke: Macmillan.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: ee pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861:
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 165, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, One specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) . The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *.. . the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘... in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON
TERTIARY PENGUINS FROM THE DUINEFONTEIN
SITE, CAPE PROVINCE, SOUTH AFRICA
“|
ISSN 0303-2515
APE TOWN
ii
Pe
A
YF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of eae illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
“As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list of
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. -H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FISCHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Konun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konan, A. J. 19605. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 79 ~~ Band
July 1979 Julie
Part 2 Deel
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE
SPERRGEBIET, SOUTH WEST AFRICA
By
WILLIAM G. SIESSER
&
DAVID SALMON
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 201-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.—p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.-p.i.), 70-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 101-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4—5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 79 3
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET,
SOUTH WEST AFRICA
By
WILLIAM G. SIESSER
South African Museum, Cape Town
&
' DAVID SALMON
Geological Survey, Cape Town
(With 15 figures)
[MS. accepted 5 June 1979]
ABSTRACT
Twelve taxa of calcareous nannofossils and twenty-one of benthic foraminifera have been
identified from calcareous marine siltstones near Bogenfels, South West Africa. These taxa
establish the sediments as upper Eocene. It is equally correct to assign them either to Martini’s
NP 19-NP 20 nannofossil zones (37,2—39,5 m.y.B.P.) or to Bukry’s Jsthmolithus recurvus
subzone (38-41 m.y.B.P.). The sediments were deposited in a shallow, near-shore environment;
the overlying watermass was cool-temperate and had normal marine salinity.
The informal name ‘Langental beds’ is suggested for the low-lying, fossiliferous rocks in
the area, at least some of which are upper Eocene. The informal name ‘Buntfeldschuh beds’ is
suggested for the topographically higher, essentially unfossiliferous units. The Buntfeldschuh
beds may be upper Paleocene—lower Eocene.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction . : ; ; ‘ : : : ‘ ea aS)
Tertiary marine deposits. : : : : seo as ee ALO
Buntfeldschuh . ; : : A : . 10
Lithology . F : p : é : . 10
Palaeontology : f : : , : ce eek
Bogenfels : ; ; ; ; 4 é Cena
Lithology . , ; 3 é ; ‘ ie? © 6)
Palaeontology . , : : . : cw als
Palaeoecology : , ; , : : oe OO
Stratigraphic status of the Tertiary deposits . : ne 50
Acknowledgements . ; : : : : : LS
References . : . 3 ; : f : : 33
INTRODUCTION
Study of the Tertiary Period in southern Africa is severely constrained by
the scarcity of outcrops. This is especially true along the western coastal margin
of the subcontinent. Scattered outcrops occur in the southern coastal zone
between Cape Town and Hondeklip Bay, but between Hondeklip Bay and the
5
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 79 (2), 1979: 9-34, 15 figs.
10 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Kunene River—a distance of more than 1 200 km—the only known marine
Tertiary beds are a few small exposures in the Sperrgebiet (Fig. 1). It is therefore
imperative to extract as much geological information as possible from these
outcrops, since they are the only positive record left of Tertiary marine incursion
along this long stretch of coastline. |
The main purpose of this paper is to present an account of the microfossils
in these rocks, although aspects of the lithology, depositional environment and
stratigraphic status are discussed as well.
TERTIARY MARINE DEPOSITS
All the Tertiary deposits occur in the ‘Sperrgebiet’. The name means ‘the
forbidden area’, and was applied by the German government a few months after
diamonds were discovered (1908) in the northern part of the area. General
prospecting was forbidden in the region lying between the coast and the Great
Escarpment and extending from the Orange River northwards to latitude 26°S—
the area originally defined as the Sperrgebiet (Stocken 1962).
Tertiary marine deposits occur sporadically as small outcrops from
Buntfeldschuh in the south to Liideritz Krater in the north, a distance of about
40 km (Fig. 1). The best-preserved and most-studied outcrops occur at two
localities: Buntfeldschuh, and a few kilometres north and north-east of
Bogenfels. Smaller outcrops occur at or near Eisenkieselklippenbake, Liideritz
Krater, Advokat Bake and in a few other patches (see Beetz 1926, and the
geological map in Kaiser 1926).
BUNTFELDSCHUH
LITHOLOGY
_At Buntfeldschuh there is a surf-cut platform at 120-140 m (Martin 1973).
About 45 m of marine sediments lie on this platform. The marine unit consists
of a sporadically occurring pebble conglomerate at the base, overlain by clayey,
mostly fine-grained sandstones. Occasional pebble lenses dominated by
chalcedony, agate and jasper cut through the sandstones (Fig. 2). These lenses
are known to be diamondiferous; Beetz (1926) reports the finding of gemstones
as large as 2,5 cts.
The sandstones are predominantly greyish green (5 GY 7/2), although
dusky yellow (5 Y 6/4), dark greyish orange (10 YR 6/6) and very pale orange
(10 YR 8/2) colours are also common (colours from the GSA Rock Color
Chart). Most units are fine-grained in texture; quartz is the most abundant
component grain, with minor, variable amounts of feldspar, rock fragments and
Opaque minerals. Only a few calcareous layers are present, and in these the
CaCO, occurs as cement. The sandstones are mostly poorly to moderately
indurated. Figure 3 shows a thin section cut from a more indurated sample.
Overlying the marine rocks is a thick (over 40 m) sequence of cross-bedded
brown aeolian sandstone (Fig. 4). This aeolian sequence is capped by about | m
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET
SOUTH WEST AFRICA
(NAMIBIA)
PAE LUDERITZ
o)
~a
m
>
2 >-
. Liideritz Krater
\. ° Granitberg @
Elizabeth Bay
Fe Pomona
\.Bogenfels m
\- eEisenkieselklippenbake
\.-Advokat Bake ©
\.-*Buntfeldschuh = —
a om
an
Fig. 1. Map showing the locations of Tertiary marine outcrops mentioned in the text.
1]
i2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. Pebble lens in Buntfeldschuh sandstones. Pebbles are predominantly vein quartz,
chalcedony, agate and jasper.
Fig. 3. Photomicrograph of a greywacke sandstone from Buntfeldschuh. Groundmass is
comminuted mica and clay; grains are mostly quartz, with some altered feldspar and
rock fragments.
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET 13
Fig. 4. Cross-bedded aeolian sandstones overlying ?upper
Paleocene-lower Eocene marine beds at Buntfeldschuh.
‘Diagenetic’-ooid-bearing calcrete caps the section.
of calcrete, containing the same unusual diagenetic ooids and intraclasts (Fig. 5)
first reported by Siesser (1973) from ?Pliocene—Pleistocene calcretes of the Cape
Province.
Further details of the Tertiary section at Buntfeldschuh are given by Beetz
(1926). Unpublished work by geologists of Consolidated Diamond Mines,
South West Africa suggests that the Buntfeldschuh-escarpment section may be
more stratigraphically complex than previously realized. Local faulting and
tilting in the section allows recognition of at least two marine members. The
lower member overlies a remnant of the Pomona beds (here capped by Tafelberg
Quartzite) in a small depression at the northern end of the escarpment
(C. G. Stocken pers. comm. 1979).
14
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ye Tis Wim.
‘Diagenetic’ ooids and intraclasts set in an intergranular fabric of microspar and
micrite at Buntfeldschuh (see Fig. 4).
“SS SS S
SAGs
SS
Fig. 6. Burrow in sandstone at Buntfeldschuh.
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET itp)
PALAEONTOLOGY
The only macrofossils found in the marine section were burrows (Fig. 6).
Fish teeth have been reported by B6hm (1926) and C. G. Stocken (pers. comm.
1979).
All samples collected were barren of microfossils.
BOGENFELS
Tertiary remnants are preserved 3-5 km north and north-east of Bogenfels
village in two depressions on either side of the Langental (Fig. 7). The larger
exposures are south and east of the Langental. The smaller, but better-known
deposits, are on the northern side of the Langental, adjacent to Wanderfeld IV
(Fig. 7). Most attention in the past has focused on the smaller exposure, which
will be referred to here as the Wanderfeld IV locality, since it is the most
fossiliferous exposure and also overlies the only known marine Cretaceous
deposit between the southern Cape Province and the Kunene River. The
following lithological and micropalaeontological descriptions of this section
refer specifically to the Wanderfeld IV outcrops.
LITHOLOGY
Tertiary outcrops rest on a platform carved into the late Precambrian
Bogenfels Formation (mostly dolostone and phyllitic schists in this area), at an
elevation of about 70 m. Beetz (1926) gives general characteristics for the
Tertiary beds. Klinger (1977) presents a diagrammatic stratigraphic section, and
the following description is taken partly from his section, and partly from our
own observations.
The marine beds are only about 4 m thick. They consist of a pebble layer
at the base, which is overlain by concretionary calcareous sandstones and marly
sandstones and siltstones. At least one layer of light-brown (5 YR 5/6)
ferruginous calcirudite occurs near the bottom of the section. This layer contains
_ pebbles, but is predominantly composed of neomorphosed mollusc fragments
set in micrite and microspar (Fig. 8). The marly sand- and siltstones are mostly
pale greenish yellow (10 Y 7/2), poorly consolidated, and calcareous. The
calcareous concretionary layers are greyish yellow (5 Y 7/4) to pale greenish
yellow (10 Y 7/2) and are moderately well indurated. All layers contain occasional
macrofossils and agates. This section is generally much more calcareous than
the Buntfeldschuh section.
PALAEONTOLOGY
Klinghardt discovered the first fossils at Bogenfels (Haughton 19306).
Reuning and Lotz collected from the locality in 1909, and supplied the original
fossils studied by BOhm & Weissermel (1913). A Miocene age was initially
assigned, based mainly on the molluscs and fish teeth. BOhm (1926) later
revised the age to middle to upper Eocene, after obtaining a more extensive
collection of fossils made by Kaiser and Beetz during 1914-19 (Haughton 19305).
16 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
However, doubt remained in some quarters as to the age of these beds (see
Siesser 1977 for a review). Siesser (1977) eventually confirmed the age as upper
Eocene, based on calcareous nannofossils.
Macrofossils
Bohm & Weissermel (1913), B6hm (1926), and Weissermel (1926) provide
an extensive list of the macrofossils found near Bogenfels. Bryozoans, bivalves,
ES WF Wil
SA WR
\ SASS
Be Dated Tertiary section (kK) Upper Cretaceous inlier
\! Precambrian
Quaternary & Tertiary
BS) thin sand & gravel
Tertiary sand & 1:= 30 000
siltstones
Tw N
A>
Fig. 7. Map showing location of upper Eocene rocks north and north-east of
Bogenfels (from Kaiser 1926; Klinger 1977).
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET 17
Fig. 8. Photomicrograph of the upper Eocene mollusc calcirudite at Wanderfeld IV
(Fig. 7). Groundmass is micrite and microspar; light grains are quartz; large elongate
grains are mollusc fragments neomorphosed te pseudospar.
gastropods, a nautiloid, cirripeds, a crab, corals, hydrozoans, fish teeth and
Callianassa burrows are all present. Bivalves and gastropods are the most
abundant fossils: B6hm (1926) named 9 new species in the former class and 13
in the latter from this locality; fish teeth are also numerous and diverse: Bohm
(1926) named 13 new species here.
The abundance and diversity of the gastropod Turritella is especially
_ striking. This genus litters the ground (Fig. 9) in the area, and prompted
Haughton (1930a) to coin the term ‘Turritella-beds’ for the Tertiary outcrops.
Microfossils
Calcareous nannofossils
Moderately to poorly preserved calcareous nannofossils (Figs 10-11) occur
in the clayey siltstones. A list of the species identified follows. The relative
_ percentage of each species, based on specimen counts in smear slides, is also
listed. (These species are all well known and their taxonomy is not controversial ;
therefore a systematic palaeontology section is not included.)
70
Braarudosphaera bigelowi (Gran & Braarud) Deflandre . . . . i
Braarudosphaera discula Bramlette & Riedel . . . . . ~~. trace
2 LES DIDS SU ee nae rem a eee ey a 1
18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
O
/o
Coccolithus eopelagicus (Bramlette & Riedel) Bramlette & Sullivan . 28
Coccolithus formosus (Kamptner) Wise s,s 6
Discoaster saipanensis Bramlette & Riedel lo. i 5
Discoaster tani Bramlette & Riedel . : ; : : : ; é 3)
isthmolithus recurvus Weflandre ©: 54 . 3. = ea 3
Reticulofenestra bisecta (Hay, Mohler & Wade) Roth . . . . 37
Reticulofenestra coenura (Reinhardt) Roth 2 ny A ee eee
Reticulofenestra umbilica (Levin) Martini & Ritzkowski. . . . 12
Lygrhablithus bijugatus (Dellandre)-Dellandre a 4
The age can be narrowly defined by the range overlap of Discoaster
saipanensis and Isthmolithus recurvus. The former ranges from middle to upper
Eocene and the latter from upper Eocene to lower Oligocene. They co-occur
only in the NP 19 and NP 20 zones of Martini’s (1971) biostratigraphic zonal
scheme, and only in the J. recurvus subzone of Bukry’s (1975) zonal scheme.
Fig. 9. Various species of Turritella weathered out of
the upper Eocene rocks at Wanderfeld IV (Fig. 7).
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET
Gr. .., Fas eee
Fig. 10. Calcareous nannofossils from the upper Eocene rocks at Wanderfeld IV (Fig. 7).
Light photomicrographs. A. Braarudosphaera bigelowi, crossed nicols, scale = 6u.
B. Coccolithus eopelagicus, crossed nicols, scale = 9u. C. Coccolithus formosus,
crossed nicols, scale = 5u. D. Discoaster saipanensis, plane polarized light, scale = 6p.
E. Discoaster tani, plane polarized light, scale = 4u. F. Isthmolithus recurvus, plane
polarized light, scale = 5u. G. Reticulofenestra bisecta, crossed nicols, scale = Sp.
H. Reticulofenestra cf. R. coenura, crossed nicols, scale = 3u. I. Reticulofenestra
umbilica, crossed nicols, scale = 6p.
19
20 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Vail et al. (1977) show the estimated time boundaries of NP 20-NP 19 as
37,2-39,5 m.y.B.P.; Bukry (1975) estimates the boundaries of the J. recurvus
subzone as 38-41 m.y.B.P.
Benthic foraminifera
Poorly preserved benthic foraminifera occur in small numbers in the clayey
siltstones at Wanderfeld IV. This is the first report of in situ upper Eocene
benthic foraminifera on the mainland of South or South West Africa. (The
‘upper Eocene’ deposits recorded by Chapman (1930) in the eastern Cape
Province are now known to be lower Eocene (Siesser & Miles in press).) The
fauna is dominated by Glandulina sp. and Lenticulina spp. Most of the other taxa
are represented by only a few specimens, or in some cases, a single specimen.
Rather formidable taxonomic problems plague the study of benthic
foraminifera under the most favourable conditions (Boltovskoy & Wright 1976;
Boltovskoy 1978). These difficulties are accentuated here, since specimens are
relatively scarce and have been affected by diagenesis (Fig. 1 1c—f). All specimens
have been variously affected by mechanical breakage, solution, recrystallization
or test infilling. The variation noted among specimens of some of the better-
known species suggests that there may be new species present. However,
insufficient numbers of specimens available for study precludes describing them
as new species.
Because there is little previously published information on southern
African Palaeogene benthic foraminifera, and because of the taxonomic
problems involved, a section on systematics follows, together with illustrations
of the taxa identified at Wanderfeld IV (Figs 11-15). Generic assignments have
been made following the classification of Loeblich & Tappan (1964). The
preferred modern species name is given, followed by a brief synonymy.
Family Textulariidae
Textularia sp.
Fig. 12A
Remarks
A single arenaceous specimen from which the initial portion of the test is
partly missing and the remainder indistinct; therefore the generic position is
somewhat uncertain. The test is slightly elongate, biserial and rhomboidal in
section. It is finely agglutinated and fourteen chambers are visible. Apertural
details are obliterated.
Family Nodosariidae
Astacolus sp.
Fig. 12B
Remarks
A solitary specimen with slightly compressed planispiral test, the final
chamber of which breaks away to become uniserial. The last chamber is shorter
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET 21
E | | F
=—— ——
Fig. 11. Calcareous nannofossils and benthic foraminifera from the upper Eocene rocks at
Wanderfeld IV (Fig. 7). Scanning electron micrographs. A. Coccolithus formosus, scale = 2.
B. Reticulofenestra bisecta, scale = 24. Note dissolution effects on C. formosus and accretion
of secondary calcite in the central area of R. bisecta. C-—F. Test infilling and test dissolution
in Lenticulina. Differential test dissolution is displayed in C (SAM-K5538) and D (SAM-—
K5539). The umbo and sutures are more resistant to dissolution and remain prominent.
Dissolution eventually produces an internal mould as shown in E (SAM-K5540) and
F (SAM-KS5541). Scale = 100z.
aD ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
in height, but broader than the previous chambers. Twelve chambers are
visible and the sutures are flush to very slightly raised.
Lenticulina simplex d’Orbigny, 1839
Fig. 12C—D
Robulus simplex (d’Orbigny) Cushman & Laiming, 1931: 98, pl. 10 (fig. 5a—b).
Remarks
A few well-preserved specimens occur, with thick, prominent umbos and
keels.
Lenticulina cf. L. pseudo-mamilligerus (Plummer, 1926)
Fig. 12E-F
Robulus pseudo-mamilligerus (Plummer) Cushman, 1951: 13, pl. 4 (figs 1-5).
Remarks
The illustrated specimen resembles the species figured by Cushman (1951)
in test outline and in suture and chamber disposition.
Lenticulina cf. L. oblonga (Coryell & Howe, 1930)
Lenticulina cf. L. oblonga (Coryell & Howe) fide Fairchild, Wesendunk & Weaver, 1969:
42, pl. 6 (fig. 4a—b).
Remarks
A poorly preserved eight-chambered specimen was found. The keel is
present on the early chambers only, the remainder unpreserved.
Lenticulina subalata Reuss, 1854
Fig. 13A-B
Cristellaria subalata Reuss, 1854: 68, pl. 25 (fig. 13). Chapman, 1926: 65, pl. 4 (igs 19a—b,
25a—b, 26a—b).
Remarks
Two specimens of this species were found. This form has been noted from
the Aptian by Reuss and from the upper Eocene of New Zealand by Chapman
(1926).
Lenticulina spp
Remarks
Twelve very badly preserved specimens were found. None could be
definitely identified to species level.
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET 23
<
c gies
Fig. 12. Benthic foraminifera from the upper Eocene at Wanderfeld IV (Fig. 7). Scanning
electron micrographs. All scales = 100u, unless otherwise noted. A. Textularia sp. SAM-—
K5520. B. Astacolus sp. SAM-K5521. C. Lenticulina simplex, side view, SAM-K5522,
scale = 300u. D. Lenticulina simplex, peripheral view, SAM-K5522. E. Lenticulina cf.
L. pseudo-mamilligerus, side view, SAM-K5523. F. Lenticulina cf. L. pseudo-mamilligerus,
peripheral view, SAM-K5523.
24 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Glandulinidae
Siphoglobulina ? sp.
Fig. 13C-D
Remarks
A single specimen appears referable to this genus, but the state of preserva-
tion does not allow an accurate diagnosis. The test is subfusiform and circular in
cross-section. Chambers are strongly overlapping, the sutures depressed and the
specimen has a terminal radiate aperture. In side view the specimen appears
similar to Marginulina, a distinguishing feature of this genus noted by Parr
(1950) in his description of the genoholotype Siphoglobulina siphonifera. The
genus ranges from lower Tertiary to Holocene.
Family Polymorphinidae
Glandulina sp.
Fig. 13E
Remarks
The most abundant form present in the Bogenfels section. Chambers and
sutures are indeterminate because of poor preservation. The terminal, radiate
aperture, however, is often preserved. |
Family Elphidiidae
Elphidium cf. E. crispum (Linné, 1758)
Fig. 13F
Nautilus crispus Linné, 1758: 709.
Polystomella crispa (Linné) Brady, 1884: 736, pl. 110 (figs 6-7).
Elphidium crispum (Linné) Barker, 1960: 220, pl. 110 (figs 6-7).
Remarks |
A single, broken specimen was found. Although broken, the features of the
central boss, chambers and sutures suggest E. crispum, rather than the closely
related form E. macellum.
Elphidium sp. A
Fig. 14A—-B
Remarks
A small Elphidium with subcircular outline has twelve chambers and raised.
sutures bridged by retral processes. The retral processes (four or five present)
of the earlier parts of the whorl are confused, giving a pitted appearance to the
test. The aperture consists of a number of pores at the base of the apertural face.
This specimen is very similar to E. saginatum Finlay, but differs in not having a
depressed central area.
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET 25
E ess F cones,
Fig. 13. Benthic foraminifera from the upper Eocene at Wanderfeld IV (Fig. 7). Scanning
electron micrographs. A. Lenticulina subalata, side view, SAM-K5524. B. Lenticulina
subalata, peripheral view, SAM—K5525. C. Siphoglandulina? sp., side view, SAM-—K5526.
D. Siphoglandulina? sp., front view, SAM-K5526. E. Glandulina sp. SAM-K5527.
F. Elphidium cf. E. crispum side view, SAM--K5528. All scales = 100z.
f
;
}
|
|
5
26 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Elphidium sp. B
Fig. 14C—D
Remarks
This well-preserved specimen has a flattened test with near-parallel sides.
Numerous chambers with raised sutures and retral processes are present, but
detail of the earliest chambers of the whorl is confused because the specimen is
broken. The umbilical area is slightly depressed and filled with calcareous
nodules. Small papillae cover the chambers and the apertural face. The aperture
consists of four pores in a circular position at the base of the apertural face and
three pores in the areal position in the lower half of the apertural face. The
specimen appears somewhat similar to Discorotalia tenuis, but trochospiral
coiling cannot be confirmed as the specimen is broken. It also differs from
D. tenuis by having the typical circular apertures of Elphidium.
Family Nonionidae
Nonion costiferum (Cushman, 1900)
Fig. 14E-F
Nonion costiferum (Cushman) fide Rau, 1964: 16, pl. 5 (fig. 5).
Remarks
Three specimens of this species were identified. The species is notable in
having raised sutures and a depressed umbilical region. The specimens from
Wanderfeld IV differ from those illustrated by Rau (1964) in possessing fewer
chambers. The previously reported occurrence of this species in the U.S.A. is
near the Oligocene-Miocene boundary (Rau 1964).
Nonion sloanii (d’Orbigny, 1839)
Fig. 15A
Nonionina sloanii d’Orbigny, 1839: 68, pl. 6 (fig. 18).
Nonion sloanii (d’Orbigny) Cushman, 1930: 9, pl. 3 (figs 6-8).
Remarks
This species is represented by a single specimen. It has been recorded in
sediments of Eocene to Holocene age.
Family Discorbidae
Valvulineria aegyptina Le Roy, 1953
Fig. 15B
Valvulineria aegyptina Le Roy, 1953: 53, pl. 9 (figs 21-23).
Remarks
The specimen found differs from the type by having dorsal chambers
which overlap strongly, making only eight chambers visible. Apertural features
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET oi |
E
SE |
Fig. 14. Benthic foraminifera from the upper Eocene at Wanderfeld IV (Fig. 7). Scanning
electron micrographs. All scales = 100u, unless otherwise stated. A. Elphidium sp. A, side
view, SAM-K5529. B. Elphidium sp. A, peripheral view, SAM-—K5529, scale = 30u.
C. Elphidium sp. B, side view, SAM-—K5530. D. Elphidium sp. B, peripheral view, SAM-K5530.
E. Nonion costiferum, side view, SAM-—-K5531. F. Nonion costiferum, peripheral view,
SAM-K5532.
;
28 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are not distinct as the apertural flap is broken; therefore the full extent of the
aperture is not known. Other features are typical of this species. A coarsely
punctate wall occurs on both dorsal and ventral sides. A typically imperforate
area occurs on the lower ventral part of the final chamber. The final chamber is
inflated and extends over, and covers part of, the central umbilical region. The
dorsal side is flat, the ventral side convex and umbilicate. This species is
recorded from the Eocene in Egypt.
Family Rotaliidae
Ammonia cf. A. beccarii (Linné, 1767)
Nautilus beccarii Linné, 1767: 1162.
Rotalia beccarii (Linné) Cushman, 1928: 104, pl. 15 (figs 3-7).
Ammonia beccarii (Linné) Cifelli, 1962: 119, pl. 21 (figs 1-6).
Remarks
This genus occurs in two forms at Bogenfels. A. beccarii has a ventral
umbilical area which lacks an umbilical boss, but this is not unusual in this
species.
Ammonia sp.
Remarks
Broken specimens occur which were impossible to identify because of poor
preservation. The features visible are typical of the genus. The umbilical area is
closed but a small protruding plug is present. This is not the typical plug found
in A. beccarii; the plug appears as a nodule of material on the umbilical
covering.
Pararotalia inermis (Terquem) emend. Le Calvez, 1949
Fig. 15C-D
Rotalia inermis Terquem, 1882: 68, pl. 6 (fig. la—c).
Pararotalia inermis (Terquem) emend. Le Calvez, 1949: 32, pl. 3 (figs 54-56).
Remarks
Badly broken specimens of this species were found. The tests are eroded
into the typical mushroom shape in side view. Perforate chambers are separated
by flush, oblique, imperforate sutures, and an imperforate central area occurs
on the dorsal side. The umbilical plug has been eroded out by removal of some
or all the chamber flaps. This species was originally described by Terquem (1882)
from the middle Eocene of the Paris Basin. McMillan (1974) described a closely
related form, Pararotalia cf. P. inermis, from Holocene sediments on the
Agulhas Bank.
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET 29
‘ § 2. :
t J ES
Fig. 15. Benthic foraminifera from the upper Eocene at Wanderfeld IV (Fig. 7). Scanning
electron micrographs. A. Nonion sloanii, side view, SAM-—K5532. B. Valvulineria aegyptina,
dorsal view, SAM-—-K5533. C. Pararotalia inermis, dorsal view, SAM-—K5534. D. Pararotalia
inermis, ventral view, SAM—K5535. E. Cibicides pseudoungerianus, dorsal view, SAM—K5536. .
F. Cibicides sp., peripheral view, SAM—-K5537. All scales = 100u. .
30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Cibicididae
Cibicides pseudoungerianus (Cushman, 1922)
Fig. 1SE
Truncatulina pseudoungeriana Cushman, 1922: 97, pl. 20 (fig. 9).
Cibicides pseudoungerianus (Cushman) Cushman, 1931: 123, pl. 22 (figs 3-7).
Remarks
A species that ranges from the Eocene to Holocene; only a single specimen
was found.
Cibicides sp.
Fig. 15F
Remarks
This specimen is not well preserved, but has features similar to the form
Cibicides sp. illustrated by Van Hinte (1963), viz. a central raised area on the
dorsal side.
Cibicides spp
Remarks
A number of poorly preserved forms were found which fit the basic
description of this genus. .
PALAEOECOLOGY
Members of the nannofossil genus Braarudosphaera are virtually absent in
open-ocean deposits, and are thus strong indicators of nearshore environments;
Zygrhablithus bijugatus is also most common in nearshore waters. These taxa
make up a small percentage only of the nannoflora in the samples studied, but
their presence in even minor amounts suggests deposition in a shallow-water
environment. The benthic foraminifera also suggest a normal marine, shallow-
water environment.
The nannoflora may in general be considered a temperate-water assemblage.
However, Isthmolithus recurvus is a cool-water nannoplankter. Miliolid and
peneropolid foraminifera, which are normally common, are conspicuously
absent among the benthic foraminifera, and this also suggests that ‘cool—
temperate’ may be the most appropriate designation for the water mass
overlying this site during the upper Eocene.
The benthic foraminifera are not closely age diagnostic, but do corroborate
a Palaeogene age for the Wanderfeld IV beds.
STRATIGRAPHIC STATUS OF THE TERTIARY DEPOSITS
Early workers assumed age equivalency among the scattered Tertiary rocks
cropping out between Buntfeldschuh and the Bogenfels—Granitberg area.
Haughton (1930qa) first expressed doubt, on palaeontologic grounds, noting that
the fish teeth reported at Buntfeldschuh do not prove these beds are con-
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET 3]
temporaneous with the Bogenfels exposures. Bohm (1926: 55), refers to abundant
fish remains at Buntfeldschuh in the introductory remarks to his paper on the
Bogenfels fossils. But he does not designate any teeth specifically from Buntfeld-
schuh in the text of his paper, and his summary table on p. 86 lists teeth from
Bogenfels only. Based on published reports, the numerous geologists who have
subsequently visited Buntfeldschuh have failed to find a single marine body
fossil (e.g. Haughton 1930a; Stocken 1962; Ziegler 1969; Martin 1973; Siesser
1977), although C. G. Stocken (pers. comm. 1979) has confirmed the presence of
fish teeth in the pebble layers. The Buntfeldschuh section is therefore considered
to be essentially unfossiliferous, and in marked contrast to the highly fossiliferous
sections near Bogenfels.
Nor can the two localities be correlated on lithologic grounds: dissimilarities
are as apparent as similarities (cf. Beetz 1926; Klinger 1977; and the descriptions
in this paper). In fact, the chief basis for age correlation seems to be that both
contain lenses of agates and other pebbles (Beetz 1926; Kaiser 1926; Martin
1973). Against this, Haughton (1930a) points out that the Buntfeldschuh beds
contain pebbles and boulders of the Pomona beds (pre-Oligocene, possibly
Cretaceous (Stocken 1962)), whereas the exposures near Wanderfeld IV do not
(Haughton 1930a). Descriptions by Beetz (1926) also suggest lithologic
similarity among the various non-fossiliferous outcrops in the area, and among
the fossiliferous outcrops, but less similarity between the two. A significant
point is the relative elevations of the fossiliferous and non-fossiliferous beds. The
base of the exposures at Buntfeldschuh lic 65 m above those at Wanderfeld IV,
and those at Advokat Bake and Eisenkieselklippenbake lie up to 100 m above
Wanderfeld IV (Kaiser 1926; Haughton 1930a; Stocken 1962).
Haughton (1963) has already suggested that there may be an age difference
between the higher and lower Tertiary deposits in this area. He suggested that
the higher deposits may be Eocene and the lower may be Miocene, presumably
believing, with Du Toit (1954), that the original age (Miocene) assigned by
Bohm & Weissermel (1913) to the lower deposits was more likely to be correct.
The writers also think the higher, non-fossiliferous deposits are probably older
than the lower, fossiliferous deposits. But there is now an unequivocal date for
the lower deposits: upper Eocene. Therefore the higher deposits may be upper
Paleocene-lower Eocene. This suggestion is based on evidence for a late
Paleocene—early Eocene transgression of the Cape Province south coast recently
documented by Siesser & Miles (1979). Moreover, Siesser & Dingle (1979) have
suggested that this transgression was higher and more extensive than the late
Eocene transgression around the coast of southern Africa.
The writers frankly admit that assigning the Buntfeldschuh outcrops to the
upper Paleocene—lower Eocene is based on circumstantial evidence. But it is no
more speculative than to assign them to the middle or upper Eocene, or to the
Miocene for that matter, as has been done in the past. In fact, what little evidence
there is for the age of these unfossiliferous beds (viz. topographically higher than
the known upper Eocene deposits; known major late Paleocene-early Eocene
32 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
transgression in southern Africa) supports the age assignment suggested here.
Whatever the age relationship of these two units, their lithologic dis-
similarity precludes their inclusion in a single lithostratigraphic unit. The
generally higher, and essentially non-fossiliferous beds are best exposed at
Buntfeldschuh, and this can be regarded as the type locality for this unit.
A ‘Buntfeldschuh Formation’ is thus potentially available, but is not herein
proposed. SACS (1977: 21) has set out strict requirements for establishing a
formal lithostratigraphic unit, and the writers do not have sufficient data on this
unit to describe a stratotype. However, the 1977 South African Stratigraphic
Code makes clear provision for the erection of informal lithostratigraphic units
in such cases. Thus it is proposed that this unit be informally termed the
‘Buntfeldschuh beds’. This name can be upgraded to the ‘Buntfeldschuh
Formation’ if and when the requirements for formal status can be met.
Topographically lower and richly fossiliferous outcrops occur near
Bogenfels, with the best-known exposures at Wanderfeld IV. This unit is also a
potential formation, but again cannot be formally proposed in this paper for the
same reason: insufficient data available to satisfy requirements for erection of a
formal stratotype. It is proposed that this unit also be given informal status.
As with a formal unit, an informal unit should carry a geographic name.
‘Bogenfels’ is unsuitable, as it already is used for the Precambrian dolostone
formation in the area. Similarly, “Wanderfeld IV’ has already been pre-empted
for the Cretaceous informal lithostratigraphic unit occurring in the same area
(Klinger 1977).
The writers suggest that this unit be informally called the ‘Langental beds’,
referring to the long valley adjacent to which the best exposures occur. This name
can later be upgraded to the ‘Langental Formation’.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Consolidated Diamond Mines of South West Africa Ltd kindly granted
permission and provided facilities for one of us (WGS) to visit and sample the
outcrop areas. Dr C. G. Stocken and Mr D. Minney of Consolidated Diamond
Mines are thanked for their efforts in making the trip a success. The senior
author is grateful to the South African Committee for Stratigraphy who
provided funds for his flight to Oranjemund. The South African Geological
Survey also provided additional samples, which were originally collected by
Dr H. C. Klinger, from the area.
The senior author began this project while a member of the Department of
Geology, University of Cape Town and completed it after he joined the
Palaeontology Department, South African Museum. Both organizations are
thanked for their support. We wish to thank the Director of the Geological
Survey for permission for one of us (DS) to publish.
Scanning electron micrographs were taken in the Electron Microscope
Unit, University of Cape Town. Dr C. G. Stocken read the manuscript and
offered useful comments.
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE SPERRGEBIET 33
REFERENCES
BARKER, R. W. 1960. Taxonomic notes on the species figured by H. B. Brady in his report on
the Foraminifera dredged by H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ during the years 1873-1876. Am. Ass.
Petrol. geol., Spec. Publ. 9: 1-238.
Brapy, H. B. 1884. Report on the Foraminifera dredged by H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ during the
years 1873-1876. Rep. Sci. Res. Explor. Voyage H.M.S. Challenger (Zool) 9: 1-814.
BEETZ, W. 1926. Die Tertidrablagerungen der Kiistennamib. Jn: KAISER, E. ed. Die Diamanten-
wiiste Siidwestafrikas 2: 1-54. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer (Ernst Vohsen).
Boum, J. 1926. Uber Tertiaire Versteinerungen von den Bogenfelser Diamantfeldern. Jn:
KaAIsErR, E. ed. Die Diamantenwiiste Siidwestafrikas 2: 55-87. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer
(Ernst Vohsen).
Boum, J. & WEISSERMEL, W. 1913. Uber Tertidre Versteinerungen von den Bogenfelser
Diamantfeldern. Beitr. geol. Erforsch. dt. Schutzgeb. 5: 1-58.
Bo.tovskoy, E. 1978. Late Cenozoic benthonic foraminifera of the Ninetyeast Ridge (Indian
Ocean). Mar. Geol. 26: 139-175.
BoLtovskoy, E. & WRIGHT, R. 1976. Recent Foraminifera. The Hague: W. Junk.
Bukry, D. 1975. Coccolith and silicoflagellate stratigraphy, northwestern Pacific Ocean, Deep
Sea Drilling Project, Leg 32. In: Larson, R. L. et al. Initial Reports of the Deep Sea
Drilling Project 32: 677-701. Washington: United States Government Printing Office.
CHAPMAN, F. 1926. The Cretaceous and Tertiary foraminifera of New Zealand. Palaeontol.
Bull., Wellington 2: 1-119.
CHAPMAN, F. 1930. On a foraminiferal limestone of Upper Eocene age from the Alexandria
Formation, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 28: 291-296.
CIFELLI, R. 1962. The morphology and structure of Ammonia beccarii (Linné) Contr. Cushman
Fdn foramin. Res. 13 (4): 119-126.
CUSHMAN, J. A. 1922. The Foraminifera of the Mint Spring calcareous marl member of the
Mariana Limestone: Prof. Pap. U.S. geol. Surv. 129-E: 123-143.
CUSHMAN, J. A. 1928. On Rotalia beccarii (Linné). Contr. Cushman Lab. foramin. Res. 4 (4):
. 103-107.
CUSHMAN, J. A. 1930. The Foraminifera of the Atlantic Ocean. Bull. U.S. natn. Mus. 104 (7):
1-79.
CUSHMAN, J. A. 1931. The Foraminifera of the Atlantic Ocean. Bull. U.S. natn. Mus. 104 (8):
1-179.
CUSHMAN, J. A. & LAIMING, B. 1931. Miocene Foraminifera from Los Sauces Creek, Ventura
County, California. J. Paleont. 5: 79-120.
CUSHMAN, J. A. 1951. Paleocene foraminifera of the Gulf Coastal Regions of the United States
and adjacent areas. Prof. Pap. U.S. geol. Surv. 232: 1-75.
D’OrsiGny, A. D. 1839. Histoire. Physique, Politique et Naturelle de I’Ile de Cuba. Paris:
_ A. Bertrand.
Du Tort, A. L. 1954. The Geology of South Africa. 3rd ed. Edinburgh: Oliver & Boyd.
FAIRCHILD, W. W., WESENDUNK, P. R. & WEAVER, D. W. 1969. Eocene and Oligocene foramini-
fera from the Santa Cruz Mountains, California. Univ. Calif. Publs geol. Sci. 81: 1-141.
HaucGuton, S. H. 1930a. Note on the occurrence of Upper Cretaceous marine beds in South-
West Africa. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 33: 61-63.
HAUGHTON, S. H. 19305. On the occurrence of Upper Cretaceous marine fossils near Bogenfels,
S.W.Africa. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 18: 361-365.
HauGuton, S. H. 1963. Stratigraphic history of Africa south of the Sahara. Edinburgh:
Oliver & Boyd.
Kaiser, E. ed. 1926. Die Diamantenwiiste Siidwestafrikas. 2 vols. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer
(Ernst Vohsen).
-Kuincer, H. C. 1977. Cretaceous deposits near Bogenfels, South West Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus.
73: 81-92.
Le CALveEz, Y. 1949. Révision des foraminiféres lutétiens du Bassin de Paris; Rotaliidae et
familles affines. Mém. Serv. Carte géol. dét. Fr. 2: 1-32.
Leroy, L. W. 1953. Biostratigraphy of the Maqfi Section, Egypt. Mem. geol. Soc. Am. 54: 1-73.
LINNE, C. 1758. Systema Naturae. 10th ed. Stockholm.
LINNE, C. 1767. Systema Naturae. 12th ed. Leipzig.
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
LogsLicH, A. R. & TAPPEN, H. 1964. Foraminifera— Morphology and Biology. Jn: Moore,
R. C. ed. Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology, Part C Protista 2: 58-134. Kansas:
Geological Society of America, University of Kansas Press.
MartTIn, H. 1973. The Atlantic margin of southern Africa between latitude 17° South and the
Cape of Good Hope. Jn: NAIRN, E. M. & STEHLI, F. G. eds. The Ocean basins and margins
1: 277-299. New York: Plenum.
MartTINi, E. 1971. Standard Tertiary and Quaternary calcareous nannoplankton zonation.
In: Farinaccl, A. ed. Proc. II Planktonic Conf. Roma 1970: 739-785. Roma: Edizioni
Technoscienza. ~
McMILLAN, I. 1974. Recent and Relict foraminifera from the Agulhas Bank, South African
continental margin. Unpublished M.Sc. thesis, University College Wales, Aberystwyth.
Parr, W. J. 1950. Foraminifera. Rep. B.A.N.Z. Antarct. Res: Exped. (B) 5 (6): 236-392.
PLummMer, H. J. 1926. Foraminifera of the Midway Formation in Texas. Bull. Univ. Tex. Bur.
econ. Geol. 2644: 3-206.
Rau, W. W. 1964. Foraminifera from the Northern Olympic Peninsula, Washington. Prof.
Pap. U.S. geol. Surv. 374-G: 1-33.
Reuss, A. E. 1854. Beitrage zur Charakteristik der Kreideschicten in den Ostalpen, besonders
im Gosauthale und am Wolfgangsee. Abh. math-naturw. KI. Akad. Wiss Wien 7 (1): 1-156.
SIESSER, W. G. 1973. Diagenetically formed ooids and intraclasts in South African calcretes.
Sedimentology 20: 539-551.
SIESSER, W. G. 1977. Upper Eocene age of marine sediments at Bogenfels, South West Africa,
based on calcareous nannofossils. In: Papers on Biostratigraphic Research. Bull. geol.
Surv. Rep. S. Afr. 60: 72-74.
SIESSER, W. G. & DINGLE, R. V. 1979. Tertiary sea-level movements around southern Africa.
(Abstract.) AAPG-SEPM Annual Convention Houston, Abstracts of Papers: 165.
SIESSER, W. G. & MILES, G. A. In press. Calcareous nannofossils and planktic foraminifera in
Tertiary limestones: Natal and eastern Cape Province, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus.
SOUTH AFRICAN COMMITTEE FOR STRATIGRAPHY 1977. South African Code of Stratigraphic
Terminology and Nomenclature. Spec. Publs geol. Surv. Rep. S. Afr. 20. Pretoria: Govern-
ment Printer.
STOCKEN, C. G. 1962. The diamond deposits of the Sperrgebiet, South West Africa. Field
Excursion Guide, 5th Ann. Congr. geol. Soc. S. Afr.
TERQUEM, O. 1882. Les foraminiferes de l’Eocéne des environs de Paris. Mém. Soc. géol. Fr.
3: 1-139.
VAIL, P. R., MircHum, R. M. & THompson, S. 1977. Global cycles of relative changes of sea
level. In: PAYTON, C. E. ed. Seismic stratigraphy—applications to hydrocarbon exploration.
Mem. Am. Ass. Petrol. Geol. 26: 83-97.
VAN Hinte, J. E. 1963. Zur stratigraphie und micropalaeontologie der Oberkreide und des
Eozans des Krappfeldes (Karntes). Jb. geol. Bundesanst. 8: 1-140.
WEISSERMEL, W. 1926. Neues uber Tabulate, Hydrozoen und eine Hexakoralle aus dem
Tertiar der Bogenfelser Diamantenfelder. In: KaAIserR, E. ed. Die Diamantenwiiste
Siidwestafrikas 2: 88-106. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer (Ernst Vohsen).
ZIEGLER, W. H. 1969. Cenozoic geology and morphology of the coast of the western Cape
Province and southern Namib desert, South Africa and South West Africa. Unpublished
Report ESSO Exploration South Africa Inc.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) aap maa peu. Nae Sis
Leda plicifera A. Adams,
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, Maso: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
3
ee. . /. the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . .in C.namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts
WILLIAM G. SIESSER
&
DAVID SALMON
EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS IN THE
SPERRGEBIET, SOUTH WEST AFRICA
OLUME 79 PART 3 JULY 1979 ISSN 0303-2515
07-6
sane ilinas SE cage soe
* +” .
At cy aS PE Hi
5 4 ae tr
}
OF THE SOUTH
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(Gi) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; ae med
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 192 ys
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927) .
Note: no comma separating name aed year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al: in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. —H. 1948. Données sur la nae wae et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvaAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. zen. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Kon, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 79 Band
July 1979 Julie
Part 3 Deel
GY) -
VARIN
S B:B.3:3:9
\
ue <
Aayiy
LS
S
NOV! NOS
A SECOND GENUS IN THE MARINE ISOPOD
FAMILY BATHYNATALIIDAE
By
BRIAN KENSLEY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 21-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t—p.i.), 51-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 711-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4—5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 78 5
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
A SECOND GENUS IN THE MARINE ISOPOD FAMILY
BATHY NATALIIDAE
By
BRIAN KENSLEY
Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C.
(With 3 figures)
IMS. accepted 14 June 1979]
ABSTRACT
Naudea louwae, the second genus and species in the south-western Indian Ocean family
Bathynataliidae is described, and compared with Bathynatalia gilchristi. The single specimen
of Naudea louwae was collected at 850 m off southern Natal.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction . : ; : ee OD
Systematic discussion . : Ww 35
Acknowledgements . : : aP eel
References : : : : bl
INTRODUCTION
The isopod family Bathynataliidae (Kensley 1978) was described when
several specimens of Bathynatalia gilchristi Barnard (previously known from a
single specimen) became available. These specimens were collected by the South
African Museum’s Department of Marine Biology working from the
R.V. Meiring Naude off the east coast of South Africa. A single specimen of an
unusual isopod has now been found in sorting a later batch of sediments from
the same station which yielded the Bathynatalia. Unfortunately this specimen
was seen only after the publication of the new family. Its addition to the earlier
paper would have been desirable as it slightly modifies the diagnosis of the
family.
SYSTEMATIC DISCUSSION
Suborder FLABELLIFERA
Family Bathynataltidae
. Diagnosis
Body dorsoventrally flattened. Cephalon anterolaterally expanded, fused
with pereonite 1 medially, separated by deep slits laterally. Pereonites 2-7
distinct, articulating coxae present at least on pereonites 2-6. Pleon of five
pleonites plus large pleotelson. At least two pleonites with free lateral extensions;
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 79 (3), 1979: 35-41, 3 figs.
35
36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
pleonites | and 5 lacking free lateral margins. Antennule with four, antenna with
five peduncular segments, both flagella multiarticulate. Molar process reduced
to spiniform process in both mandibles. Lacinia present on one mandible only.
Maxilla 1 curved, armed apically with cluster of spines. Maxilla 2 with inner
ramus uni- or bilobed. Maxilliped with 3-segmented palp, broad endite, broadly
oval or triangular exopod. Pereopod | robust and subchelate in both sexes;
remaining pereopods ambulatory. Pleopod 1 indurate, exopod and endopod
lying parallel, operculate over branchial chamber. Pleopods 2-5 biramous,
membranous. Uropod subterminal, consisting of single segment, obscurely
trilobed apically.
Naudea gen. nov.
Diagnosis
Maxilla 2 with inner ramus bilobed. Pereonite 7 lacking coxa or free lateral
margins. Pleonites 2 and 3 with broad lateral extensions; pleonite 4 with narrow
elongate lateral extension. Pereopod 7 absent. Uropod of single segment with
distal rudimentary ramus.
Gender
Feminine.
T ype-species
Naudea louwae.
Etymology
The generic name is derived from the C.S.I.R. Research Vessel Meiring
Naude.
Remarks
In describing the family Bathynataliidae, the diagnosis for the genus
Bathynatalia was considered the same as for the family. Now that a second genus
is described, the familial diagnosis has been slightly revised.
The main differences between the two genera are summarized below:
Bathynatalia Barnard, Naudea gen. nov.
1957
Antennular flagellum 12 articles 5 articles
Antennal flagellum 11 articles 8 articles
Maxilla 2, inner ramus _unilobed bilobed
Dorsal integument sculptured unsculptured
Pereonite 7 with free coxa lacking free lateral margins
Pereopod 7 present absent
Pleonite 4 lacking lateral extension with lateral extension
A SECOND GENUS IN THE MARINE ISOPOD FAMILY BATHYNATALIIDAE 20
The close affinity of the two genera within the same family is illustrated by
the many similarities, especially in pereopodal, pleopodal, and mouthpart
structure, as well as in the unusual uropodal structure.
The superficial resemblance of Naudea to the serolids is even more marked
than in Bathynatalia. Because of the similarity in structure between the serolids
and bathynataliids in the maxilliped, maxillae, mandibular palp, and pereopod 1,
it is thought that these two families are more closely related to each other than
to any other family within the Flabellifera.
The strongly depressed body, as in the serolids, is probably an adaptation
to allow detrital feeding in the upper few millimetres, without the body sinking
too deeply into the fine-sediment substrate.
Naudea louwae sp. nov.
Figs 1-3
Description
Female
Integument moderately indurate, brittle, lacking sculpture. Body broadest
at pereonite 4; strongly dorsoventrally depressed. Cephalon lacking eyes;
anterior margin hollowed to receive antiguous antennal bases; tiny rostral point
present; anterolateral corners quadrate/rounded; two circular convexities
dorsally marking insertion of mandibular musculature. Cephalon and pereonite |
fused medially, separated laterally by deep sinuous slit. Coxa of pereonite | not
demarked, but laterally broadly flattened, margin convex, with two circular
convexities dorsally marking insertion of pereopod | musculature. Pereonites 2—4
similar, with shallow transverse dorsal groove; coxae demarked, rectangular.
Pereonites 5—6 narrower than preceding pereonites; coxae demarked, roughly
rectangular. Pereonite 7 very short, lacking coxa. Pleon consisting of five
pleonites plus pleotelson. Pleonite | short, similar to pereonite 7, lacking free
-lateral margin. Pleonite 2 medially very short, widening laterally, with broad
rectangular lateral extension. Pleonite 3 medially very short, widening into
broad lateral extension, somewhat posterodistally produced. Pleonite 4 very
short, with narrow lateral extension slightly shorter than that of pleonite 3.
Pleonite 5 very short, lacking free lateral margins. Pleotelson roughly rect-
angular; distolateral corners rounded, separated from short, broad triangular
apex by notch for insertion of uropod; proximal half dorsally convex, with low,
rounded ridge running to apex.
Antennular peduncle 4-segmented, basal segment slightly longer than
subequal segments 2 and 3; fourth segment very short; flagellum of five articles,
reaching to base of antennal flagellum. Antennal peduncle 5-segmented,
segments | and 2 moderately broad; segment 3 inserted almost at right angle to
segment 2; segments 4 and 5 moderately broad; flagellum of eight articles.
Mandibles indurate; molar process on each side reduced to spiniform process;
palp 3-segmented, first and third segments subequal, one-third length of middle
38 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 1. Naudea louwae. A. Holotype in dorsal view. Scale = 1 mm. B. Ventral view of pleon.
C. Left mandible. D. Apex of left mandible. E. Apex of right mandible. F. Maxilla 1.
G. Maxilla 2.
A SECOND GENUS IN THE MARINE ISOPOD FAMILY BATHYNATALITDAE 39
Fig. 2. Naudea louwae. A. Maxilliped. B. Pereopod 1. C. Pereopod 6. D. Uropod.
segment; latter with six short, fringed spines in distal half; terminal segment
curved, with elongate terminal spine and four shorter fringed spines in distal
half. Left mandibular incisor with four rounded cusps, lacinia transversely
broad, with five or six short rounded cusps. Right mandible, incisor of five
‘ rounded cusps; lacinia lacking. Maxilla 1 consisting of single strongly curved
indurate ramus armed distally with nine spines. Maxilla 2 with bilobed outer
ramus, each lobe bearing two elongate fringed spines; inner ramus tipped with
five fringed spines. Maxilliped exopod broadly oval, outer margin fringed with
fine setules; endite about as broad as palp, with single strong coupling hook on
median margin and four setae on distal margin; palp of three segments, first and
third shorter and narrower than broadly oval second segment; terminal segment
40 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
tiny, with three elongate setae. Pereopod | robust, subchelate; dactylus meeting
spine at distal end of carpus; dactylar unguis very short; propodus proximally
broad, palm with slightly convex hyaline border bearing fourteen sensory spines
of varying lengths; carpus triangular, with single strong distal sensory spine;
merus half length of carpus. Pereopods 2-6 ambulatory, similar; unguis half
length of dactylus; propodus twice length of dactylus, with four sensory spines
on posterior margin and two fringed spines distally; carpus two-thirds length of
SSS
>
<S <é5
SN
KK
SS
=
SARS
IS = SS
SS
Fig. 3. Naudea louwae. A. Pleopod 2. B. Pleopod 3. C. Pleopod 4. D. Pleopod 5.
A SECOND GENUS IN THE MARINE ISOPOD FAMILY BATHYNATALITIDAE 4]
propodus with single, distal sensory spine; basis equal in length to merus and
ischium together. Pereopod 7 absent. Oostegites absent. Pleopod 1 indurate,
operculiform; protopod broad; endopod narrowly triangular, together with
shorter and narrower exopod meeting ventral pleonal margins and completely
closing off branchial chamber. Pleopod 2 with broad, roughly rectangular
protopod; exopod inserted obliquely on protopod, rectangular, distal margin
truncate, bearing eleven elongate plumose setae, several shorter plumose setae
on outer margin; endopod basally broad, tapering distally, distal margin
oblique, with nine elongate plumose setae. Pleopod 3 with lateral half of
protopod broadened, distally rounded; endopod triangular, shorter than
narrowly lanceolate exopod; latter with transverse suture at midlength, eight
distal plumose setae. Pleopod 4 endopod basally broad, shorter than narrowly
lanceolate exopod; latter with four distal plumose setae. Pleopod 5 shorter than
pleopod 4, exopod with two distal plumose setae; endopod narrower than in
pleopod 4. Uropod a single roughly cylindrical segment, little more than twice
longer than wide, few scattered setae on outer margin; obscurely trilobed
distally, with single, small, rounded ramus bearing seven setae.
Material
Holotype SAM-—A16205, ° total length 3,5 mm.
Meiring Naude station SM 129, 30°53’S 30°31’E (off Natal), 850 m.
Etymology
The species is named for Elizabeth Louw of the Department of Marine
Biology of the South African Museum, in appreciation of her help to the author
in the Museum’s Meiring Naude programme, both during the cruises and
subsequently.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
My sincere thanks are due to Dr Thomas E. Bowman of the Division of
Crustacea, Smithsonian Institution, for reading the manuscript and for useful
comments and criticisms.
REFERENCES
BARNARD, K. H. 1957. Three additions to the fauna list of South African Crustacea. Ann. Mag.
nat. Hist. (12) 10: 814-816.
‘ KENSLEY, B. F. 1978. A new marine isopod family from the south-western Indian Ocean.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 75: 4i—S0.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ©... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
BRIAN KENSLEY
A SECOND GENUS IN THE MARINE ISOPOD
FAMILY BATHYNATALIIDAE
VOLUME 79 PART 4 SEPTEMBER 1979 ISSN 0303-2515
507.6%
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should bé rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are-not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; , lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and yeu of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) ee
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; ao pics
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927) .
‘As described (Haughton et a/. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
Scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-63 4,
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivaivia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 79 Band
September 1979 September
Part 4 Deel
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 9
BRYOZOA
By
P. J. HAYWARD
&
P. L. COOK
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t—p.i.), 711-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.—p.i.), 15(4—-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 82 3
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 9
BRYOZOA
By
P. J. HAYWARD
Department of Zoology, University College of Swansea
&
PE. Cook
Department of Zoology, British Museum, Natural History
(With 21 figures, 4 tables, 1 appendix)
[MS. accepted 5 April 1979]
ABSTRACT
Bryozoa from the hitherto uninvestigated deeper shelf waters (>350 m) off the eastern
South African coast are both abundant and diverse. A total of 1 Ctenostome, 2 Cyclostome
and 48 Cheilostome species is described. Of these, 23 species— Carbasea mediocris, Notocoryne
cervicornis, Notoplites cassidula, N. candoides, Tricellaria varia, Bugulella australis, Cellaria
tectiformis, C. paradoxa, Aspidostoma magna, Inversiscaphos setifer, Escharoides distincta,
Flustramorpha angusta, Adeonella majuscula, A. cracens, Tessaradoma bispiramina, T. circella,
Sertella bullata, Reteporella dinotorhynchus, R. clancularia, Turbicellepora protensa, Costaticella
carotica, Batopora lagaaiji and B. nola—are considered to be new. In addition, 3 new genera —
Notocoryne, Leiosalpinx and Inversiscaphos—and 1 new family, the Setosellinidae, are intro-
duced. Some species have previously been described from regions as far distant as the Eastern
~ Atlantic and Western Pacific Oceans, and are known from very few records. Of the 22 previously
reported species, 14 are new records for South Africa, and 4 for the Indian Ocean. Many of
the colony growth forms (morphotypes) of species are known to be adapted to life on the
surface of fine sediments, and are either anchored by rhizoids or ‘free-living’. Most colony
morphotypes are flexible and delicate, and some are extremely small, less than 3 mm in
diameter.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction dal eee 44
List of species. . : alia: 44
Systematic account . ; : 44
Discussion . : : 5 sth hey
Summary . : : : 37) 124
Acknowledgements . : aD md |S)
References . i : ; pat 125
Abbreviations . g ; ew ZO
Appendix 1 eee oe 2 130
43
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. '79(4), 1979: 43-130, 21 figs, 4 tables, 1 appendix.
44 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
Bryozoa are generally most abundant in the shallow waters of continental
shelves, where firm substrata are available for larval settlement and colony
growth (Ryland 1970). Recent work on the faunas of the deeper waters of the
Atlantic and the outer shelf and slope of western Europe has, however, revealed
a far greater abundance of colonies and diversity of species than previously
recorded (D’Hondt 1975a, 1977; Hayward 1977, 1978a; Hayward & Ryland
1978). The substrata available for colonization in some of these regions often
consist only of the fine sea-bottom sediments. Species therefore tend to show
adaptations of structure which enable them to live in this environment.
The bryozoan fauna described here, from seventeen of the Meiring Naude
stations, with depths ranging between 376 and | 300 m, resembles those from
western Europe in showing a remarkable diversity of taxa and colony growth
forms. A high proportion of the species does not appear to have been described
before, and many of the previously described species have extensive geographical
ranges, often with equally broad bathymetric distributions. The occurrence of
numerous colonies of very small ‘rooted’ or ‘free-living’ species in the bottom
sediments is particularly interesting, and these collections have provided a great
deal of information, not only on the South African Bryozoa, but on the potential
nature of deep-water faunas from other regions.
LIST OF SPECIES
The Meiring Naude collections comprised 51 species of Bryozoa: 48 cheilo-
stomes, 2 cyclostomes and 1 ctenostome. In Table 1 the species are listed in
systematic order, and their occurrence at each of the seventeen stations
indicated. The stations are arranged in order of increasing depth, and the
sediment type and total number of species recorded is given for each station.
Co-ordinates and depth for the Meiring Naude stations which yielded samples of
Bryozoa are listed in Appendix 1. Data for all stations are given by Louw (1977).
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT
ORDER CHEILOSTOMATA
Family Cupuladriidae Lagaai, 1952
Cupuladriidae Lagaaij, 1952: 31. Cook, 1965a: 154; 19655: 192.
Discoporella @Orbigny, 1852
Discoporella @Orbigny, 1852: 472. Cook, 1965b: 219.
Discoporella umbellata (Defrance, 1823)
Lunulites umbellata Defrance, 1823: 361, pl. 47, fig. 1a—b.
Discoporella umbellata: Cook, 1965a: 177, pl. 1 (fig. 7), pl. 3 (figs 1, 3, 5-6), fig. 4; 19655: 221,
pl. 3 (fig. 3), fig. 2h.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 45
Material
Stations SM 23, SM 31.
Description
Colonies lunulitiform, free-living. Zooids with an extensive cryptocyst
lamina, perforated by opesiules; opesia small. Basal surface of colonies grooved.
Avicularia regularly patterned, each distal to a zooid; mandibles setiform, slung
from asymmetrical condyles.
Remarks
Two small, worn colonies only, which may have been transported from
shallower water, were found.
Family Setosellinidae fam. nov.
Colony encrusting very small substrata, often becoming free peripherally.
Ancestrula single, budding two primary zooids and two avicularia directly.
Zooids in two series, budded spirally for at least the first four astogenetic
generations. Avicularia interzooidal, one placed distally or distolaterally to each
zooid; subrostral chambers rounded, inflated. Mandible setiform, slung from
asymmetrical condyles. Brooding zooids with dimorphic, wide opercula,
embryos brooded in a large ovicell with a central, distal foramen, closed by the
operculum.
Genera included: Setosellina and Heliodoma.
The genera Setosellina Calvet and Heliodoma Calvet share a correlation of
distinctive colony form, spiral budding pattern and type of zooidai poly-
morphism. Some species of Setosellina appear, however, to be similar to
encrusting membraniporine forms which have no distinctive budding pattern,
but which are assigned to different families. A parallel group of deep-water
coilostegan species (the Setosellidae) which display a similar range of colony
form, but with zooids with distinct cryptocyst laminae and opesiules, has,
however, long been given family status. A family group is therefore introduced
here for the genera Setosellina and Heliodoma.
Setosellina was placed in the Hincksinidae by Lagaaij (19635) and Cook
(1965a). The type species of this heterogenous group, Hincksina flustroides
(Hincks), is now usually assigned to the Flustridae (Ryland & Hayward 1977: 86).
Setosellina has also been included in the family Lunulariidae, another diverse
and artificial grouping, which included the Cupuladriidae (Prenant & Bobin
' 1966: 297), and the Selenariidae (Cheetham 1966: 24). The free-living members
of the Cupuladriidae and Selenariidae differ from the Setosellinidae in possessing
a basal, colony-wide coelomic cavity (Hakansson 1973).
The genus Vibracellina Canu & Bassler (1917: 14) includes fossil and
Recent species which may prove to be attributable to the Setosellinidae.
V. laxibasis Canu & Bassler, a Pliocene species from Panama which was
discussed by Lagaaij (19635), and V. viator Canu & Bassler (1929: 97), a Recent
xX XR
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
46
xX X
me
O68 <Sutannccde
I ae dite x x x
x x x
x
NOG SO NMe aBeNMNTeeHeeaseNONNIA HANA BANA
Xx
x
x
x
I< OK 262K
Xx
x
x
: SUIIDAD DIJQUOAPP »&
DINISn[DUL DjJaUOAaPY
SIMAO{1]DAOD DjJJ2UDapy
pydioudjod paodojuvsiy
DISNSUD DYAAOWDAISN] HT 4
DIDUIGADUL DYCAOWUDAISN]
DJIUIISIP SAPIOADYIST »
* dafijas SOYADISISAAAUT y
puauopiyd v1dojns1t
DusDU DUO{SOpIAdS PY 5,
DXOPVDADA VIADIJID %
SIUMLAOf1192] DIAD[IJID xe
SIUAOI1G Snsajsojojag |
‘ds piyjan
DUSDUL DjJaUUNIOD
DIDUAOUL XUId]vSO1aT
SI]DAJSND DIJajINSNg x.
bjvAponb vixodnq
DIADA DIADIJOIIAT, xe
Saplopuvd saj1jdojon ,
DINPISSDI Saj1]dOjJON »
DAIDAPUYJAD BULAOIOJON.
SIUAOI1AADD BULAOIOJON
SIADOIPAU DASDGIDD »
DIDI du DuopoyaTy |.
* 12j]nNOA DUIlJasojas |.
DIvjaquin vjyjas1odoIsiq
ee
Sproziyy od A} Se SOON LOL Ty Oe POOE SL LE ce. 6S. 19-60) 26. 69 08/S8 ec OT
< w 00S
‘ydio~m jo "ON < W000 I < W OSL
“pa}Oa][OO so1deds Jo ysIT
| aTaV
uone}¢
yideq
47
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
‘UdAIS OSTL
SI punoy sem soldeds ova YOIYM 3e SUOT}E}S JO JoquINU oY) pUe ‘UOT}E}s YOO 3e soloods Jo JoquINU oY], “(SUBIOJIUIUIeIOJ 9dA}— ,LUISIIOQO]S,) 1D
‘(4so] SnosovUeIe YUM SUBIATTUTUeIO O1N}UEq) J (pues) ¢ “(TTPYS) YS :snyI sforrIed Jo odd} yULUTWIOp oY} pu “(UI C.¢< 951809 WINIPEU) ON
‘(Ww O‘¢> sug) 4 “(Wu CO‘ [ > ou AIDA) JA :SNY} poyeorpuT sr soporjred yUOUTIpas Jo ozIs JURUTWIOpeld SUL, ‘(Pet1aFUT) (YY) “(PeAtesqo) Y :sny} po}oU ST
SPpIOzIYI Jo eouasoid oY, ‘(WIOJUTTJaSOI0s) § pue (WIOJINUN) JT ‘“(WAOFUNPEIeYOsoUOd) OD “(WIIOFMIETIID) VD ‘(WIOJTITE[N]TE9) 9D “(WIOJINSNY) A
‘(WIJOjI10d9}01) Y ‘(WIOJIUOEpe) Y ‘(WIIOFIIOdTuvIquIOUT) J : SNY} poyedrpul oe (g{T °d 99s) sodAjyoydioul AuojoD *| poyx1ew ore ULC UPIPU] 94} 0} Mou
so1oeds puv ‘, payxJeUl ore solsods MON ‘yIdap SUISeSIOUI Jo JopiO Ul pesULIIL o1e SUOTIE}S OY} PUL “IOPIO SI}eUID}SAS Ul posi] ore soloods oY
I 2qQU0L fo uoyouvjdxq
ID a [Dad oe 1D A IOUS Ss. Ss YS ID US
Ad OW HA OW d HA AH AAHA A A d dH dA
DEG eS a Aa iin oh eee AVS | SO Sli I aC BE CC Cae Oe ah so sorseds JO ‘ON
x es 1YJAOMSPIOY “Ie D1S1AD
x " * *) paljuDj1D DaUuospIUpyT
x 7 5 + ds papyjasssnpfoan?é
x 7 + + + "ds uoposoys04,
DUDILA{D DUI JAADYISAUDD
SMuUdsofiddd DINULAIDT
pjou D10d0j0g »
thiovsv] v1odojvg »
: 2 : 14pAAnu psodojog
: : DIDULADUL DAOdOJaJOUp
x ; : S14JSOA1JD] DAOdOAaJOUp
x "8 991JOADI DIJAINIDISOD »
4 : : : * "ds psagip1ddn[ é
psuajodd DAOdAJAI1GANT,
DIADINIUD]I 011210431 2Y x
snyoudysojouip 111240d212Y »
x TS SANA IE ES
xX Xx x 7% 19]]8D AI. DULOPDAVSSAL,
x DUIUDALdS1G DULOPDADSSAT, »
ey . ° cman nN Wnnvaqi: n9nN1N17777I1001
(a) 0)
-
Ad 0h 0h 0 oe Oe oo
fe) fe)
O00
x
x XX
us 25 2S
Xx 0S eX ON
x X X
x
x
x X X
x
x
QD
e:))
Aenean toOnn
6K XK OK
x
x
SK 3K KOK KK
LAAPFANATAMNAANCHYTTN Geos
x
-
a
4
TABLE 1
List of species collected.
Depth 500 m > 750 m > 1000m >
Station 16 2385/8669 92 103 67 1 53 32 31 78 60 61 No; of Mork
41 107 109 stations type —_—-Rhizoids
I ors
Discoporellaumbellata . . x x
+Setosellinaroulei. . . . x
tHeliodomaimplicata. . . X X
*Carbasea mediocris yee
*Notocoryne cervicornis eo x
Notocoryne cylindracea . . x
*Notoplites cassidula . . . Sees x
*Notoplites candoides . . . x
*Tricellaria varia. . . . x
Eupaxia quadrata F : . x x
*Bugulellaaustralis . . . X X X x
Leiosalpinx inornata 2m
Columnellamagna . . . x
Neliaispiuenite tues. se, ie x
+Petalostegus bicornis . . . x x
*Cellaria tectiformis . 8 ; x= XTX x
*Cellaria paradoxa = eee: x x
*Aspidostoma magna . . . x x
Figulariaphilomena . . . xX
*Inversiscaphos setifer . ‘i é x
*Escharoides distincta . . . yaa
Flustramorpha marginata . . x
*Flustramorpha angusta : eo
Gigantopora polymorpha . ; x
Adeonella coralliformis 5 ; x x
* Adeonella majuscula . ‘ A x
* Adeonella cracens - 5 . SO
Adeonella sp. P : ‘ _ x x
; RB a Se SS ag a IAT a ee eed Se eg
Cleidochasma protrusum . ; x au
Smittoidea ?hexagonalis
*Tessaradoma bispiramina . .
*Tessaradoma circella. . . XxX
*Sertellabullata . . . . ™X
* Reteporella dinotorhynchus
* Reteporella clancularia
*Turbicellepora protensa
?Turritigera sp. eT ee
*Costaticella carotica . . . *X
Anoteropora latirostris x
Anoteropora inarmata
Batopora murrayi
*Batopora lagaaiji
*Batopora nola a
Lacrimula pyriformis .
Conescharellina africana
Trochosodonsp.. . . .
?Neoflustrellidra sp... % Fi x
Idmidronea atlantica . " = x
Crisia aff. holdsworthi
% x
Noyof:species; =. 4 23-23) DI (3a 22) S11 eal S saa A eae ee ee ee ae
VF F F F F VF VF F VF F MC VF MC F
Sh Gl Sh S S GiGl F Gl F F Gl F Gl
x XK XX
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
nner
am
°
~
Rrrnnnnn
-_~
Le
WOASNW NVOI8AV HLAOS AHL 40 STVNNV
x X
WWNWEENNENNWAN HERP RWEEKWNIFKOAN
Or
PP >>> mNZMErPOOOOOOOOOE OD
PARR
x
xX XX
x
xX XK XK
xX XK K KK XK
x
x
Slslel talallakaa tal)
XXX XX
x
x
xX XX
x
x
xX XX
xX XK XK
xXx XX
x
lens Gigs XS Cr St tL bo det NU ee
Explanation of Table 1
The species are listed in systematic order, and the stations are arranged in order of increasing depth. New species are marked *, and species
ae to ne Indian Ocean are marked t. Colony morphotypes (see p. 118) are indicated thus: M (membraniporiform), A (cdeouitoan) R Geiepodtoray
: = ri wen Ce (cellulariiform), Ca (cellariiform), Co (conescharelliniform), L (lunulitiform) and S (etoselliniform). The presence of rhizoids
e a fa us lus: R (observed), (R) (inferred). The predominant size of sediment particles is indicated thus: VF (very fine <1,0 mm), F (fine <5,0 mm),
GL Caleb =e Senate ae a and the dominant type of particle thus: Sh (shell), S (sand), F (benthic foraminiferans with arenaceous test),
Siocon: ype foraminiferans). The number of species at each station, and the number of stations at which each species was found is
SHSINUO JGAYN ONIVITW SIANASAW NVOrddaY HINOS AHL
LY
48 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
species from the Philippines (41-903 m), are both very similar in colony form
and zooidal morphology to Setosellina.
Setosellina Calvet, 1906
Setosellina Calvet, 1906: 157; 1907: 395. Cook, 1965a: 182.
Ancestrula with one proximolateral primary zooid and avicularium, and
one distal primary zooid and aviculartum. The two spirally budded series of
zooids originating from these zooids surround the ancestrula in either a clock-
wise or anti-clockwise direction. Intercalary series of zooids budded after the
fourth astogenetic generation. Zooids growing free from the substratum
peripherally, but rarely protruding for more than two generations. Peripheral
avicularia often enlarged and directed basally. Ovicell large, terminal, with a
central foramen, closed by a wide operculum.
The earliest known species is S. gregoryi Cheetham (1966: 25, figs 45)
from the Upper Eocene of southern England. The zooids were very small, were
budded in anti-clockwise series and had distally placed avicularia. Recent
species are associated with fine particled sediments (Lagaaij 19635), from deep
water.
The localities given by Calvet (1906, 1907) are based on a meridian passing
through Paris, not Greenwich (see Ryland 1969: 238).
Setosellina roulei Calvet, 1906
Figs 1A, 17B, 18B
Setosellina roulei Calvet, 1906: 157; 1907: 395, pl. 26 (figs 5-6).
Material
Stations SM 1, SM 16, SM 69, SM 86, SM 103, SM 109.
Description
Colonies very small (largest—with 34 zooids—3,0 mm diameter). Zooids
with basal walls calcified only peripherally, cryptocyst narrow, gymnocyst
distinct laterally, variable proximally. Avicularian subrostral chambers large,
rounded, placed distally to zooids.
Remarks
Cook (1965a) distinguished S. roulei from the Mediterranean species,
S. capriensis (Waters), on the basis of zooidal size as well as bathymetrical and
geographical distribution (see also Harmelin 1977: 1062).
The zooids of South African colonies are of comparable size up to four
generations from the ancestrula, but attain larger dimensions later in astogeny
(see Table 2). Colonies of S. capriensis therefore have a similar size range to
those of S. roulei, but differ in that in S. capriensis size decreases with astogeny
in colonies which grow beyond the substratum. In addition, the lateral cryptocyst
< a
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 49
of S. capriensis is extensive, and the apertures of the ancestrula and first three
zooid generations are closed by a lamina very early in astogeny, when colonies
have only twelve zooids. Colonies of S. roulei have closed zooids only when
more than thirty zooids have been budded, and those affected include only the
ancestrula and primary zooid pair, which have slight extensions of the crypto-
cyst. S. goesi (Silén), from the West Indies and Florida, also has zooids with a
well-developed lateral cryptocyst (see Lagaaij 19635: 172, pl. 2 (fig. 1), figs 1-2).
The zooids are very small and the avicularia budded distal-laterally. Lagaaij
(19635) observed that a significant proportion of colonies had anti-clockwise
spirals of growth. S. constricta Harmer (1926: 264), from the East Indies, differs
from all other species in the absence of pore-chambers. The zooids are very
small, and have thin lateral cryptocysts and no closed zooids.
Calvet (1907, pl. 26, fig. 5) figured, but did not describe, two zooids of
S. roulei with large ovicells, each with a small uncalcified frontal foramen. Very
similar ovicells have recently been described in S. capriensis by Harmelin
(1977: 1062, fig. 12).
TABLE 2
Comparative measurements (in mm) of species of Setosellina and Heliodoma implicata
Lz Lap Lop lop Is
Setosellina roulei
ancestrula . 0,25-0,28 0,23-0,25 0,22-0,24 0,17-0,18
zooid 1 0,30-0,33 0,27-0,30 0,25-0,28 0,18—0,20 0,30
zooid 2 0,35-0,41 0,32-0,33 0,28-0,30 0,18-0,19 0,38
zooid 3 0,39-0,42 0,34-0,36 0,31-0,34 0,19-0,22 0,40
zooid 4 0,40-0,42 0,35-0,36 0,32-0,34 0,23-0,25 0,53
zooid 6 0,43 0,36 0,33 0,25 0,75
zooid 7 0,50 0,43 0,39 0,29 0,75
S. capriensis
ancestrula . 0,25-0,30 0,23-0,25 0,20-0,23 0,19-0,20 —
zooid 1 0,30-0,35 0,27-0,29 0,20-0,22 0,15-0,16 ~~
zooid 2 0,35-0,41 0,33-0,40 0,30-0,32 0:15-0:17 —
zooid 3 0,45—0,50 0,36—0,39 0,32-0,36 0,13-0,16 —
zooid 5 0,50-0,56 0,40-0,43 0,32-0,35 0,17—0,20 —
zooid 9 0,25-0,28 0,19-0,21 0,17-0,18 0,11-0,13 —
zooid 11 0,22-0,24 0,17-0,20 0,16-0,18 0,10-0,12 —
Heliodoma implicata
ancestrula . 0,20-0,22 0,18-0,19 0,17-0,18 0,15-0,17 —
zooid 1 (lateral) 0,20-0,25 0,19-0,21 0,18-0,19 0,11-0,13 —
zooid 1 (distal) 0,23-0,30 0,20-0,25 0,20-0,21 0,14-0,18 0,40
zooid 2 : 0,31-0,35 0,25-0,27 0,21-0,23 0,14-0,15 0,43
zooid 3 0,36—-0,40 0,25-0,28 0,20-0,21 0,13-0,14 0,50
zooid 4 0,42-0,43 0,27-0,30 0,20-0,22 0,10-0,14 0,68
zooid 5 0,43-0,45 0,28-0,31 0,20-0,21 0,08-0,10 0,83
zooid 6 0,40-0,43 0,30-0,31 0523-025 0,09-0,10 1,10
zooid 11 0,41-0,45 0,28—0,30 0,27-0,29 0,09-0,11 1,30
zooid 20 0,42-0,43 0,29-0,31 0,27-0,28 0,09-0,10 1,40
50 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Nearly all the colonies from South Africa were alive when collected; they
have the setiform mandibles intact, and tentacles and viscera are present in all
zooids except the ancestrula in specimens with fewer than sixteen zooids.
Colonies are far less numerous than those of Heliodoma implicata (see below),
and show no evidence of larval preference for any particular type of substratum.
The size range of sand grains and foraminiferans colonized is 1,00—3,00 mm.
The long setiform avicularian mandibles (which reach a length of 0,75 mm)
almost certainly have a stabilizing, if not supporting function. They probably
also clean the colony surface of deposits, like those of the Cupuladriidae (see
Cook 1963) and Selenariidae (see Cook & Chimonides 1978), although the low
sedimentation rate in very deep waters makes this an inferred, secondary
function.
Distribution
The only previous records of S. roulei are from 1 900 m off the Cape Verde
Islands, and from 2 330 m off Cap Blanco.
Heliodoma Calvet, 1906
Heliodoma Calvet, 1906: 157; 1907: 396.
Colonies primarily encrusting minute substrata and subsequently becoming
free-living. Ancestrula with one proximolateral avicularium, and one distal and
one distolateral primary zooid. Two spirals of zooids originate from these
zooids, each budded laterally and clockwise, surrounding the ancestrula and
alternating with each other. Intercalary zooid series absent. Substratum
becoming covered basally by extensions from the basal walls of free-living
zooids. Interzooidal avicularia distal. Peripheral avicularian setae supporting
colony. Ovicells large, terminal with a central foramen, closed by a wide
operculum.
Heliodoma implicata Calvet, 1906
Figs 17A, 18A
Heliodoma implicata Calvet, 1906: 157, 1907: 396, pl. 26 (figs 7-9). Harmelin, 1977: 1063,
pl. 1 (fig: 4), fig. 11.
Material
Stations SM 1, SM 16, SM 23, SM 31, SM 41, SM 60, SM 61, SM 69,
SM 86, SM 103.
Description
Zooids with well-developed lateral cryptocysts. Ancestrula and primary
zooids with thin cryptocysts, which later become extended to form complete
closures. Basal walls thinly but completely calcified. Setae of peripheral
avicularia very long.
aia Pe es ee ee
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 51
eed
Fig. 1. A. Setosellina roulei Calvet. Young colony with setiform avicularian mandibles.
B. Inversiscaphos setifer gen. et sp. nov. Young colony with paired setiform avicularian
mandibles. Scale = 1,0 mm.
52 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
The differences between Setosellina and Heliodoma are small but consistent.
The early astogeny differs fundamentally (see Fig. 18A—B), and the zooids of
Heliodoma are always budded laterally. The first primary bud is narrower than
the ancestrula (see Table 2) and is laterally budded at right angles; the other
primary bud is distal. The pattern figured by Calvet (1907) differs slightly from
this, and he did not show any closed zooids. In the South African specimens
closures are present in the ancestrula and primary zooids when colonies have
six pairs of zooid generations. In larger, older colonies, closures extend to the
zooids of the fourth astogenetic generation. Closed zooids have the aperture
completely covered by a thick, curved calcified lamina, which has a raised,
central umbo, and a faint opercular scar. In contrast, the closures of S. capriensis
(see above) are flat with a small central pore.
The peripheral setiform mandibles reach 1,40 mm in length and almost
certainly have a supporting, as well as a possible cleaning function. None of the
colonies is as large as that figured by Calvet, which had 39 zooids. The largest has
34 zooids and a diameter of 2,30 mm. The larvae of H. implicata appear to display
a distinct preference for fine substrata. Of a total of 221 colonies, 195 grew on
sand grains, 22 on foraminiferans, 3 on shell fragments and 1 on a fragment
of echinoid spine. The size range of substrata selected ranged from 0,70 mm to
2,00 mm in diameter. Most of the sediments analysed had sand grains abundantly
available, except at stations SM 1, SM 16 and SM 69. At station SM 16, shell
fragments were dominant, yet of 138 colonies found, none encrusted shell, and
127 grew on sand grains.
Distribution
The original description of H. implicata was based on 6 colonies (4 from
1 900 metres off the Cape Verde Islands, and 2 from 3 700 m off the Canary
Islands). Recently, 9 more colonies were reported from 200 m from a sea-mount
north of the Canary Islands (Harmelin 1977).
Family Flustridae d’Orbigny, 1852
Flustridae d’Orbigny, 1852: 324. Smitt, 1868: 357. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 76.
Carbasea Gray, 1848
Carbasea Gray, 1848: 105, 146. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 79.
Carbasea mediocris sp. nov.
Fig. 2A—B
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26294, station SM 86. 27°55.4’S 32°40,8’E. 550 m.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 53
Ss
=
k
=
=
%
=
Fig. 2. A-B. Carbasea mediocris sp. nov. A. Zooids from the middle of the branch, frond edge
on the right. B. The proximal portion of the colony. C—D. Leiosalpinx inornata (Goldstein).
C. Portion of a colony. D. Zooids viewed in profile, showing joints. E-F. Nellia sp.
E. A portion of the colony. F. An ovicelled zooid. Scale = 0,5 mm for E-F; 1 mm for A-D.
54 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
Colony forming long and narrow, strap-like fronds, unilaminar, up to
3,5 cm long. Zooids in single, linear series, each series bifurcating infrequently;
large, oval or linguiform, distal end rounded, proximal end forked. Very lightly
calcified, frontal surface almost entirely membranous, with a scarcely discernible
area of gymnocyst over each proximal corner. Operculum subterminal, marked
by a thin, shallowly curved sclerite. Adjacent zooids are linked by large multi-
porous septula in the vertical walls. These linkages are formed between the
distal end of the proximal zooid and the forked corner of the distal zooid. At
the frond edge, the outer, proximal portion of each zooid may be traced back,
along the outer edge of the zooid preceding it, as a slender tube, apparently
originating from a particularly conspicuous septulum in the outer proximal fork
of that zooid.
Etymology
Mediocris (L)— ordinary, referring to the lack of strongly defined features.
Remarks
One frond had a slender, proximal zooid which was inferred to be the
ancestrula. It was tapered proximally, but had no apparent anchoring processes.
A single series of five zooids succeeded this assumed ancestrula, the first arose
from a septulum in its proximal half, traversing it as a simple tube; disto-
laterally, on the opposing side, it budded what appeared to be a simple
kenozooid.
Two colonies were collected; in both, all the zooids lacked polypides and a
majority contained distinctive brown bodies. The species of Carbasea present
acute taxonomic problems, arising out of their simplified morphological
features. Zooid size and shape are the most useful characters, and in these
respects C. mediocris is distinct from other known southern hemisphere species.
In other members of the Flustridae the form of the colony and the structure of
ovicells and heterozooids appear to be valuable characters. The marginal
tubular structures seen in C. mediocris, which may prove to be kenozooids, have
not been described in other species of Carbasea.
Measurements (means of 15 values) in mm
Lz WZ,
1,05 0,56
Family Chaperiidae Jullien, 1888
Chaperiidae Jullien, 1888: 61. Brown, 1952: 94.
Notocoryne gen. nov.
Colony erect, club-shaped or cylindrical, rising from a single elongate
ancestrula, secured by rhizoids. Zooids in longitudinal series around the long
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES B
axis of the colony. Occlusor laminae well developed, occupying the distal third
of the opesia. Adventitious avicularia present; spines present, both cylindrical
and branched. Ovicell hyperstomial, closed by the zooidal operculum.
Type species: Notocoryne cervicornis sp. nov.
The genus Chaperia, as presently constituted, includes encrusting, erect
foliaceous and vinculariform species; this assemblage may prove to be
unnaturally broad. In Notocoryne the occlusor laminae are more fully developed
than in all species of Chaperia, but the principal difference between the two
genera lies in the colony form of Notocoryne, which implies a degree of morpho-
logical integration and adaptation not found in the former genus.
Etymology
Notos (G)—south, koryne (G)—a club, referring to the geographical
distribution and shape of the colonies respectively.
Notocoryne cervicornis sp. nov.
Fig. 3
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26303, station SM 86, 27°59,5’S 32°40,8’E, 550 m.
Other material: stations SM 1, SM 16, SM 32, SM 41, SM 53, SM 60,
SM 86.
Description
Colony erect, in the form of a slender, faceted club, arising from a single
ancestrula but budding rapidly to produce six alternating, longitudinal series of
zooids within four astogenetic generations. In the extensive material collected,
the largest colonies were 5,5 mm long. Zooids broadly oval or pear-shaped,
narrowing distally, 0,5—-0,55 mm long by about 0,5 mm broad; zooidal boundary
marked by the edges of a broad, flaring cryptocyst, finely granular, gymnocyst
- reduced and indistinct. Opesia oval, occupying about one half the total zooid
length. Occlusor laminae well developed, prominent in the distal half of the
opesia in cleaned specimens; fused medially, forming stout junctions with the
lateral walls and delimiting two elliptical lacunae for the passage of the opercular
occlusors. Two short cylindrical spines on the distal border of the opesia, absent
in ovicelled zooids; on either side of the orifice a pair of large hollow, intricately-
branched and antler-like spines, curving inwards over the frontal membrane.
These cervicorne spines are variously developed, and may be broken short in
‘ older material, their position marked by a pair of thickened, socket-like bases.
Adventitious avicularia present, typically one pair per zooid, situated on the
gymnocyst and directed medioproximally, mandible elliptical. Ovicell spherical,
imperforate, finely granular, partially immersed in the succeeding zooid, closed
by the operculum of the maternal zooid. On zooids succeeding non-ovicelled
individuals a small, simple kenozooid, with an oval opesia, occurs between the
paired avicularia.
56 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Ancestrula elongate, up to 1 mm in length, posteriorly cylindrical, smooth
and bifid. Frontal membrane occupying about three-quarters of the length of the
zooid, underlain by a flaring, finely granular cryptocyst with a few small
marginal spines. Opesia oblong.
Etymology
Cervus (L)—a deer, cornu (L)—a horn, referring to the spines.
Remarks
The ancestrula buds two zooids from its distobasal surface; from these a
triplet of zooids is budded, thereafter new zooids are added in alternating
whorls of three, giving a hexagonal section to the colony. Zooids of the first
two astogenetic generations may be more slender than later ones, but otherwise
differ from them in no significant way, although the small kenozooids are more
frequent on the proximal parts of the colony. In the largest colonies the
ancestrula is frequently damaged and the earliest generations of zooids have
their opesiae occluded by convex laminae of granular calcite, usually each with
a small central foramen. The small kenozooids are inferred to give rise to
supporting rhizoids, although none were found in the material studied.
Notocoryne cylindracea (Busk, 1884)
Electra cylindracea Busk, 1884: 78, pl. 33 (fig. 2).
Material
Stations SM 16, SM 41.
Description
Colony erect, cylindrical, branching irregularly. Zooids oval, closely
spaced, boundaries indistinct. Frontal surface largely occupied by an oval
opesia; gymnocyst small and obscured, cryptocyst narrow, a distinct mural rim
surrounding the distal half of the zooid. Occlusor laminae closely applied to the
terminal wall. Four distal oral spines present; the distalmost pair short, thick
and cylindrical, the proximal pair flattened, blade-like, curving over the frontal
membrance. A single avicularium occurs on the gymnocyst, the rostrum
elongate, lanceolate, directed distally, over the frontal membrane, occasionally
laterally or proximally. A broad, cervicorne spine arises from the base of the
avicularium and extends over the proximal half of the opesia. A second type of
avicularium arises from the distal wall, single or paired, columnar, with a short,
acute mandible; rarely this may replace the elongate, proximal type. Ovicell
hemispherical, smooth, with a triangular frontal lacuna bounded by raised
ridges. The ovicell is usually intimately associated with the distal avicularia.
Remarks
The principal justification for assigning Electra cylindracea to the new genus
Notocoryne lies in the form of its colony, although zooid morphology is
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Fig. 3. Notocoryne cervicornis gen. et sp. nov. A. Zooids at the distal tip of a colony.
B. The characteristic appearance of older zooids, with spines lost. C. The ancestrula of a
young colony. D. The same in lateral view. E. A complete colony, the most proximal zooids
with occluded opesiae. Scale = 0,5 mm for A-D; 4 mm for E.
58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
strikingly similar to that of the type species. The colony of N. cylindracea is
developed from a single, elongate ancestrula which, in larger specimens,
becomes enclosed by basally directed rhizoids.
Two fragments only were obtained by the Meiring Naude. Described by
Busk (1884) from Prince Edward Island, N. cylindracea has not been reported
before from South African waters and these records possibly mark the as
limit of its geographical range.
Family Scrupocellariidae Levinsen, 1909
Scrupocellariidae Levinsen, 1909: 130. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 128.
Notoplites Harmer, 1923
Notoplites Harmer, 1923: 348. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 131.
Notoplites cassidula sp. nov.
Fig. 4A—C
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26299, station SM 23, 27°44,4’S 32°42,8’E, 400-450 m.
Other material: Stations SM 60, SM 86.
Description
Colony erect, forming diffuse tufts up to 1,5 cm high, branching
dichotomously; bifurcations of Type 15 (Harmer 1923). Zooids elongate,
slender, biserially arranged; opesiae oval, each occupying half the frontal
surface of the zooid, not overlapping but strictly alternating along the length
of the branch. Cryptocystal rim narrow, scutum absent; four or five delicate
oral spines present, frequently broken short. An adventitious avicularium
present on the outer distal angle of each zooid, mandible short, triangular,
directed laterally. Frontal avicularia also present, with short, triangular
mandibles orientated perpendicularly to the long axis of the branch; when borne
by ovicelled zooids, the orientation of the frontal avicularia is reversed, they are
closely associated with the ovicells and directed distally. Enlarged frontal
avicularia sporadic; rostrum hooked, supporting a short, triangular mandible.
Ovicell small, domed, resembling a small helmet (hence, cassidula), but not
projecting prominently from the branch; with a transversely elongate frontal
fenestra, not closed by zooidal operculum. Basal avicularia absent. Each zooid
has a number of conspicuous septula on the basal surface, at the points of
origin of long rhizoids. These traverse the length of the colony, closely applied
to the basal surface, forming proximally a thick bundle of anchoring rootlets.
Etymology
Cassidula (L)—a little helmet, referring to the ovicell.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 59
Fig. 4. A-C. Notoplites cassidula sp. nov. A. Part of a branch. B. Ovicelled zooids at a
Lifurcation. C. Basal view of a bifurcation, two rhizoids proximally. D-E. Notoplites
candoides sp. nov. D. Part of a colony, including a bifurcation, showing parts of three lateral
processes. E. A bifurcation in basal view. Scale = 0,5 mm for A-D; 1 mm for E.
60 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
The genus Notoplites Harmer is defined precisely by its method of bifurca-
tion, shown clearly in the present species (Fig. 4C). The scutum may be present
or absent, but the lateral avicularia, fenestrate ovicell and oral spines of
N. cassidula are typical of the genus. The antarctic and subantarctic species of
Notoplites were monographed by Hastings (1943), and four Indo-West-Pacific
species were described by Harmer (1926). N. cassidula differs from all the
species included by these two authors, and bears no resemblance to any
cellularine species described from this area by earlier writers. It is characterized
by the lack of scutum and basal avicularium, the shape and size of the ovicell
and the form of the two types of frontal avicularia.
Notoplites candoides sp. nov.
Fig. 4D-E
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26300, station SM 23, 27°44,4’S 32°42,8’E, 400-450 m.
Description
Colony erect, branching dichotomously, bifurcations of Type 15 (Harmer
1923); branches linked laterally by stout chitinous rhizoids, giving a loose,
reticulate structure, reminiscent of a species of Canda. Zooids elongate,
biserially arranged; opesiae oval, each occupying about one half the frontal
surface of the zooid; angled to the long axis of the branch, thereby imparting a
saw-toothed outline. Cryptocystal rim broad, scutum absent; two or three distal
oral spines present, delicate and frequently broken short. A single adventitious
avicularium present on the gymnocyst of each zooid, immediately proximal to the
opesia, acute to frontal plane; mandible acute triangular, directed distally or
proximally. Enlarged avicularia occur sporadically, replacing the frontal type
and essentially of the same form. A second avicularium present on the basal
surface of each zooid, situated on the outer distal corner and directed disto-
laterally. The broad, tubular rhizoids linking the branches arise from enlarged
kenozooids, with small circular opesiae; these are developed on the basal,
frontal or lateral surfaces of the colony and their position varies from zooid to
zooid. Occasionally a kenozooid is developed on the distal wall of the terminal
zooid in a row, when the small opesia may be missing. The rhizoids typically
extend laterally, probably fusing with, and certainly continuous with, those
arising from neighbouring branches. Others trail proximally and perhaps serve
to secure the colony to the substratum.
Etymology
Canda—a bryozoan genus, oides (G)—like, referring to the appearance of
the colony.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 61
Remarks
A single, damaged, colony of this species was found, comprising four
branching fragments up to 1 cm long. Regrettably, both early stages and
brooding zooids were absent but the morphology of this species is so unusual
that it is certain that it has not been described before. The cross-linking rhizoids
are a feature of the genus Canda Lamouroux, but the method of bifurcation and
the type and distribution of avicularia place this species unequivocally in
Notoplites Harmer.
Tricellaria Fleming, 1828
Tricellaria Fleming, 1828: 540. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 143.
Tricellaria varia sp. nov.
Fig. 5
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26295, station SM 103, 28°31,7’S 32°34,0’E, 680 m.
Description
Colony erect, branching, jointed; bifurcations of Type 9 (Harmer 1923).
Internodes of three to nine zooids, a variable but always uneven number,
separated by well developed brown, chitinous joints. Zooids in biserial rows,
slender; opesiae oval, occupying just less than half the frontal surface, alternating
and not overlapping. Cryptocystal rim narrow, scutum broad, consisting largely
of an extensive proximal lobe. Two spines present on the outer distal edge of
each zooid. Presence, frequency and size of adventitious avicularia very variable;
most frequent are lateral avicularia, situated on the outer distal corner of the
zooid. These are of varying size, may be present on a few or all of the zooids of
~acolony, or may be absent altogether. Even rarer are minute frontal avicularia
which may occur on the gymnocyst immediately proximal to the opesia. This
variability may impart remarkably different appearances to different colonies,
but intermediate branches may always be found. Rhizoids issue from large
kenozooids sporadically present basally, at the proximal end of the zooid.
Ovicell globular, smooth, with a small fenestra close to its opening.
Etymology
Varia (L)—different, referring to the variability of the avicularian
characters.
Remarks
The material of this species was extensive but fragmentary, comprising
portions of several different colonies, the largest fragment being about 7 mm
long. The range of internode size and the variation in avicularia caused initial
62 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 5. Tricellaria varia sp. nov. A. An internode, with well-developed lateral avicularia.
B. Three zooids, with a single small lateral avicularium. C. Ovicelled zooids. D. Three zooids,
one with a minute frontal avicularium. E. Basal view of a bifurcation. Scale = 0,5 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 63
confusion in the determination of this species, but sufficient intermediate
specimens were found to demonstrate that only one species was present.
T. varia is distinguished from other species of Tricellaria by the variable
lateral avicularia, and the almost complete absence of frontal avicularia. It has
fewer spines than most southern hemisphere species and, as in many of the
Scrupocellariidae, the morphology of the ovicell appears to be characteristic.
Eupaxia Hasenbank, 1932
Eupaxia Hasenbank, 1932: 321, 363.
Eupaxia quadrata (Busk, 1884)
Fig. 6C-F
Cellularia guadrata Busk, 1884: 18, pl. 5 (fig. 5).
Eupaxia incarnata Hasenbank, 1932: 363, fig. 30A-C.
Material
Stations SM 16, SM 92, SM 103.
Description
Colony erect, slender, branching dichotomously, up to 5 cm high; deep
carmine in alcohol preserved specimens. Zooids in two alternating, longitudinal
series, the frontal planes at an obtuse angle; elongate, rectangular, approximately
1 mm long by 0,35 mm wide, lightly calcified with a completely membranous
frontal surface. Distolaterally each zooid bears a small adventitious avicularium,
mandible short, triangular, orientated at a right angle to the branch and directed
laterally. Basally, the avicularium may be seen to be linked to the outer proximal
corner of the zooid by a slender tube, most clearly visible at the growing tips of
the colony. Elsewhere, additional tubes arise in the same region of each zooid,
traverse the edges of the basal surface of the colony as rhizoids, gathering proxi-
mally into a bundle and anchoring the colony. At a bifurcation the basal rhizoids
cross from the inner edges of the two branches to the outer edges of the supporting
ramus (Fig. 6F). Ovicells were not found, and perhaps do not occur. Ancestrula
of similar size to later zooids with, additionally, a slender proximal portion
continued as an elongate tube. The ancestrula and earliest zooids are typically
ensheathed by rhizoids. The coloration of the colony is very characteristic and
seems to be derived from pigment in the polypide and from coarse granules in
the coelomic fluid.
Distribution
E. quadrata was reported by Busk (1884) from Kerguelen and Heard
Islands at depths of 51 m (28 fms) and 137 m (75 fms). Hasenbank’s material
was collected off the Somali coast, at the far greater depth of 1 668 m, where it
possibly approaches the northern limit of its range.
64 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Bicellariellidae Levinsen, 1909
Bicellariellidae Levinsen, 1909: 93. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 146.
Bugulella Verrill, 1879
Bugulella Verrill, 1879: 472. Maturo & Schopf, 1968: 36.
Bugulella australis sp. nov.
Fig. 6A-B
Erymophora sp. Hastings, 1943: 469, fig. 56.
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26302, station SM 23, 27°44,4’S 32°42,8’E, 400-450 m.
Other material: stations SM 16, SM 23, SM 32, SM 86.
Description
Colony erect, branching; delicate, forming diffuse, tangled clumps,
frequently attached to sponges or to other bryozoans (Adeonella spp.). Zooids
in single, linear series, branching frequently; elongate, a slender tubiform
proximal portion broadening abruptly to an oval distal portion bearing an oval
opesia, with a narrow cryptocystal rim. Ten delicate marginal spines present,
the two distal pairs short and erect, the rest incurved over the frontal membrane.
Avicularia infrequent; pedunculate, attached to the disto-basal wall of the
zooid, rostrum prominent, supporting a semi-elliptical mandible. Ovicell
globular, thin walled, with an irregular, tessellate surface and a few indistinct
pores. Each zooid develops a short peduncle on its distobasal wall from which
the next zooid is budded, separated from the peduncle by a joint or constriction.
A bifurcation is initiated when a slender, unjointed tube arises close to the
origin of the new zooid and grows parallel to it. As the new zooid broadens
distally a short tube develops from its proximal lateral wall, fusing with the
tube adjacent to it. Above the point of fusion a joint is developed and from this a
second zooid buds, diverging from the first at an angle of about 60°. Each zooid
bears four lateral septula, two distal and two proximal; it is from the proximal
septula that the short lateral tubes are derived; they do not arise from the distal
septula, the significance of which is consequently unclear. Numerous specimens
were obtained; all were alive when collected, and many bore embryos.
Etymology
Australis (L)—southern, referring to the geographical distribution.
Remarks
B. australis was formerly known by a single small specimen described by
Hastings (1943) as ‘Erymophora sp. indet’. Her material was from an unknown
locality.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 65
Fig. 6. A-B. Bugulella australis sp. nov. A. Part of a branch including a bifurcation.
B. Two zooids in lateral view showing an avicularium. C—F. Eupaxia quadrata (Busk).
C. Three zooids in frontal view. D. The ancestrula, enveloped by rhizoids. E. Zooids from
the tip of a branch in basal view. F. Basal view of a dichotomy. Scale = 0,5 mm for A-C, E;
1 mm for D, F.
66 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Leiosalpinx gen. nov.
Colony erect, branching dichotomously, unjointed. Zooids in single linear
series. No avicularia, spines or ovicell.
Type species: Alysidium inornata Goldstein, 1882.
Alysidium inornata Goldstein (= Catenaria attenuata Busk) was placed by
Hastings (1943) in the genus Brettia. As presently constituted Brettia embraces
a considerable number of species, from most parts of the world, whose only
common feature seems to be an erect, uniserial habit. Ryland & Hayward (1977)
pointed out that the type species of Brettia, B. pellucida Dyster, was based on a
single, dead fragment collected at Tenby, South Wales. The type specimen,
although extant, is unrecognizable and no further material has ever been
collected. The definition and systematic status of Brettia is thus open to doubt
and there seems to be little excuse for continuing its use, particularly in
describing faunas from regions remote from the British Isles. It is appropriate,
therefore, to introduce a new genus for Alysidium inornata Goldstein in the
hope that a critical re-examination of the species currently assigned to Brettia
Dyster may be encouraged.
Etymology
Leios (G)—smooth, salpinx (G)—a trumpet, referring to the shape of the
zooids.
Leiosalpinx inornata (Goldstein, 1882)
Fig. 2C—D
Alysidium inornata Goldstein, 1882: 42, pl. 1 (fig. 1).
Catenaria attenuata Busk, 1884: 14, pl. 2 (fig. 1).
Brettia inornata: Hastings, 1943: 476.
Material
Station SM 107.
Description
Colony erect, diffuse, branching dichotomously; zooids in single linear
series, slender, very elongate, horn-shaped, calcification thin and translucent.
The zooid is broadest distally, where it bears an oval opesia, comprising no
more than one-sixth of the total zooid length. New zooids budded from the
disto-terminal walls, linked to their predecessors by an uncalcified node.
Dichotomies arise simply when the terminal zooid produces two buds, widely
spaced and distolaterally orientated ; there is no connection between the two new
zooids (cf. Bugulella). As noted by Hastings (1943), the surfaces of the zooids
are often covered by detritus, usually obscuring the borders of the opesia. The
operculum was unclear in all specimens studied.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 67
Remarks
Several small colonies were found, each tangled among specimens of
Bugulella australis.
Distribution
At present L. inornata is known only from Marion and Heard Islands.
Family Farciminariidae Busk, 1852
Farciminariidae Busk, 1852: 32. Harmer, 1926: 401.
Columnella Levinsen, 1914
Columnella Levinsen, 1914: 571.
Levinsenella Harmer, 1926: 402.
Columnella magna (Busk, 1884)
Fig. 9A
Farciminaria magna Busk, 1884: 49, pl. 5 (fig. 1).
Columnella magna: D’Hondt, 1975a: 563.
Material
Station SM 67.
Description
Colony erect, branching dichotomously, delicate and very lightly calcified.
Zooids in four longitudinal series, each comprising one facet of a quadrate
branch section; rectangular, frontal surface entirely membranous, transparent,
1,4 mm long by 0,3 mm broad. Operculum thin, lightly chitinized, no spines,
-ovicells not present in material collected. Avicularia small, adventitious,
infrequent; occurring, rarely, at the proximal end of the zooid, mandible semi-
circular, perpendicular to frontal plane.
Remarks
A single fragment was collected, 2 cm long and including two bifurcations.
Distribution
Columnella magna is a deep water species with a wide geographical
distribution. Described by Busk from off Uruguay and from south of Heard
Island, it has since been reported from the North Atlantic (Silén 1951, D’Hondt
1975a) and the Bay of Biscay (Hayward 1978a).
Nellia Busk, 1852
Nellia Busk, 1852: 18. Harmer, 1926: 240.
68 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Nellia sp.
Fig. 2E-F
Material
Station SM 60.
Description
Colony erect; jointed? Branches quadrate in section, composed of four
longitudinal series of zooids, spiralling around the branch axis. Zooids
rectangular, frontal surface comprising a large oval opesia with a narrow,
granular cryptocyst, raised into a crenellated mural rim. Gymnocyst reduced,
bearing one or two adventitious avicularia, mandibles semicircular, directed
proximolaterally. No spines. Ovicell spherical, granular and imperforate;
immersed, and closed by zooidal operculum.
Remarks
Three very small fragments were found, none of which included a joint.
Clearly attributable to Nellia, this species is distinct from other known species,
but in view of the extreme paucity and fragility of the material available it is
impossible to obtain a complete idea of its morphology. Consequently, it is
necessary to await the collection of further specimens before a name can be
applied.
Family Alysidiidae Levinsen, 1909
Alysidiidae Levinsen, 1909: 201. Harmer, 1957: 641.
Petalostegus Levinsen, 1909
Petalostegus Levinsen, 1909: 114. Harmer, 1957: 642.
Petalostegus bicornis (Busk, 1884)
Catenaria bicornis Busk, 1884: 14, pl. 2 (fig. 2).
Petalostegus bicornis: Harmer, 1957: 642, pl. 51 (figs 13-18), fig. 118.
Material
Stations SM 1, SM 107.
Description
Colony erect, branching, jointed, diffuse; each internode comprising a
single zooid. Each zooid spatula shaped, a slender, smooth proximal portion
expanding abruptly to form a club-like distal portion containing the polypide.
Frontal shield of distal portion formed of several flattened and overarched
plates. New zooids budded distally and laterally. A single avicularium present
on each of the distolateral corners of the zooid.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 69
Distribution
Described from the Society Islands, in the mid-Pacific, P. bicornis has also
been reported from two localities in Indonesia; the present records are the first
from the western side of the Indian Ocean.
Family Cellariidae Hincks, 1880
Cellariidae Hincks, 1880: 103. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 119.
Cellaria Ellis and Solander, 1786
Cellaria Ellis & Solander, 1786: 18. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 119.
The phylogenetic relationships of the southern hemisphere species of
Cellaria present certain problems. The first of the two species described below,
C. tectiformis sp. nov., has a distinctive node formation, unlike that of the type
species, C. sinuosa, or, indeed, of the majority of the northern species. The
second species, C. paradoxa, displays a pattern of early astogeny which is
perhaps unique among described species. The joints of C. tectiformis are similar
to those described in C. tecta by Harmer (1926), and in Cellariaeforma aurorae
by Moyano (1969). However, Cellariaeforma Rogick is at present poorly
defined and until a comparative study of the southern Cellariidae is accom-
plished, the two species described here are most usefully accommodated within
Cellaria Hincks.
Cellaria tectiformis sp. nov.
Fig. 7
Material
Holotype: SAM-—A26292, station SM 23, 27°44,4’S 32°42,8’E, 400-450 m.
Other material: stations SM 1, SM 16, SM 41, SM 86, SM 103.
Description
Colony erect, branching, jointed, forming a rigid, flat and open fan;
up to 4,5 cm high in the material studied. Internodes square in section, about
0,6 mm wide, broadening in older specimens or where ovicells develop; basal
internodes up to 14 mm long, distal internodes typically shorter. Dichotomies
smooth, symmetrical, U-shaped: subsequently, fractures develop around the
base of each new internode which is then secured to its origin by a tangled knot
of rhizoids, arising from the epithecae of the zooids distal to the fracture.
' Basally, the colony is supported by a single internode, which in the largest
colonies is entirely obscured by a mass of brown rhizoids. This forms a broad
holdfast, securing the colony to the substratum. Zooids in four alternating
longitudinal series, each comprising one face of the branch; hexagonal, truncate
distally and proximally, laterally extending on to two other faces of the branch.
Boundaries marked by distinct raised sutures. Cryptocyst depressed medially,
delimited laterally and distally by a low ridge; opesia occupying about one-
70 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 7. Cellaria tectiformis sp. nov. A. Part of an internode, including an avicularium.
B. Part of a branch, including an ovicelled zooid. C. An avicularium with an unusual
orientation. D. A-new bifurcation, showing the avicularium at the base of one ramus.
E. Outline diagram of colony form. F. Old bifurcations, and the base of the colony, showing
rhizoids. Scales = 0,5 mm for A—C; 1 mm for D; 10 mm for E; 2,5 mm for F.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES Jb
quarter of the total frontal surface, broadly crescentic, twice as wide as long,
the proximal border forming a rounded or quadrate lip, beyond which two
blunt, proximal denticles are visible. Ovicells endotoichal, position indicated
by a broadening of the ramus in fertile areas; opening of ovicell a narrow,
transverse slit, arched over by a short, domed canopy arising immediately
distal to it. Avicularium vicarious, as large as an autozooid; opesia oval,
comprising less than one-third of total length of heterozooid, rostrum acute,
raised, supporting a hooked, triangular mandible. Avicularia are found
infrequently along the length of the branch, but one occurs constantly at the
base of each internode, immediately above the dichotomy. The rostrum is
usually orientated transverse to the branch axis, but occasionally it may be
directed distally.
No complete ancestrulae were found, but in two specimens sufficient detail
was visible to indicate the pattern of early astogeny. The first eight zooids budded
are biserially arranged ; buds 9 and 10 assume diametrically opposite orientations
to those preceding them and with buds 11 and 12 the four-faceted branch is
established.
Etymology
Tecta—a species of Cellaria, forma (L)—shape, referring to the similarity
with C. tecta.
Remarks
The flat, fan-like colony of this species is characteristic of several southern
Cellariidae, and is in complete contrast to the dense, bushy form assumed by,
particularly, the European species of Ce/laria. In colony form, structure of the
joints and the form of the ovicellar orifice this species most resembles the Indo-
West-Pacific Cellaria tecta Harmer (hence, tectiformis), but differs from it in the
size and proportions of the zooids and avicularia, and in the structure of the
_zooidal opesia.
Measurements (means of 10 values) in mm
Lz Iz Lop lop Lav lav
0,63 0,62 0,13 0,2 0,68 0,35
Cellaria paradoxa sp. nov.
Fig. 8
‘ Material
Holotype: SAM-A26291, station SM 1, 27°00,8’S 33°03,1’E, 688 m.
Other material: stations SM 86, SM 103.
Description
Colony erect, attached by chitinous rootlets derived from frontal eipithecae
of the lowest zooids; possibly branching, although only single rami were found,
AD ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
without indication of nodes. Up to 1,8 cm high, with a maximum width of
about | mm. Proximally the colony is very slender, 0,2-0,4 mm broad, com-
mencing as a slender, fusiform ancestrula, the epitheca of which, proximally,
forms a fine rootlet. First generations of buds similar in size to ancestrula,
biserially arranged, frontal surfaces at approximately 45° to each other. After
about eight astogenetic generations a third series of zooids develops; the branch
now assumes a rectangular section, three facets being occupied by zooid frontal
surfaces, the fourth comprising the lateral walls of the two outer series. After a
further eight or ten astogenetic generations three more series of zooids are
developed and the branch section is elongated, giving a slim, rectangular shape.
The two narrowest faces are occupied each by a single series of zooids, with
obliquely orientated opesiae. The third face of the branch is occupied by three
alternating, longitudinal series of essentially similar zooids (‘A’ zooids), and the
branch here attains its greatest width. The former basal surface is now occupied
by a single series of very broad zooids (‘B’ zooids). This disposition is maintained
through the whole of later growth stages. :
Zooids at proximal end of colony elongate, pyriform, later approximately
hexagonal. In the biserial areas of the colony a raised rim surrounds the
depressed cryptocyst of each zooid. In later ‘A’ zooids this is absent, the frontal
surface being generally concave between the raised lateral sutures, but they are
retained in the single marginal series. In “B’ zooids there is a distinct cryptocystal
rim, often completely encircling the opesiae. In all zooids the opesia is semi-
circular, with a quadrate proximal lip and paired, blunt denticles. Additional
paired denticles present distally, but less distinct. Opesiae larger in ‘B’ zooids
than in ‘A’ zooids. Avicularia not observed, although small, triangular keno-
zooids were present, each with a circular central opesia. These occurred
constantly distolateral to the outer series of “A’ zooids, infrequently among the
marginal zooids, and never in association with ‘B’ zooids; they occurred also
among the biserial and triserial regions of the colony and appear to be the
origin of the anchoring rhozoids.
Etymology
Paradoxus (G)—strange, referring to the zooidal dimorphism.
Remarks
Dimorphic zooids do not appear to have been described before for any
species of Cellaria. The differences between the ‘A’ and ‘B’ zooids of C. paradoxa
are so striking that the two aspects of the branch, viewed side by side, suggest
two distinct species. There seems little doubt that the dimorphism is sexual in
nature as ovicellar orifices occurred only among the series of “B’ zooids.
However, not all of these large zooids seem to develop ovicells and other
functional differences may be involved. The astogenetic changes apparent in a
large colony are also extraordinary, the proximal, biserial regions closely
resembling a species of Euginoma. Such is the degree of difference between
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 13
ee
Fig. 8. Cellaria paradoxa sp. nov. A. Two ovicelled ‘B’ zooids. B. The reverse of the branch,
‘A’ zooids. C. The ancestrula. D. The proximal part of a colony, showing the biserial
arrangement developing into a triserial form. E. Part of a branch showing the inception of
‘B’ zooids. Scale = 0,5 mm for A—-C; 1 mm for D-E.
74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
astogenetically old and young fragments that it would not be possible to consider
them to constitute a single species, if a complete colony, displaying transitional
stages, had not been obtained.
Measurements (means of 10 values) in mm
Lz Iz Lop lop
‘A’ zooids _ 0,80 0,47 0,14 0,20
‘*B’ zooids 0,82 0,74 0,15 0,24
Family Aspidostomatidae Jullien, 1888
Aspidostomatidae Jullien, 1888: 77. Harmer, 1926: 322.
Aspidostoma Hincks, 1881
Aspidostoma Hincks, 1881: 159. Harmer, 1926: 323.
Aspidostoma magna sp. nov.
Fig. 9C-D
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26310, station SM 23, 27°44,4’S 32°42,8’E, 400-450 m.
Other material: station SM 41.
Description
Colony erect, cylindrical, branching; stout, up to 1,5 mm wide, the largest
fragment being 6 mm long. Zooids in three alternating, longitudinal series, their
frontal surfaces occupying two-thirds of the circumference of the branch;
hexagonal to polygonal, 1,2 to 1,4 mm long by about 0,8 mm broad, boundaries
marked by raised sutures. Calcification thick, finely granular; frontal surface
convex proximally, dipping distally to a deep, oval opesia occupying about
one-third of the zooid length, bounded distally by a thickened, raised rim.
Distolaterally, on each side, the rim is produced into a prominent, projecting
lobe, often broken short. Proximal border of opesia forming a flared, bilobed
lip, perpendicular to the frontal plane; a prominent conical knob proximal to it,
often extended as a longitudinal rib. Ovicells large, subimmersed, with one or
more frontal umbones.
Etymology
Magnus (L)—large, referring to the size of the zooids.
Remarks
The material of this species was fragmentary, but sufficient of its morphology
was preserved to demonstrate its uniqueness. Few species of Aspidostoma are
known, and only one living species, A. cylindricum Harmer (1926: 323), has an
erect habit. A. magna is distinguished by its large size, the zooids being almost
twice as large as any other species, and by the disposition of the zooid series
which, in A. cylindricum, open on all surfaces of the branch.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES (BS)
Fig. 9. A. Columnella magna (Busk). Part of the colony, including a bifurcation. B. Figularia
philomela (Busk). Two damaged zooids and an avicularium. C—D. Aspidostoma magna sp. nov.
C. A group of zooids. D. A fragment showing two ovicelled zooids. Scale = 0,5 mm for B;
1 mm for A, C-D.
716 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Cribrilinidae Hincks, 1880
Cribrilinidae Hincks, 1880: 182. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 56.
Figularia Jullien, 1886
Figularia Jullien, 1886: 608. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 70.
Figularia philomela (Busk, 1884)
Fig. 9B
Cribrilina philomela Busk, 1884: 132, pl. 17 (fig. 6).
Material
Stations SM 16, SM 41.
Remarks
Two minute fragments only were found. One was unilaminar, but detached,
and the other was bilaminar and evidently part of an erect, foliaceous colony.
The zooids of both fragments were extensively damaged and all chitinous parts
were missing. However, the avicularian rostrum is an important character in
distinguishing the different species of Figularia, and the avicularium present in
this material corresponds to that illustrated by Busk for F. philomela. This latter
species, characterized by an erect, foliaceous habit, was collected by the
Challenger from Marion Island. Busk distinguished encrusting material of his
species, from the same locality, as var: adnata; but, as ‘hemescharan’ colonies
are usually secured to the substratum by encrusting, unilaminar sheets of zooids,
there seems to be little use in such a distinction.
Inversiscaphos gen. nov.
- Colony minute, encrusting very small substrata. Zooids budded in alter-
nating distolateral radial series. Gymnocyst extensive, costae simple, fused
terminally forming a median keel (hence Jnversiscaphos). Zooids communicating
by large septulae (or pore-chambers with frontal windows?). Avicularia
adventitious and terminal, interzooidal in position, paired. Mandibles long and
setiform. Ovicells terminal, closed by the operculum, brooding zooids wide.
Type species: Jnversiscaphos setifer sp. nov.
Etymology
Skaphe (G), scapha (L)—a boat, inversus (L)—upside down, referring to
the shape of the zooids.
Inversiscaphos setifer sp. nov.
Figs 1B, 19
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26307, station SM 16, 27°33’S 32°44,6’E, 376-384 m.
Other material: station SM 16.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES T7
Description
Colony minute, encrusting sand grains. Ancestrula similar to subsequent
zooids, primary zooids budded proximally or proximolaterally, subsequent
zooids budded in alternating lateral series. Zooids small, with a distinct
peripheral gymnocyst. Two pairs of large lateral septulae (which may be part of
a lateral pore-chamber complex) with uncalcified windows present and facing
frontally early in ontogeny. Windows obscured distolaterally by next zooid
series. Frontal shield formed by seven to eight flat, wide, simple costae, fused
terminally forming a distinct keel, lacunae absent. Intercostal areas simple slits,
slightly enlarged peripherally to form rounded foramina, but with no intercostal
fusions. Secondary calcified orifice elongated, narrowing proximally. Avicularia
adventitious, budded in pairs from the terminal wall of each zooid, not com-
municating with other zooids. Basal wall of subrostral chamber reaching the
substratum. Avicularia present on ancestrula, mandibles setiform, slung on
asymmetrical condyles. Brooding zooids very wide, ovicell terminal, hyper-
stomial, imperforate, closed by the operculum.
Etymology
Setifer (L)— bristly, referring to the avicularian setae.
Remarks
The colony structure and zooid form of J. setifer do not appear to have been
described before. It is inferred that the species is adapted to life in deep water
and on minute substrata, and that the setiform mandibles have a stabilizing
function similar to those of Setosellina. Cribrimorph bryozoans with very long,
setiform avicularia are rare (see Waters 1888: 22). Jolietina latimarginata (Busk),
which encrusts corals, and dead, erect bryozoans from very deep water, also has
setiform avicularia, but a different growth pattern from J. setifer, which includes
large, interzooidal kenozooids. The frontal shield has numerous intercostal
- fusions (see Busk 1884: 131, pl. 22 (fig. 10); Waters 1888: 22, pl. 1 (figs 11-12)).
The ancestrula and primary zooids of J. setifer all have the same
morphology, and the primary buds are produced proximally from the ancestrula.
The avicularian chambers are terminal, and do not appear to develop distal or
lateral septulae. All subsequent zooids are budded alternately from the lateral-
distal septulae of preceding zooid pairs. Avicularia are thus adventitious in
origin, but interzooidal in position. The occurrence of avicularia as part of the
ancestrula complex is unusual although it is known in the Cupuladriidae
‘ (Lagaay 1963a). Avicularia with acute but not setiform mandibles are also
known to be developed on the ancestrulae of some encrusting colonies, such as
Metrarabdotos (Cook 19736). The presence of the setiform mandibles in the
ancestrular complex of both the Setosellinidae and Cupuladriidae, and in
I. setifer, is inferred to indicate the importance of the establishment of a clearing
and stabilizing function early in astogeny, in colonies living in sandy or muddy
environments.
78 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Ovicells are prominent, and appear to be a product of the distal wall of the
maternal, brooding zooid. No distal zooids are budded from the ovicelled
zooid, which are present in colonies with from nine to eleven zooids.
Measurements in mm
Lz 0,30-0,39 Iz 0,20-0,24
Lbrz 0,39-0,41 Ibrz 0,30-0,32
Ls 0,48-0,75
Family Exochellidae Bassler, 1935
Exochellidae Bassler, 1935: 33. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 78.
Escharoides Milne-Edwards, 1836
Escharoides Milne-Edwards, 1836: 218, 259. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 78.
Escharoides distincta sp. nov.
Fig. 11D
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26308, station SM 23, 27°44,4’S 32°42,8’E, 400-450 m.
Other material: station SM 16.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids oval, convex, up to 1,2 mm long. Frontal wall
thick and smooth, imperforate centrally, with a double row of marginal pores.
Aperture broader than long, proximal border with a projecting, quadrate lip;
a single avicularium on each side of the aperture, mandible oval, acute to plane
of aperture and directed distolaterally. Two spines present on the distal border
of the aperture, and one on each side; each lateral spine arises close to the
avicularium and projects proximally to it. Ovicell globular, smooth, with a
distinct frontal ridge.
Etymology
Distinctus (L)—different, referring to the distinctive character correlations
of the species.
Remarks
Two small, damaged specimens only of this species were found, each
comprising no more than six zooids. However, Escharoides is a very distinct and
Fig. 10. A-D. Adeonella coralliformis O'Donoghue. A. Zooids from a growing tip.
B. Later zooids. C. Diagram of the primary orifice. D. A branch viewed from the edge.
E-H. Adeonella majuscula sp. nov. E. Two young zooids. F. Diagram of the primary orifice.
G. Two older zooids. H. A branch viewed from the edge. I-L. Adeonella cracens sp. nov.
I. Three young zooids. J. Diagram of the primary orifice. K. Three older zooids.
L. A branch viewed from the edge. Scale = 0,5 mm for A-C, E-G, I-K; 1 mm for D, H, L.
Us
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Fig. 10
80 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
well-defined genus; few species are at present described and each of these is
characterized by the morphology of the apertural rim, the size and slope of
lateral avicularia and the number and disposition of the oral spines. On these
characters E. distincta may be distinguished from all presently known species.
Family Microporellidae Hincks, 1880
Microporellidae Hincks, 1880: 204. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 220.
Flustramorpha Gray, 1872
Elustramorpha Gray, 1872: 168 Busk, 1884: 135.
Flustramorpha marginata (Krauss)
Flustra marginata Krauss, 1837: 35, fig. 3.
Flustramorpha marginata: Busk, 1884: 135, pl. 20 (fig. 8).
Material
Stations SM 23, SM 41.
Description
Colony erect, bilaminar, foliaceous. Zooids broad and flat, hexagonal,
separated by raised sutures. Primary orifice semicircular. Frontal wall granular,
with numerous small pores and a median crescentic ascopore. Avicularium
adventitious, proximolateral to the orifice, rostrum oval, supporting a whip-like
setiform mandible.
Remarks
Two small, damaged and very worn fragments were found, possibly an
indication that they have been transported, perhaps, from shallower water.
Flustramorpha angusta sp. nov.
Fig. 11E
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26309, station SM 16, 27°33’S 32°44,6’E, 376-384 m.
Description
Colony erect, bilaminar, formed of narrow, strap-like branches. Zooids
hexagonal, flat, separated by raised ridges; 0,7 mm long, by 0,4 mm wide.
Primary orifice with straight proximal edge and curved distal edge, constituting
less than a semicircle. Frontal wall minutely granular, with small scattered pores.
Ascopore situated in the distal third of the zooid, immediately proximal to the
orifice, crescentic, with a finely denticulate edge. Avicularium lateral, single, the
cystid partially immersed in the zooid; rostrum broadly oval, with a median
pivotal bar, mandible not seen. Ovicell globular, recumbent on the distally-
succeeding zooid, prominent, surface granular and imperforate. The edges of the
branch are channelled to receive supporting rhizoids.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 81
Etymology
Angustus (L)—narrow, referring to the branches of the colony.
Remarks
A single specimen was found, 4 mm long and 1,5 mm broad, and conse-
quently little can be said about the colony. However, this species is clearly
referrable to Flustramorpha and differs from the two species presently known,
F. marginata and F. flabellaris, in the slender, straplike colony form, the smaller
size of the zooids, shape of the primary orifice, and in the structure of the ovicell,
which is broader and bears marginal flutings in the latter two species.
Measurements (means of 10 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,73 0,47
Family Gigantoporidae Bassler, 1935
Gigantoporidae Bassler, 1935: 32. Harmer, 1957: 878.
Gigantopora Ridley, 1881
Gigantopora Ridley, 1881: 47. Harmer, 1957: 879.
Gigantopora polymorpha (Busk, 1884)
Gephyrophora polymorpha Busk, 1884: 167, pl. 34 (fig. 2).
Adeonella ponticula O’Donoghue, 1924: 54, pl. 4 (fig. 23).
Gigantopora polymorpha: Brown, 1952: 208, figs 145-146.
Material
Station SM 103.
Description
Colony encrusting, or developing erect, bilaminar, cylindrical, foliaceous
~ or reteporiform growths. Zooids broad, flat and polygonal, separated by raised
sutures; frontal wall granular, with scattered, minute pores. Primary orifice
orbicular, proximal edge concave. An elongate, triangular avicularium develops
on each side of the orifice, directed medially, arching above the primary orifice
and fusing to form a slender bridge.
Distribution
The species is known only from South Africa, although Tertiary fossil
. specimens have been reported from New Zealand by Brown (1952).
Family Adeonellidae Gregory, 1893
Adeonellidae Gregory, 1893: 241. Cook, 1973a: 246.
Adeonella Busk, 1884
Adeonella Busk, 1884: 183. Cook, 1968: 180.
82 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Adeonella coralliformis O’ Donoghue, 1924
Fig. 10A-D
Adeonella coralliformis O’Donoghue, 1924: 55, pl. 4 (fig. 24).
Adeonella coralliformis: Cook, 1973a: 254.
Material
Stations SM 16, SM 41, SM 86.
Description
Colony erect, branching, rigid. Branches flat, bilaminar, up to 4 mm broad;
fragments only recovered, no complete colonies. Zooids in regular, quincuncial
series, hexagonal or rhombic, becoming irregular in older parts of colony;
convex, separated by shallow grooves rapidly infilled by secondary calcification.
Primary orifice orbicular, with a deep, narrow sinus. Peristome low, thickened
but not particularly prominent; spiramen situated immediately proximal to the
secondary orifice, separated from it by a narrow bridge of calcite, thickening
with age but often broken in dead material. Avicularia typically paired, lateral
to secondary orifice, arising beside, or immediately distal to, the spiramen;
rostrum acute triangular, directed distomedially and just extending on to the
distal border of the peristome. Frontal wall finely granular, pierced by numerous
small pores. Additional avicularia occur elsewhere on the frontal wall, but are
not common. Vicarious avicularia, similar to and little larger than the
adventitious types, may be distributed along the edge of the branch, but are not
common; the edge is largely composed of normal autozooids overlapping from
branch faces. Sexual polymorphs were not found, although they are described
by Cook (1973a).
Distribution
This species is known only from South Africa. Both O’Donoghue (1924)
and Cook (1973a) have commented on its resemblance to A. regularis Busk
(1884), described from south-east of Cape Town, but Busk’s description and
figure are not easy to understand and it is not certain that the two species are the
same.
Adeonella majuscula sp. nov.
Fig. 1OE-H
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26311, station SM 86, 27°59,5’S 32°40,8’E, 550 m.
Other material: station SM 41.
Description
Colony erect, branching, rigid, attached by an encrusting base; at least
10 cm high and probably with an equivalent spread. Branches flat, narrow,
bladelike, bilaminar. Zooids in numerous, alternating longitudinal series,
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 83
E
Fig. 11. A-B. Bifaxaria longicaulis Harmer. A. The proximal part of the colony showing
rhizoids with their tuber-like swellings. B. The worn, main part of the specimen. C. Bifaxaria
submucronata Busk. Part of the specimen. D. Escharoides distincta sp. nov. A group of zooids,
including one with an ovicell. E. Flustramorpha angusta sp. nov. A group of zooids.
Scale = 0,5 mm for B, E; 1 mm for A, C_D.
84 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
bifurcating frequently and diverging towards the edges of the branch, the outer
series thus orientated transverse to the branch axis; oval to hexagonal, convex,
separated by deep grooves. Primary orifice approximately semicircular, with a
broad, shallow sinus proximally. Peristome prominent, thickened, fronto-
terminal, secondary orifice orbicular; spiramen medially situated, occasionally
displaced laterally, half-way between proximal border of secondary orifice and
proximal edge of zooid. Frontal calcification thick and smooth, thickly
punctured by numerous pores, in zooids at growing edge marginal pores are
large and distinct, but are later little larger than frontal pores. Adventitious
frontal avicularia single or paired, developing from marginal pores lateral, or
just distal, to the spiramen; typically inclined distomedially, the elongate
triangular mandible passing between spiramen and peristome. Frequently the
avicularium is distally, or even proximally, directed; in older zooids they are
obliterated and there is a proliferation of smaller frontal avicularia, with random
orientation. Large vicarious avicularia present in continuous series along edges
of the branch, and occasionally replacing marginal autozooids, rostrum
identical to frontal adventitious type. |
Etymology
Majusculus (L)—somewhat greater, referring to the size of the zooids.
Remarks
In the oldest parts of the colony peristomial orifices and spiramina became
deeply immersed, narrowed and eventually obliterated; the surface of the
branch develops a uniform, coarsely porous surface with numerous small
adventitious avicularia. Secondary calcification appears to proceed most
rapidly in the central parts of the branch, which thus develops a distinct keel.
Dimorphic zooids were not found in any of the material studied, but are a
feature of the genus Adeonella. The most useful taxonomic characters among the
species of Adeonella appear to be the shape of the primary orifice, and the
position of the spiramen and the avicularia relative to the peristome, although
zooid size and colony form are also important. A. majuscula differs in these
respects from all presently known species; it is the largest Adeonella occurring
in these collections, and the wide gap between the secondary orifice and the
spiramen is perhaps its most distinctive feature.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,97 0,51
Distribution
The genus Adeonella is widespread in tropical and subtropical waters.
From a centre of distribution in the Indo-West-Pacific it ranges through the
Indian Ocean, to the east and west coasts of Africa, and into the Western
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 85
Atlantic. A single species was described by Busk (1884) from South Africa
(A. regularis, above), and several others by O’Donoghue (1924) and O’ Donoghue
& De Watteville (1944).
Adeonella cracens sp. nov.
Fig. 10I-L
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26312, station SM 86, 27°59,5’S 32°40,8’E, 550 m.
Other material: stations SM 23, SM 41.
Description
Colony erect, branching, rigid, attached by an encrusting base; at least 5 cm
high, with an equivalent spread. Branches flat, strap-like, bilaminar, up to 6 mm
broad; becoming cylindrical in older parts of the colony, where they are often
narrower than later growth. Zooids in alternating linear series, bifurcating
frequently and diverging towards the margin of the branch; elongate, rectangular
or pyriform, becoming irregular, strongly convex and separated by deep grooves
when newly developed. Primary orifice wider than long, proximal border
deeply concave. Peristome low and thickened, little raised above the frontal
plane of the zooid, secondary orifice approximately semicircular. Spiramen
situated immediately proximal to the secondary orifice, in the distal third of the
zooid; oblong, distoproximally orientated, becoming deeply immersed, the
secondary opening developing a more circular outline. Avicularia single or
paired, situated laterally between the spiramen and the peristome, distally
directed; mandible acute triangular. Vicarious avicularia present in a continuous
series along the edge of the branch, rostra identical to, and little larger than,
those of the adventitious type. Frontal wall finely granular, closely punctured
with numerous small pores. Dimorphic zooids were not seen.
Etymology
Cracens (L)—slender, referring to the shape of the branches.
Remarks
With continuing secondary calcification the peristome and spiramen become
deeply immersed, as do the frontal avicularia. In this state the zooids have a
very characteristic appearance, reminiscent of a species of Micropora. Additional
’ frontal avicularia are developed on older zooids, apparently randomly distri-
buted and with no discernible orientation. Adeonella cracens differs from the
other species of Adeonella in the fauna most markedly in the shape of the
primary orifice and the position of the spiramen and avicularia, relative to the
secondary orifice. The shape of the spiramen, though obscured in the oldest
parts of the colony, is also an important character. The zooids are smaller than
those of A. majuscula, and the colony as a whole tends to be less extensive, with
86 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
narrower, rather delicate branches, not developing the characteristic midrib of
the latter species.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,97 0,34
Adeonella sp.
Fig. 12E
Material
Stations SM 16, SM 41, SM 103.
Distribution
Fragments of a small species of Adeonella occurred at three stations. It
could not be assigned with confidence to any described species, and appeared
to be distinct from each of the three species discovered in the present survey.
However, the paucity of material, and the indifferent state of preservation of the
few specimens available, prevent an adequate description, and further elucidation
of the systematic status of this species must await the collection of more
representative samples.
The specimens obtained represented Piciene (up to 4,5 mm long and
1,5 mm wide) of branches, cylindrical in section and comprising just four series
of zooids, the orifices opening all around the branch axis. In a few instances the
branch was broadened to six or eight series. The zooids are rectangular and
elongate, smaller than any of the other species recorded here, with coarsely
granular and densely punctured frontal walls. Secondary orifice semicircular,
with an elliptical spiramen immediately proximal to it; avicularia paired, lateral
to spiramen and orientated distally or distomedially. Marginal avicularia were
not found.
Family Bifaxariidae Busk, 1884
Bifaxariidae Busk, 1884: 79. Harmer, 1957: 859.
Bifaxaria Busk, 1884
Bifaxaria Busk, 1884: 79. Harmer, 1957: 860.
Bifaxaria submucronata Busk, 1884
Fig. 11C
Bifaxaria submucronata Busk, 1884: 80, pl. 13 (fig. 1).
Bifaxaria submucronata: Harmer, 1957: 861, pl. 57 (figs 1-3, 19, 22).
Material
Station SM 60, a single damaged internode.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 87
| C D
Fig. 12. A-B. Smittoidea hexagonalis (O'Donoghue). A. Two zooids, showing different types
of suboral avicularia. B. An ovicelled zooid. C—D. ?Turritigerasp. C. Zooids at the growing tip.
D. Older zooids with occluded orifices. E. Adeonella sp. Two young zooids. Scale = 0,5 mm.
88 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
Colony erect, jointed. Internodes biserial; zooids in alternating back-to-
back sequence, vase-shaped. Primary orifice terminal, obscured by a prominent,
projecting proximal lip. Frontal wall smooth, with a single series of marginal
pores, and a variable number of pores in longitudinal sequence frontally.
Epitheca thick, clearly visible. A single, small adventitious avicularium situated
on each side of the orifice, mandible semicircular, directed distolaterally.
Bifaxaria ?longicaulis Harmer
Fig. 11A-B
Bifaxaria longicaulis Harmer, 1957: 863, pl. 57 (figs 5-6, 14-15, 17, 20).
Material
Station SM 31, a single damaged colony.
Description
Colony erect, jointed and branching; anchored by long branching rhizoids,
locally swollen and forming inflated, tuber-like structures. Internodes slender,
biserial, zooids in alternating, back-to-back sequence. Primary orifice sub-
terminal, circular, without a pronounced peristome. Frontal wall smooth, fine-
grained, with sporadic frontal and marginal pores. Adventitious avicularia small,
lateral to orifice or on proximal frontal wall of adjacent zooid.
Remarks
The solitary specimen obtained represented the proximal portion of an old
and thickened colony. Details of zooidal morphology were unclear, but in
broadest terms they corresponded most closely to B. longicaulis Harmer. In
particular, the curious swellings of the rootlets are described by Harmer (1957)
for this species. However, the condition of the specimen prevents confident
identification with the latter species.
Family Cleidochasmatidae Cheetham & Sandberg, 1964
Cleidochasmatidae Cheetham & Sandberg, 1964: 1032.
Cleidochasma Harmer, 1957
Cleidochasma Harmer, 1957: 1038. Cook, 1964a: 11.
Several species of this genus have the ability to colonize very small sub-
strata, and some appear to be confined to this type of environment. Lunulitiform
colonies of C. mirabile were described by Harmer (1957: 1045, pl. 71 (figs 15,
17-18), fig. 113) from the East Indies, and the minute, encrusting C. rotundorum
(Norman) was described by Cook (1964a: 20, pl. 1 (fig. 2), fig. 5B—C) from
Madeira. Another similar encrusting species, C. gilchristi Cook, is known from
South Africa (see Cook 1966: 212, pl. 1 (fig. 1[A—B), fig. 2A—B). C. gilchristi was
reported from 101—275 metres off Durban, but has not been found in the present
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 89
South African collections, its place being taken by colonies of C. protrusum,
which is otherwise known from shallow water.
Cleidochasma protrusum (Thornely, 1905)
Gemellipora protrusa Thornely, 1905: 119, pl. 7.
Cleidochasma protrusum: Harmer, 1957: 1040, pl. 71 (figs 1-4), fig. 112.
Material
Stations SM 23, SM 41.
Description
Colony encrusting, often on small substrata. Zooids with marginal frontal
pores and lateral and distal septulae. Orifices with a deep, triangular sinus and
large, paired condyles. Adventitious avicularia suboral, derived from marginal
septula, mandible acute, orientated laterally or proximally. Ovicells prominent,
tuberculate, hyperstomial, not closed by the operculum.
Remarks
C. protrusum has a very wide bathymetrical and geographical range and is
found on a variety of substrata. The colonies from South Africa are very small
and encrust sand grains. They range in diameter from 0,90-2,00 mm and
comprise from 6 to 35 zooids. Ovicells are present in colonies with only 8 zooids.
The specimens described by Harmer (1957) were much larger (diameter 10 mm)
and originate on shell fragments 3-4 mm in diameter. The colonies consist of
multilaminar spheres formed by successive overgrowth, and as many as 16 zooid
layers are present.
Distribution
C. protrusum has also been found in shallow-water sediments of Upper
Miocene age from the Chake clay beds of Pemba, Zanzibar (British Museum
Collections). The Recent distribution extends from the Indo-West-Pacific
through the Indian Ocean to Mauritius and east and South Africa.
Family Smittinidae Levinsen, 1909
Smittinidae Levinsen, 1909: 335. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 98.
Smittoidea Osburn, 1952
Smittoidea Osburn, 1952: 408. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 108.
Smittoidea ?hexagonalis (O’Donoghue)
Fig. 12A-B
Smittia hexagonalis O’Donoghue, 1924: 46, pl. 3 (fig. 15).
Material
Station SM 86.
90 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids broad and flat, quadrate or hexagonal, separated
by raised sutures; 0,7-0,9 mm long by about 0,6 mm broad. Primary orifice
orbicular, with a short, quadrate lyrula occupying about half the proximal
border; paired, blunt and downcurved, lateral condyles present. Orifice
surrounded laterally by a thin, raised peristome, incomplete proximally where it
incorporates a small avicularium; mandible semicircular, directed proximally.
Three or four distal oral spines present. Frontal wall smooth, thin and almost
flat, with distinct marginal pores. Frontal avicularia occur sporadically, similar
to the suboral type but larger. Frequently the suboral avicularium is replaced by
an elongate, parallel-sided avicularium which extends from the proximal edge
of the orifice laterally, almost to the edge of the zooid, the peristome being
deformed in the process. Ovicell hyperstomial, thin, hyaline, with numerous
small frontal pores.
Remarks
A single small colony only was found. In most respects it is closest to
O’Donoghue’s species, described from eastern South Africa, but more informa-
tion on the South African Smittinid fauna is required before a firm identification
may be made.
Family Tessaradomidae Jullien, 1903
Tessaradomidae Jullien, 1903: pl. 14. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 242.
Tessaradoma Norman, 1869
Tessaradoma Norman, 1869: 309. Lagaaij & Cook 1973: 494. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 242.
Tessaradoma bispiramina sp. nov.
Fig. 13A—D
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26296, station SM 86, 27°59,5’S 32°40,8’E, 550 m.
Other material: stations SM 23, SM 85, SM 103.
Description
Colony attached by an encrusting base, erect, cylindrical, branching
irregularly; branches composed of triple whorls of zooids, tapered distally,
thickening steadily by continuous frontal calcification. Typically producing
paired lateral branches, at right angles to the main stem; all branches tending to
curve distally. Colonies up to 1,5 cm tall, with maximum width of 2 mm. Zooids
oval, boundaries marked by distinct sutures. Frontal wall thick, vitreous, with
tessellated surface, distinct marginal pores present. Primary orifice orbicular,
obscured by a tall, cylindrical peristome—frequently broken short—at the base
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 9]
of which two tubular spiramina arise, developing separately, close together, on
the outer, proximal side of the peristome. In older zooids the spiramina are
covered by secondary calcification and appear to be enclosed within the
peristome. Avicularia adventitious, single or paired, distolaterally situated on
the frontal wall of the zooid, developing from the marginal pores; mandible
semicircular, directed laterally or proximolaterally. Ovicell broader than long,
smooth and imperforate, opening into the peristome; completely obscured by
development of the peristome and continued secondary calcification. The ovicell
is apparent only at the growing tips, or in broken areas of the colony.
Etymology
Spiraculum (L)—an air-hole, referring to the paired spiramina of this
species.
Remarks
With continued calcification the boundaries of the zooids become indistinct,
sutures are increasingly undulated and wander over large areas of the colony.
Orifices are deeply immersed, hiding the characteristic doubled spiramen, and
there is a proliferation of small adventitious avicularia. The triple zooid whorls
and the doubled spiramen distinguish 7. bispiramina from other described
species of Tessaradoma.
Measurements (means of 10 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,8 0,4
Tessaradoma circella sp. nov.
Fig. 13E-H
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26313, station SM 103, 28°31,7’S 32°34’E, 680 m.
Other material: stations SM 16, SM 86, SM 92.
Description
Colony erect, slender, attached by a narrow, ring-shaped base, encircling
hydroid stems; branching irregularly, up to 1 cm long in material collected, with
a maximum width of 0,5 mm. Zooids in alternating; back-to-back pairs;
elongate, oval, separated by raised sutures with a deep peristome constituting
‘ approximately half the zooid length. Frontal wall gently convex, smooth, with
_ distinct marginal perforations; a short, tubular spiramen medially sited at the
base of the peristome, in the apparent middle of the zooid. Peristome transversely
oval. Avicularia adventitious, small, lateral, developed along the margins of the
zooids, proximal to the peristome, apparently developing from the marginal
pores; at least two, but up to six or more per zooid, mandible short, semi-
circular, acute to the frontal plane of the zooid and directed laterally. Ovicell
92 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
broader than long, smooth surfaced and imperforate, opening into the peristome;
rarely clearly visible, usually immersed and hidden by the peristome.
The colony becomes progressively smoother, and zooid outlines indistinct,
with continued secondary calcification. The primary orifice is deeply immersed
and the peristomial opening lies almost completely flush with the colony surface.
Marginal pores are similarly deeply immersed but the spiramen remains
prominent. Additional avicularia are developed as earlier ones are obliterated.
Etymology
Circellus (L)—a little ring, referring to the early astogeny of the colony.
Remarks
Of the 7 specimens with complete bases, 5 were attached to the stems of a
hydroid, 1 old colony stump had become detached from its support, and 1 was
attached to another colony of the same species. In all cases, the basal portion
formed a narrow ring. Although both young and old colonies were found, the
astogeny was not clear. The ring in the smallest colony appeared to be formed
partly by a single zooid, perhaps the ancestrula, and partly by expansions from
the zooids budded from it. Secondary calcification rapidly thickens the ring and
early developmental stages are thus obliterated. 7. circella is easily distinguished
from other species of Tessaradoma by the very slender zooids, the length of the
peristome, relative to total zooid length, and the median position of the spiramen.
Its basal attachment is also unique.
Measurements (means of 10 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,91 0,41
Family Sertellidae Jullien, 1903
Sertellidae Jullien, 1903: 57. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 260.
Sertella Jullien, 1903
Sertella Jullien, 1903: 57. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 260.
Sertella bullata sp, nov.
Fig. 1SA—D
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26293, station SM 23, 27°44,4’S 32°42,8’E, 400-450 m.
Other material: stations SM 16, SM 41.
Fig. 13. A-D. Tessaradoma bispiramina sp. nov. A. Zooids at the tip of a colony.
B. An ovicelled zooid. C. A group of young zooids, one with a developing spiramen.
D. Part of an old thickened branch. E-H. Tessaradoma circella sp. nov. E. Zooids at the
tip of a colony. F. Ovicelled zooids. G. The proximal part of an old colony, showing its
ring-like base. H. The proximal part of a young colony, attached to a hydroid.
Scale = 0,5 mm for A-F, H; 1 mm for G.
93
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Fig. 13
94 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
Colony erect, reticulate; trabeculae, up to 0,4 mm wide, composed of two
alternating series of zooids, occasionally doubled where two trabeculae fuse;
fenestrulae large, diamond-shaped, 1,5 mm long by 0,9 mm wide. Zooids oval,
elongate, slightly convex, separated by shallow grooves, later partially immersed
and less distinct. Frontal wall smooth, fine grained, with inconspicuous marginal
pores, later partially covered by small granular papillae. Primary orifice broader
than long, transversely oval, distal half minutely denticulate, proximal half
gently concave between blunt lateral condyles. Peristome thin, erect, distal edge
flared, deep, completely obscuring the orifice; a narrow median fissure extends
the whole of its length, communicating with a small round pseudosinus
proximally. Two short oral spines distolaterally, visible only in newly developed
zooids. Adventitious avicularia present on different areas of each zooid, usually
close to the margin, very numerous in older zooids; cystid inflated, rostrum
fusiform, pivotal bar approximately median with a foramen on each side;
mandible triangular, acute, variously orientated. There is little variation in size,
although small individuals, with semicircular mandibles, occur rarely. Ovicell
very large, almost as long as the bearing zooid, pear-shaped, broadest distally,
slightly flattened frontally with a very narrow fissure extending almost the whole
of its length. In the present material, ovicells seem to occur only on zooids
immediately proximal to trabecular fusion, the ovicell being supported on the
joint. Basal surface with numerous avicularia, and thickly covered with papillae.
Etymology
Bullatus (L)—inflated, referring to the ovicell.
Remarks
Species of Sertella are characteristic of the benthos of the outer continental
shelf and slope in various parts of the world. Systematic problems are worsened
by the often fragmentary nature of the material obtained, and earlier records are
often difficult to corroborate. The Sertellidae (= Reteporidae) of the Indo-West-
Pacific have been well monographed by Harmer (1934) but in most other regions
they require considerable investigation. Sertella bullata may be distinguished
from other described species by the relatively large size of the ovicell, the shape
of the avicularia and its characteristically papillose surface.
Measurements (means of 10 values) in mm
LZ Iz
0,49 0,21
Reteporella Busk, 1884
Reteporella Busk, 1884: 126. Harmer, 1934: 572.
This genus was created by Busk (1884: 26) for a single species, R. flabellata,
collected by the Challenger from Heard Island. The two species described below
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 95
conform to Busk’s, and later Harmer’s (1934) diagnosis of the genus, but are
distinctive in being bilaminate, with zooids on both sides of the flat branches.
Reteporella dinotorhynchus sp. nov.
Fig. 14A—D
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26305, station SM 23, 27°44,4’S 32°42,8’E, 400-450 m.
Other material: station SM 41.
Description
Colony erect and branching, not reticulate. Branches flat and broad, up to
3 mm wide, largest unbranched fragment measuring 13 mm; bilaminar, zooids
opening on both faces. Zooids oval to hexagonal, strongly convex and separated
by deep grooves. Frontal calcification smooth and vitreous, with a few scattered,
inconspicuous marginal pores. Primary orifice longer than broad, approximately
bell-shaped, distal rim finely denticulate, posterior border gently concave below
blunt, lateral condyles. Peristome low and thick, with a small mucro medio-
proximally adjacent, on the right or left, to a shallow notch. Five or six tall,
flattened and jointed (antenniform) spines around the distal and distolateral
borders of the orifice. Adventitious avicularia sparsely distributed, occurring on
the frontal wall immediately proximal to the peristome; cystid inflated, mandible
semi-elliptical, acute to frontal surface and directed proximally. Vicarious
avicularia present along the branch edges, often common, identical to
adventitious type but larger. Ovicells were found only in the oldest specimens,
only the lateral walls remained and nothing of their structure could be deduced.
In the more proximal parts of the colony secondary calcification causes a
thickening and smoothing of the colony surface, and adventitious avicularia are
more frequent.
Etymology
Dinotos (G)—rounded, rhynchos (G)—a snout, referring to the avicularium.
Remarks
No complete colony was found, but a number of fragments, of both living
and dead material, was obtained from each of the two stations.
Measurements (means of 10 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,86 0,52
Reteporella clancularia sp. nov.
Fig. 14E-I
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26304, station SM 23, 27°44,4’S 32°42,8’E, 400-450 m.
Other material: station SM 41.
96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
Colony erect, branching, not reticulate. Branches flat, narrow, commonly
less than 2 mm broad, largest unbranched fragment 8 mm long; bilaminar,
zooids opening on both faces of the branch. Zooids oval, convex, separated by
deep grooves, distinct at the growing edges but later immersed. Frontal wall
smooth, fine-grained, with a few small and inconspicuous marginal pores.
Primary orifice longer than wide, bell-shaped, distal rim finely denticulate,
proximal border concave below blunt lateral condyles. Peristome erect, thin,
with a rounded notch proximally and frequently a small columnar avicularium
adjacent to it; mandible semicircular. Six or seven slender, jointed (antenniform)
spines on the distal border of the orifice. Avicularia numerous and varied,
becoming more frequent in older parts of the colony. Small frontal avicularia
present on most zooids, with semicircular mandible, often two or three in older
zooids; enlarged avicularia, with broadly spatulate mandibles, may also occur.
These large avicularia also occur consistently along the edges of the branch.
Ovicell thin, hyaline, with a broad frontal fissure; prominent when newly
developed, later immersed and obscured.
Etymology
Clancularius (L)—unknown, referring to the specific character correlations.
Measurements (means of 10 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,64 0,29
Family Celleporidae Busk, 1852
Celleporidae Busk, 1852: 85. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 274.
Turbicellepora Ryland, 1963
Turbicellepora Ryland, 1963: 34. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 284.
Turbicellepora protensa sp. nov.
Fig. 1SE-H
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26301, station SM 86, 27°59,5’S 32°40,8’E, 550 m.
Other material: stations SM 23, SM 41, SM 103.
Fig. 14. A—D. Reteporella dinotorhynchus sp. nov. A. Two young zooids with complete spines.
B. Diagram of primary orifice. C. Later zooids, with marginal avicularia on right. D. Immersed
orifices of old zooids. E-I. Reteporella clancularia sp. nov. E. Young zooids with complete
spines. F. The branch edge, showing vicarious avicularia. G. Ovicelled zooids. H. Old zooids
with immersed orifices. I. Diagram of primary orifice. Scale = 0,5 mm.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Fig. 14
oT
98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
Colony attached by a small encrusting base, forming a flat, branching and
spreading growth; branches slender, cylindrical and tapering, up to 2,5 mm
thick, with a spread of 2,5 cm in the largest specimen. Zooids oval, strongly
convex, in regular series at the distal ends of the branches, elsewhere randomly
orientated as branches thicken by frontal budding. Primary orifice orbicular,
with a V-shaped proximal sinus, encircled by a thin, erect peristome enclosing a
small avicularium; mandible semi-elliptical, acute to frontal plane of zooid and
directed laterally. Frontal wall smooth, finely granular, with small, widely-spaced
marginal pores. Vicarious avicularia spatulate, palate with an oval foramen,
pivotal bar very thin, without a columella. Ovicell spherical, smooth, with about
ten small, round pores frontally.
As in all species of this genus, the appearance of the colony alters with age.
Continuous frontal budding produces a multilaminar colony with orifices
opening at all levels; the primary orifice becomes deeply immersed in older parts
of the colony, but where the rate of frontal budding slows the peristomes are
commonly worn or broken and the orifice has a more open appearance.
Colonies commence branching at an early stage and the form seems to be
particular to the species. Nodular, massive colonies were not found and the
open fan-like growth occurred in all the specimens found. Initially attached
wholly to the substratum, the branches are independent of it; the actual point
of attachment is very small and in the largest specimen was not apparent at all.
Etymology |
Protensus (L)—extended, referring to the branching pattern of the colony.
Remarks
The genus Turbicellepora, and indeed a majority of the Celleporidae,
presents severe systematic problems which will not be resolved without critical
re-examination of described species, and of specimens of species with purportedly
broad geographical ranges. Many of the Celleporidae reported from South
African waters have been identified with European or north Atlantic species
(e.g. O’Donoghue 1924; O’Donoghue & De Watteville 1944). Some of these
reports may refer to the above species, which has not been independently
described, as far as it is possible to judge, but without accurate descriptions and
illustrations synonymy is impossible.
Fig. 15. A-D. Sertella bullata sp. nov. A. Young zooids, with numerous avicularia.
B. An ovicellate zooid. C. Basal view of a branch. D. Diagram of primary orifice.
E-H. Turbicellepora protensa sp. nov. E. A group of zooids. F. Later zooids, and vicarious
avicularia. G. Ovicelled zooids. H. Typical form of the colony. Scale = 0,5 mm for A-G;
2 mm for H.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Figeals
99
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Orifice dimensions (means of 20 values) in mm
Lor lor
0,138 0,139
Turritigera Busk, 1884
Turritigera Busk, 1884: 129.
?Turritigera sp.
Fig. 12C—D
Material
Stations SM 16, SM 23.
Description
Colony erect and branching, composed of four longitudinal series of zooids,
orifices opening alternately around the whole periphery. Zooids 0,7 to 1,1 mm
long by about 0,3 mm broad, convex, boundaries indistinct. Primary orifice
obscured by a tall, funnel-like peristome, curving out perpendicularly from the
branch when undamaged. Peristomial orifice longer than broad, approximately
quadrate in shape; an adventitious avicularium on its distal border with acute
triangular mandible, directed distally. A smaller avicularium occurs on the
proximal border of the peristome, with a minute semicircular mandible.
Additional avicularia of the second type occur elsewhere on the frontal surface.
Frontal wall thick and smooth with discontinuous longitudinal striations, small
marginal pores present. Secondary calcification proceeds swiftly, giving a
smooth, uniform surface to the colony. Orifices of the proximalmost zooids are
obliterated, with only the distal avicularium remaining visible.
Remarks
- Fragments of this curious species were recovered from two stations, but
were insufficient to give a complete account of its morphology; none of the
fragments bore ovicells, and the shape of the primary orifice could not be
determined. Turritigera is represented by a single species, 7. stellata Busk,
recorded from the Patagonian shelf (Busk 1884; Moyano 1974) and the Cape of
Good Hope (Busk 1884). The present species differs from T. stellata principally
in having zooids disposed around the whole circumference of the branch, in the
latter there is a defined basal surface with zooid orifices opening only on one side
of the branch. The structure of the peristome and the type and distribution of
avicularia suggests an affinity with Turritigera, but conclusive evidence will be
supplied only by the collection of better material.
Family Vittaticellidae Harmer, 1957
Vittaticellidae Harmer, 1957: 765. Wass & Yoo, 1975: 286.
Costaticella Maplestone, 1899
Costaticella Maplestone, 1899: 9. Wass & Yoo, 1975: 288.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 101
Costaticella carotica sp. nov.
Fig. 16
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26306, station SM 85, 27°59,5’S 32°40,8’E, 550 m.
Other material: stations SM 16, SM 23, SM 86.
Description
Colony erect, ramifying, composed of chains of single zooids, linked
proximally and distally by chitinous, tubular nodes. Branching at irregular
intervals, where a short daughter zooid is budded distolaterally from a normal
zooid, and initiates a new chain. Rarely, the daughter zooid may bud a second
series of zooids laterally, in addition to the distal series. Zooids elongate, vase-
shaped; primary orifice lepralioid, with a straight or slightly convex proximal
border. Frontal wall with an elliptical series of 8-13 small, round or irregular,
fenestrae, often with faint sutures extending medially from them. Proximal to the
orifice, half of the area enclosed by the fenestrae is apparently formed by the
fusion of seven costae; distinct lateral and medial sutures are visible between
them. Scapular chambers developed as short, squat avicularia, with triangular
mandibles orientated parallel to the long axis of the zooid. Suprascapular
chambers short; two infrascapular chambers on each side, elongate; each with
two or three uniporous pore plates. Gonozooids were not present. The colony
is anchored by bundles of chitinous rootlets arising from the basal surfaces and
the infrascapular chambers of the lowest zooids.
Etymology
Caroticus (L)—stupefying, referring to the monotonous character
correlations of the genus.
~ Remarks
The structure of the frontal wall, the shape of the orifice and the form of the
infrascapular chambers suggest that this species is most appropriately placed in
Costaticella Maplestone. It appears to be most similar to C. benecostata
(Levinsen), described from southern Australia, but differs from it in its more
prominent avicularia. The morphological complexities of this group of
Ascophorans makes the evaluation of many early records extremely difficult
_ However, C. carotica is certainly distinct from any of the Australian species
recently described or redescribed by Wass & Yoo (1975), and is quite different
from the few Vittaticellidae known from the east African coast.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,82 0,33
102 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 16. Scanning Electron Micrographs. Costaticella carotica sp. nov. A. A single
zooid. B. Daughter zooid budded from a maternal zooid. C. Enlarged view of the
central area of the frontal wall. D. The proximalmost infrascapular chamber, showing
uniporous pore plates. Scale = 0,092 mm for A; 0,07 mm for B; 0,0874 mm for C;
0,026 mm for D.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 103
Family Mamilloporidae Canu & Bassler, 1927
Mamilloporidae Canu & Bassler, 1927: 9. Harmer, 1957: 887.
Anoteropora Canu & Bassler, 1927
Anoteropora Canu & Bassler, 1927: 10. Harmer, 1957: 888.
Colony lunulitiform, but anchored by basal rhizoids. Zooid series developed
radially from a fan-shaped group of primary and secondary zooids derived from
a single ancestrula. Zooids with greatly extended vertical walls, and small,
hexagonal basal walls. Zooids communicating through septula, placed at the
basal part of the zooid. Orifices large, usually with paired condyles. Avicularia,
if present, interzooidal, regularly patterned. Ovicells large, hyperstomial, closed
by the operculum, orifices of brooding zooids variously dimorphic.
Anoteropora latirostris Silén, 1947
Anoteropora latirostris Silén, 1947: 58, pl. 5 (figs 25-27), figs 49-50. Cook, 1966: 210.
Material
Stations SM 16, SM 23.
Description
Anoteropora with large avicularia placed laterally to the orifice of both
autozooids and brooding zooids.
Remarks
Anoteropora latirostris differs from A. inarmata (see below) in possessing
avicularia, and from A. magnicapitata, the other species found in the Indian
Ocean, in having avicularia associated with the brooding zooids (see Canu &
Bassler 1929: 476; Harmer 1957: 888). A. smitti (Calvet), known from only two
colonies from the Cape Verde Islands, is very similar to A. latirostris (Cook 1966:
291, 1968 :-183).
- Distribution
A. latirostris has been reported from the Red Sea and the Western Indian
Ocean to the East Indies, from depths ranging from 30 to 450 m.
Anoteropora inarmata Cook
Figs 17C, 18C
Anoteropora inarmata Cook, 1966: 211, fig. 1.
‘ Material
Stations SM 53, SM 60.
Description
Anoteropora without avicularia. Frontal shield with a reticulate pattern of
calcification. Operculum of brooding zooids with a subperipheral sclerite which
is straight distally.
104 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
A. inarmata was originally described from a single colony from Zanzibar.
The additional colonies from South Africa show the numerous basal rhizoids,
and the pattern of early astogeny. The colonies from station SM 60 are all
regenerated from fragments. .
The zooids are very deep, and the basal part of each one forms a small
compartment which communicates distally and laterally with other zooids.
Basally, the compartment walls make a pattern of hexagonal partitions, similar
in appearance to those of Cupularia guineensis (Cook 1965a: 170). The compart-
ments are not kenozooidal, however, and the structure of Anoteropora is
fundamentally different from that of the Cupuladriidae (Hakansson 1973). The
rhizoids are numerous (Lr 0,30 mm, Ir 0,04 mm) and originate from a small
septulum at the distal end of each basal zooid hexagon.
The investing cuticle appears to be distended above the calcification of the
frontal shields and ovicells.
Distribution
A. inarmata occurs from Zanzibar to eastern South Africa, from a narrow
bathymetrical range, 720-810 m.
Family Orbituliporidae Canu & Bassler, 1923
Orbituliporidae Canu & Bassler, 1923: 186. Cook & Lagaaij, 1976: 349.
The budding patterns of the colony forms occurring in both the
Orbituliporidae and Conescharellinidae (see below) were described by Cook &
Lagaaij (1976). Colonies are constructed of an ancestrular complex including a
kenozooidal rooting element. In the genera Batopora and Lacrimula,
Conescharellina and Trochosodon, all budding is frontal, and there is no zone
of astogenetic repetition. Colonies are inferred to be orientated with the
ancestrular, adapical region anchored in the sediment by one or more rhizoids,
and with the proliferal, antapical region, where new zooid buds are formed,
facing upward. The conventional representation of these colonies with the
adapical region upward is therefore the reverse of the living orientation (see
Figs 17, 20).
Cook & Lagaaij (1976) also discussed the combination and correlation of
character states which were variously shared among species nominally assigned
to Batopora, Lacrimula and Conescharellina. The type species of these genera
Fig. 17. A. Heliodoma implicata Calvet. Colony from frontal side, inferred to be uppermost
in life, showing setiform avicularian mandibles. x21. B. Setosellina roulei Calvet. Colony
encrusting sand grain, showing setiform avicularian mandibles. x 16. C. Anoteropora inarmata
Cook. Basal side of colony, showing rhizoids. x7. D. Batopora nola sp. nov. Lateral view of
holotype colony, showing adapical rhizoid. x24. E. B. lagaaiji sp. nov. Lateral view of
holotype colony, showing adapical rhizoid. x24.
105
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
17
Fig
106 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
differ in many characters, but an increasing series of species has been found
which has reduced the overall differences among generic groupings belonging
to the two families.
Batopora Reuss, 1867
Batopora Reuss, 1867: 233. Cook & Lagaaij, 1976: 349.
There are a few correlated character states which are used here to distinguish
Recent species, at least, of Batopora from those of Lacrimula. The existence of
living forms of Batopora was unknown until relatively recently, and the
increasing numbers of fossil and living species of both Batopora and Lacrimula
are the direct result of examination of sea-bottom sediments. Until many more
samples have been analysed, it is advisable to delay revision of genera, and both
Batopora and Lacrimula are retained here.
Species of Batopora have a single, relatively undifferentiated adapical
rooting kenozooid which may become immersed as a ‘pit’, in contrast to the
kenozooidal complex of Lacrimula. The peristomial ovicells are probably not
closed by the operculum, also in contrast to those of Lacrimula. The primary
orifice does not appear to have any condyles.
Batopora murrayi Cook, 1966
Figs 18F, 20A
Batopora murrayi Cook, 1966: 216, pl. 1 (fig. 3A—B). Cook & Lagaaij, 1976: 329, pl. 1 (fig. 2).
Material |
Stations SM 16, SM 23, SM 32, SM 53, SM 60, SM 78, SM 86.
Description
Colonies small (1,60—3,40 mm in diameter), and rather flat. Ancestrular area
with a central or eccentric rooting kenozooid, slightly raised at first, becoming
immersed in a ‘pit’. Whorls of four to five zooids budded alternately and
becoming irregularly direct later in astogeny. Secondarily budded, small
kenozooids and avicularia developing late in astogeny. Mandibles rounded,
slung on paired condyles. Zooidal primary orifices straight antapically, peristome
elongated and tubular in proliferal region, secondary orifices rounded. Ovicells
very large, producing swollen peristomes in the proliferal zooids.
Remarks
Two colonies from station SM 16, with 30 and 12 zooids respectively, each
have a delicate rhizoid (Lr 1,00 mm, Ir 0,20 mm) originating from the adapical
Fig. 18. Scanning Electron Micrographs. A. Heliodoma implicata Calvet. x46. B. Setosellina
roulei Calvet. X37. C. Anoteropora inarmata Cook. Frontal side of colony, note ovicells. x8.
D. Batopora lagaaiji sp. nov. x29. E. Lacrimula pyriformis Cook. Zanzibar, BMNH
1965.8.24.12. x30. F. B. murrayi Cook. x12.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Fig. 18
107
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
108
a a us
06 X ‘QJe]) PI00z SUIPOOIG JO MOIA [eIDNIeT ‘C “06x “(01}U99) PIOOZ SUIPOOIG JO MIA [eWIXOId-[eJUOIT ‘DO 06x ‘“so[Apuod
UBLILINSIAV [BOINEWIUUASe 9JON[ “UI9}}3ed SuIppnq SUIMOYS sprooz JUSNbesqns suWIOS pu (JYSII) B[NISOOUYW “Gq “ZI[X ‘PIIe[NOIAR [eISIp
‘poued pue vjnjdos [eiojv] “pjorys [ejUOIJ SUIMOYS PIOOZ ‘yY ‘AOU ‘dS dafijas soydvdsissaauyT “SYdeIBSOIN IAL UOII[_ Suruuvsg 6] ‘SI
Di
Yy MO:
Yi WHOLE
WHY?
Ze
Ly
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 109
kenozooid. Many of the colonies were alive when collected, and the dark
coloured viscera are visible through the peristome walls. Uncalcified buds,
appearing as ‘bubbles’ of cuticle are present in the proliferal region.
Distribution
B. murrayi was first described from Zanzibar, from a depth of 805 m, and
subsequently reported from Fiji, from 384 m.
Batopora lagaaiji sp. nov.
Figs 17E, 18D, 20C
Material
Holotype: SAM-—A26297, station SM 53, 26°51,5’S 33°12,5’E, 720 m.
Other material: stations SM 16, SM 31, SM 60, SM 69.
Description
Colonies very small (1,80—2,20 mm in diameter, 1,30-1,50 mm high).
Adapical rooting kenzooid prominent, surrounded by five proximally directed
primary zooids. Subsequent whorls are regularly composed of five alternating
zooids. Small, antapical axial kenozooids present. Avicularia absent. Ovicells
very large, peristomes of brooding zooids inflated but not curved.
Etymology
The species is named for the late Dr Robert Lagaaij, who initiated recent
work on these minute bryozoan colony forms.
Remarks
B. lagaaiji differs from B. murrayi in the budding pattern and the absence
of avicularia, and from B. nola (see below), by the number of zooids in each
whorl. The holotype colony from station SM 53 has a rhizoid (Lr 0,40 m,
Ir 0,10 m) emanating from the adapical kenozooid.
The differences between B. lagaaiji and B. nola are small but consistent, and
stem from the astogenetic pattern. Colonies of both species live under similar
conditions and even occur in the same sample (SM 16). The rooted mode of Itfe,
and rigid, highly integrated early astogenetic budding pattern of conescharel-
liniform colonies, both make it unlikely that differences are attributable to
microenvironmental (intracolony) influences. The number of zooids in each
whorl is therefore regarded as genetically determined and as a specific difference
between the two taxa (see below).
Measurements in mm
Lk 0,25-0,30 Lz,! 0,70 Iz! 0,60
lk 0,32-0,38 Iz? 0,50 Iz? 0,40
Ik aperture 0,10-0,20 lov 0,36—-0,40
1 secondary orifice 0,14
110 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Batopora nola sp. nov.
Figs 17D, 20B, 21A
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26298, station SM 16, 27°33’S 32°44,6’E, 376-384 m. |
Other material: stations SM 16, SM 23, SM 41, SM 86.
Description
Colonies elongated, very small (0,90-1,10 mm in diameter, 0,80—1,00 mm
high), shaped like a small handbell. Adapical rooting kenozooid large and
prominent, surrounded by four proximally directed primary zooids. Sub-
sequent whorls of four zooids alternating, orifices directed antapically and
laterally. Small, antapical axial kenozooids present. Avicularia absent. Ovicells
large, peristomes of brooding zooid curved adapically.
Etymology
Nola (L)—a little bell, referring to the shape of the colony.
Remarks
The peristomes of the autozooids are elongated and directed antapically,
distinguishing colonies from those of the superficially similar species, Lacrimula
pyriformis (see below). Brooding zooids are present in colonies of only twelve
zooids; the peristomes are strongly curved adapically. One of the colonies
(holotype) from station SM 16 has a rhizoid (Lr 0,80 mm, Ir 0,06 mm) emanating
from the adapical kenozooid.
Measurements in mm
Lk 0,30-0,33 Lz! 0,50-0,53 Iz! 0,40-0,42
Ik 0,35-0,40 Lz? 0,30-0,35 — Iz? 0,30-0,33
Ik aperture 0,10 lov 0,25-0,30
1 secondary orifice 0,06—-0,07
Lacrimula Cook, 1966
Lacrimula Cook, 1966: 217. Cook & Lagaaij, 1976: 355.
The genus was introduced for L. burrowsi Cook which was reported from
depths of 101-207 m from Zanzibar and South Africa (Cook 1966: 218, pl. 2
(figs 2-4) fig. 4A). L. burrowsi has large colonies (1,0-2,0 mm in diameter,
2,8—3,2 mm high), and differs from L. pyriformis in the characters of the adapical
region and the ovicells.
Lacrimula pyriformis Cook, 1966
Figs 18E, 20D
Lacrimula pyriformis Cook, 1966: 219, pl. 2 (fig. 1), fig. 4B. Cook & Lagaaij, 1976: 342,
pl. 5 (fig. 3), pl. 6 (fig. 5).
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 111
Fig. 20. Sketches of conescharelliniform colonies, orientation in life the reverse of that shown.
A. Batopora murrayi Cook. Note rhizoid arising from adapical ‘pit’. B. B. nola sp. nov.
C. B. lagaaiji sp. nov. D. Lacrimula pyriformis Cook. E. Conescharellina africana Cook.
F. Trochosodon sp. Scale = 1 mm.
h2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
Stations SM 1, SM 16, SM 23, SM 86.
Description
Colonies very small (0,8-1,5 mm in diameter, 1,0—2,2 mm high). Adapical
kenozooidal complex with a ring of secondarily budded avicularia. Whorls of
four zooids alternating, peristomes not elongated. Ovicells hyperstomial, closed
by the operculum, frontal wall with a row of subpheripheral pores.
Remarks
Colonies of L. pyriformis are superficially similar to those of B. nola. They
differ in the nature of the adapical region and ovicell, in the area of exposed
frontal shield, and in the overall size of zooids. Colonies of comparable size will
include 16 zooids in L. pyriformis, but only 12 zooids in B. nola. This difference
is a function of the angle of zooidal axes to colony axis and is regarded as
genetically determined. Zooid peristomes are not elongated and those of the
brooding zooids are not curved adapically. One colony, from station SM 16,
has a rhizoid originating from the adapical kenozooid (Lr 0,80 mm Ir 0,06 mm).
Distribution
L. pyriformis was originally reported from Zanzibar, from a depth of 310 m.
Family Conescharellinidae Levinsen, 1909
Conescharellinidae Levinsen, 1909: 308. Harmer, 1957: 722.
Conescharellina d’Orbigny, 1852
Conescharellina d’Orbigny, 1852: 446. Harmer, 1957: 726.
Colonies have an adapical ancestrular region with secondarily budded
kenozooids, heterozooids and extrazooidal tissue, including special ‘rootlet
pores’. Zooids are budded frontally in alternating or direct rows, and surrounded
by regularly patterned, interzooidal avicularia. Primary zooid orifices with a
distinct sinus, secondary orifices with a raised lateral peristome. Ovicells
hyperstomial, prominent, not closed by the operculum.
Conescharellina africana Cook, 1966
Figs 20E, 21B
Conescharellina africana Cook, 1966: 214, pl. 1 (fig. 2A-B), fig. 3.
Fig. 21. Scanning Electron Micrographs. A. Batopora nola sp. noy. Adapical view of colony,
note large adapical kenozooid. x90. B. Conescharellina africana Cook. Adapical view of
colony. Note adapical kenozooidal area surrounded by avicularia, and large hyperstomial
ovicell. x90,
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
Fig. 21
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
13
114 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
Stations SM 1, SM 16, SM 23, SM 41, SM 86.
Description
Colony very small (1,0-1,4 mm in diameter, 1,20-1,6 mm high) with
alternating whorls of six zooids. Adapical area of kenozooids and extrazooidal
tissue, surrounded by a circlet of eight to nine avicularia. Primary orifices with a
narrow antapically directed sinus, peristome developed laterally and antapically.
Frontal shield calcification reticulate, with large frontal septula. Avicularia
paired, lateral, mandibles short and rounded, orientated laterally and slung on
a complete bar. Occasionally an antapical avicularium, with antapically
orientated mandible present. Ovicells globular, very prominent, developed by
zooids of the third and fourth whorls late in astogeny, not present on proliferal
region zooids. Ovicell frontal wall with large, irregular pores.
Remarks
The ovicells are not present in very young colonies, but are unusual in that
they apparently develop later, on astogenetically early zooids only. C. africana
also differs from other species in having an adapical region of extrazooidal tissue
which is inferred to be the origin of rhizoids rather than distinct ‘rootlet pores’.
Distribution
C. africana was originally described from South Africa, at a depth of 101 m.
Trochosodon Canu & Bassler, 1927
Trochosodon Canu & Bassler, 1927: 11. Harmer, 1957: 744.
The species assigned to this genus differ very little from those placed in
Conescharellina, and require revision. Trochosodon has a generally more exten-
sive, extrazooidal adapical region than Conescharellina; the primary orifices are
not sinuate and the zooidal peristomes are elongated and tubular.
Trochosodon sp.
Fig. 20F
Material
Station SM 60.
Description
Colony very small (1,40 mm in diameter, 1,0 mm high); with twenty-four
zooids. Adapical region domed, with ‘rootlet pores’. Zooids in alternating series.
Avicularia absent. Ovicells prominent, present on zooids of the proliferal region.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIJRING NAUDE CRUISES Lis
Remarks
One colony only of this distinctive species has been found. It greatly
resembles unnamed specimens from Cape York, Queensland figured by Cook &
Lagaaij (1976: 329, pl. 1 fig. 2). Examination of several other samples in the
British Museum collections has revealed the presence of a complex of fossil and
Recent forms from the east African area, and until these are analysed this species
is left unnamed.
ORDER CTENOSTOMATA
The Ctenostomata are represented in these collections by one species only,
a contrast to the deep-water faunas of the North-eastern Atlantic (D’Hondt
197565; Hayward & Ryland 1978; Hayward 1978a, 19786) which have recently
been shown to include substantial numbers of new or little-known species.
Family Flustrellidridae Bassler, 1953
Flustrellidridae Bassler, 1953: 33.
Neoflustrellidra d’Hondt, 19756
Neoflustrellidra @ Hondt, 19756: 320.
?Neoflustrellidra sp.
Material
Station SM 86.
Description
Colony erect, branching profusely by dichotomy. Zooids elongated,
arranged in alternating biserial series, back-to-back. Orifices not noticeably
strengthened. Kenozooids absent.
Remarks
The material is fragmentary and shrunken. After treatment with trisodium
phosphate solution, the zooids can be seen to be very similar in character and
budding pattern to those of N. schopfi D’Hondt (1975b: 320, fig. 3), collected
from the North Atlantic in 4 779 m. The orifices, however, lack any prominent,
strengthened lower lip, and resemble those of Bockiella angusta Silén (see
Hayward 1978a: 219), another erect, deep water ctenostome reported from more
than 4000 m from the North-eastern Atlantic, and 135-700 m from the
western Pacific. Species of Bockiella usually have regularly disposed interzooidal
kenozooids (Cook 1964). Until further material becomes available this species
is left unnamed.
116 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ORDER CYCLOSTOMATA
Some Cyclostomata from east Africa, and including some species from
deep water, have recently been described by Brood (1976). Specimens are rare
in these collections, and most fragments are too worn for identification.
Family Tubuliporidae Johnston, 1838
Tubuliporidae Johnston, 1838: 247.
Idmidronea Canu & Bassler, 1920
Idmidronea Canu & Bassler, 1920: 784. Harmelin 1976: 181.
Idmidronea atlantica (Forbes, in Johnston, 1847)
Idmonea atlantica Forbes, in Johnston, 1847: 278.
Idmidronea atlantica: Harmelin, 1976: 182.
Material
Station SM 86.
Description
Colony erect, branching. Zooids arranged in alternating series of three to
four facing frontally. Zooid peristomes connate, curved frontally. Basal surface
of colony flat. Gonozooids frontal, slightly inflated, ooeciostome associated
with the nearest, most median autozooid aperture.
Remarks
The complex of forms usually included in /. atlantica has a wide geographical
and bathymetrical distribution, and some records have been revised by Harmelin
(1976). The specimens from South Africa consist of 3 fragments, 1 of which has
3 gonozooids.
Family Crisiidae Johnston, 1847
Crisiidae Johnston, 1847: 282.
Crisia Lamouroux, 1812
Crisia Lamouroux, 1812: 183. Ryland, 1967: 272.
Crisia aff. holdsworthi Busk, 1854
Crisia holdsworthi Busk, 1886: 6, pl. 3 (fig. 2).
Material
Station SM 60.
Remarks
This species is represented by several specimens in a good state of preserva-
tion. Zooids are very attenuated, and the orifices alternating and widely spaced.
No gonozooids are present, and further, fertile material 1s needed before a
certain identity with Busk’s species can be established.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES EY
DISCUSSION
General review of collection
The majority of species present in the Meiring Naude collections were
cheilostomes, of which the number of anascan and cribrimorph species (20) was
less than that of the ascophorans (28). The relatively low number of cyclo-
stomes (2) is not unusual, but in view of the increasing number of ctenostome
forms now known from deep water, it is surprising that only one species was
found in this survey (see D’Hondt 1975a, 19755; Hayward & Ryland 1978).
Relative abundance in terms of numbers of colonies is not easy to estimate,
except in the case of those species with very small, and therefore obviously
discrete, colonies. Setosellina and Batopora are good examples. In these
instances the numbers of anascan colonies (333) outweigh those of the Ascophora
(173). The presence of such minute colonies was established only after careful
examination of sediment samples. These species are very different in appearance
from most other forms of Bryozoa, and for this reason may be overlooked when
benthic samples are sorted. Further, because of their small size they are probably
not recovered by collecting techniques other than those specifically designed to
sample benthic substrata (see also Cook 1979). Harmelin (1977) has reported a
diverse fauna of nineteen species, including several rare, free-living or rooted
forms, from the Canary Islands region. The sample was collected accidentally
during a plankton haul at 200 m over a sandy substratum, and the bryozoans
were found only when the sediment was examined.
The shallow-water Bryozoa of South Africa have been reviewed by
O’ Donoghue (1957) and by Day et al. (1970), but require taxonomic revision
and redescription. Generally, the deeper waters off South Africa have not been
investigated before. Murray (1910) gave details of several expeditions to the
Indian Ocean which were made in the last century. Of these, only the Challenger
expedition (1872-6) and the Valdivia (Deutschen Tiefsee Expedition, 1898-9)
have produced published descriptions of the Bryozoa. None of the Challenger
stations from South Africa were deeper than 270 m (see Busk 1884: viii—xi), and
none of the Valdivia stations exceeded 318 m (Hasenbank 1932). Both
expeditions, however, made dredge hauls in very deep water from the South
Atlantic and Indian Oceans.
Some Bryozoa from deep sediments collected by the John -Murray off
Zanzibar, and a collection made off Durban by J. D. F. Gilchrist in 1903-4,
have been described by Cook (1966). Recently, D’Hondt & Redier (1977) have
’ described some Bryozoa from the Kerguelen Islands, from depths of 29 to 270 m.
The Cyclostomata of the Zanzibar area have been described by Brood (1976).
Colony form and environment
The correlation of bryozoan colony forms, or morphotypes, with environ-
mental parameters such as substratum, turbulence and rate of sedimentation
118 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
have been discussed by Lagaaij & Gautier (1965), Cook (1968), Labracherie
(1973), Harmelin (1976) and Brood (1976).
The significance of colony morphotypes in ecological analyses of faunas
depends on the degree to which mode of life (whether known or inferred) is
reflected in colony structure. Some forms are distinctive and have a high
correlation with certain environments (e.g. the lunulitiform and conescharellini-
form morphotypes). Others are capable of inhabiting several types of environ-
ment (e.g. the cellariiform morphotype), and have a lower correlation. In
addition, some species may display one morphotype early in astogeny and
another in later stages of growth. The colony morphotypes particularly asso-
ciated with sea-bottoms of mud, sand or foraminiferal ooze, where substrata
available for larval settlement are restricted, have been reviewed by Cook (1979).
In deep waters, turbulence and sedimentation rate are low, and substrata may
be limited to the sediment particles alone. Briefly, species may be adapted to
direct colonization of the sediments (primary fauna), or to general and/or
specific utilization of other substrata, such as hydroids, which are themselves
often primary colonizers (secondary fauna).
The morphotypes present in these collections fall into the following groups
(see also Table 1):
Membraniporiform (4 species): encrusting, unilaminar, often on stones. Except
for Cleidochasma protrusum, which in these collections has minute colonies
encrusting sand grains, none of the species showing this morphotype are
particularly adapted to either deep water or fine particled substrata.
Adeoniform and reteporiform (14 species): erect, rigid, branched, often bilaminar
and arising from a small encrusting base. Colonies of some of these species
originate from stones, but many have grown from flexible substrata such as
hydroids or other, jointed Bryozoa. Colonies of Tessaradoma, and the ‘reteporid’
species generally, often occur on this type of substratum and are typical
secondary fauna forms (Cook, 1968: 246).
Flustriform (3 species): erect, bilaminar, flexible, often anchored by rhizoids.
The presence of rooting systems enables these species to colonize a range of
habitats, but in deep water they may be part of either primary or secondary
faunas.
Cellulariiform and Cellariiform (17 species): erect, flexible, jointed, branched,
usually delicate and attached or anchored by rhizoids. Most of the species
typical of abyssal faunas have these colony morphotypes. In shallow waters they
are able to colonize unstable substrata, and it may be inferred that in deep water
they are also a major part of the primary fauna.
Conescharelliniform (7 species): small, conical or globular, anchored by one or
more rhizoids. This morphotype is typical of the primary fauna of fine sediments,
and is generally, although not exclusively, associated with deep water. Notocoryne
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 119
cervicornis is included among the conescharelliniform species, because of the
small size of its colonies.
Lunulitiform (3 species): cup-shaped, unilaminar, either free living and supported
by setiform avicularian mandibles, or anchored by basal rhizoids. These
colonies have the classical ‘sand-fauna’ morphotype and are exclusively part of
the primary fauna, although those with setiform avicularia are not generally
found in deep waters (cf. setoselliniform). The forms which have basal rhizoids
do not seem to have ‘cleaning’ setiform avicularia, a fact possibly related to the
flexibility of their attachment and to the lower sedimentation rates and turbulence
of deep waters.
Setoselliniform (3 species): discoid, very small, free living, supported or
stabilized by setiform avicularian mandibles. This morphotype is exclusively
associated with primary faunas, particularly of deep waters, and colonies are
often of the same order of magnitude as the surrounding sediments.
The classification of colony morphotype is, of necessity, occasionally
arbitrary. For example, Notocoryne cylindracea is here considered as a
cellariiform species, as is the fragment of Nellia sp., although both differ
markedly from Cellaria and related genera. Turbicellepora protensa has a very
unusual and interesting growth form (p. 98), but has been placed in the
reteporiform group, with which it appears to have functional similarities. Of the
30 species with morphotypes particularly associated with fine-particled sea-
bottoms, 25 are known or inferred to have rhizoid systems, and 3 have setiform
avicularian mandibles capable of stabilizing their very small colonies.
The sediments which have been examined (from stations SM 1, SM 16,
SM 23, SM 31, SM 32, SM 41, SM 53, SM 60, SM 61, SM 67, SM 69, SM 78,
SM 103, SM 109) vary considerably, both in the nature of the constituents and
in the range of particle size (Tables 1, 3). There is no apparent correlation
between sediment type and geographical or bathymetric distribution, or between
sediment type and abundance and diversity of bryozoans. For example, the
sediments at stations SM 31 and SM 61 consisted principally of very fine
foraminiferan ooze, with a particle size of less than 1,0 mm. At stations SM 32
and SM 60, there was a preponderance of larger benthic foraminifera, with sand
accreted tests, more than 5,0 mm in length or diameter. At station SM 41 there
was hardly any sand, and the foraminifera were larger than 5,0 mm, whereas at
SM 103 nearly all the sediment consisted of sand grains. Relatively large stones
(> 20 mm diameter) were present in the samples from several stations (SM 23,
. SM 67, SM 103, SM 109) from a broad depth range. Similarly, large fragments
(> 20 mm length) of coelenterate skeleton were abundant at stations SM 1,
SM 23 and SM 41. Significant quantities of brachiopod shell and echinoderm
test were present in sediments from stations SM 1, SM 41 and SM 60.
Generally, the abundance and diversity of bryozoans was highest at the two
shallowest stations (SM 16, 376-384 m, and SM 23, 400-450 m), but almost as
many species were present at station SM 41, from 880 m (Table 1).
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
120
a
OSS 1G I OE= Shere 6 29 Siete 7S te C Ley 1 Se SC STeIOL
I I I ID Ad OOfl 601 WS
g 8€ (4 vl Gl g ¢ Hq OW 088 Iv WS
I v) 9 ID dA 0¢8 19 WS
Y) €C I I I 9 € IT H OW 018-008 09 WS
I I I al d OSL 8L WS
to Si I I € ID HA OL T€ WS
¢ (4 I I cl Hd OSL-O€L ce WS
Vv ¢ I I I C ID dA OCL es WS
¢ Sc e I IL Eee ID HAA 889 LT WS
C 6V ty 9 Ss d 089 €OI WS
€ te I I I YS fa 099 69 WS
IL le C I I I ") Se my a. Oss 98 WS
8 8V CC I Sle ae, I Cc I (4 ID dH OSv-00r €c WS
Ol 69¢ Ol CCunO esc (|b ofl I Le coke th (OIL US ale = VStaee 9T WS
Ours Oly See ye eS ee
Sere Oe Clas ea Ree eg eS
soiseds soruojoo S 5 Be a > iS = : Sto Eh = = S = odiy/ozis w‘yideq uonrs
JOON JO'ON §& aoe. 8 S = < S 5 & < ‘ Soa JUSUTPSS
SI S 8 Ss ‘ = = a at iS S
Ses a =. a 8 8
g
W 0 92 OE OF FF OF ODO T T TT S §-— §_ sdk oydI0/W
"[ JIQUL Ul Se Poyisse[d ‘UOI}e}S YORS JOJ PoJeOIPUI SI 9ZIS puw 9dA} JUSUIPag ‘saloeds Jo Joquinu
ou} pue ‘so1oads [ev JO SOTUOJOO Jo JoquINU [e}0} OY} UII JOYIESO} ‘UOI}e}S YORd 3 SoIOodS YOvO JOJ pojSI] SI puNoJ saruojos Jo Joquinu oy], “YIdop
ZUISBOIOUI JO JOpiO Ul posueIIeE ore suOT}E}S odAyoYdIOW 0} SUIpIO.v SdnoJs Ul posuvIIE oe SaIseds OY], “SOTUOTOS 9]NUTUT JO AjISIOATP pue souRpUNnqY
¢ ATaV
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 12]
Zoogeographical and faunistic considerations
The bryozoan faunas of the outer continental shelf and slope, in most of
the world’s seas, are little known. Early systematic works rarely discriminate
between the slope faunas and those of the shallower shelf waters, or between the
slope and the abyssal depths beyond 2 000 m. However, it is becoming apparent
that the composition of slope and deep shelf bryozoan faunas, as with other
animal groups (Briggs 1974: 360), may differ markedly from those of both
shallower and deeper waters.
Recent interest in the bryozoan faunas of the continental slope between
200 and 2 000 m has been largely focused on the North-eastern Atlantic and the
Meiring Naude collections presented a valuable opportunity for comparison.
Such conclusions as have been reached in recent works are still tentative and
subject to modification as further data accumulate. The most significant result
of the present survey, namely the astonishing number of undescribed species, is
both an aid and a hindrance to current discussion. The works of D’Hondt (1974,
1975a, 19756, 1977) and others have shown that even in the well-studied North-
eastern Atlantic waters a significant proportion of new species may be expected
from samples collected along the continental slope. The complete lack of
exploration of the South African slope is demonstrated here by the discovery of
a quite unknown fauna. However, the preponderance of undescribed species
makes it difficult to assess their importance to current ideas, as no comment
may be made on their geographical and bathymetric ranges, beyond that
revealed by the survey.
A further problem is the relative paucity of information on the bryozoan
benthos of South African coastal waters, compared, for example, to those of
Europe and North America. It is essential to have a sound background in the
vertical and geographical distribution of coastal and shelf species before the
significance of deep water records may be considered. For example, from present
understanding of the vertical distribution of colony types, and of certain
taxonomic groupings, it seems unlikely that the species of Adeonella recorded
here reflect their actual bathymetric distributions within the series of samples
available. It is probable that all four species are here at the lower limit of their
vertical ranges. In considering the composition of slope faunas it is necessary
to be able to isolate different components, demonstrating which may be shelf
species, declining steadily with depth; which are perhaps truly abyssal species,
at the upper limits of their range; and which species represent the indigenous
slope fauna. For the most part this approach is not possible here, although some
information may be gleaned from the known distributions of the minority of
previously described species. It is perhaps permissible, also, for some of the new
species, to draw analogies with related species in better known regions.
In Table 4 the 22 previously described species are listed, together with their
known geographical and bathymetric ranges, in some cases taken from specimens
in the British Museum (Natural History). The bathymetric range of specimens
from the Meiring Naude stations which were collected alive is also given for
122 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 4
Geographical and bathymetric ranges for 22 species of Bryozoa.
Geographical Distribution
= s
s 2 Bros
: 5 Ss
Depth range in m < S 8 . 3
- Meiring oes = FA Ss 3 S
eS
Naude Previously = , - S = Z 8
living known 5 2 B° So See ss)
colonies A ff oo 89 eae
— 8-130 x Xx
D. umbellata (50-207) (x) 0)
S.roulei . 376-1 300 1 900-2 330 K
H. implicata 376-880 200-3 700 x
N. cylindracea ' — 144-270 x
L. inornata 1 000 135-270 Xx
E.. quadrata 376-680 50-1 668 x x
C. magna 680-700 1 900-4 850 x x x Xx
P. bicornis 688-1 200 469-3 500 x
F. philomela — 90-135 SK
F.marginata . ; — 90-270 x x
G. polymorpha 680 71-265 x
A. coralliformis — 270-750 x
B. submucronata . 800-810 567-1 158 x x
B. longicaulis . . 740 1 158-2 796 Xx
C. protrusum . . 400-450 10-18 4 <
S. hexagonalis 50 48 x
A. latirostris . 376-450 30-310 x x x
A. inarmata 720-810 732 4
B. murrayi 376-810 805 x
L. pyriformis . 376-688 310 x
C. africana . 376-880 101 x
Iatlanica +. 5 550 6-300 x x
comparison. Most of the small, setoselliniform, lunulitiform and conescharel-
liniform colonies are here reported from depths well within their known vertical
range (Heliodoma, Anoteropora inarmata and Batopora) or from deeper waters
(A. latirostris, Lacrimula and Conescharellina). Setosellina occurs from a very
wide range, slightly shallower than that reported before. Meiring Naude results
further strengthen the contention that these small animals are particularly
adapted to life on the soft, unconsolidated sediments of the slope, and that the
latter four genera may be restricted to a fairly narrow range of depths.
Discoporella umbellata is essentially a shallower-shelf species, although the
South African population, which differs in some characters from the typical
form, is known from deeper water than specimens from the Mediterranean and
North-eastern Atlantic (Table 4). D. umbellata is associated with coastal sandy
deposits, but the present material was dead and had been transported far
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 123
beyond its normal vertical limits. Several species occurred at depths greater than
their known range. In the case of Leiosalpinx inornata, Gigantopora polymorpha,
Smittina hexagonalis, and the shallower record of Cleidochasma protrusum
living colonies were collected, but several others were represented only by
fragments (Notocoryne cylindracea, Figularia philomela, Flustramorpha
marginata), suggesting that the records reflect transported debris. Both
Columnella magna and Bifaxaria longicaulis normally occur in deeper waters
than was sampled by the present survey.
Of the newly described species, few show any immediate evidence of
restricted vertical distributions: most occurred at more than one station, and
many were distributed over a considerable depth range. However, Escharoides
distincta was represented by fragments only at the two shallowest stations,
suggesting that it might prove to be a shelf species at the lower limit of its
distribution. Sertella bullata was likewise recorded only at the two shallowest
stations, and the two species of Reteporellina were recorded also at two stations,
at 400 m and 880 m. Much of the material of the latter two species was frag-
mentary; both of these genera are more usually associated with the outer shelf
(although slope species are known) and the deeper records, again, probably
represent transported material. The same comments may be applied to the two
species of Cellaria. Conversely, Turbicellopora protensa was collected as living
material from the same two stations, and this genus is most often found in
shallow coastal waters. The genus Notoplites is widespread around the world,
and in the North-eastern Atlantic is represented by several deep shelf and slope
species (Hayward & Ryland 1978).
The virtual absence of Ctenostomata has been remarked upon before. It
might be added here that, in the North-eastern Atlantic, significant numbers of
deep benthic ctenostomes become evident only below 1 000 m.
Table 1 shows the number of species recorded for each of the stations, and
exemplifies the usual decline in species diversity with depth. The unexpectedly
high number of species (18) recorded from station 41 includes many, discussed
above, which were apparently dead or recorded only as fragments. Only six
species (H. implicata, N. cervicornis, C. magna, T. protensa, B. nola and
C. africana) were represented by specimens which may be inferred to have been
alive when collected. It is interesting to note that the total fauna at each station
would have been far lower without the small, free-living or rooted, species
(Anoteropora, Batopora etc.). Species diversity in Bryozoa is, generally, largely a
function of the availability of hard substrata and, consequently, niche diversity
(Eggleston 1972). Yet, a very high proportion of this fauna was essentially
independent of hard substrata, except for the smallest particles.
On the basis of present knowledge it is likely that the Bryozoan fauna of the
continental slope of South Africa represents an admixture of shelf species, with
varying lower vertical limits, and a distinct component of slope species, whose
vertical ranges may or may not be completely encompassed by the range of
depths sampled here. But, with the exception of Batopora, Anoteropora,
124 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Lacrimula and Conescharellina, it is not possible to separate the two clearly until
further information becomes available.
The various limitations discussed above must be considered also when
discussing the geographical distribution of the species. The known geographical
ranges for the described species are given in Table 4. The first three species
listed, and Idmidronea atlantica, are reported for the first time remote from their
presently known centres of distribution, and represent interesting new records.
Four species, G. polymorpha, S. hexagonalis, A. coralliformis and C. africana,
are still known only from South African waters, and several others are pre-
viously known only from the South Indian Ocean (from Kerguelen, for example),
or from east Africa. Generally, the Table supports the opinion that the South
African marine fauna represents the western fringe of the Indo-West-Pacific
zoogeographical realm. Briggs (1974) summarizes earlier works which demon-
strate that the east South African fauna constitutes a distinct zoogeographical
province, largely influenced by the southward-flowing, warm Agulhas current,
and with a high degree of endemism. To a certain extent these collections support
this suggestion. Bryozoan faunas to the south are generally well known, with
considerable published data on the islands of the southern, cold-temperate
Indian Ocean, and the Southern Ocean generally; yet only six of the species in
this collection have been reported from these regions. To the north, Waters
(1909, 1910, 1913, 1914) reported on the Bryozoa of the Sudan, east Africa and
Zanzibar, but again none of the species described by him were found in this
survey. It has been emphasized above that these regions are still under-studied,
yet it might have been expected that a few of the species described by Waters
would have been found, especially considering the common factor of the
Agulhas current. Further research will no doubt result in broader geographical
distributions being established for many of the species described in this paper,
but it is probable that a significant proportion will prove to be endemic to this
region.
SUMMARY
A total of 51 species of Bryozoa has been found in a collection from 17
Meiring Naude stations, ranging in depth from 376 to 1 300 m. Nearly half the
species described, 23 in total, are considered to be new. In view of the large
number of hitherto undescribed forms found recently in the deeper shelf and
slope benthos of the North-eastern Atlantic, this high proportion of new forms
is not unexpected, and it is interesting that it is similar to the proportion
reported for other groups from the Meiring Naude collection (see Griffiths 1977;
Millard 1977; Kensley 1978).
The greatest diversity of bryozoans was found from 376 to 550 m, although
several species are inferred to have been transported from shallower waters.
Some deep-water forms (e.g. Setosellina roulei, Columnella magna and Bifaxaria
longicaulis) have previously been reported from much greater depths, but the
lower limits of bathymetric range of others (e.g. Leiosalpinx inornata, Cleido-
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 125
chasma protrusum and Conescharellina africana) have been considerably
extended by these collections. Specimens which were alive when collected have
provided valuable information on both early astogenetic stages and later
astogenetic changes of colonies (e.g. Tricellaria varia, Cellaria paradoxa and
Tessaradoma circella). Many colonies, particularly those capable of direct
colonization of fine sediments, also showed evidence of rhizoid systems for
anchorage. The demonstration of rhizoids in Anoteropora, Batopora and
Lacrimula allows stronger inferences to be made about the environmental
parameters of similarly constructed colonies over a wide range of time and space
(see also Cook & Lagaaij 1976). The discovery of a setoselliniform cribrimorph
species (nversiscaphos setifer) illustrates the remarkable similarity of adaptations
of unrelated genera which are a response to the ‘sand fauna’ environment. The
adaptations of growth form of Turbicellepora protensa are also very interesting,
although as yet less understood. The abundance of minute colonies is a direct
result of the detailed examination of bottom sediments, and these collections
have provided large numbers of some ‘rare’ species (e.g. Heliodoma implicata)
which have hitherto been known from a few colonies only. Relatively large
quantities of delicate, erect branching species (e.g. Bugulella australis and
Eupaxia quadrata) were also present, the last named being remarkable for its
brilliant red pigmentation, which persists in preserved specimens. It is possible
that the deeper shelf fauna of south-eastern Africa may prove to include a
significant proportion of endemic forms. Generally, however, the area appears
to constitute the extreme westerly limit of the Indo-West-Pacific faunal realm
(see also Clark 1977, but compare Millard 1978). As with the Hydroida (see
Millard 1977), however, a few of the Bryozoa have previously been reported
only from the North-eastern Atlantic (e.g. Setosellina and Heliodoma), and this
indicates both how much information has been gained from study of these
collections, and how much further work remains to be done on the deeper shelf
and slope faunas of the world’s seas.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We should like to thank Dr N. A. H. Millard and Dr P. A. Hulley (South
African Museum) for the opportunity to work on the Meiring Naude collections,
and Mr M. R. Fordy (University College of Swansea) and Mr P. J. Chimonides
(British Museum, Natural History) for the Scanning Electron Microscopy.
REFERENCES
BASSLER, R. S. 1935. Fossilium catalogus 1: Animalia; Part 67, Bryozoa: 1-229. ’s-Gravenhage:
W. Junk.
BASSLER, R. S. 1953. Bryozoa. In: Treatise on invertebrate paleontology. Moore, R. C. ed.
Part G: 1-253. New York: Geological Society of America.
BriacGs, J. C. 1974. Marine Zoogeography. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Broop, K. 1976. Cyclostomatous Bryozoa from the coastal waters of East Africa. Zoologica
Scr. 5: 277-300.
126 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Brown, D. A. 1952. The Tertiary Cheilostomatous Polyzoa of New Zealand. London: British
Museum (Nat. Hist.).
Busk, G. 1852. Catalogue of marine Polyzoa in the collection of the British Museum 1.
Cheilostomata (part). London: Trustees of the British Museum.
Busk, G. 1884. Report on the Polyzoa. Part 1. The Cheilostomata. Rep. scient. Results Voy.
Challenger Zool. 10 (30): i—xxiii, 1-216.
Busk, G. 1886. Report on the Polyzoa. Part 2. The Cyclostomata, Ctenostomata and
Pedicellinea. Rep. scient. Results Voy. Challenger Zool. 17 (50): i—viti, 1-47.
CaLveET, L. 1906. Note préliminaire sur les Bryozoaires recueillis par les expéditions du
‘Travailleur’ (1881-1882) et du ‘Talisman’ (1883). Bull. Mus. natn. Hist. nat., Paris 12 (3):
154-166.
CALVET, L. 1907. Bryozoaires. Expéd. Sci. ‘Travailleur’ et ‘Talisman’ 1880-1883 8: 355-495.
CANU, F. & BASSLER, R. S. 1917. A synopsis of American Early Tertiary Cheilostome Bryozoa.
Bull. U.S. natn. Mus. 96: 1-87.
CANU, F. & BASSLER, R. S. 1920. North American early Tertiary Bryozoa. Bull. U.S. natn.
Mus. 106: 1-879 (2 vols).
CANU, F. & BASSLER, R. S. 1923. North American Later Tertiary and Quartenary Bryozoa.
Bull. U.S. natn. Mus. 125: 1-302.
CANU, F. & BASSLER, R. S. 1927. Classification of the Cheilostomatous Bryozoa. Proc. U.S.
natn. Mus. 69 Art. 14: 1-42.
CANu, F. & BASSLER, R. S. 1929. Bryozoa of the Philippine Region. Bull. U.S. natn. Mus.
9 (100): ii—xi, 1-685.
CHEETHAM, A. H. 1966. Cheilostomatous Polyzoa from the Upper Bracklesham Beds (Eocene)
of Sussex. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 13 (1): 1-115.
CHEETHAM, A. H. & SANDBERG, P. A. 1964. Quaternary Bryozoa from Louisiana Mudlumps.
J. Paleont. 38 (6): 1013-1046.
CLARK, A. M. 1977. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 4. Echinoderms.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 73: 133-147.
Cook, P. L. 1963. Observations on live lunulitiform zoaria of Polyzoa. Cah. Biol. mar. 4:
407-413.
Cook, P. L. 1964a. Polyzoa from west Africa. Notes on the genera Hippoporina Neviani,
Hippoporella Canu, Cleidochasma Harmer and Hippoporidra Canu & Bassler. Bull. Br.
Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.) 12 (1): 1-35.
Cook, P. L. 1964b. Notes on the Flustrellidridae (Polyzoa, Ctenostomata). Ann. Mag. nat.
Hist. (13) 7: 279-300.
Cook, P. L. 1965a. Notes on the Cupuladriidae (Polyzoa, Anasca). Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist.
(Zool.) 13 (5): 151-187.
Cook, P. L. 1965b. Polyzoa from west Africa. The Cupuladriidae (Cheilostomata, Anasca).
Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.) 13 (6): 189-227.
Cook, P. L. 1966. Some ‘sand fauna’ Polyzoa (Bryozoa) from Eastern Africa and the Northern
Indian Ocean. Cah. Biol. mar. 7: 207-223.
Cook, P. L. 1968. Bryozoa (Polyzoa) from the coasts of tropical West Africa. Atlantide Rep.
10: 115-262.
Cook, P. L. 1973a. Preliminary notes on the ontogeny of the frontal body wall in the Adeonidae
and Adeonellidae (Bryozoa, Cheilostomata). Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.) 25 (6):
243-263.
Cook, P. L. 1973b. Settlement and early colony development in some Cheilostomata. In:
Larwoop, G. P. ed. Living and Fossil Bryozoa. London & New York: Academic Press.
Cook, P. L. 1979. The potential of minute bryozoan colonies in analysis of deep sea sediments.
In: Gray, J., Boucot, A. J. & Berry, W. B. N. eds. Communities of the past.
Stroudsburg: Dowden, Hutchinson & Ross. (In press.)
Cook, P. L. & CHIMONIDES, P. J. 1978. Observations on living colonies of Selenaria (Bryozoa,
Cheilostomata). Part 1. Cah. Biol. mar. 19 (2): 147-158.
Cook, P. L. & LAGAAW, R. 1976. Some Tertiary and Recent conescharelliniform Bryozoa.
Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.) 29 (6): 317-376.
Day, J. H., Fiecp, J. G. & PENRITH, M. J. 1970. The benthic fauna and fishes of False Bay,
South Africa. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 39: 1-108.
DEFRANCE, J. L. M. 1823. Dictionnaire des Sciences Naturelles 27. Paris.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES i 7)
EGGLESTON, D. 1972. Factors influencing the distribution of sub-littoral ectoprocts off the
south of the Isle of Man (Irish Sea). J. nat. Hist. 6: 247-260.
ELuis, J. & SOLANDER, D. 1786. The natural history of many curious and uncommon zoophytes.
London: Benjamin White and Son.
FLEMING, J. 1828. A history of British animals. Edinburgh: Bell & Bradfute.
GOLDSTEIN, J. R. Y. 1882. Some new species of Bryozoa from the Marion Islands, with notes
on Bicellaria grandis. Trans. Proc. R. Soc. Vict. 18: 39-46.
Gray, J. E. 1848. List of the specimens of British animals in the collection of the British Museum.
Part 1. Centroniae, & radiated animals. London: Trustees of the British Museum.
Gray, J. E. 1872. On Flustra marginata of Krauss and an allied species, forming a new Genus
(Flustramorpha). ... Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (4) 10: 167-169.
Greoory, J. W. 1893. On the British Palaeogene Bryozoa. Trans. zool. Soc. Lond. 13: 219-279.
GRIFFITHS, C. 1977. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 6. Amphipoda.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 74: 105-123.
HAKANSSON, E. 1973. Mode of growth of the Cupuladriidae (Bryozoa, Cheilostomata).
In: LARwoop, G. P. ed. Living and Fossil Bryozoa. London & New York: Academic Press.
HARMELIN, J.-G. 1976. Le sous-ordre des Tubuliporina (Bryozoaires Cyclostomes) en
Mediteranée, écologie et systématique. Mém. Inst. océanogr. Monaco 10: 1-326.
HARMELIN, J.-G. 1977. Bryozoaires du banc de la Conception (nord de Canaries). Campagnes
Cineca I du ‘Jean-Charcot’. Bull. Mus. natn. Hist. nat., Paris (3) Zool. 341: 1057-1074.
Harmer, S. F. 1923. On Cellularine and other Polyzoa. J. Linn. Soc. 35: 293-361.
Harmer, S. F. 1926. The Polyzoa of the ‘Siboga’ Expedition. Part 2. Cheilostomata, Anasca.
Siboga Exped. 28b: 181-501.
Harmer, S. F. 1934. The Polyzoa of the ‘Siboga’ Expedition. Part 3. Cheilostomata,
Ascophora 1, Family Reteporidae. Siboga Exped. 28c: 502-640.
HARMER, S. F. 1957. The Polyzoa of the ‘Siboga’ Expedition. Part 4. Cheilostomata
Ascophora. . . . Siboga Exped. 28d: 641-1147.
HASENBANK, W. 1932. Bryozoen der Deutschen Tiefsee Expedition. Dt. Tief. Exped. 21 (2):
319-380.
Hastincs, A. B. 1943. Polyzoa (Bryozoa) 1. Scrupocellariide, Epistomiidae, Faciminariidae,
Bicellariellidae, Aetidae, Scrupariidae. ‘Discovery’ Rep. 22: 301-510.
HAYWARD, P. J. 1977. The morphology of Euginoma vermiformis Jullien (Bryozoa Cheilosto-
mata). J. nat. Hist. 12: 97-106.
HAYWARD, P. J. 1978a. Bryozoa from the West European continental shelf. J. zool. Lond.
184: 207-224.
HAyYwarbD, P. J. 19785. Two new species of Ctenostomata (Bryozoa) from the Norwegian Sea.
Sarsia 63 (3): 159-162.
HAYWARD, P. J. & RYLAND, J. S. 1978. Bryozoa from the Bay of Biscay and Western
Approaches. J. mar. biol. Ass. U.K. 58: 143-159.
HAYWARD, P. J. & RYLAND, J. S. 1979. British Ascophoran Bryozoans. Synopses of the British
Fauna n.s. 14. London: Academic Press for the Linnean Society.
Hincks, T. 1880. A history of the British marine Polyzoa. 2 vols. London: Van Voorst.
Hincks, T. 1881. Contributions towards a general History of the Marine Polyzoa, IV. Foreign
Membraniporina. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (5) 7: 147-161.
Honpt, J.-L. D’. 1974. Bryozoaires récoltés par la ‘Thalassa’ dans le golfe de Gascogne
(campagnes de 1968 a 1972). Cah. Biol. mar. 15: 27-50.
HonptT, J.-L. D’. 1975a. Bryozoaires Cténostomes et Cheilostomes . . . de la campagnes
océanographique Biacores du ‘Jean-Charcot’. Bull. Mus. natn. Hist. nat., Paris (3) Zool.
209: 553-600.
Honpt, J.-L. D’. 19755. Bryozoaires cténostomes bathyaux et abyssaux de |’Atlantique du
: Nord. Docums Lab. Géol. Fac. Sci. Lyon HS. 3 (2): 311-333.
HonptT, J.-L. D’. 1977. Bryozoaires récoltés en 1972 et 1973 par les campagnes ‘Polymede IT’
en Mediterranée occidentale et ‘Thalassa’ 1973 dans le Golfe de Gascogne (Cheilostomes
et Cyclostomes). Cah. Biol. mar. 18: 59-70.
Honpt, J.-L. D’ & RepieR, L. 1977. Bryozoaires récoltés lors des campagnes d’été 1972 et
1974 aux iles Kerguelen .... CNFRA 42: 215-236.
JOHNSTON, G. 1838. A history of British zoophytes. Edinburgh, London & Dublin.
JOHNSTON, G. 1847. A history of British zoophytes. 2nd. ed 2 vols. London: John van Voorst.
128 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
JULLIEN, J. 1886. Les Costulidées, nouvelle famille de Bryozoaires. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 11:
601-620.
JULLIEN, J. 1888. Bryozoaires. Mission scient. Cap. Horn 1882-1883 6 (1): 1-92.
JULLIEN, J. 1903. Bryozoaires provenant des campagnes de I’Hirondelle (1886-1888). Résult.
Camp. scient. Prince Albert I 23: 1-188.
KENSLEY, B. 1978. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 7. Isopoda.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 74: 125-157.
Krauss, C. F. F. 1837. Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Corallineen und Zoophyten der Siidsee nebst
Abbildungen der neuen Arten. Stuttgart.
LABRACHERIE, M. 1973. Functional morphology and habitat of Bryozoa in the Eocene of the
North Aquitaine Basin. In; Larwoop, G. P. ed. Living and Fossil Bryozoa. London &
New York: Academic Press.
LAGAAIJ, R. 1952. The Pliocene Bryozoa of the Low Countries. Meded. geol. Sticht. (C) 5 (5):
1-233.
LAGAAL, R. 1963a. Cupuladria canariensis (Busk)— portrait of a Bryozoan. Palaeontology 6 (1):
172-217.
LAGAAI, R. 1963b. New additions to the bryozoan fauna of the Gulf of Mexico. Pubs. Inst.
mar. Sci. Univ. Tex. 9: 162-236.
LAGAAIJ, R. & Cook, P. L. 1973. Some Tertiary to Recent Bryozoa. In: HALLAM, A. Atlas of
Palaeobiogeography. Amsterdam, London & New York.: Elsevier.
LAGAAI, R. & GAUTIER, Y. V. 1965. Bryozoan assemblages from marine sediments of the
Rhone delta, France. Micropaleontology 11 (1): 39-S8.
LAMOUROUX, J. V. F. 1812. Extrait d’un mémoire sur la classification des Polypiers corallingénes
non enti¢rement pierreux. Nouy. Bull. Scient. Soc. Phil. 3: 181-188.
LEVINSEN, G. M. R. 1909. Morphological and Systematic Studies on the Cheilostomatous
Bryozoa. Copenhagen.
LEVINSEN, G. M. R. 1914. Bryozoa, Endoprocta, Pterobranchia og Enteropneusta
[of Greenland]. Meddr Gronland 23: 547-634.
Louw, E. 1977. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 1. Station data,
1975, 1976. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 72: 147-159.
MAPLESTONE, C. M. 1899. Further descriptions of the Tertiary Polyzoa of Victoria, II. Proc. R.
Soc. Vict. n.s. 12 (1): 1-13.
Maturo, F. & Scuopr, T. J. M. 1968. Ectoproct and Entoproct type material. Postilla 120:
2-95.
MILLARD, N. A. H. 1977. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 3.
Hydroida. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 73: 105-131.
MILLARD, N. A. H. 1978. The geographical distribution of southern African hydroids. Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 74: 159-200.
MILNE-EDWarbDs, H. 1836. Histoire des Polypes. In: LAMARCK, J. B. P. A. ed. Histoire naturelle
des Animaux sans Vertebres. 2nd ed. 2. Paris.
MoyAano, H. 1969. Bryozoa colectados por la Expedicion Antarctica Chilena 1964-65. III.
Familia Cellariidae Hincks, 1880. Boln. Soc. Biol. Concepcion 41: 41-77.
Moyano, H. 1974. Briozoos marinhos chilenos II, Briozoos de Chile austral I. Gayana Zool.
30: 3-41.
Murray, J. 1910. On the depth and marine deposits of the Indian Ocean... . Reps Percy
Sladen Exped. Indian Ocean 2. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. Zool. 13 (24): 355-396.
Norman, A. M. 1869. Last report on dredging among the Shetland Islands. Polyzoa. Rep. Br.
Ass. Advmt. Sci. 1868: 303-312.
O’Donocuug, C. H. 1924. The Bryozoa (Polyzoa) collected by the S.A. ‘Pickle’. Rep. Fish.
mar. biol. Sury. Un. S. Afr. 3 Spec. Rep. 10: 1-63.
O’DonoGuuE, C. H. 1957. Some South African Bryozoa. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 35: 71-95.
O’DonocuuE, C. H. & DE WATTEVILLE, D. E. 1944. Additional notes on Bryozoa from South
Africa. Ann. Natal Mus. 10 (3): 407-432.
ORBIGNY, A. D’. 1852. Paléontologie Francaises, Terrains Crétacés, V, Bryozoaires: 185-492.
Paris: Masson.
OsBurn, R. C. 1952. Bryozoa of the Pacific Coast of America, 2. Cheilostomata Ascophora.
Allan Hancock Pacif. Exped. 14: 271-611.
PRENANT, M. & BoBIN, G. 1966. Bryozoaires. Part 2. Chilostomes Anasca. Faune Fr. 68: 1-647.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 129
Reuss, A. E. 1867. Die Bryozoen, Anthozoen und Spongarien des braunen Jura von Balin bei
Krakau. Denkschr. Akad. Wiss. Wien math.—naturw. Cl. 27 (1): 1-26.
RIDLey, S. O. 1881. Account of the Zoological Collections ... of H.M.S. ‘Alert’... . Part V.
Polyzoa. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1881: 44-61.
RYLAND, J. S. 1963. Systematic and biological studies on Polyzoa (Bryozoa) from western
Norway. Sarsia 14: 1-59.
RYLAND, J. S. 1967. Crisiidae from western Norway. Sarsia 29: 269-282.
RYLAND, J. S. 1969. A nomenclatural index to ‘A History of the British Marine Polyzoa’ by
T. Hincks (1880). Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.) 17 (6): 207-260.
RYLAND, J. S. 1970. Bryozoans. London: Hutchinson University Library.
RYLAND, J. S. & HAywarp, P. J. 1977. British Anascan Bryozoans. Synopses of the British
Fauna n.s. 10. London: Academic Press for the Linnean Society.
SILEN, L. 1947. Conescharellinidae (Bryozoa Gymnolaemata) collected by Prof. Dr. Sixten
Bock’s Expedition to Japan and the Bonin Islands, 1914. Ark. Zool. 39A (9): 1-61.
SILEN, L. 1951. Bryozoa: Rep. Swed. deep Sea Exped. 2. Zool. (5): 63-69.
SmiiT, F. A. 1868. Kritisk forteckning 6fver Skandinaviens Hafs-Bryozoer, III. Ofvers. K.
Vetensk Akad. Forh. 24: 279-429.
THORNELY, L. R. 1905. Report on the Polyzoa. In: W. A. Herdman ed. Rep. Pearl Oyster
Fisheries, Gulf of Manaar (4) Suppl. Rep. 26: 107-130.
VERRILL, A. E. 1879. Brief contributions to zoology from the museum of Yale College. No. 42.
Notice of recent additions to the marine fauna of the eastern coast of North America,
No. 5, Polyzoa. Amer. J. Sci. (3) 17: 472-474.
Wass, R. E. & Yoo, J. J. 1975. Distribution and taxonomy of some Recent catenicelliform
Bryozoa from Australia. Docums Lab. Géol. Fac. Sci. Lyon HS. 3 (2): 281-297.
Waters, A. W. 1888. Supplementary report on the Polyzoa.... Rep. scient. Results Voy.
Challenger Zool. 79: 1-41.
Waters, A. W. 1909. Reports on the Marine Biology of the Sudanese Red Sea.. ., XII.
The Bryozoa, Part I, Cheilostomata. J. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) 31: 123-181.
Waters, A. W. 1910. Reports on the Marine Biology of the Sudanese Red Sea .. ., XII.
The Bryozoa, Part II, Cyclostomata, Ctenostomata and Endoprocta. J. Linn. Soc.
(Zool.) 31: 231-256.
Waters, A. W. 1913. The Marine Fauna of British East Africa and Zanzibar. . ., Bryozoa—
Cheilostomata. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1913: 458-537.
Waters, A. W. 1914. The Marine Fauna of British East Africa and Zanzibar . . ., Bryozoa—
Cyclostomata, Ctenostomata and Endoprocta. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1914: 831-858.
ABBREVIATIONS
Lz length of zooid Iz width of zooid
Lap length of aperture
Lop length of opesia lop width of opesia
Ls length of seta
Lbrz length of brooding zooid Ibrz width of brooding zooid
Lov length of ovicell lov width of ovicell
Lav length of avicularium lav width of avicularium
Lvic.av length of vicarious avicularium :
Lr length of rhizoid Ir width of rhizoid
Lk length of kenozooid Ik width of kenozooid
130 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
APPENDIX 1
Meiring Naude stations which produced Bryozoa
Station Co-ordinates Depth, m Date
og of |
SM 1 DT OS: Sessile 688 23.519
SM 16 2IBSi 32°44,6’ 376-384 D5
SM 23 27°44,4’ 32°42,8' 400-450 2635.75
SM 31 28°4,5’ 32°42,8’ 740 27.5015
SM 32 2336.2 32°43;5° 730-750 21-5415
SM 41 28°41,7’ 32°34,5’ 880 29S
SM 53 26-5 1,14 Son 12s5, 720 18.5.76
SM 60 27 936) SY) Sy 800-810 19°5:76
SM 61 2h 10;3% BP Sol 820 195576
SM 67 27°14,8’ 32°54,6’ 680-700 20.5.76
SM 69 QT 1222: 32°56’ 660 20.5.76
SM 78 27 Slko* 32750! 750 DiEDS16
SM 85 Des9-5) 32°40,8’ 550 22-5516
SM 86 25955" 32°40,8’ 550 22.5:16
SM 92 28°14,5’ 32°40,6’ - 650-720 23:5.76
SM 103 2337: 32°34’ 680 24.5.76
SM 107 23318 32°38,4’ 1 000-1 200 20-16
SM 109 28°41’ 3236;8- 1 300 2525416
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific namé must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15SA
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nuceula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955S: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid- tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
~(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
' (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
P. J. HAYWARD
&
P. L. COOK
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 9
BRYOZOA
_ ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE ‘TOWN
~
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of a illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; at sp
‘As described (Haughton & Broom oe
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927) .
Note: no comma separating name and: year
Pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, p. —H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHerR, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Carus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19605. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 79 Band
September 1979 September
Part 5 . Deel
A REDESCRIPTION OF THE KELP CURLER
_ AMPITHOE HUMERALIS (CRUSTACEA, AMPHIPODA)
FROM SOUTH AFRICA
AND ITS RELATIONSHIP TO MACROPISTHOPOUS
By
CHARLES L. GRIFFITHS
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.—p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.-p.i.), 7(1-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 81 5
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
A REDESCRIPTION OF THE KELP CURLER AMPITHOE HUMERALIS
(CRUSTACEA, AMPHIPODA) FROM SOUTH AFRICA
AND ITS RELATIONSHIP TO MACROPISTHOPOUS
By
CHARLES L. GRIFFITHS
Zoology Department, University of Cape Town
(With 3 figures)
[MS. accepted 24 July 1979]
ABSTRACT
Ampithoe humeralis Stimpson, to date known only from west North America, is redescribed
and figured from material collected from the west coast of the Cape Peninsula, South Africa.
Individuals of this species appear to co-operate in the construction of nests made from the
folded fronds of living kelp plants and to consume the walls of these nests while progressively
extending them back along the fronds. The relationship between Ampithoe and Macropisthopous
K. H. Barnard 1916, is discussed and Macropisthopous reduced to a junior synonym of
Ampithoe.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction q : ‘ eto
Description of material . me US
Notes on ecology. : ew 3
Relationships. : ; ha Si
Acknowledgements . : ee ley,
References . ; 3 ; sft Leh A
INTRODUCTION
Amphipods of the family Ampithoidae are usually large-bodied, con-
spicuous species normally associated with algae in the intertidal or shallow
sublittoral zones. Most members of the group are tubicolous, spinning soft
parchment-like tubes amongst the holdfasts and fronds of various algae
(J. L. Barnard 1965). Exceptions include Pseudoamphithoides incurvaria (Just,
1977) (formerly Amphyllodomus—Just’s 1977 genus being synonymous with that
of Ortiz 1976), which cuts oval sections from algal fronds and glues these
together to form a ‘mobile-home’, and the kelp curler, Ampithoe humeralis,
which constructs nests from the curled blades of the giant kelp Macrocystis
(Jones 1971) or lives in Macrocystis holdfasts (J. L. Barnard 1969a).
Ampithoe humeralis has to date been recorded only from the west coast of
North America, where it may on occasion reach sufficient densities significantly
to damage the Macrocystis beds (North 1971). The range of A. humeralis is
131
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 79 (5), 1979: 131-138, 3 figs.
132 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
extended herein to include the west coast of South Africa, where it is associated
with a different species of kelp—Ecklonia maxima—and appears to have
somewhat modified its habits accordingly.
A redescription from this material has highlighted the similarity between
A. humeralis and the monospecific genus Macropisthopous K. H. Barnard and
necessitated a re-examination of the taxonomic status of that genus.
DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL
Ampithoe humeralis Stimpson, 1864
Figs 1-3
Amphithoe humeralis Stimpson, 1864: 156. Calman, 1898: 271, pl. 33 (fig. 4).
Ampithoe humeralis: Stebbing, 1906: 636. J. L. Barnard, 1954: 29; 1965: 7, figs 2-3; 1969a: 83.
Description (of male, 15 mm)
Head length of first two pereon segments, rostrum absent, ocular lobes
rounded, eyes oval, red; antenna | length of pereon, articles 1 and 2 subequal,
sparsely setose, article 3 a quarter size of 2, accessory flagellum absent, flagellum
35-articulate; antenna 2 approximately 60 per cent length of 1, sparsely setose,
gland cone small, acute, articles 4 and 5 of peduncle equal in size, flagellum
16-articulate.
Upper lip apically rounded, distally densely setulose; article 3 of mandibular
palp shorter than 2, bearing eight terminal pectinate setae, primary cutting edge
of mandible of eight teeth, lacinia mobilis with seven teeth, spine row of thirteen
spines, molar triturative; lower lip with outer lobes deeply notched, outer
portion considerably the larger; inner plate of maxilla 1 with one apical plumose
seta, outer plate with ten strong terminal spines ranging from thick and smooth
laterally to slender and strongly comb-like medially, palp exceeding outer plate,
biarticulate, article 2 with six apical spines and one pectinate seta; plates of
maxilla 2 equal in length, inner more slender than outer and setose medially as
well as apically; maxilliped bearing stout 4-articulate palp, outer plate extending
to centre of article 3 of palp, thirteen short stout serrate spines along medial
margin, seven pectinate setae on lateral margin, inner plate with numerous
medial and apical setae but no spines.
Pereon dorsally smooth, coxae 1-4 progressively longer, oval, ventrally
rounded, a few setae at posterodistal corner; coxa 5 slightly deeper than 4, with
broad posterior lobe, 6 bilobed, 7 semicircular; gnathopods 1 and 2 of similar
structure, 2 slightly the larger and heavier, article 2 not lobed, 5 slightly lobed
in gnathopod 1, more strongly in 2, strongly setose posteriorly, article 6 hardly
wider than 5, slightly chelate, margin of palm minutely crenulate, defined by a
small spine largely concealed by dense pectinate setae along palm and posterior
margin, dactyl almost twice length of palm, bearing closely appressed serrations;
article 2 of pereiopods 1 and 2 greatly expanded and filled with glandular
A REDESCRIPTION OF AMPITHOE HUMERALIS 133
material, article 4 broadly lobed anteriorly; pereiopod 3 shorter than | and 2,
article 2 subcircular, posterior margin of article 6 bearing seven short stout
spines, dactyl short, strongly curved; pereiopod 4 longer than 3, article 2
broadly oval, none of distal segments greatly expanded, article 4 somewhat
longer than 5 or 6, dactyl moderately curved; pereiopod 5 slightly longer than 4
but of similar structure, none of segments greatly enlarged or expanded.
Pleon and urosome dorsally smooth; pleonal epimera rounded with slight
lateral ridges; peduncle of uropod 1 with stout interramal spine about 25 per
cent length of rami, laterodorsal margin of peduncle with four short spines,
mediodorsal margin with seven small spines, outer ramus slightly the shorter,
with two dorsal and two apical spines, inner ramus narrower, with one dorsal
and four apical spines; uropod 2 extending as far as 1, peduncle with one lateral
and one apical spine on each dorsal margin, outer ramus with four short dorsal
and three apical spines, inner ramus slightly the longer, with four dorsal and
four apical spines; uropod 3 extending slightly beyond 1 and 2, peduncle stout
with a few dorsal and apical setae, outer ramus somewhat less than half length
of peduncle, dorsally setulose, bearing two large strongly recurved apical hooks,
inner ramus slightly shorter, broadly oval, distally truncated and setose with one
small spine; telson semicircular, two small plumose setae on each margin and a
small spine and plumose seta at each distal corner.
Variation
Females are very similar to males except for presence of brood-plates. The
largest individual recorded, a female of 19,5 mm, had flagellum of antenna 1
40-articulate, of antenna 2 20-articulate, while the smallest juvenile, of 6 mm,
had flagellum of antenna | 18-articulate, of antenna 2 8-articulate.
Material
136 individuals from Oudekraal (33°58’S 17°21’E). Collected from the
fronds of Ecklonia maxima at 5 m depth, 29 May 1978. Representative material
has been deposited in the collections of the South African Museum (SAM-—
A13660) and the University of Cape Town (CP 838A).
Distribution
Pacific North America (Puget Sound to Guadalupe Island), west coast of
South Africa. Intertidal to approximately 80 m, usually associated with kelp
species, rarely with other algae.
NOTES ON ECOLOGY
The nests of South African Ampithoe humeralis are formed by folding a
secondary blade of the frond of the large kelp Ecklonia maxima longitudinally
134 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
a ill PHO
Fig. 1. Ampithoe humeralis Stimpson, 1864.
Male, 15 mm. Lateral aspect and sketch of nest formed from frond of Ecklonia maxima.
and sealing together the adjoining surfaces some 10-20 mm above the fold.
A tubular chamber is thus formed along the middle of the blade, the marginal
portions of which extend freely. The two intact dwellings examined were
constructed from fronds of 70 and 90 mm total width and the enclosed areas
measured 55 x 10 and 80 x 20 mm respectively. The larger chamber contained
a tightly-packed colony of 121 individuals of all sizes (the smaller chamber was
preserved together with loose individuals and its population could not be
accurately assessed). The interior of both chambers was strongly eroded,
especially around the distal margins where the walls were paper-thin. The long,
tattered streamers of frond adjacent to both chambers (Fig. 1) clearly indicate
that the nests are initially formed at the tip of the blades and progressively
extended backwards as the occupants feed upon their walls. The method of
chamber formation is unknown but the rigidity of the blade and turbulence
encountered at the collection site would indicate that a considerable communal
effort must be required. The sealant used to form the chamber is invisible along
most of its length, where the walls are closely appressed, but emerges as a
triangular area of transparent mucous-like material, containing distinct trans-
verse fibres, where it stretches between the diverging walls of the blade
proximally.
A REDESCRIPTION OF AMPITHOE HUMERALIS 135
Fig. 2. Ampithoe humeralis Stimpson, 1864.
Male, 15 mm. A. Mandible. B. Lower lip. C. Maxilla 1, with tips of spines enlarged.
D. Maxilla 2. E. Maxilliped. F—G. Gnathopods 1, 2. H-I. Articles 6 and 7 of pereiopods 3, 5.
136 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 3. Ampithoe humeralis Stimpson, 1864.
Male, 15 mm. A. Urosome, lateral aspect. B. Uropod 3, medial view. C. Telson.
Macropisthopous stebbingi K. H. Barnard, 1916.
Male, 5,5 mm. D-E. Articles 5-7 of gnathopods 1, 2. F. Pereiopod 5. G. Uropod 3, medial
view.
A REDESCRIPTION OF AMPITHOE HUMERALIS 137
RELATIONSHIPS
The material described here agrees in almost every detail with that illus-
trated by J. L. Barnard (1965) and there can be little doubt as to its identification.
Ampithoe humeralis is unique in Ampithoe for having the male gnathopod 2
almost as small as | (J. L. Barnard 1965) and there is thus a temptation when
running it through a generic key (J. L. Barnard 19695) to allocate it to Macro-
pisthopous. This genus, a monospecific one erected by K. H. Barnard (1916) for
M. stebbingi from South Africa, is distinguished from Ampithoe primarily by the
feebly chelate gnathopods (the enlarged pereiopod 5 cannot be regarded as
generically significant—e.g. U. platypoda in Urothoe, various Orchestia species).
A re-examination of M. stebbingi (Fig. 3) shows that the gnathopods of this
species are very similar to those of A. humeralis (Fig. 2), the original sketches of
K. H. Barnard (1916) being somewhat misleading in this regard.
On the basis of the above evidence it appears that a generic distinction
between M. stebbingi and A. humeralis cannot be justified. Moreover, although
the weakly chelate gnathopods of these two species do distinguish them from
those of other Ampithoe species, this condition appears to be merely the extreme
of a wide range of gnathopod types occurring in the genus. For this reason a
transfer of A. humeralis to Macropisthopous would not be justified and hence
Macropisthopous must be incorporated into Ampithoe. A. stebbingi (K. H.
Barnard, 1916) would then be distinguished from other Ampithoe species by the
enlarged oar-like pereiopod 5 (Fig. 3F) and from all except A. humeralis by the
condition of the gnathopods.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
My thanks to Mr G. S. Dieckmann, who collected the material of Ampithoe
humeralis and brought it to my attention. Mrs S. Hardman kindly typed the
manuscript.
REFERENCES
BARNARD, J. L. 1954. Marine Amphipoda of Oregon. Ore. St. Monogr. Stud. Zool. 8: 1-103.
BARNARD, J. L. 1965. Marine Amphipoda of the family Ampithoidae from southern California.
Proc. U.S. natn. Mus. 118: 1-46.
BARNARD, J. L. 1969a. Gammaridean Amphipoda of the rocky intertidal of California:
Monterey Bay to La Jolla. Bull. U.S. natn. Mus. 258: 1-230.
BARNARD, J. L. 1969b. The families and genera of marine gammaridean Amphipoda. Bull.
U.S. natn. Mus. 271: 1-535.
BARNARD, K. H. 1916. Contributions to the crustacean fauna of South Africa. 5. The Amphi-
poda. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 15: 105-302.
CALMAN, W. T. 1898. On a collection of Crustacea from Puget Sound. Ann. New York Acad.
Sci. 11: 259-292.
JONES, L. G. 1971. Studies on selected small herbivorous invertebrates inhabiting Macrocystis
canopies and holdfasts in southern California kelp beds. In: NorTH, W. J. ed. The biology
of giant kelp beds (Macrocystis) in California. Nova Hedwigia (Suppl.) 32: 1-600.
Just, J. 1977. Amphyllodomus incurvaria gen. et sp. n. (Crustacea, Amphipoda), a remarkable
leaf-cutting amphithoid from the marine shallows of Barbados. Zool. Scr. 6: 229-232.
138 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
NortTH, W. J. ed. 1971. The biology of giant kelp beds (Macrocystis) in California. Nova
Hedwigia (Suppl.) 32: 1-600.
OrtTIz, M. 1976. Un nuevo genero y una nueva especie de anfipodi de aguas Cubanas
(Amphipoda, Gammaridea, Ampithoidae). Ciencies La Habana (8) 27: 3-12.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1906. Amphipoda 1. Gammaridea. Das Tierreich 21: 1-806.
STIMPSON, W. 1864. Descriptions of new species of marine invertebra from Puget Sound,
collected by the naturalists of the North-west Boundary Commission, A. H. Campbell,
Esq., Commissioner. Proc. Acad. nat. Sci. Philad. 16: 153-165.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
‘An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name ‘(and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
~ not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
T. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10). .
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
CHARLES L. GRIFFITHS
A REDESCRIPTION OF THE KELP CURLER
AMPITHOE HUMERALIS (CRUSTACEA,
AMPHIPODA) FROM SOUTH AFRICA
AND ITS RELATIONSHIP TO MACROPISTHOPOUS
{
- VOLUME 79 PART 6 DECEMBER 1979
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN J
; MUSEUM |f
CAPE TOWN >
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; ee a
‘As described (Haughton & Broom eee
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927) .
Note: no comma separating name etd year
Pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
Scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. —H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvaL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Gans (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19605. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 79 Band
December 1979 Desember
Part 6 Deel
CALCAREOUS NANNOFOSSILS AND PLANKTIC
FORAMINIFERS IN TERTIARY LIMESTONES,
NATAL AND EASTERN CAPE,
SOUTH AFRICA
By
WILLIAM G. SIESSER
&
GREGORY A. MILES
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1-3, 5-8), 3(1-2, 4-5, 8, t.-p.i.), 5(1-3, 5, 7-9),
6(1, t.-p.i.), 711-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 15(4—-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 83 1
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
CALCAREOUS NANNOFOSSILS AND PLANKTIC FORAMINIFERS
IN TERTIARY LIMESTONES, NATAL AND EASTERN CAPE,
SOUTH AFRICA
By
WILLIAM G. SIESSER*
South African Museum, Cape Town
&
GREGORY A. MILES
Exxon Company, U.S.A. Houston
(With 12 figures)
[MS. accepted 28 August 1979]
ABSTRACT
Sixteen taxa of Palaeogene calcareous nannofossils and seven of planktic foraminifers
have been identified in limestones from the eastern Cape Province. Four taxa of Neogene
calcareous nannofossils and nine of planktic foraminifers have been found in limestones from
Zululand.
The assemblages indicate that the limestones at Birbury are lower Eocene, and suggest a
probable Eocene age for the limestones in the upper quarry at Needs Camp. Nannofossils and
planktic foraminifers confirm that the limestones north of the Umfolozi River in Zululand are
upper Miocene—lower Pliocene.
The Birbury and Zululand dates reflect the mid Paleocene—-early Eocene and late Miocene—
early Pliocene transgressions round South Africa. The Tertiary limestones at Needs Camp
could have been deposited during either the early or the late Eocene transgression.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction : ‘ P ; : , 2140
Birbury : : ; : : : a 14
Calcareous nannofossils . : . 144
Planktic foraminifers : : . 144
Age . ‘ E : ‘ : ~~ 144
Needs Camp : ; 3 : : ss AS
Calcareous nannofossils . P ie SAS
Age. : : : ‘ : 4. 450
Zululand . : ; : ‘ : S50
Calcareous nannofossils . : ; 152
Planktic foraminifers ’ : eee Wel ie)
APS. f : ; : ‘ sie JE
Tertiary sea-level movements . . . 154
Acknowledgements . : t : 8
References . 3 5 ‘ : ; ; ST.
* Present address: Department of Geology, Vanderbilt University, Nashville, Tennessee,
31235.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 79 (6), 1979: 139-158, 12 figs.
139
140 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
Tertiary limestones are exposed intermittently along the coast of the Cape
Province from at least Saldanha Bay in the west to East London in the east. A
second belt of limestones crops out intermittently from near the Umfolozi River
in Natal Province (‘Zululand’) northward into Mozambique (Fig. 1). ;
These limestones are not well dated, despite the efforts of numerous
investigators. Age assignments of certain outcrops in the eastern Cape and
/
aes Maputo
/
/SWAZI-
1 Q otakeyiew
72S eMTOTI PAN
MKUZEe SY
MORRISVALE®
ee u LOT 178 ©—_- 9°
7
UMKWELANE HILL 5@ HAS ZDRAIN
THE JUNGLE _
Richards
NATAL Bay
CAPE NEEDS CAMPe ast London
BIRBURYe
Port Elizabeth
26
Fig. 1. Location map showing the outcrop localities of the marine Tertiary limestones
mentioned in the text.
CALCAREOUS NANNOFOSSILS AND PLANKTIC FORAMINIFERS 141
Natal are especially contentious. Most earlier workers relied on molluscs,
echinoderms, benthic foraminifers or sharks’ teeth as the bases for their age
assignments. The first three groups of animals are strongly facies controlled and
are not particularly good for narrow age determinations. Nor are sharks’ teeth
very suitable, since their stratigraphic usefulness suffers from a lack of precisely
known age ranges for different species.
Planktic foraminifers and calcareous nannofossils are the two groups most
widely used for high-resolution Tertiary biostratigraphy today. They have
several advantageous characteristics: (i) they are very abundant in marine
sediments, (ii) their evolution has been rapid, which allows establishment of
many narrow and discrete zones on the basis of morphotypes, and (111) as floating
organisms they are widely distributed and thus are useful for interregional
correlations. Planktic foraminifers from some of the outcrops described in this
study have been investigated in recent years, and several of the former age
assignments have already been modified (especially in Zululand). Calcareous
nannofossils have not previously been reported from any of these rocks.
The purposes of this paper are (i) to record the nannofossils and planktic
foraminifers present in these Tertiary limestones, (ii) to assess the ages of the
rocks, based on the nannofossils and foraminifers, and (iii) to comment on
Tertiary sea-level movements round South Africa in the light of the ages now
assigned to the limestones.
BIRBURY
Only cursory remarks on the lithology of the Birbury section (Fig. 1) have
previously been published. Figure 2 shows a stratigraphic section measured by
one of us (WGS) at Birbury. The section is exposed in an abandoned quarry
near the Birbury homestead. It consists of 1 to 1,5 m of calcareous conglomerate
and coarse calcarenite, overlain by about 3 m of fine to medium calcarenite
which becomes increasingly nodular and ‘chalky’ up section. The limestones
contain scattered sharks’ teeth and mollusc, echinoid and bryozoan fragments.
The general lithology of this outcrop is not similar to the Tertiary Alexandria
Formation extensively exposed to the west (see measured sections in Siesser
1972), nor to the Needs Camp exposures to the east.
Chapman (1930) examined ten thin sections of the Birbury limestones
which were sent to him by Haughton in 1925. Chapman noted the presence of
*. . . beautifully preserved and abundant tests of Discocyclina pratti and
D. varians . . ... Chapman (1930) assigned the rocks to the upper Eocene on the
basis of the more abundant of the two species, D. pratti, which he stated
*. . . is a well-recognized Bartonian species’. He also mentioned that the less
numerous D. varians seemed to indicate a slightly lower horizon (upper Lutetian,
i.e. middle Eocene). More recent investigations have extended the age range of
D. pratti, and it is now known to occur from the Paleocene through the Eocene
(D. Salmon, pers. comm. 1978).
Nevertheless, an Eocene age seemed evident and was widely accepted until
142 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
4m
Mostly pinkish grey, poorly consolidated, chalky fine calcarenite.
= Irregularly shaped, well indurated calcarenite nodules common to
abundant. Sparse fossils.
3m
= Well consolidated fine calcarenite. Abundant nodules as above.
Poorly consolidated fine calcarenite. Sparse nodules as above.
_ Pale greenish yellow, poorly consolidated fine calcarenite.
Scattered coarse quartz grains. Macrofossil fragments abundant.
— Pale greenish yellow, poorly consolidated fine calcarenite.
Macrofossil fragments abundant: fish teeth, echinoids,
2m bivalves, bryozoans.
- Pale greenish yellow, quartzose medium calcarenite.
Pale greenish yellow, well consolidated calcareous conglomerate.
— Granules and pebbles of quartz, quartzite and siltstone abundant.
Sparse fossils.
im
— Yellowish grey, well consolidated glauconitic coarse calcarenite
Granules of quartzite and siltstone common. Sparse fossils.
Yellowish grey, poorly consolidated medium. calcarenite.
Sparse granules. Poorly exposed.
Fig. 2. Stratigraphic section of lower Eocene limestones at Birbury, eastern Cape Province,
33°28'18’S 26°55’30’E. Base of the section is about 205 m above sea-level. Colours are from
the Geological Society of America Rock-Color Chart.
Bourdon & Magnier (1969) reported their investigation of the foraminifers at
Birbury. Largely on the basis of test preservation, they concluded that two
different assemblages are present at Birbury: (1) an abundant, but poorly
preserved Eocene fauna represented by at least twenty taxa, and (ii) a sparse,
but well-preserved Miocene fauna represented by five species of benthic fora-
minifers. They, therefore, assigned the rocks to the Miocene, suggesting that the
CALCAREOUS NANNOFOSSILS AND PLANKTIC FORAMINIFERS 143
diverse and abundant Eocene foraminifers were reworked (but correctly noted
that such a mixture was ‘quite remarkable’).
Their Miocene age assignment seems to have been uncritically accepted by
most interested workers in South Africa, even though Bourdon & Magnier’s
five ‘Miocene’ species were not conclusively identified (all were listed as ‘cf’).
Moreover, even if the identifications of these five species had been definite, it
seems somewhat presumptuous to assign a Miocene age on the basis of such
long-ranging forms as Cibicides lobatulus (Eocene to Holocene) and Lagena
gibbera (? Eocene to Holocene). Finally, Bourdon & Magnier (1969: 123) point
out that their colleagues at the Paris Museum examined sharks’ teeth from the
same samples and assigned them to the lower Eocene.
Fig. 3. Quarry face at Birbury. Pebble conglomerate at bottom of
photograph. Hammer lies near top of fossiliferous calcarenite.
Nodular, ‘chalky’ zone at top of photograph.
144 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Calcareous nannofossils (Fig. 4)
Very rare, poorly preserved nannofossils occur throughout the section at
Birbury. However, only a poorly consolidated fossiliferous layer about 2 m
above the base contains nannofossils in sufficient numbers and with adequate
preservation to justify study. Species present include:
Braarudosphaera bigelowi (Gran & Braarud)
Chiasmolithus solitus (Bramlette & Sullivan)
Chiasmolithus sp.
Coccolithus eopelagicus (Bramlette & Riedel)
Coccolithus formosus (Kamptner)
Cruciplacolithus sp.
Cycloccolithus gammation Bramlette & Sullivan
Discoaster sp.
? Lophodolithus nascens Bramlette & Sullivan
Pontosphaera spp.
Reticulofenestra coenura (Reinhardt)
Transversopontis pulcher (Deflandre)
Zygodiscus plectopons Bramlette & Sullivan
Zygrhablithus bijugatus (Deflandre)
Planktic foraminifers (Figs 4-6)
A sparse population of planktic foraminifers is found throughout the
section, but the best assemblage occurs in a fossiliferous layer about 2,5 m above
the base. The following species were identified in the series of samples collected
at Birbury:
Acarinina esnaensis (LeRoy)
A. nitida (Martin)
A. primitiva (Finlay)
A. pseudotopilensis Subbotina
A. soldadoensis soldadoensis (Bronnimann)
Morozovella subbotinae (Morozova)
Subbotina eocaena (Giimbel)
Age
The nannofossil assemblage is clearly Palaeogene. Cruciplacolithus sp.,
Cyclococcolithus gammation, Lophodolithus nascens and Zygodiscus plectopons
all range from Paleocene to Eocene, and Coccolithus formosus, Reticulofenestra
coenura and Zyerhablithus bijugatus range from Eocene to Oligocene. Trans-
versopontis pulcher is probably restricted to the Eocene, and Chiasmolithus
solitus occurs only in the lower and middle Eocene. Braarudosphaera bigelowi
and Coccolithus eopelagicus range throughout the Tertiary.
The planktic foraminifers also indicate a Palaeogene age. Acarinina
esnaensis, A. nitida, A. pseudotopilensis and A. soldadoensis soldadoensis all range
CALCAREOUS NANNOFOSSILS AND PLANKTIC FORAMINIFERS
F ' G
Fig. 4. Calcareous nannofossils and planktic foraminifers from Birbury (lower Eocene).
A. Chiasmolithus sp., plane polarized light, scale = 6u. B. Coccolithus formosus (right)
and Pontosphaera sp. (left), crossed nicols, scale = 8u. C. Transversopontis pulcher,
crossed nicols, scale = 5u. D. Acarinina esnaensis, spiral view, SAM-K5542.
E-G. A. nitida. E. Spiral view, SAM-K5543. F. Umbilical view, SAM—-K5544.
G. Side view, SAM-K5544. Scales D-G = 200z.
145
146 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
E pee. F
A SSL
Fig. 5. Planktic foraminifers from Birbury (lower Eocene). A-—C. Acarinina primitiva.
A. Spiral view, SAM-K5545. B. Umbilical view, SAM-K5546. C. Side view, SAM-K5547.
D. A. pseudotopilensis, spiral view, SAM—K5548. E-F. A. soldadoensis soldadoensis. E. Spiral
view, SAM-K5549. F. Umbilical view, SAM—K5550. Scales = 200p.
CALCAREOUS NANNOFOSSILS AND PLANKTIC FORAMINIFERS 147
E F
bee
ea ae |
Fig. 6. Planktic foraminifers from Birbury (lower Eocene). A-B. Morozovella subbotinae.
A. Spiral view, SAM-—K5551. B. Umbilical view, SAM—K5551. C—E. Subbotina eocaena.
C. Spiral view, SAM—K5552. D-E. Umbilical views, SAM—K5553, SAM-K5554. F. Acarinina
soldadoensis soldadoensis, umbilical view, SAM—K5555. Scales = 200p.
—————EEE_eai
148 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
from upper Paleocene to lower Eocene, A. primitiva ranges from upper Paleocene
to middle Eocene, Subbotina eocaena from lower Eocene to lower Oligocene, and
Morozovella subbotinae is restricted to the lower Eocene.
It is difficult to believe that these diverse Palaeogene assemblages of
calcareous nannofossils and planktic foraminifers are entirely the result of
reworking, especially since not one strictly Neogene nannofossil or foraminifer
was found in the section. The section is, therefore, assigned to the lower Eocene,
based on the overlapping ranges of various species of planktic foraminifers and
calcareous nannofossils. The presence of M. subbotinae corroborates the age
and allows assignment to Berggren & Van Couvering’s (1974) planktic fora-
miniferal Zones P6 to P8 (54,5 to 50 m.y.B.P.; years from Hardenbol &
Berggren 1978).
NEEDS CAMP
Marine limestones crop out in two quarries near Needs Camp (Fig. 1). The
lower quarry contains limestones, which, on the basis of calcareous nannofossils,
are probably upper Campanian to lower Maestrichtian (Siesser, unpublished
data). The upper quarry is about 17 m above the lower quarry, and the contact
between the limestone units in the two quarries is not exposed.
The exposed section in the upper quarry is about 4 m thick; it is a hard,
recrystallized, coarse calcarenite which becomes more flaggy towards the top
(Fig. 7). The calcarenite is mostly yellowish-grey 5Y 7/3 (GSA Rock Color
Chart) on fresh surfaces but weathers to a darker grey. A thin section of the
calcarenite shows it is a skeletal grainstone, rich in the remains of molluscs,
cirripeds, bryozoans and coralline algae, cemented by microspar (Siesser 1971).
Large Perna valves are conspicuous in these rocks. Additional notes on the
lithology of the upper quarry are found in Lock (1973).
_ The limestones in the upper quarry were originally correlated with the
Alexandria Formation (Bullen-Newton 1913; Du Toit 1954). An Eocene age was
proposed for part of the Alexandria Formation, based on the identification of
upper Eocene foraminifers (Chapman 1930) and sharks’ teeth (Haughton 1925)
at Birbury. Haughton (1969), therefore, suggested an Eocene age for the upper
quarry in his textbook on South African geology. King (1972) considered both
quarries to be Upper Cretaceous, based on fossil and geomorphic evidence.
Lock (1973) reviewed the literature in detail with regard to the dating of the
upper quarry. He concluded, again, that these rocks are Tertiary, but did not
assign them to a specific series. Lock (pers. comm. 1977) believes the upper
quarry could be as yo..ng as Miocene, based on the presence of Carcharodon
angustidens. (This shark is, however, now known to range from middle Eocene
to Pliocene (Jubb & Gardiner 1975).)
Calcareous nannofossils (Fig. 8)
Most of the rocks in the upper quarry are too recrystallized to yield
identifiable nannofossils; only a few heavily overgrown species (Coccolithus
CALCAREOUS NANNOFOSSILS AND PLANKTIC FORAMINIFERS 149
Fig. 7. Calcarenite in the upper quarry at Needs Camp, eastern
Cape Province. Probably Eocene.
eopelagicus, Cyclococcolithus gammation and Toweius sp.) were found in a soft
layer about 1,75 above the base of the exposure.
A slightly better assemblage was found in a calcareous siltstone from a pit
dug below the exposed base of the outcrop. This sample was collected and made
available by B. E. Lock. The sample contains a mixture of poorly to moderately
preserved Upper Cretaceous and Tertiary species. Extensive reworking of the
nannofossil-rich underlying beds is obvious, since Upper Cretaceous specimens
outnumber Tertiary specimens by a ratio of about 10 to 1 in the siltstone. The
following Tertiary species are present:
Braarudosphaera bigelowi (Gran & Braarud)
Chiasmolithus cf. C. solitus (Bramlette & Sullivan)
Coccolithus eopelagicus (Bramlette & Riedel)
150 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A
——s B | ene |
Fig. 8. Calcareous nannofossils from Needs Camp upper quarry (probably Eocene).
A. Cycloccolithus gammation, crossed nicols, scale = 3p. B. Chiasmolithus solitus,
plane polarized light, scale = Su. C. Micula staurophora (Gardet) Stradner (reworked
from Upper Cretaceous), crossed nicols, scale = 3p.
C. cf. C. formosus (Kamptner)
Cyclococcolithus gammation Bramlette & Sullivan
? Cyclicargolithus floridanus (Roth & Hay)
Reticulofenestra coenura (Reinhardt)
? Zygrhablithus bijugatus (Deflandre)
No identifiable planktic foraminifers were found in the samples.
Age
An unequivocal age cannot be assigned because of the obvious reworking
and the questionable identification of several species. Nevertheless, the overall
assemblage is clearly Palaeogene (Eocene—Oligocene) (see Birbury p. 144 for the
age ranges of these species). The age is probably Eocene. Cyclococcolithus
gammation is considered by most (but not all) nannofossil workers to be limited
to the Eocene; Toweius sp. is not considered to range above the lower Eocene
(Bukry 1973; Gartner 1977); and Chiasmolithus solitus is restricted to the lower
and middle Eocene (Gartner 1977).
ZULULAND
Scattered outcrops of Tertiary limestones occur in north-eastern Natal
(‘Zululand’), from the Umfolozi River northward to the Mozambique border
and beyond. The best-known exposures are at Uloa, Sapolwana, Warners Drain,
Lot U-178, Umkwelane Hill and The Jungle (Fig. 1). Detailed studies of these
outcrops have been made by King (1953 et seq.) and Frankel (1960 et seq.).
Lesser-known exposures occur at or near Mtoti Pan, Lakeview, Morrisvale and
Mkuze. The last two are previously unreported Tertiary localities. Their
co-ordinates are: Morrisvale—27°40'36”S 32°22'03”E; Mkuze—27°33’50"S
32°15'25”E. B. du Cann (pers. comm. 1976) believes the Zululand limestones
may reach their thickest development (about 15 m) at Lakeview; Truswell
(1977), however, has reported up to 60 m of the limestones at an unspecified
CALCAREOUS NANNOFOSSILS AND PLANKTIC FORAMINIFERS 151
locality in Zululand. In general, these rocks consist of a basal nodular limestone
which rests on a planed Cretaceous surface. The nodular limestone contains
phosphatized pebbles of Cretaceous siltstone and is intensely iron-stained at
some localities. Reworked Eocene foraminifers and Cretaceous ammonites have
also been found in this unit (Frankel 1968; King 1970). The basal unit is not
everywhere present, but does occur at Uloa, where it is overlain by an unbedded
calcirudite (“Pecten bed’) (Fig. 9). The Pecten bed is a richly fossiliferous unit
which has yielded over 100 species of macrofossils and 45 species of microfossils
(King 1970). The fossil assemblage is dominated by the abundant Aeqguipecten
uloa King. The Pecten bed is the oldest unit exposed at some localities, but is
always overlain by bedded, upward-fining calcarenites (Frankel (1966) gives a
detailed description of the lithology of the Uloa section).
Fig. 9. Pecten calcirudite at Uloa (upper Miocene to lower
Pliocene). Hammer lies above nannofossil-bearing zone.
152 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The stratigraphic position of these outcrops has been the subject of con-
siderable discussion (see Stapleton (1977) for a review). Briefly, King (1953 et
seq.) believes the basal and Pecten beds are lower Miocene, based on macro- and
microfossil evidence. He states that an unconformity separates the lower
Miocene unit from the overlying calcarenites, which he dates as Pliocene on the
basis of mollusc fragments. Frankel (1968) prefers a middle or upper Miocene
to Pliocene position for these limestones, based on sharks’ teeth and foraminifers.
He recognizes intra-formational channelling of the Pecten bed, but not a major
hiatus.
Much of the controversy concerning the age of these outcrops resulted from
the use of fossils which are not closely age-diagnostic. Two recent papers
described assemblages of planktic foraminifers which may have settled the
question. Maud & Orr (1975) reported a stratigraphic sequence in boreholes at
Richards Bay that is the lithologic equivalent of the Uloa—Sapolwana sequence.
The Richards Bay strata consist of a mollusc-fragment coquina (containing
ferruginous Cretaceous siltstone pebbles at its base) overlain by quartzose
calcarenite. The lowermost portion of the calcarenite consists of well-bedded
coarse sand, whereas higher up the calcarenite is cross-bedded. This sequence
unconformably overlies Cretaceous and Paleocene rocks and has a maximum
thickness of 5 to 6 m in the Richards Bay area. A good assemblage of upper
Miocene benthic and planktic foraminifers is found in the calcarenite (Maud &
Orr 1975). The foraminiferal assemblage in the coquina is apparently not as
age-diagnostic, although Maud & Orr (1975) feel the similarities between the
calcarenite and coquina assemblages are sufficient to place the ato in the
upper Miocene also.
Stapleton (1977) found an assemblage of thirteen species of planktic
foraminifers in a sample collected at the base of the Uloa Pecten bed. He
concluded that its age is latest Miocene, or at the Miocene—Pliocene boundary.
He reassessed published information on the planktic foraminifers in the over-
lying calcarenites and concluded that they could be little younger than the
Pecten bed, and are probably of nearly the same age.
Calcareous nannofossils (Fig. 10)
Samples examined from Sapolwana, Warners Drain, Umkwelane Hill, The
Jungle, Mkuze and Mtoti Pan were barren of nannofossils. Samples from
Lakeview, Morrisvale and Lot U-178 contain rare to sparse, poorly preserved
specimens of Reticulofenestra pseudoumbilica (Gartner). A soft pocket in the
Pecten bed just south of the railway line at Uloa yielded a sparse, but moderately
well-preserved assemblage including Coccolithus pelagicus (Wallich), Discoaster
surculus Martini & Bramlette, Discoaster sp. and Reticulofenestra pseudoumbilica.
Planktic foraminifers (Figs 10-12).
The only samples containing identifiable planktic foraminifers are those
from Lakeview, Lot U-178 and Uloa. Globigerinella aequilateralis (Brady) and
CALCAREOUS NANNOFOSSILS AND PLANKTIC FORAMINIFERS 153
F eae eee | G [ake vel
Fig. 10. A—C. Calcareous nannofossils from Morrisvale (A) and Uloa (Pecten bed)
(B & C), upper Miocene-lower Pliocene. A. Reticulofenestra pseudoumbilica, crossed
nicols, scale = 3u. B. Discoaster surculus, plane polarized light, scale = 8p.
C. Reticulofenestra pseudoumbilica, crossed nicols, scale = 3p.
D-G. Planktic foraminifers from Uloa (Pecten bed). Scales = 200u. D-E. Globigerina
cf. G. praedigitata. D. Spiral view, SAM-K5556. E. Side view, SAM-—K5556.
F-G. Globigerinella aequilateralis. F. Spiral view, SAM-K5557. G. Side view,
SAM-KS5558.
154 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Globigerinoides obliquus extremus Bolli & Bermudez were found at Lakeview
and G. trilobus (Reuss) at Lot U-178. The Pecten bed at Uloa yielded a better
assemblage, including: |
Globigerina cf. G. praedigitata Parker (single specimen)
Globigerinella aequilateralis (Brady)
Globigerinoides conglobatus (Brady)
G. obliquus extremus Bolli & Bermudez
G. trilobus (Reuss)
Globoquadrina altispira altispira (Cushman & Jarvis)
G. altispira globosa Bolli
Neogloboquadrina humerosa (Takayanagi & Saito)
Orbulina universa d’Orbigny
This assemblage is indicative of warm-temperate water.
Age
The calcareous nannofossils and planktic foraminifers in these rocks
strongly support the stratigraphic position assigned to them by Maud & Orr
(1975) and Stapleton (1977), i.e. upper Miocene to lower Pliocene.
The calcareous nannofossil Reticulofenestra pseudoumbilica ranges from
middle Miocene to lower Pliocene; Discoaster surculus ranges from upper
Miocene to upper Pliocene. Overlapping age ranges of these two species indicate
that the Pecten bed at Uloa is upper Miocene to lower Pliocene. Furthermore,
the Pecten bed can be placed in Martini’s (1971) calcareous nannofossil Zones
NN 11-NN 15 (9,5 to 3,0 m.y.B.P.; years from Vail et al. (1977)).
The planktic foraminiferal assemblage also indicates an upper Miocene to
Pliocene assignment. A Pliocene age may be suggested by the presence of
Globigerinella aequilateralis and Neogloboquadrina humerosa, since these species
are substantially more abundant in the Pliocene than in the Miocene, and thus
are more likely to be encountered in sparse Pliocene, rather than in sparse
Miocene, samples. However, this is very tenuous ‘evidence’, and only the
conservative range of upper Miocene-lower Pliocene is assigned at this time.
TERTIARY SEA-LEVEL MOVEMENTS
The firmly dated limestones at Birbury (lower Eocene) and in Zululand
(upper Miocene-lower Pliocene) and the tentatively dated limestones at Needs
Camp (Eocene) provide evidence as to the timing of sea-level movements round
the south and east coasts of South Africa.
Siesser & Dingle (1979) presented a generalized scenario of Tertiary sea-
level movements round southern Africa, based on evidence from continental
shelf and on-shore deposits. They suggested that a transgression began in mid
Paleocene times and continued into the early Eocene. A middle Eocene regression
was followed by another transgression in the late Eocene (see also Siesser 1977).
CALCAREOUS NANNOFOSSILS AND PLANKTIC FORAMINIFERS 155
E | oaceaa tant F ‘tesla dae
Fig. 11. Planktic foraminifers from Uloa (Pecten bed) (A, C-F) and Lakeview (B), upper
Miocene-lower Pliocene. A. Globigerinoides conglobatus, spiral view, SAM-—K5559.
B. G. obliquus extremus, umbilical view, SAM—K5560. C-D. G. trilobus. C. Spiral view,
SAM-K5561. D. Umbilical view, SAM-K5562. E-F. Globoquadrina altispira globosa.
E. Spiral view, SAM-K5563. F. Umbilical view, SAM-K5563. Scales = 200p.
156 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The early Eocene transgression is recorded on-shore by the outcrops at
Birbury. The Needs Camp limestones can be dated only as probably Eocene;
thus it cannot yet be suggested whether they were deposited during the early or
the late Eocene transgression.
Other evidence presented by Siesser & Dingle (1979) indicates that, after a
long Oligocene-early Miocene regression, the seas began to move shoreward
again in middle Miocene time. This transgression probably reached its greatest
extent in the late Miocene-early Pliocene, as represented by the sequence of
marine limestones in Zululand.
C
Ee reeeeeeer cs)
Fig. 12. Planktic foraminifers from Uloa (Pecten bed), upper Miocene-lower Pliocene.
A-B. Neogloboquadrina humerosa. A. Spiral view, SAM-K5564. B. Umbilical view, SAM-—
K5565. C. Orbulina universa, SAM-K5566. Scales = 200p.
CALCAREOUS NANNOFOSSILS AND PLANKTIC FORAMINIFERS 57
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This work began while the senior author was a member of the Marine
Geoscience Group, University of Cape Town, and was completed after he
joined the South African Museum. Both organizations are thanked for their
support. The senior author also wishes to thank the Council for Scientific and
Industrial Research and the University of Cape Town for research grants which
made the work possible.
Dr H. C. Klinger directed one of us (WGS) to previously unreported
Tertiary outcrops in Zululand (Morrisvale and Mkuze). His assistance is
gratefully acknowledged. Scanning electron microscopy of the foraminifers was
funded by Exxon Company, U.S.A.
REFERENCES
BERGGREN, W. A. & VAN COUVERING, J. A. 1974. Biostratigraphy, geochronology and
paleoclimatology of the last 15 million years in marine and continental sequences.
Paleogeogr., Paleoclimat., Paleoecol. 16: 1-216.
Bourbon, M. & MAGNIER, PH. 1969. Notes on the Tertiary fossils at Birbury, Cape Province.
Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 72: 123-125.
Bukry, D. 1973. Coccolith stratigraphy, Eastern Equatorial Pacific, Leg 16 Deep Sea Drilling
Project. In: VAN ANDEL, T. H., HEATH, G. R., ef al., Initial Reports of the Deep Sea
Drilling Project 16: 653-711. Washington: United States Government Printing Office.
BULLEN-NEWTON, R. 1913. On some Kainozoic shells from South Africa. Rec. Albany Mus.
2EBiS=352.
CHAPMAN, F. 1930. On a foraminiferal limestone of Upper Eocene age from the Alexandria
Formation, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 28: 291-296.
Du Torr, A. L. 1954. The geology of South Africa. 3rd ed. Edinburgh: Oliver & Boyd.
FRANKEL, J. J. 1960. The geology along the Umfolozi River, south of Mtubatuba, Zululand.
Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 63: 231-252.
FRANKEL, J. J. 1966. The basal rocks of the Tertiary at Uloa, Zululand, South Africa. Geol.
Mag. 103: 214-230.
FRANKEL, J. J. 1968. Tertiary sediments in the lower Umfolosi River Valley, Zululand. Trans.
geol. Soc. S. Afr. 71: 1135-1146.
_ GARTNER, S. 1977. Nannofossils and biostratigraphy : an overview. Earth Sci. Rev. 13: 227-250.
HARDENBOL, J. & BERGGREN, W. A. 1978. A new Paleogene numerical time scale. Jn:
CoHEE, G. V., GLAESSNER, M. F. & HEDBERG, H. D. eds. Contributions to the Geological
time scale. Studies in geology 6: 213-234. Tulsa: American Association of Petroleum
Geologists.
HaucGuton, S. H. 1925. The Tertiary deposits of the south-eastern districts of the Cape
Province. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 28: 27-32.
HAuGurton, S. H. 1969. Geological history of southern Africa. Cape Town. Geological Society
of South Africa.
JusBB, R. A. & GARDINER, B. G. 1975. A preliminary catalogue of identifiable fossil fish
material from southern Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 67: 381-440.
Kina, L. C. 1953. A Miocene fauna from Zululand. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 56: 59-91.
Kina, L. C. 1970. Uloa revisited: a review of the essential data from this classic locality and a
statement of Tertiary history of the Zululand coastal area. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 73:
151-157.
KING, L. C. 1972. Geomorphic significance of the Late Cretaceous limestones at Needs Camp,
near East London. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 75: 1-3.
Lock, B. E. 1973. Tertiary limestones at Needs Camp, near East London. Trans. geol. Soc.
S. Afr. 76: 1-5.
158 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
MarTINI, E. 1971. Standard Tertiary and Quaternary calcareous nannoplankton zonation.
In: Farinaccl, A. ed. Proc. II Planktonic Conf. Roma 1970: 739-785. Roma: Edizioni
Technoscienza 739-785.
Maubp, R. R. & Orr, W. N. 1975. Aspects of Post-Karroo geology in the Richards Bay area.
Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 78: 101-109.
SIESSER, W. G. 1971. Petrology of some South African coastal and offshore carbonate rocks
and sediments. SANCOR Mar. Geol. Prog. Bull. 3. Cape Town: Dept. Geology, University
of Cape Town.
SIESSER, W. G. 1972. Petrology of the South African Coastal limestones. Trans. geol. Soc.
S. Afr. 75: 177-185.
SIESSER, W. G. 1977. Upper Eocene age of marine sediments at Bogenfels, South West Africa,
based on calcareous nannofossils. In: Papers on biostratigraphic research Bull. geol.
Surv. Rep. S. Afr. 60: 72-74.
SIESSER, W. G. & DINGLE, R. V. 1979. Tertiary sea-level movements around southern Africa.
(Abstract.) AAPG-SEPM annual Convention Houston, Abstracts of Papers: 165.
STAPLETON, R. P. 1977. Planktonic foraminifera and the age of the Uloa Pecten bed. In: Papers
on biostratigraphic research. Bull. geol. Surv. Rep. S. Afr. 60: 11-17.
TRUSWELL, J. F. 1977. The geological evolution of South Africa. Purnell: Cape Town.
VaIL, P. R., MircHuM, R. M. & THompson, S. 1977. Seismic stratigraphy and global changes
of sea level. Part 4: global cycles of relative changes of sea level. In: PAYTON, C. E. ed.
Seismic stratigraphy—applications to hydrocarbon exploration. Mem. Am. Assn. Petrol.
Geol. 26: 83-97.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51). |
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. noy., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-1S5SA
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
‘not acceptable.
In describing new Species, One specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ©... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
“Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
WILLIAM G. SIESSER
&
GREGORY A. MILES
CALCAREOUS NANNOFOSSILS AND PLANKTIC
FORAMINIFERS IN TERTIARY LIMESTONES,
NATAL AND EASTERN CAPE,
SOUTH AFRICA
S, , Oc
VOLUME 79 PART 7 FEBRUARY 1980
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; fae aoe
“As described (Haughton & Broom Sn
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927) .
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FIscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 79 Band
February 1980 Februarie
Part”. 7. Deel
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF
HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCK! (REPTILIA,
ORNITHISCHIA) FROM THE STORMBERG
OF SOUTH AFRICA
By
A. P. SANTA LUCA
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1=3, 588), 30122)4-5..8 tp.) 5032579)
6(1, t—p.i.); 744), 8, 9(1—2, 7), 10(1-3),
1101-2;5; 7, tpi), -15G-5), 2402): 27, 31-3), 326), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 86 6
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI
(REPTILIA, ORNITHISCHIA) FROM THE STORMBERG OF
SOUTH AFRICA
By
A. P. SANTA LUCA
The University of Texas Health Science Center, Dallas
(With 23 figures, 1 table and 1 appendix)
LMS. accepted 30 August 1979]
ABSTRACT
Heterodontosaurus tucki (SAM—K1332), from the Upper Red Beds of the Stormberg
Series, comprises the only known complete postcranial skeleton of an early ornithischian
dinosaur. It is characterized by: length just over 1 m; a short presacral, especially dorsal,
region; six fused sacrals; ossified tendons only in the dorsal region; humerus with large
deltopectoral crest and entepicondyle; ulna with an olecranon process; nine carpal elements;
three functional, parallel, manual digits; elongated tibiofibula; functional tibiotarsus and
tarsometatarsus; small, robust prepubis; and ischium without an obturator process.
H. tucki was bipedal but probably capable of slow quadrupedal progression. The hand
was a grasping organ and the forelimb possessed powerful flexor musculature. The hind limb
was abducted and protracted, but definitely not parasagittal nor vertical. The tail was not rigid.
H. tucki differed in many important characters from fabrosaurids, indicating a long
period of ornithischian evolution still unknown. Resemblances are found to Jurassic-Cretaceous
ornithopods and non-ornithopods, particularly small Ceratopsia. Ornithopods are redefined
as only those ornithischians having an obturator process. H. tucki is classified as a non-
ornithopod of unknown subordinal status. It argues for the existence of a non-ornithopodous
radiation possibly ancestral to some later non-ornithopods.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction Steg ts : : ; : ‘ ‘ . Psk6o
Historical survey ; : ; 2 : : ~ 160
Material . ‘ 3 j . : ’ ‘ oe) GS
Description of Heterodontosaurus tucki . : . =. 163
Vertebral column : ; g : é : «163
Pectoral girdle and forelimb . : y : vee?
Pelvic girdle and hind limb . ‘ : 3 . »h84
Discussion . : : : ‘ ; : é ; 53 HAOT
Diagnosis . ; ; : : ‘ : - . 1 OT
Morphological interpretation . : : : LO
Heterodontosaurus and Fabrosaurus ' : «ft PASS
The importance of H. tucki . ; : ‘ 2 & 200
The significance of the obturator process. cu 20
H. tucki and Ornithischian classification : S202
Summary . ‘ : : : : : gat 3 5 20S
Acknowledgements . 3 é ; . : : . » 204
References . : : ; : ; : : : fe m2O5,
Abbreviations . ; ; E : : : : Ei eeO7
Appendix 1 ; ‘ : 5 ; : : : ere 209
159
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 79 (7), 1980: 159-211, 23 figs, 1 table, 1 appendix.
160 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
All known Late Triassic ornithischians are classified either as fabrosaurids
or heterodontosaurids. The family Fabrosauridae has recently been surveyed,
in part, by Galton (1978). In this family he included Fabrosaurus australis
Ginsberg, 1964, Echinodon Owen, 1861, Nanosaurus Marsh, 1877, and Lesotho-
saurus diagnosticus Galton, 1978 gen. et sp. nov. This last is the fabrosaurid
material described by Thulborn (1970a, 1972) as Fabrosaurus australis; it is the
only specimen of the above with sufficient postcranial material for comparison
with Heterodontosaurus tucki.
The family Heterodontosauridae includes Heterodontosaurus tucki
Crompton & Charig, 1962, Lycorhinus angustidens Haughton, 1924, Abricto-
saurus consors (Thulborn, 1974) Lanasaurus scalpridens Gow, 1975, Gerano-
saurus atavus Broom, 1911, and Pisanosaurus mertii Casamiquela, 1967.
P. mertii has been classified as a hypsilophodontid by Galton (1972) but as a
heterodontosaurid by Bonaparte (1976). Abrictosaurus consors (Hopson 1975)
comprises the material which Thulborn (1974) described as Lycorhinus consors
(specimen B54, Department of Zoology, University College, London). But apart
from SAM-K1332, the specimen described here, little heterodontosaurid post-
cranial material exists.
Previous discussions of Heterodontosaurus have dealt primarily with its
cranial and dental anatomy (Crompton & Charig 1962; Charig & Crompton
1974). Little attention was given to the available postcranial skeleton (but see
Santa Luca, Crompton & Charig 1976), though it is the most complete of any
known Triassic ornithischian. This is the first study to describe heterodonto-
saurid morphology in detail; the purpose is to present a thorough analysis of the
postcranial anatomy and of its implications for ornithischian phylogeny.
HISTORICAL SURVEY
Though no detailed study of Heterodontosaurus has previously appeared, it
has been discussed frequently in the press. Most of the controversy has centred
around the familial status and generic synonymies of Heterodontosaurus.
Crompton & Charig’s (1962) announcement of the first Heterodontosaurus skull
described the dentition and diagnosed the specimen as ornithischian. After
short comparisons with iguanodonts and hadrosaurs, they provisionally assigned
Heterodontosaurus to the suborder Ornithopoda but not to any family within
that suborder.
Romer (1966: 370) made it the monotypic genus of the family Heterodonto-
sauridae. However, Thulborn (1970a: 430) assigned it to the Hypsilophodontidae
in his study of a fabrosaurid skull, but he gave no reasons for so doing. Subse-
quently, the systematic position of Heterodontosaurus became greatly confused
as Thulborn (1970b, 1974) described another South African ornithischian as
congeneric with Lycorhinus angustidens Broom, 1911, and then argued that the
161
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI
sjseo oie ydeisojoyd siy} Ul s[qipueu pue [[Nys oy,
‘[eUIsIIO dy} JO
MOIA [BIO}e] WoT Ul CEE TO
WVS
(s11eYyD 2 UoJdWIOID) 149n]
SnAnvsojuopodsajayy “| “Biz
162 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
name Heterodontosaurus was but a junior synonym of Lycorhinus and therefore
not valid.
In answer to this, Charig & Crompton (1974) and Hopson (1975) adequately
demonstrated that generic distinctions in the dentition did exist between
Heterodontosaurus and Lycorhinus. Furthermore, Galton (1972), Charig &
Crompton (1974), and Hopson (1975) have all shown that Heterodontosaurus is
sufficiently distinct from the Hypsilophodontidae to warrant separate familial
status. Thulborn (1974) later accepted a familial distinction, but continues to
refer to this genus as ‘Lycorhinus’ (Thulborn 1978).
Because of its dentition and some of its cranial characters, Heterodonto-
saurus has always been considered a rather specialized ornithischian. From this
Thulborn (1970a, 1971a, 1972, 1974) has inferred that heterodontosaurids were
a short-lived evolutionary divergence from the basal ornithischian stock. In a
previous publication Santa Luca et al. (1976), only assumed that H. tucki itself
could not be ancestral to later ornithischians. This hypothesis will be thoroughly
examined at the end of this study since some important similarities in the post-
cranial skeleton of H. tucki and later ornithischians do exist.
The result of previous work has been to clarify the familial and generic
status of Heterodontosaurus. However, the question of the subordinal status of
Heterodontosaurus has never been examined. It has simply been standard
practice to classify all bipedal ornithischians as Ornithopoda. This is unsatis-
factory for some bipedal ornithischians (e.g. pachycephalosaurs) and so the
question of subordinal status will be taken up in the discussion.
Fig. 2. H. tucki. SAM-—K1332. Skull, right lateral view. Xx 1.
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 163
MATERIAL
The specimen described here (South African Museum K 1332) is on loan to
the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University. It was discovered in
December 1966 in the Upper Red Beds of the Stormberg series, about 1 770 m
above sea-level on the northern slopes of Krommespruit Mountain near
Voisana in the District of Herschel, Republic of South Africa. The specimen
consists of a virtually complete and articulated skeleton of an adult ornithischian
dinosaur (Figs 1-2). The precise extent of preservation of each skeletal element
has been noted at the beginning of the descriptive sections. A complete list of
measurements is provided in the appendix.
Comparisons have been made with a cross-section of published ornithischian
material. This includes ankylosaurs (Coombs 1978a, 19786), Camptosaurus
(Gilmore 1909), ceratopsians (Hatcher, Marsh & Lull 1907; Lull 1933), Fabro-
saurus (Thulborn 1972; Galton 1978), hadrosaurs (Lull & Wright 1942),
Hypsilophodon (Galton 1974), Iguanodon (Hooley 1925), Microceratops
(Maryarska & Osmdlska 1975), pachycephalosaurs (Maryarska & Osmdolska
1974), Protiguanodon and Psittacosaurus (Osborn 1923, 1924), Protoceratops
(Brown & Schlaikjer 1940), stegosaurs (Gilmore 1914), and Thescelosaurus
(Gilmore 1915).
DESCRIPTION OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI
VERTEBRAL COLUMN
The vertebral column of Heterodontosaurus is virtually complete and in
articulated condition. However, it has been left in a bed of matrix and only the
left lateral surfaces of the vertebrae are generally visible (Fig. 3); a few of the
vertebral bodies, in the anterior dorsal region, can be seen from the right side
(Fig. 4). In the presacral column, the most notable absence is the atlas which
cannot be reconstructed from the few fragments which remain; however, the
axis is exceptionally well preserved. The transverse processes of the posterior
cervicals are cracked so the precise angle of the processes relative to the neural
arch is uncertain. The anterior part of the centrum of C9 is missing, thus the
shape of this centrum and its effect on curvature in the neck are indeterminate.
The posterior cervical and the dorsal ribs overlay these vertebral bodies and
obscure their structure. The most severe deformation is in the middle and
posterior dorsals. Here the neural arches are collapsed downwards over the
centra; the transverse processes, instead of being horizontal, are now flush
_ against the centra and point downward. The ilia have been squeezed together,
displacing the sacral ribs. The caudal vertebrae are the best preserved but are
also embedded in matrix (Figs 6, 8) so only the left lateral surface is visible.
Cervical vertebrae (Figs 1, 3, 5A)
The cervical vertebrae of H. tucki can be divided into two groups based on
serial changes in centrum and in neural arch shape. C2-5 have longer centra,
164 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 3. H. tucki. Stereophotograph of main matrix block, left side. Scale = 5 cm.
longer neurocentral junctions (10-11 mm) and more widely separated pre- and
postzygapophyses. Each centrum has a moderate ventral keel, concave in
lateral outline, which is not strongly differentiated from the centrum itself. The
axis has a rather more elongate centrum with a less marked lateral concavity and
ventral keel than the other anterior cervicals. The odontoid process is 7,5 mm
long. C6—-9 have shorter centra, narrower neurocentral junctions (decreasing
from 8 mm in C6 to 5 mm in C9), more closely apposed pre- and post-
zygapophyses and much more strongly developed diapophyseal processes. The
keeling and concave ventral outline are more pronounced in C6-9. Furthermore,
a ridge outlines the anterior and posterior intercentral margins. The anterior
ridge continues up the side of the centrum and joins the parapophyseal promi-
nence. The posterior ridge continues along the ventral margin of the centrum.
These ridges outline a much deeper concavity below the parapophyses in C6—9
than in C2-5. They also increase the transverse width of the ventral keel which
is narrow and sharp in C2-5, but flat and several millimetres wide in C6-9.
While some of these distinctions typify the cervical vertebrae of other orni-
thischians (e.g. Hypsilophodon), the division into two groups is more pronounced
in A. tucki.
Fig. 4. H. tucki. Stereophotograph of main matrix block, right side. Scale = 5 cm.
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 165
Only two features of the cervical centra do not show the dichotomous
variation noted above. First, the height of the centra is approximately constant
throughout the series. Second, the absolute position of the parapophysis is
constant in all the cervical vertebrae. The position of the diapophysis varies but
not in the fashion noted above for the cervical centra: in C3—5 (the axis has no
rib facet) it lies just above and behind the parapophysis, but the distance
between the two facets progressively increases so that the diapophysis lies at the
level of the zygapophysis on C7 and above that level on C8 and C9.
Three different kinds of neural spines are found in successive groups of
cervical vertebrae: C2, 3, 4; C5, 6; C7, 8, 9. The neural arch of the axis has a
very prominent spine, the long axis of which is almost horizontal, parallel to the
long axis of the centrum. The arch is lateromedially compressed except at the
posterior ventral margin. Here the arch develops two lateral processes or
flanges; these extend from the distal tip of the arch anteriorly and inferiorly to
the postzygapophyses. The neural spines of C3 and 4 are successively smaller
versions of this form. C5 and 6 have small, narrow spines which project
anteriorly and dorsally between the postzygapophyses of the preceding vertebra.
The spine of C4 is inclined about 45° to the horizontal, C5 about 30°. The
spines of C7-9 are narrow vertical processes; in C7 and 8 the tip of the spine is
broken and the height uncertain; in C9 it rises about 7 mm above the level of
the zygapophyses.
_ The orientation and position of the zygapophyses also vary in the cervical
region. The prezygapophyses of the axis for articulation with the atlantal neural
arch are flat and face laterally. The transverse axis of the joint is horizontal at
C2/3, but it becomes successively more angulated until at C6/7 it is about 70°
above the horizontal. The zygapophyseal joints of C7/8 and C8/9 are covered
by matrix, but the transverse axis of C9/D1 is less erect than the axis of C6/7.
The transverse axis is horizontal again at the D2/3 articulation (see D3/D4 in
Fig. 5B).
Since the distance between the pre- and postzygapophyses of any single
vertebra varies with the length of the centrum, the zygapophyses are closer
together in the posterior than in the anterior group of cervical vertebra.
In the cervical series, the anterior and posterior surfaces of the centra are
not perpendicular to the long axis of the centrum. Thus, the centra of C3 and 4
have a parallelogram-shaped profile; those of C5 and 6 are approximately
rectangular, those of C7 and 8 trapezoidal (that of C9 is indeterminate). The
differently shaped centra, when articulated, automatically impart a curvature to
- the neck.
Though facets for the cervical ribs begin with C3, only the ribs of C4, 5, 8
and 9 are preserved or worked out of matrix (Figs 1, 3), but this is sufficient to
infer the structure of the entire series. The ribs of C3-—5 are alike, being very
short with capitular and tubercular processes of about equal length; both arms
are equally divergent from the axis of the rib shaft and so form a Y. The rib of
C9 (Fig. 5A) is incomplete distally, the preserved portion is 70 mm long; the
166 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 5. H. tucki. A. Cervical vertebrae, left lateral view, atlas missing. B. Dorsal vertebrae,
left lateral view. Scales = 5 cm.
tubercular process (6 mm long) is only half the length of the capitular process
(12 mm). The tubercular process is not divergent from but lies on the long axis
of the rib shaft; the head is flattened anteroposteriorly and bony excrescences
indicate a strong attachment to the diapophysis. Comparable ridges are found
on the diapophyses and these are especially well developed-on C8 and 9. The
capitular process of C9 diverges at about 60° from the long axis of the shaft; its
head is rounded and marked by a bony ridge along only the anterior margin of
the articular facet.
Dorsal vertebrae (Figs 1, 3, 5B)
Several features of the tenth vertebra indicate that it is the first dorsal;
counting thus, there are then 12 dorsal vertebrae. Most importantly, compared
to C6-9, the tenth centrum is elongated and has a longer neurocentral junction;
the intercentral margins are not raised into strong ridges and the ventral
keeling is considerably smaller.
However, the first three dorsals are, in some features, intermediate between
the posterior cervicals and the remaining dorsals. The presence of a small ventral
keel is an intermediate condition in that the succeeding dorsals have none. The
level of the zygapophyses above the centrum decreases gradually in the first
three dorsals from their position high above the centrum in the posterior
cervicals (D1, Fig. 5B) to just above the centrum in most of the other dorsals
(D3/4, Fig. 5B). The angle of inclination of the zygapophyseal facets gradually
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 167
decreases from D1 so that it is horizontal between D3 and 4. The diapophyses
and transverse processes also become lower in the first three dorsals so that on
D3 they are immediately above the parapophysis and connected to it by an
oblique crest. Finally, the neural spines of the first three dorsals change from a
very narrow-based process to a long-based process, about as long as the centrum
itself.
D4-10 may be considered typical dorsal vertebrae. The centra are rect-
angular in lateral outline (the outlines were determined by radiograph for
Figure 5B); consequently, the shape of the centra does not impart a curvature
to the dorsal region. The centra lack the strongly marked vertical ridges on the
intercentral margins seen in the posterior cervicals. The transverse processes lie
approximately at the same level as the zygapophyses; furthermore, the two rib
facets also lie on this level, the parapophyses (having risen completely off the
centrum) on the ventromedial surface and the diapophysis on the lateral surface
of the transverse process. The transverse processes are horizontal and angled
posteriorly. In D6—10 the transverse process becomes bifid: that is, an incisure
develops between that part carrying the parapophysis anteriorly and the part
carrying the diapophysis posteriorly. The two rib facets are closer together in
the posteriormost dorsals, still divided in D11 but completely merged into a
single facet in D12.
While orientation of the zygapophyseal facets varies with position in the
dorsal series, exact orientation is unknown because the neural arches were
broken just above the centra and displaced ventrally in most of the middle
dorsals. The transverse processes were also broken and folded downward, so as
to lie in contact with the lateral surface of the centra. Only the processes of
D3, 4, 5, 11 and 12 retain their original horizontal orientation; thus, only in
these vertebrae can the orientation of the zygapophyses be determined. The
facets between D3/4 and D4/5 are horizontal and those between D10/11 and
D11/12 are inclined at about 45°. In the other vertebrae, if the transverse
_ processes were restored to their horizontal position, then the inclination of the
facets would also be about 45°, similar to that of D11 and 12.
The height of the zygapophyses on the neural arch decreases in the first
three dorsals; but from D4~-10 the height is indeterminate since the neural
arches were displaced ventrally as described above. In D11 the prezygapophysis
is 4-5 mm above the centrum, the postzygapophysis about 10 mm above this
level. The zygapophyses of D12 are about 7 mm above the centrum.
The size and shape of the neural spine vary throughout the dorsal region.
. The precise height in D4~9 is uncertain, but the spines are clearly antero-
posteriorly elongated at both the base and vertex. The height of the spines above
the zygapophyses is about 10 mm in D3 and 14 mm in D12. The difference in
height between D3 and D12 is actually greater because the zygapophyses them-
selves articulate at a higher level in the more posterior dorsal vertebrae.
The ribs of the transitional dorsals differ from those of the posterior
cervicals only in having shorter tubercular and capitular processes. Total rib
168 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
length is indeterminate: the preserved part of dorsal rib 3? is 90 mm long. In
the remaining dorsal ribs except the last, the tubercular process is so reduced
that the tuberculum lies on the dorsal surface of the rib a short distance behind
the capitulum. A line connecting capitulum and tuberculum makes a 45° angle
with the proximal part of the shaft. The last dorsal rib is very short and has a
single head which articulates with a reduced transverse process.
Sacral vertebrae (Figs 3, 7A)
The sacrum consists of six vertebrae, the centra of which are completely
fused. Only a few details about the structure of the sacrum can be obtained
since the sacrum is only partially exposed (and only on the left side).
Sacrals 1 and 2 articulate with the anterior iliac process. The transverse
processes of SI and 2 resemble those of D12: they are short, horizontal, dorso-
ventrally flattened and arise from the middle of the centrum. The first two
sacrals do not have typical sacral ribs which cover a large portion of the lateral
central surface; rather, the ribs connect the transverse processes with the ilia.
The prezygapophyses of S1 are exactly like those of D12, the transverse and
anteroposterior axes angled about 45° to the horizontal. The prezygapophyses
of S2 are completely obscured by matrix. The neural spines are as high as those
of the posterior dorsals but narrower; D12 resembles S1 and 2 in this last
respect more than it does D7-11.
S3 articulates with the ilia immediately dorsal and anterior to the pubic
peduncle. The structure of the sacral rib is indeterminate since the centrum has
a vertical fracture along which it has sheared; thus, only the point of articulation
is clear, but not the shape of the bones forming it. Dorsally, only the spinous
portion of the neural arch is visible: it is anteroposteriorly longer than that of
Sl and 2.
In dorsal view only the basal part of the neural spine of S4 is visible, the
dorsal tip being eroded away. The remaining portion resembles that of S3.
S5 has an anteroposteriorly elongated transverse process which seems to be
continuous with a ventrolateral projection from the centrum; this may indicate
a true sacral rib. S6 has a narrow transverse process which angles caudally and
meets the posterior iliac process.
The ventral surface of each centrum is concave anteroposteriorly; it is
somewhat flattened transversally in S1-3 but has a slight ridge in S5 and 6.
Ossified tendons are found on the sides of the neural spines beginning
abruptly at D4 (Figs 1, 3). They continue throughout the dorsal series and are
found on the sides of the sacral neural spines. They disappear at S5 or 6 and are
not found at all posterior to the sacrum.
Caudal vertebrae (Figs 6, 7B—C, 8-9)
The caudal series is not complete, but a total of 28 vertebrae remain. The
first 12 are preserved in two separate but contiguous blocks of matrix. A further
block contains another group of 16 articulated caudals. The number of vertebrae
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 169
Fig. 6. H. tucki. Stereophotograph of caudal vertebrae 3-12, left lateral view. Note distal
portions of ischium and postpubic rod in lower left corner of matrix block. Scale = 5 cm.
that would bridge the gap between the two groups can be estimated by com-
paring the mid-central heights of the two vertebrae at the ends of the gap. (This
measure seems to decrease uniformly from anterior to posterior caudals, while
centrum length increases and decreases several times within the caudal series.)
The difference in height is 1,5 mm; this corresponds to 6 vertebrae in the first
group and to 9 in the second. Presumably, then, at least 6 but not more than 9
caudals intervened between the two segments preserved.
The caudal cenira do not have a consistent pattern of variation in shape or
length. In the first seven caudals the anterior central surface is inclined postero-
dorsally while the posterior surface is perpendicular to the long axis of the
centrum. The remaining centra in the first group are rectangular. Centra 4 to 7
of the last block have a parallelogram outline, the dorsal margin anterior to the
ventral; the other centra are rectangular. The length of the centra increases from
about 15 mm for sacral 1 to about 18 mm for sacral 11. In the second group,
length is approximately constant at 16 mm.
Several features are common to the first nine caudal centra. The ventral
- margin is markedly concave; this is accentuated by the inferiorly projecting
articulation with the chevrons. Beyond caudal 9 the area of heamal arch
articulation decreases and the inferior border becomes more gently concave.
On the lateral surface of the centra a fossa lies below the transverse process;
a ridge marks the middle of the ventral margin. The size of the fossa decreases
from the first to ninth caudal and disappears at caudal 10.
Transverse processes are found on all twelve caudals of the first group and
on the first twelve caudals of the second. The processes maintain the same
’ relative position throughout, projecting from the middle of the centrum just
below the neurocentral junction. The processes of the first nine caudals are
horizontal and angled posteriorly; all the rest are successively smaller projections
but perpendicular to the centrum.
The neural arches of the first ten caudals have spinous processes, the
remaining caudals do not. In the first ten, the spine both decreases in height and
inclines more posteriorly. The first seven spines are about 15 mm high while the
170 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
{ —- + -
1 2 3 4
Fig. 7. H. tucki. A. Sacral vertebrae, left lateral view; outline of S 2-5 taken from radiograph.
B. First two caudal vertebrae, from main matrix block, left lateral view. C. Caudal vertebrae
3-12, from matrix block illustrated in Figure 6, left lateral view. Scale = 5 cm.
remainder diminish rapidly in height. The inclination of the spines to the
horizontal plane decreases from about 90° in the first sacral to about 45° in the
tenth; in this last, the spine is almost parallel to the postzygapophyseal process.
The zygapophyseal processes are set at about 40° to the horizontal plane in the
first group of caudals; this angle decreases to about 30° in the second group.
The transverse axis of the articular facets increases from about 45° relative to
the horizontal plane at the sacrocaudal junction to almost 90° after the first
six or seven caudals.
All the caudal vertebrae preserved had chevrons. The first six chevrons are
expanded proximally, having relatively large articular contacts with the centra;
Fig. 8. H. tucki. Stereophotograph of second block of caudal vertebrae. Scale = 5 cm.
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 171
distally, these chevrons narrow to a small rod. From the seventh chevron of the
first group to the sixth of the second, the distal end of the chevron is antero-
posteriorly expanded into a knob. The length of the chevrons decreases pro-
gressively from about the ninth. The first chevron preserved on the last block is
20-21 mm long; the fifth behind that is about 18 mm long; and the last complete
chevron is still 16 mm long (on the third from last vertebra). If the reduction in
chevron length were a linear function, then 15-20 vertebrae would have com-
pleted the caudal series if the smallest chevron were 8-10 mm long.
Comparisons
The total number of presacral and sacral vertebrae in H. tucki (9+12+6)
_ cannot be matched in any of the well-known ornithopods such as Hypsilophodon
(9+15+6), Camptosaurus (9+16+4/5), or Jguanodon (11+17-+6). Only
ceratopsians (including Protoceratops), Psittacosaurus and Protiguanodon have a
similar sacral and pre-sacral count.
As a whole, the vertebral structure of H. tucki resembles that of Hypsilo-
Phodon most closely, though similarities to the non-ornithopods are frequent.
The axis has a structure similar to that of the ornithopods Hypsilophodon and
Camptosaurus, but also to that of Stegosaurus. In the remaining anterior
cervicals, H. tucki and Hypsilophodon are quite similar. However, the deeply
concave and short posterior cervical centra are not matched in Hypsilophodon
but rather in Protoceratops.
The morphology of the dorsal vertebrae agrees with that of typical ornitho-
pods such as Hypsilophodon, Camptosaurus and Thescelosaurus and with what is
known of Fabrosaurus. The dorsals, however, are unlike those of hadrosaurs,
Fig. 9. H. tucki. Caudal vertebrae on second matrix block illustrated in Figure 8. Scale = 5cm.
172 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
iguanodonts and some non-ornithopods (Stegosaurus, Centrosaurus) which have
high and relatively narrow neural spines.
The sacral vertebrae of H. tucki are virtually unknown since they are buried
in matrix between the ilia. The caudal vertebrae resemble those of Hypsilophodon,
Thescelosaurus and Fabrosaurus. In Camptosaurus, the anterior caudals are
considerably shorter but the posterior caudals much more like those of H. tucki.
The caudals of H. tucki do not have the anteroposteriorly compressed centra nor
the high neural spines of iguanodonts and hadrosaurs.
PECTORAL GIRDLE AND FORELIMB
Scapula (Figs 1, 3-4, 10D)
Both scapulae are preserved, the left presenting the external aspect, the
right the inferior-external aspect. The glenoid cavity is clearly visible on the
right (Figs 1, 3) as the humerus is disarticulated from the scapula, but the
humeral head lies in the glenoid on the left side (Fig. 4). Both scapulae lie
approximately parallel to the vertebral column, the anterior extremity somewhat
more ventral than the posterior. In the reconstruction the scapula has been
reoriented parallel to the vertebral column in a position comparable to that
seen in well-preserved hadrosaurs (Lull & Wright 1942). An anteroventral-
posterodorsal orientation of the scapular long axis would also be quite accept-
Fig. 10. H. tucki. A. Medial view of olecranon process, right ulna. B. Proximal articular
surface, right radius and ulna. C. Right distal tarsals and proximal portion of metatarsals with
reduced fifth digit, ventral view. D. Left scapula, lateral view. Scales: A-B = 2,5 cm;
C-D = 5 cm.
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 173
able. In either case, the glenoid long axis should be primarily ventral in position,
not posterior.
The scapula is the longest element of the shoulder girdle-forelimb complex.
The caudal portion is thin and broadened into a blade; the bone at the margin
here has a roughened and unfinished appearance which probably indicates a
cartilaginous suprascapular extension. Along the blade-like caudal portion of
the scapula, the ventral margin is strongly concave while this part of the dorsal
margin is straight. Cranially, the scapula tapers considerably: it becomes sub-
circular in cross-section about 20 mm proximal to the scapulocoracoid suture;
it broadens out again above the glenoid but remains thick in cross-section. The
scapula has only a gentle curvature to conform to the thoracic wall: the arc 1s
90 mm, the chord 85 mm; most of the curvature occurs just proximal to the
glenoid fossa.
Along the dorsal margin above the glenoid fossa, a prominent acromial
process rises about 9 mm above the scapula. The coracoid edge of the process is
damaged so there is no evidence of a clavicular facet. A well-developed glenoid
tubercle appears at the posterior lip of the glenoid fossa, separated from the lip
by a small fissure. It probably marks the attachment of the scapular head of
triceps. The glenoid itself is anteroposteriorly concave (10 mm wide) and
transversely flat (5 mm thick); the cavity is 3-4 mm deep. The scapula and
coracoid are firmly fused, each contributing about half of the articular area.
Coracoid (Figs 1, 3, 10D)
The left coracoid is complete except for a small area opposite the acromion
and for the distal end of the plate; only the glenoid portion of the right coracoid
is preserved.
The coracoid plate has flat proximal and distal halves, bent about a
perpendicular to the long axis of the scapula. The proximal half is in line with
the glenoid portion of the scapula, the distal half is bent medially relative to the
proximal. An ovoid tubercle lies at the ventral margin approximately 10 mm
distal to the glenoid fossa, at the junction of the proximal and distal coracoid
halves; it is perhaps associated with the coracobrachialis or costocoracoideus
muscle.
Sternum (Figs 1, 3)
What seems to be a thin sternal plate lies in matrix within the angle formed by
the left humerus and scapula. Its approximate dimensions are 35 mm by 18 mm.
However, the exact shape and orientation of the plate are unknown since its
complete outline is not discernible: it may be either quadrangular like the sternal
plates of Hypsilophodon (Galton 1974), or quadrangular with a handle-like
process like the plates of Iguanodon atherfieldensis (Hooley 1925).
Humerus (Figs 1, 3-4, 11A)
Both humeri are complete but still in matrix, the left gives a posterior view
and the right an anterior view so no details are lost. The shaft is only slightly
174 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 11. H. tucki. A. Right humerus, dorsal view. B. Right manus, medial view.
Seales: A> — Si cmis B — 25cm
twisted about its long axis, so the transverse axis of the proximal and of the
distal articular surfaces are virtually parallel. The proximal part of the shaft
with the deltopectoral crest is retroflexed relative to the distal part; the angle
formed is about 30°.
Proximally, the humerus has a moderately well-developed articular head,
bounded laterally by the superior margin of the deltopectoral crest and medially
by a tuberosity lying just below the articular eminence. The head lies in the
middle of the superior surface; its diameter is greater than the thickness of the
proximal end of the shaft and a small fossa occurs just below the head anteriorly
while a buttress of bone lies below the head posteriorly.
The deltopectoral crest occupies about 40 per cent of the lateral margin of
the humerus; it ends abruptly and joins the shaft at nearly a right angle. The
crest is directed anteriorly as well as laterally, so the anterior surface of the crest
and shaft is concave, the posterior surface convex. The edge of the crest is thin
except superiorly where it forms part of the tuberosity (for the insertion of the
deltoid) and inferiorly where it is rugose and thickened for the attachment of the
pectoralis muscle.
Below the deltopectoral crest the shaft is subcircular in cross-section; it
becomes more rectangular distally as the supracondylar area is approached.
The medial, ulnar condyle is gently rounded both transversely and antero-
posteriorly; it extends somewhat lower than the radial condyle. The radial
condyle is ridge-like transversely, not rounded; a transverse section through the
condyles would thus show a U-shaped ulnar condyle meeting a V-shaped radial
condyle. While the anteroposterior axis of the ulnar condyle is parasagittal, the
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 175
ridge of the radial condyle is offset in an anterolateral-posteromedial direction.
The radial condyle is limited above and anteriorly by a small transverse ridge,
creating a shallow fossa between condyle and ridge. A small supracondylar ridge
widens the humerus radially. The medial surface of the humerus just above the
ulnar condyle has a strong entepicondyle sharply demarcated from the surface
of the shaft. This indicates a correspondingly strong development of forearm
flexor musculature. Neither condyle extends on to the dorsal surface of the shaft
(Figs 1, 3); the humerus is here completely flat with no olecranon fossa though
the ulna has a well-developed olecranon process. Consequently, it would be
impossible for the forearm to have been fully extended on the humerus.
Radius (Figs 1, 3, 10B, 12-13)
Both radii are complete but still partially contained in matrix. The right
radius is composed of several realigned fragments and is somewhat distorted,
whereas the left is complete and undistorted. On the left radius the distal
articulation is turned about 20°-30° medially relative to the proximal; a similar
torsion is found in the ulna. In section, the shaft of the radius is generally
subcircular; at the extremities it becomes quadrangular.
The superior articular surface (Fig. 10B) is semicircular in outline: a
straight medial edge in contact with the ulna and a convex lateral margin. The
fossa for the radial condyle of the humerus is an elongated shallow sulcus which
matches the ridge-like nature of the condyle. Such an arrangement would
stabilize the radiohumeral articulation and limit rotation of the radius. The
posterior margin of the superior articular surface is raised and extended
Fig. 12. H. tucki. Stereophotograph of right radius, ulna, carpus and manus, dorsal view.
Scale = 5 cm.
176 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 13. H. tucki. Right radius, ulna, carpus and manus,
dorsal view. Scale = 5 cm.
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 177
posteriorly (Fig. 12); the articular surface is thus lengthened and inclined
anteroinferiorly. Distally, a small rounded tubercle lies on the dorsal surface of
the shaft, 5 mm above the distal end (Fig. 13); this may be associated with an
insertion of the extensor carpi radialis muscle. Distally, the shaft is expanded
toward the ulnar side; here it makes an oblique contact with the ulnare. The
inferior articular surface is planar, in contact with the radiale.
Uina (Figs 1, 10A, 10B, 12-13).
Both ulnae are preserved, in articulation proximally and distally, but not
freed from matrix. The left ulna presents a dorsolateral view, the right a dorso-
medial view.
Proximally, the ulna has a pronounced olecranon process which rises about
10 mm above the coronoid process; the coronoid process itself projects anteriorly
as an almost horizontal shelf. The olecranon part of the articular surface is
wider than the coronoid part. The posterior surface of the olecranon bears a
rugose, uplifted area of bone for the attachment of the triceps tendon. The
radial side of the proximal ulna is convex; a small tubercle lies on this side of the
olecranon process, above the coronoid (Fig. 12). The medial surface of the
proximal ulna is marked by the jutting ridge for the triceps attachment and by
the overhanging ridge of the articular surface; these ridges give the proximal
ulna a concave appearance. The ulnar shaft narrows below the coronoid process
but widens gradually towards the distal end. A long, low ridge is found on the
dorsal part of the shaft beginning below the area of triceps attachment (ur,
Fig. 13); it continues to the distal third of the shaft and then terminates. The
distal articular surface is transversely convex, fitting into the concave proximal
surface of the ulnare. Both ulna and ulnare are in contact with the pisiform
laterally.
Carpus (Figs 1, 12-15)
Both left and right carpi are complete and in virtually undistorted articula-
tion with the forelimb and metacarpus of each side. Consequently, the relative
position of the carpal elements is certain; this is important since the arrangement
of the proximal row of carpals differs from that known in all other ornithischian
groups.
The carpus is composed of nine ossified elements, arranged in a proximal
and distal row with one element sandwiched centrally between these rows. The
proximal row contains the radiale, ulnare and pisiform; the distal row contains
- one carpal for each of the five metacarpals; finally, one carpal lies beneath the
medial part of the ulnare, above distal carpal 2 and the medial part of distal
carpal 3. This arrangement contrasts sharply with the carpal construction of
known ornithischians. Properly speaking, the bone intervening between the two
rows of carpals does not correspond to an os intermedium; rather, it corresponds
in position to an os centrale.
Comparisons with other ornithischians are hindered because so few com-
178 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 14. H. tucki. Stereophotograph of right carpal region, dorsal view. Scale = 5 cm.
plete carpi exist; however, the complete carpus of Camptosaurus dispar (Gilmore
1909) does not contain an os centrale, only an os intermedium. An os centrale
does exist in the carpus of the alligator (but along with an os intermedium) so it
would not be unusual to find its retention in an early ornithischian archosaur.
A number of possibilities exist with respect to the fate of the os intermedium in
Heterodontosaurus, but it is impossible to choose among them: (i) the os inter-
medium has been lost in the Heterodontosaurus lineage; (i1) the os intermedium
has fused with the ulnare, as in Stegosaurus (Gilmore 1914); (iii) the os inter-
medium has fused with the radiale; (iv) the os intermedium has become dis-
placed inferiorly by the growth of the radiale and/or ulnare, to occupy the
position of an os centrale. The phylogenetic history of the carpus in Heterodonto-
saurus thus remains unknown for the present.
The radiale is a flat, plate-like bone, articulating with the entire distal
surface of the radius; it is transversely elongated to match the distal, expanded
shaft of the radius. The ulnare, proximodistally thicker than the radiale, contacts
the radiale on the inferior half of its medial margin while the superior half of the
medial margin is in contact with the distal end of the radial shaft. As noted
above, the superior surface of the ulnare is transversely concave to accept the
rounded end of the ulnar shaft; distally, the ulnare has a flat articular surface.
The lateral surface of the ulnare has two facets, the inferolateral for distal
carpal 5, the superolateral for the pisiform. The pisiform is a cuboidal element
in contact with both ulnare and ulna. The intervening bony element in the
carpus is biplanar, in contact proximally only with the ulnare, but with distal
carpals 2, 3 and 4 below.
Distal carpals 1 and 2 are both thin, biplanar elements, sandwiched between
the carpals above and the metacarpals below. Distal carpal 3 is proximodistally
thicker than 1 and 2, rectangular medially, but the lateral margin is diagonal.
The diagonal margin permits distal carpal 4 to intervene between the ulnare
Wie
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI
mct
_—
-.
a. -*
mand)
e
4
2
,
Ab
Fig. 15. H. tucki. Detail of right carpus and manus. Scale = 2,5 cm.
180 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
above and distal carpal 3 below. The inferolateral surface of distal carpal 4 is
offset in such a way that digit 4 is highly abducted with respect to digits 1-3.
Distal carpal 5 is cuboidal, articulating with the inferior facet of the ulnare’s
lateral surface. The inferior facet of the ulnare faces laterally as well as inferiorly;
consequently, the fifth digit is abducted and lies parallel to digit 4. The orienta-
tion of the carpal bones results unquestionably in a manus with the 3 medial
digits parallel to each other and digits 4 and 5 abducted with respect to the first
three but parallel to each other.
Manus (Figs 1, 11B, 12-13, 15)
Both left and right manus are virtually complete. The left lacks only the
distal portions of the metacarpal and phalanges of digit 2. The right lacks the
distal portion of phalanx 1, digit 1, and of phalanx 3, digit 3; none of the right
fifth digit is visible (though the proximal part may still be in matrix, the distal
portion is certainly missing). Most of each manus is still embedded in matrix, so
only the dorsal surface of the digits is usually visible. The phalangeal formula is
2-3-4—3-2.
The base of metacarpal | is transversely expanded and dorsoventrally
flattened, making it a thin rectangle in section (metacarpal | is seen in oblique
view in Fig. 11B). The metacarpal narrows below the base so the medial and
lateral margins are both concave. A tubercle, about 3 mm long, lies at the upper-
most medial margin of the metacarpal base, in the position of attachment of the
supinator manus muscle of modern reptiles (Fig. 15). On the laterai half of the
metacarpal base the articular facet extends a short distance on to the dorsal
surface of the metacarpal, allowing extension of the metacarpal on the distal
carpal. The metacarpal bears another tubercle at the uppermost lateral margin
of the dorsal surface, in contact with a similar protuberance at the base of
metacarpal 2. The heads of metacarpals 2-4 each bear such a tubercle at both
the uppermost medial and lateral dorsal margin. These tubercles correspond to
the attachments of the humerodorsalis muscle of reptiles and amphibians. The
condition of Heterodontosaurus indicates at least seven slips of attachment, not
a reduced number as seen in Varanus, Sphenodon and Alligator (Haines 1939).
Distally, each of the first three metacarpals bears a deep pit on the dorsal
surface just proximal to the articular head. This receives a well-developed dorsal
process of the phalangeal base. The distal articular surface of the first three
metacarpals continues on to the dorsal surface, just distal to the pit. This
prolongation of the articular surface permits hyperextension of the proximal —
phalanges on the metacarpal heads of digits 1-3. This is important during
quadrupedal progression (plantigrade) when the forelimb is weight-bearing, and
supports the hypothesis that Heterodontosaurus was capable of quadrupedal
locomotion.
The distal articular surface of metacarpal 1 is complex and asymmetric
(Figs 11B, 15). The outline of the medial condyle is subelliptical, its long axis
proximodistal, that is, oriented on the long axis of the metacarpal. The lateral
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 181
condyle is also subelliptical, but its long axis is perpendicular to the medial
condyle, that is, directed dorsoventrally. Thus, the lateral condyle rises above the
dorsal surface of the metacarpal shaft while the medial condyle is flush with this
surface. In addition, the pits for the collateral ligaments have relatively different
positions due to the difference in condyle orientation. The pit for the medial
collateral ligament lies midway between the dorsal and ventral margins; the pit
for the lateral collateral ligament lies just at or above the dorsal surface of the
metacarpal. Dorsally, the intercondylar groove lies medial to the midline of the
joint, the lateral condyle being wider than the medial. The metacarpal is also
asymmetric in length: the lateral edge is longer than the medial edge. This
produces an oblique transverse axis of rotation which has two effects: first, the
phalanges of digit 1 would be medially offset (though the metacarpal is not) in
extension; second, the phalanges would be laterally offset during rotation around
the oblique axis of the joint.
The bases of metacarpals 2-5 differ from that of metacarpal 1 in being
almost square in section, not dorsoventrally flattened. These metacarpals have
an almost square dorsal outline resulting from the planar articulations with the
distal carpals and with the adjacent metacarpals. The carpometacarpal articu-
lation of metacarpal 2 carries on to the dorsal surface for a short distance; this
would permit some extension of the metacarpal on the carpus. In metacarpal 3,
the articulation with the distal carpal does not extend on to the dorsal meta-
carpal surface; the boundary between the carpal and dorsal surfaces is a sharp
ridge, not a smooth, curved transition as in metacarpals 1 and 2.
The metacarpophalangeal joint of digit 2 is symmetrical, the two condyles
being of equal size. Flexion-extension here would result only in movement along
the long axis of the metacarpal. The metacarpophalangeal joint of digit 3 is
smaller but also seems to be symmetrical (the view of the medial surface is
limited since digit 3 lies very close to digit 2).
Digits 4 and 5 are extremely reduced and apparently non-functional. The
- total length of digit 4 hardly exceeds the length of metacarpal 3. However, the
base of metacarpal 4 is almost as large as the bases of metacarpals 2 and 3. This
may be correlated with the still large attachment for the humerodorsalis on
metacarpal 4. The head of metacarpal 4 is quite small; it is covered with a black
concretion which obscures the details of the metacarpophalangeal joint. The
base of metacarpal 5 is convex dorsally without any tubercles, indicating the
humerodorsalis had lost all attachment to the fifth digit.
Atrophy of digits 4 and 5 occurs in both known Late Triassic ornithischians,
- Heterodontosaurus and Fabrosaurus, and in almost all other Jurassic-Cretaceous
ornithischians as well. Consequently, the reduction of the lateral digits occurred
very early in the phylogenetic history of the group or was characteristic of the
ancestral group which gave rise to ornithischians. Gilmore’s interpretation, for
example, that digit 5 of Camptosaurus ‘was becoming atrophied’ (1909: 256) is
thus not accurate. The digit had already become reduced in previous forms and
was merely the expression of an ancestral trait.
182 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Apart from the unguals, the phalanges of the first 3 digits can be placed in
2 categories. The simpler has a symmetric articular facet both proximally and
distally; these are the penultimate phalanges of digits 1-3. The base of each has
a well-developed median dorsal and median ventral process. Distally, the outline
of the articular facet for the ungual phalanx is not uniformly rounded but is
somewhat flattened dorsally. The articular surface extends farther on to the
ventral than the dorsal aspect of the phalanx. The pits for the collateral liga-
ments are found near the dorsal surface of the phalanx on both lateral and
medial sides.
In the other category of nonungual phalanges are those which intervene
between the metacarpal and the penultimate phalanx: phalanx 1 of digit 2, and
phalanges 1 and 2 of digit 3. These phalanges have a symmetric base proximally
but an asymmetric head distally (Fig. 12). The asymmetry involves, firstly, a
torsion of the head relative to the base which turns the ventral surface of the
digit somewhat medially. Secondly, the length of the phalanx along the medial
margin is a little less than along the lateral margin: this directs the longitudinal
axis of the succeeding digit medially. Thirdly, the condyles themselves are
asymmetric: the medial condyle is larger than the lateral, and the trochlear
surface of the medial condyle is not as steep as that of the lateral condyle. The
outline of the medial condyle is a half ellipse,-its long axis pointed ventrally
about 45° to the long axis of the phalanx; the outline of the lateral condyle is
also a half ellipse, but its long axis parallels that of the phalanx (see the head of
phalanx 1, digit 2, Fig. 11B). The depressions for the collateral ligaments are
found near the ventral margin medially but near the dorsal border laterally. The
transverse axis of the joint is thus dorsolateral-ventromedial, with the dorso-
lateral edge being slightly distal to the ventromedial. Rotation about this axis
would produce a medial-to-lateral movement during flexion like that of digit 1.
The first three ungual phalanges are large, lateromedially compressed claws.
The proximal ventral surface bears a protruding flexor tubercle for the attach-
ment of the long flexor tendons (Fig. 11B). A comparable development of flexor
tubercles is found nowhere else in the Ornithischia. The lateral and the medial
surface of the unguals has an irregular depression midway between the dorsal
and ventral margins about 3 mm distal to the articular surface. This probably
marks the distal attachment of the collateral ligaments.
The phalanges of digits 4 and 5 are quite diminutive; those of digit 4 have
recognizable articulations permitting flexion-extension, but are very simplified.
The articular surfaces are dorsoventrally rounded; the phalangeal heads have a
single uniform articular surface without clearly defined medial and lateral
condyles. The terminal phalanx of digit 4 is dorsoventrally flattened, triangular
in outline. The proximal phalanx of digit 5 is much too small for details to have
been retained during preparation. It has a concave proximal and convex distal
articular surface. A small fragment of bone distal to the phalanx may be part
or all of the next and presumably terminal phalanx: it is only about 1,5 mm
long.
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 183
Comparisons
‘The scapular morphology of H. tucki approaches that of conservative
ornithopods (Hypsilophodon, Thescelosaurus, and Camptosaurus) more than that
of other ornithopods (Anatosaurus or Iguanodon). It differs from that of
ceratopsians, stegosaurs and ankylosaurs which have a more nearly uniform
width of the scapular blade. However, the non-ornithopods are no more
different from H. tucki than Anatosaurus and Iguanodon.
The humerus of H. tucki is relatively more robust than that of conservative
ornithopods and Fabrosaurus. Most of the differences are probably related to the
forelimb capabilities of H. tucki, both quadrupedal and prehensile. The
relatively larger deltopectoral crest and the entepicondyle are more reminiscent
of the large ornithischian quadrupeds such as Stegosaurus and Triceratops.
However, hadrosaurs have a deltopectoral crest larger than that of H. tucki. In
one feature, the humerus of H. tucki seems unlike that of any other ornithischian:
the lack of a posterior intercondylar groove or depression between the radial and
ulnar condyles. This would have severely limited elbow extension; consequently,
H. tucki may have assumed a semi-sprawling posture with the forelimbs.
In H. tucki, the extremities of the radius are expanded relative to the shaft,
somewhat more than they are in the radii of Hypsilophodon, Camptosaurus,
Thescelosaurus, and Anatosaurus, but very similar to those of the radius of
Iguanodon. In fact, as a whole the forearm of Jguanodon is more similar to that
of H. tucki than are the forearms of other ornithischians. The radii of the large
quadrupedal forms are variable: those of ceratopsians are but little expanded at
the extremities but that of Stegosaurus is much more so. The ulna of H. tucki
has a relatively well-developed olecranon process, a feature usually found in the
heavy quadrupedal ornithischians ; however, the ulna of the small Microceratops
also has an olecranon process. Only Jguanodon among the ornithopods seems to
have a comparably developed process.
Because the carpus is incomplete in so many ornithischians, the precise
orientation of the metacarpals remains uncertain in these cases. Digits 4 and 5
are clearly deviated to the ulnar side in H. tucki; however, in Fabrosaurus and
Hypsilophodon the manus was reconstructed with only digit 5 abducted. In the
latter two genera, however, digit 4 may also have been abducted since the
carpals, which would have determined digit orientation, are missing.
The only previously published illustration of the carpus and manus of
H. tucki (Bakker & Galton 1974, fig. 1H) is completely inaccurate. On the
basis of that inaccurate reconstruction, the authors argued that the hand of
H. tucki was identical to that of Triassic saurischians and was most likely
inherited from Triassic saurischians. In fact, the properly reconstructed hand
of H. tucki is more reminiscent of that of thecodontians than of early saurischians.
The phalangeal formula in Heterodontosaurus is 2-3-4-3-2. This agrees
with that of Hypsilophodon (according to Gilmore 1915), Thescelosaurus and the
ceratopsians; it differs from that of Camptosaurus (2-3-3-3-2), Trachodon
(0O-3-3-3-3) and Jguanodon (1-3-3-3-4). Trachodon and Iguanodon are
184 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
anomalous in the number of phalanges in the fifth digit; it seems unlikely that
such a phalangeal formula could have been derived from that of H. tucki since
it would require an increase in the number of phalanges in a non-functional digit
and a change of this digit to a functional role in the animal’s behaviour. By
inference, then, Trachodon and Iguanodon could not be derived from any genus
having only two phalanges in digit 5; thus, they represent a deviation in
ornithischian phylogeny about the origin of which we have no information.
PELVIC GIRDLE AND HIND LIMB
Pelvis (Figs 1, 3-4, 16-18A)
Both pelves are preserved but the left is somewhat damaged. The left ilium
has been displaced ventrally while the right has been displaced dorsally. The ilia
are also lateromedially compressed; this has compacted the sacral ribs and
transverse processes and considerably narrowed the interacetabular width of the
pelvis. The left anterior iliac process is broken and shifted ventrally; this creates
a greater convexity than the ilium actually had. The left prepubic process has
been completely crushed, its original form destroyed; fortunately, the right
prepubic process is well preserved. A fracture through the left ilio-ischial suture
distorts this region, but the right side is undamaged here. The fracture separating
the main matrix block from the first caudal vertebrae block (Fig. 1) also divides
the postpubes and ischia in midlength but no bone has been lost and the shafts
are complete.
Tlium
The ilium of H. tucki has a shallow, elongated anterior and posterior
process. The anterior process extends about 45 mm anterior to the pubic
peduncle; this constitutes 44 per cent of total iliac length. Anteriorly the process
veers away from the vertebral column and ends opposite the last dorsal vertebra.
A small ventral flange or convexity gives a bulbous appearance to the last 10 mm
of the process. The first three sacral vertebrae join the slender anterior process;
furthermore, the rib of the last dorsal vertebra was probably fused to the tip of
the process. This rib is short (19 mm) and could not have extended beyond the
ilium. The posterior iliac process is shorter than the anterior (28 mm from the
ischial peduncle) but equally shallow; it ends in a small, rounded expansion.
The brevis shelf is horizontal but shallow, extending 4-6 mm medially from the
ventral margin of the process to join the last sacral vertebra.
The acetabulum of H. tucki is 22 mm high and 20 mm long at its base. The
pubic peduncle is relatively long compared to other ornithischians (18 mm from
the notch between the anterior process and peduncle to the ilio-pubic suture).
The peduncle is almost vertical, inclined only about 20° anterior to a perpen-
dicular from the long axis of the ilium. The anterior and posteroventral
acetabular margins are raised into a sharp ridge while the dorsal and ventral
acetabular margins are rounded and flush with the surface of the ilium and
puboischium.
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI
185
Fig. 16. H. tucki. Stereophotograph of right pelvis, lateral view. Scale = 5 cm.
Fig. 17. H. tucki. Detail of right pelvic region. Scale = 5 cm.
186 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 18. H. tucki. A. Right pelvis, lateral view. B. Left femur, lateral view. Scale = 5 cm.
The single most important feature of the acetabulum is the expanded
articular surface at the posterodorsal corner. Here the ischiadic peduncle of the
ilium flares out, creating an horizontal articular shelf and buttress against which
the femoral head would have rested. The ventral surface of this shelf is a
continuation of the acetabulum and would have borne articular cartilage during
life. The ilio-ischial suture lies below this buttress and is separate from it.
Structurally, this articular buttress closely resembles the antitrochanter of birds
(completely different from the ‘antitrochanter’ of dinosaurs). Very strong
ligaments connect the iliac antitrochanter and the femoral greater trochanter in
birds. This system resists the collapse of the body on the femur when the body is
supported by only one leg. Unquestionably, the structural similarity to the avian
acetabulum argues that some similar mechanical system in the pelvis and hind
limb of H. tucki prevented excessive pelvic tilt when weight was borne by a
single hind limb.
The dorsal margin of the ilium is slightly convex; its arc is 101 mm while
the chord (that is, maximum iliac length) is 96,7 mm. A ridge for muscle
attachment runs from the tip of the anterior to the tip of the posterior process:
beginning on the ventral flange of the anterior process, it passes obliquely
upwards to the dorsal margin of the ilium, 20 mm behind the tip of the anterior
process; the very last 15 mm of the ridge descends from the dorsal rim to the
middle of the lateral surface of the posterior iliac process. In Romer’s reconstruc-
tion of the hind limb musculature of Thescelosaurus (1927a) this ridge marks
the attachment of the ilio-tibialis and ilio-fibularis muscles. The ilio-tibialis 1
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 187
would be above the ridge on the anterior iliac process; the ilio-tibialis 2 would
be attached above the ridge along the dorsal margin; the ilio-fibularis would lie
below the ridge on the posterior process; the ilio-caudalis would lie above the
ilio-fibularis and the ridge. A small tubercle situated ventrally on the tip of the
posterior process may indicate the attachment of flexor tibialis externus
(ilioflexorius). The coccygeofemoralis brevis is, of course, attached to the small,
horizontal brevis shelf.
Below the ilio-tibialis ridge, the lateral iliac surface presents no muscular
ridges. The cortical bone has been fractured in many places; on the right, over-
lapping fractures simulate a dividing ridge between muscle masses, but it is
purely artificial. This means that no demarcation can be found between the
supposed attachments of ilio-femoralis externus and ilio-trochantericus 1.
Romer (1927a: 264) could not find any limiting ridges either and so based his
reconstruction of Thescelosaurus on the position of the antitrochanter of
hadrosaurs and, probably, on the position of these two muscles in birds.
Recently, Walker (1977) argued that the iliotrochanterici should be considered
part of the ilio-femoralis externus and should not be reconstructed as a separate
muscle. Thus, he proposed a single deep dorsal muscle mass, the ilio-femoralis
externus, originating below the ilio-tibialis ridge and inserting on the lesser
trochanter. The confusion develops because the embryonic origin of the ilio-
trochanterici is uncertain (Romer 1927b, 1942). Walker’s argument is weak
because he drew his analogy with the development of the thigh musculature of
Lacerta (described by Romer 1942); however, the avian condition is certainly a
better model for ornithischian musculature than the lacertilian.
Ischium
The ischium of H. tucki has a long, columnar iliac peduncle and a flat, deep
pubic peduncle. The iliac peduncle is 15 mm high and 5 mm in diameter; the
pubic peduncle is 9 mm deep. The ischial rods are straight and do not seem to be
fused together. The rod bears a robust, laterally projecting ridge (if, Fig. 18A)
beginning about 35 mm behind the acetabular border and continuing to the end
of the rod; a similar feature is present on the ischium of Protiguanodon. In mid-
length, the ridge becomes drawn out laterally into a shelf which may have
provided attachment for the flexor tibialis internus and probably the ischio-
trochantericus. Romer noted (1927a: 248) that the flexor tibialis internus
probably arose from the dorsal margin of the ischial rod half-way along its
length; since this position corresponds with that of the shelf in H. tucki, the
. flexor tibialis internus may have attached here. A short, roughened line on the
proximal part of the ischial shaft and pubic peduncle may mark the adductor
musculature; this line lies below and anterior to the above ridge. The area
below the major ridge on the ischial rod was probably occupied by the obturator
internus (pubo-ischio-femoralis externus). The ischial rod of H. tucki does not
have an obturator process. However, the only real criterion for classification
within the Ornithopoda seems to have been a bipedal form of locomotion; it is a
188 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
functional category in which several independent phylogenetic lineages may be
included.
Pubis
The pubis of H. tucki is the first which shows the configuration of the early
ornithischian prepubis. The prepubic process is short and deep, 11 mm long
from the anterior edge of the pubic peduncle of the ilium, and about 8 mm deep.
The postpubis is thin and fragile, as long as the ischial rod, lying parallel to and
about 5-8 mm below it. The postpubis seems devoid of muscle markings except
on the internal surface opposite the shelf-like process on the ischium. Here a
small, longitudinal, roughened area may indicate the obturator internus muscle.
The obturator foramen ventral to the acetabulum is closed posteriorly by the
pubis itself, not by the ischium. A tubercle lies above the obturator foramen on
the ventral margin of the acetabulum; no corresponding tubercle exists in the
alligator but in Struthio (Gadow, in Gregory & Camp 1918, pl. 46) a tubercle in
this position marks the attachment of the mm accessorii.
While the postpubis has few signs of muscle attachments, the prepubis has
several prominent tubercles and ridges which indicate its importance for muscle
attachment (Figs 16-18A). A small, smooth ridge parallels the dorsal margin of
the prepubis and terminates at the anterosuperior edge in a small but distinct
tubercle. Another tubercle below the former lies on the anterior edge of the
prepubis surrounded dorsally and ventrally by small damaged and pitted areas.
These two tubercles have rounded, finished edges showing that they were not
part of a single continuous ridge on the anterior margin of the prepubis. The
anteroventral corner bears another, smaller, tubercle; its original extent is
indeterminate because this corner is also slightly pitted and damaged. A short
ridge runs along the ventral margin of the prepubis but ends below the obturator
foramen and does not continue on to the postpubis.
The question of which muscles attached to the prepubis has never been
resolved. Romer (1927a) thought only the abdominal musculature would have
attached here. Galton (1969) disagreed and, in addition to the abdominal
musculature, placed the ambiens, pubo-tibialis and part of the pubo-ischio-
femoralis internus (ilio-femoralis internus of birds) on the prepubis. The
muscle markings of H. tucki cannot themselves solve this problem, but they
show that Romer was wrong, at least in the case of H. tucki, in placing only the
abdominal musculature here. Romer rejected the idea of other muscles attaching
to the prepubis because the most primitive ornithischians known, the hypsilopho-
dontids, had a long, thin prepubis; this would have placed some muscle origins
too far forward to have provided a firm support for muscular contractions.
These are not problems in H. tucki because the prepubis is short and sturdy. The
ambiens and a head of pubo-ischio-femoralis internus could each have origi-
nated from one of the tubercles. However, the pubo-tibialis is an unlikely muscle
to attach to the prepubis; its absence in both birds and crocodiles certainly
means it had a low probability of appearing in ornithischians. More likely, a
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 189
further head of pubo-ischio-femoralis internus or an embryonic derivative of
the same muscle mass, the ilio-trochanterici, also originated from the prepubis.
The avian model for prepubic musculature may be sounder than realized
before. The prepubic process of the earliest known ornithischians was clearly
short and stout, not long and thin. This is precisely the shape of the pectineal
process in the embryo chick. Only during later embryonic development does the
pectineal process become relatively and absolutely small. This occurs as the
pectineal process stops growing and becomes incorporated into the other pelvic
cartilages during their expansion (Johnson 1883). But originally, the pectineal
process of the chick has the same relative size, shape and position as the prepubis
of H. tucki (though the pectineal process is an iliac, not a pubic, derivative in
birds). Because of this similarity the musculature of the avian pre-acetabular
area could be used as a model for the ornithischian prepubic musculature.
Femur (Figs 1, 3-4, 18B, 19)
Both femora are complete but each has been damaged. The left is fractured
somewhat proximal to the condyles; the proximal portion is on the main
matrix block while the distal end is on a separate block with the tibia—fibula.
The fourth trochanter is on a third block, that containing the first group of
caudal vertebrae. The right femur is in articulation with tibia—fibula and pelvis,
but is only partially exposed from the matrix. The right fourth trochanter is still
buried in matrix except for its lateral edge. The proximal tips of the right greater
and lesser trochanters have not been preserved.
The femur of H. tucki differs from that of ornithopods in that the lesser
trochanter is not separated by a cleft from the femoral shaft. Instead, the lesser
trochanter is a protuberant crest at the anterolateral femoral margin (Figs
16—18B). It begins just below the level of the femoral head and is about 20 mm
long. The anteromedial surface is smooth and continuous with preaxial surface.
The lateral surface, however, is extremely rough and irregular. Romer (1927a:
- 256) remarked that the lesser trochanter was independent of the greater in the
more primitive ornithischians, since only some stegosaurs and the ankylosaurs
did not have independent lesser trochanters. But this is not a question simply of
primitiveness. As with the obturator process, both conditions of the lesser
trochanter appear in the Upper Triassic of South Africa: H. tucki with the lesser
trochanter joined to the femoral shaft, Fabrosaurus with a cleft between lesser
trochanter and shaft. The two configurations may thus be independent of each
other, representing two different ornithischian lineages.
Neither does the greater trochanter of H. tucki correspond to Romer’s
(1927a: 254) description of the primitive form. Ordinarily, a depression separates
the femoral head from the greater trochanter. But in H. tucki both head and
greater trochanter are on the same level; in fact, the greater trochanter is
distinguished from the lateral femoral surface only by a low, horizontal ridge
and an uplifted area above this for tendinous attachment.
The 4th trochanter is a pendant, rod-like process, 14 mm long; it makes an
190 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 19. H. tucki. Stereophotograph of matrix block containing left distal femur and tibiotarsus.
Note transversely oblique proximal tibial surface. Scale = 5 cm.
approximate 45° angle with the shaft. Two parallel ridges run along the lateral
surface of the trochanter, creating a shallow sulcus between them; the sulcus
presumably marks the attachment of coccygeo(caudi)-femoralis brevis. The
medial surface of the femur is not visible at the trochanter so the insertion of
caudi-femoralis longus cannot be checked.
Distally, the lateral femoral condyle is the smaller, about 18 mm long, the
inner condyle much larger, 24 mm long (Figs 1, 19). Anteriorly and posteriorly,
the condyles are not separated by an intercondylar groove. While Fabrosaurus
does not have an anterior groove it does have a posterior intercondylar groove.
Presumably, the posterior groove is absent in H. tucki because the outer condyle
is so poorly developed posteriorly.
The transverse axis of the distal femoral articular surface is oblique, that is,
the transverse axis is inclined, the lateral edge lower than the medial. However,
the superior articular surface of the tibia—fibula is horizontal. Consequently, the
femur must be abducted relative to the pelvis to keep the articulation with the
tibia—fibula horizontal. A perfectly parasagittal orientation of the femur, often
depicted in reconstructions of bipedal dinosaurs, was impossible in H. tucki.
Furthermore, the femoral head must have rested against the articular surface of
the antitrochanter-like buttress of the ilium to support the body weight. Thus,
the femur, in addition to being abducted, would be protracted, so the long axis
of the femur passed through the antitrochanter-like articular area. The femur
could not have been held vertically for several reasons: firstly, the interace-
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 191
tabular width of H. tucki was not great, consequently, vertically oriented femora
would have impinged on the abdomen; secondly, the inferior femoral articular
surface is oblique relative to the long axis of the shaft, so a horizontal, stable
articular surface could be obtained only with the femur abducted; thirdly, even
if a wedge-shaped articular cartilage intervened between tibia and femur to
produce a vertical limb, loading would produce a sliding of the femur relative
to the tibia and thus an unstable knee joint. Thus, the only possible position of
the femur in H. tucki is abducted and protracted.
Tibia and fibula (Figs 1, 3-4, 19-20A)
Both tibiae are complete, but the left is fractured so that the fibula and
calcaneum are displaced ventrally. The cortical bone is eroded in many places,
particularly on the distal surface of the right tibia.
Structurally, the tibia—fibula of H. tucki is a tibiotarsus: the astragalus and
calcaneum are completely fused with the tibia and fibula and the fibula is fused
distally with the tibia. No sutures remain distally between the tibia—fibula and
the proximal tarsals. Fusion occurred in stegosaurs and certaopsians but not in
the known ornithopods.
Proximally, the inner tibial condyle is lateromedially compressed, only
7 mm wide, but anteroposteriorly expanded, 31 mm long. The great length is
partially due to the cnemial crest on the medial side of the tibial head. The
outer condyle is small, 12 mm long. It sits on a strong lateral buttress (hidden
by the displaced fibula in Figs 1, 19-20; see Fig. 4) which extends 40 mm down
the tibial shaft. This creates a deep sulcus between it and the cnemial crest
medially. No intercondylar groove is present anteriorly, but a small cleft is
found posteriorly. Thulborn (1972: 46) noted a smaller, accessory condyle
anterior to the outer in Fabrosaurus but H. tucki does not have a similar
accessory condyle.
The head of the fibula is longer than the outer tibial condyle against which
it rests. The fibular shaft narrows progressively and is fused with the tibia; it
terminates in a blunt end, about 3 mm in diameter, immediately above the fused
calcaneum.
The distal tibiotarsal surface permitted only flexion-extension of the tarso-
metatarsus. The joint is a pulley, anteroposteriorly rounded, with lateral and
medial ridges which prevented long axis rotation. The depressions for the
collateral ligaments are well developed (laterally; the medial astragaler surface
is damaged). The joint surface rises 12 mm on to the anterior tibiotarsal surface
and about 10 mm on to the posterior. The tibiotarsus of H. tuckiis remarkably
convergent with the tibiotarsus of birds and quite unlike that of other
ornithischians.
Muscle markings on the tibia—fibula are obscured by fracturing and the
flaking of the outer cortical bone, but some surface features remain (Fig. 19).
The cnemial crest received the common extensor tendon. A small vertical rugose
area on the posterolateral surface of the fibular head may mark the attachment
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
192
Lea |
ee, re,
area
Be
(
ae
\
\
y
|
Fig. 20. H. tucki. A. Left tibiotarsus, lateral view. B. Right pes and distal tarsals, dorsal view.
Scale = 5 cm.
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 193
of the ilio-fibularis. Three other ridges can be made out clearly: a vertical ridge
on the posterior surface of the fibula, 16 mm below the fibular head and about
12 mm long; a smaller ridge on the lateral fibular surface just below and anterior
to the former; another vertical ridge continuous with the second on the edge of
the lateral buttress described above. The first may be associated with a head of
the digital flexors and the others with the peroneal muscles.
Pes (Figs 1, 10C, 20B, 21-22)
The right pes is complete and well preserved save for a transverse fracture
proximally and some displacement near the metatarsal bases. The left pes is
virtually incomplete except for the phalanges and part of the distal tarsals. The
following description, therefore, depends only on the right pes.
The distal tarsals of H. tucki differ considerably from those preserved in
other ornithischians. In the latter, they are usually flat, disc-shaped bones not
ankylosed with the metatarsals. Fabrosaurus is similar to other ornithischians in
this respect and in no way resembles H. tucki. The three distal tarsals of H. tucki
are fused with each other and with the four metatarsals; the latter are also fused
with each other: So just as the tibia—fibula is a structural tibiotarsus, the foot is
a structural tarsometatarsus. The fifth digit is only a small splint of bone on the
proximoventral surface of digit 4.
Though fused, the individual tarsals are still distinguishable: distal tarsal 1
caps metatarsals 1 and 2, distal tarsal 2 caps metatarsal 3, and distal tarsal 3
caps metatarsal 4. A ridge rises along the medial and posterior margins of distal
tarsal 1; the anterior margin is rounded and the articular surface permitted
e =
Fig. 21. H. tucki. Stereophotograph of right pes and distal tarsals, dorsal view. Scale = 5 cm.
194 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
extension of the tarsometatarsus on the tibiotarsus. Posteriorly, the medial
edge of the tarsus bears a vertical process or flange (Fig. 10C). The tendon of
gastrocnemius may have passed over the tarsus lateral to this tubercle before
expanding into the plantar aponeurosis. Distal tarsal 2 also has a rounded
anterior margin but a ridge does not appear along the posterior margin; the
articular surface is slightly concave. Distal tarsal 3 has a strong ridge round its
free margin. The articular surface is a shallow, elliptical depression, antero-
posteriorly oriented; this accepts the articular ridge of the calcaneum. The
anterior margin of distal tarsal 3 is strongly lipped and overhangs slightly the
body of the tarsal; the articular surface thus does not extend on to the dorsal
tarsal surface. A foramen pierces the third distal tarsal in the middle of its dorsal
(anterior) surface.
The rest of the pes generally resembles a small ornithopod such as
Hypsilophodon. The head of metatarsal 1 faces medially so the first digit lies in
an abducted (i.e. relative to the axis of the pes) position. The first digit was much
too short to have been weight-bearing as the tip of the ungual reached only the
middle of phalanx 1, digit 2.
The distal articular surfaces of the three weight-bearing metatarsals
produce a bird-like stance of the digits. On metatarsals 2 and 4, the surfaces are
transversely oblique so both digits were abducted relative to digit 3; on meta-
tarsal 3, the articular surface is horizontal so digit 3 was aligned along the pedal
axis. The distal ends of metatarsals 3 and 4 bear a small dorsal pit just above
the articular surface; neither metatarsal 1 nor 2 has such a pit. Presumably,
digits 3 and 4, being much longer than digit 2, required greater extension to
shorten their effective length and allow digit 2 to reach the ground. The dorsal
pits on metatarsal 3 and 4 are indicative of this greater extension.
The phalanges of H. tucki are characterized by deep interphalangeal pulley
Fig. 22. H. tucki. Stereophotograph: detail of right distal tarsals and proximal portion of
metatarsals, dorsal view. Scale = 5 cm.
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI
195
Fig. 23. Reconstruction of Heterodontosaurus tucki.
196 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
joints. Proximally, a deep intercondylar groove separates the steep-walled
condylar articular surfaces; a cross-section of the joint surface here would show
a narrow W. A deep pit lies on the dorsum of the phalanx proximal to the
articular surface. The condyles are quite extensive; in side view, they describe an
arc of somewhat more than 180°. To fit the deep intercondylar groove, the base
of the succeeding phalanx has a steep, V-shaped articular surface. The base also
has a prominent dorsal keel which reaches the extensor pit of the opposing
phalanx. The collateral ligaments were apparently quite robust: a deep pit for
the ligament on the lower half of the condyle lies opposite a tubercle for its
attachment near the ventral margin of the apposed phalanx.
The terminal joint between ungual and penultimate phalanx differs from
the interphalangeal joints only in that the pit for the collateral ligament lies near
the dorsal margin of the penultimate phalanx. The ungual phalanges are trans-
versely compressed claws but are not greatly recurved. They have a groove
along their length both laterally and medially.
Comparisons
The ilium of H. tucki resembles that of Hypsilophodon most closely amongst
ornithopods (also that of Protiguanodon and Psittacosaurus should they be
classed as ornithopods). The ilia of Camptosaurus and Thescelosaurus have a
much deeper brevis shelf. Hadrosaur ilia have the dinosaurian antitrochanter
which the ilium of H. tucki does not have. The ilium of Jguanodon differs in having
a slightly reflected dorsal supra-acetabular margin and deeper post-acetabular
blade. Amongst the non-ornithopods, the ilium of Protoceratops is remarkably
similar to that of H. tucki. |
The prepubis of H. tucki is similar to that of Fabrosaurus and Scelidosaurus.
The pubis of ornithopods generally has a much longer prepubic process, some-
times associated with a greatly reduced postpubic process (hadrosaurs). A short
prepubic process (but with a short postpubic process unlike that of H. tucki)
can be found in the pelvis of Psittacosaurus, Protiguanodon and Protoceratops.
The ischium of H. tucki has few parallels within the ornithopods; it is
similar only to Psittacosaurus, Protiguanodon and the pachycephalosaurs, all of
which are doubtful ornithopods. Conversely, all non-ornithopodous ornithi-
schians resemble H. tucki in the lack of an obturator process.
The femur of H. tucki, with the lesser trochanter not demarcated from the
femoral shaft, cannot be matched in any ornithopod. The femora of some
ankylosaurs, some stegosaurs (S. ungulatus (Gilmore 1914)) and Triceratops are
similar (the trochanters are separated by a small notch in Protoceratops).
In this respect, H. tucki is more similar to theropod dinosaurs.
In general morphology, the tibia of H. tucki resembles that of Hypsilophodon
and Fabrosaurus. However, the fusion of tibia—fibula and astragalus—calcaneum
into a functional tibiotarsus does not seem to have an equivalent within the
ornithischians.
The pes of H. tucki is less distinctive than the tibiotarsus and similar to that
f "SSS a ar a in
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 197
of many light ornithopods: Fabrosaurus, Hypsilophodon, and Dryosaurus
(Galton 1977). The pes also resembles that of Thescelosaurus and Camptosaurus
in the closely applied proximal metatarsals; but these heavy bipedal forms have
proximodistally compressed phalanges unlike those of H. tucki. Outside the
ornithopods, the pes most closely resembles that of Microceratops and to a
lesser extent that of Protoceratops.
‘DISCUSSION
Diagnosis
Order ORNITHISCHIA
Suborder incertae subordinis
Family Heterodontosauridae Romer, 1966; Kuhn, 1966
The following diagnosis of Heterodontosaurus tucki Crompton & Charig,
1962, is based on the postcranial skeleton of SAM-—K1332: short presacral
column of 21 vertebrae (9 cervical + 12 dorsal), sacrum with 6 fused vertebrae;
at least 34 caudal vertebrae; ossified tendons present in dorsal and sacral
region, but absent from caudal. Scapula elongate relative to trunk; humerus
with large deltopectoral crest and large entepicondyle; humerus lacks posterior
intercondylar fossa; ulna with olecranon process; nine carpal bones, one of
which occupies a position analogous to the os centrale; digits 1-3 parallel,
digits 4 and 5 reduced and abducted. Ilium with articular boss analogous to
avian antitrochanter; prepubis short but deep, postpubis as long as ischium;
ischium without obturator process; greater and lesser femoral trochanters not
separated by cleft; transverse axis of distal femoral surface obliquely oriented;
fibula reduced and fused with tibia; astragalus—calcaneum fused with each other
and to the tibia—fibula; three distal tarsals present, all fused to each other and
metatarsal heads; metatarsals 1-4 fused.
~ Morphological interpretation
The functional importance of several morphological features may not be
entirely clear from the foregoing descriptions. In particular, the orientation of
the vertebral column and the posture of the forelimb and hind limb should be
discussed.
In the vertebral column, a strong flexion is induced in the cervical region
by the shape of the centra (Fig. 5A). The posterior cervicals are especially
. important in this: their trapezoidal outline combined with their shortness
_ creates an abrupt flexion at the transition from dorsal to cervical region.
Secondly, ossified tendons are present only in the dorsal region of the vertebral
column; the back was therefore a rigid structure, the ossified tendons presumably
acting to resist flexion and support the trunk during bipedal progression.
Thirdly, the tail of H. tucki was not strengthened by ossified tendons. This is
probably not a vagary of preservation since the caudals are by far the best
198 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
preserved vertebrae. Consequently, the tail was not a rigid structure as inferred
for some other ornithischians such as Hypsilophodon and hadrosaurs, but was
flexible and mobile.
The hind limb of H. tucki cannot be articulated at a right angle to the long
axis of the illum. The presence of the avian-like antitrochanter required the
femoral long axis to lie at 45° or less to the iliac long axis. In normal resting
position, the femur would thus be protracted. There is a further similarity to
birds since the femur must also be abducted relative to the midsagittal plane.
This clearly follows from the oblique orientation of the inferior femoral surface:
only in abduction of the femur would the femorotibial joint of H. tucki be
horizontal and thus stable. This is completely analogous to the structure of birds
in which the inferior femoral articular surface is also oblique. It might be argued
that since known dinosaur trackways are narrow, the hind limb could not have
been abducted in any dinosaur. However, it must be remembered that in birds,
in spite of femoral abduction, rotation about the knee joint of the supporting
limb brings the body weight over this limb and close to the centre of gravity,
creating a narrow trackway. A similar system is to be expected in H. tucki
because of the very close structural similarity to the avian hind limb and joint
surfaces.
Many features of the forelimb can be interpreted as quadrupedal
adaptations; however, the evidence is not unequivocal. As already noted, the
ulna of H. tucki has a relatively large olecranon process. Such a feature is
usually considered a quadrupedal adaptation since it increases the lever arm of |
the ulna; indeed, the forelimb itself is relatively large compared to that of
Fabrosaurus and Hypsilophodon. The large entepicondyle of the humerus
indicates powerful forearm flexor and rotational musculature, a further sign of
quadrupedal capabilities. In addition, presence of a large entepicondyle has been
interpreted by Bakker (1971) as a key feature in the sprawling gait of primitive
tetrapods. Finally, the large flexor tubercle of the unguals may be associated
with a powerful propulsive stroke during push-off. Thus the forelimb of H. tucki
quite clearly had the structure requisite for quadrupedal locomotion.
However, each trait may also be interpreted as a feature of a powerful,
grasping manus. In the case of a manipulative hand, the skeletal features
associated with forelimb flexion would also be emphasized. Only the olecranon
process does not seem to fit this interpretation; yet, the coelurosaur Syntarsus
(Raath 1969) has a grasping hand and also an elongate olecranon. Furthermore,
it is quite possible that the forelimb and hand of H. tucki performed a dual
function, in locomotion and feeding, as in living sciurids.
Unfortunately, the orientation of the forelimb in H. tucki cannot be
precisely determined. The humeral head is smooth and rather amorphous and
the glenoid is somewhat saddle-shaped. Haines (1952) has pointed out that in
living reptiles the ligaments surrounding the shoulder joint, not the joint
surfaces themselves, are primarily responsible for determining the range of
humeral movements. The long axis of the scapula would have been more or less
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 199
parallel to the vertebral column, as found in articulated skeletons of hadrosaurs ;
consequently, the long axis of the glenoid would have been horizontal. The lack
of a posterior intercondylar groove on the humerus is most unusual since that
would have severely restricted forelimb extension. Furthermore, the extent of
forelimb rotation which would have been possible is indeterminate: the radial
condyle of the humerus is not rounded but ellipsoid or ridge-like; this would
seem to restrict rotation, yet a similar condylar structure in Sphenodon permits
about 45° pronation/supination (Haines 1946). The orientation of the humeral
condyles is similar to those of Sphenodon and Varanus; thus, even with 45°
rotation the humerus of H. tucki would have to have been abducted somewhat
(approaching a semi-sprawling position) for the palmar surface of the manus
to contact the ground. Thus, a fully erect gait (as described by Bakker 1971)
is questionable for the forelimb of H. tucki.
Heterodontosaurus and Fabrosaurus
The extent of the difference between these two genera must be appreciated
for an understanding of ornithischian phylogeny (see Table 1). Heterodonto-
saurus and Fabrosaurus represent a schism in ornithischian structure which
cannot be contained within a single family. A whole series of anatomical
characters separates these genera, many of which reflect the differences in
ornithopods and non-ornithopods of the Jurassic—Cretaceous.
_ These distinctions are important because Galton (1978: 154) has contended
that fabrosaurids were either directly or indirectly ancestral to heterodonto-
TABLE 1
Differences in the postcranial skeleton of H. tucki and Fabrosaurus (Thulborn 1972)
Feature
forelimb and hand
humerus
humerus
ulna
ilium
ilium
ischium
trochanters
fourth trochanter
~femoral condyles
- tibia—fibula
proximal tarsals
distal tarsals
proximal metatarsals
ossified tendons
H. tucki
relatively and absolutely larger
posterior intercondylar groove
absent
entepicondyle large
olecranon process present
posterior process shallow
presence of ‘avian antitro-
chanter’
obturator process absent
greater and lesser continuous
rod-shaped
no intercondylar grooves
fused
fused to each other and tibia—
fibula
fused to each other and meta-
tarsal heads
square in X-section
absent in caudal region
Fabrosaurus
relatively and absolutely smaller
posterior intercondylar groove
present
entepicondyle absent
no olecranon process
posterior process deep
dorsal acetabular margin roofed
obturator process present
greater and lesser divided by
cleft
triangular, blade-like
posterior intercondylar groove
only
separate
separate
separate
lateromedially compressed
present in caudal region
200 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
saurids. However, he offered no anatomical comparisons to substantiate how
such a derivation could have occurred. When the distinctions listed in Table 1
are taken into account, it would be almost impossible to derive H. tucki from a
fabrosaurid: the smaller forelimb skeleton, the acetabular morphology, the
obturator process, the configuration of the femoral trochanters make Fabro-
saurus a most unlikely ancestor for H. tucki. However, a more primitive
heterodontosaurid, without the specializations of H. tucki (e.g. without the
caniniform teeth, without the jugal boss, without the functional tibiotarsus and
tarsometatarsus) could be ancestral to the fabrosaurids or hypsilophodonts.
It also follows from the above distinctions that H. tuckiis not a hypsilopho-
dontid as Thulborn (1970a, 1970, 1971a, 19716, 1972) has previously contended.
The absence of the obturator process is alone sufficient to distinguish unequi-
vocally the two forms. The taxonomic significance for ornithischians of
differences in pelvic structure cannot be ignored. Yet, Thulborn and Galton
have done precisely this, the former in trying to make H. tucki a hypsilopho-
dontid, the latter in trying to derive H. tucki from a fabrosaurid.
The importance of H. tucki
The distinctions between Fabrosaurus and H. tucki and the improbability
that the latter evolved from a fabrosaurid have important implications for
ornithischian evolution. Firstly, since H. tucki is a specialized ornithischian,
particularly in comparison with Fabrosaurus, its specialized nature implies a
derivation from a more conservative and stratigraphically older ornithischian.
H. tucki thus implies the existence of an heterodontosaurid-like radiation of
which it is a product: that is, a radiation of non-fabrosaurid, non-hypsilopho-
dontid ornithischians. Thus, the distinctions between the ornithopods and the
non-ornithopods of the Cretaceous appear in incipient form in the Triassic.
| Secondly, the existence of heterodontosaurids discredits the notion of a
‘hypsilophodont plexus’ (Thulborn 19715); that is, that hypsilophodonts were
ancestral to all other ornithischians, including the major groups of Jurassic—
Cretaceous non-ornithopods. Galton recently advanced a similar hypothesis
(1978), that the fabrosaurids were ancestral to all other ornithischian dinosaurs.
The existence of heterodontosaurids discredits both hypotheses, primarily
because the heterodontosaurids themselves cannot be derived from either
hypsilophodonts or fabrosaurids. In addition, because heterodontosaurids lack
an obturator process but have quadrupedal as well as bipedal capabilities, they
are better structural precursors for the later non-ornithopod groups than are
fabrosaurids/hypsilophodonts. Thus, though H. tucki itself could not be ancestral
to a later non-ornithopod such as Microceratops, a heterodontosaurid or a
derivative of the heterodontosaurid radiation (without the derived specializa-
tions of H. tucki) is a much more likely ancestor than a fabrosaurid or hypsilo-
phodont. Consequently, the notion of a hypsilophodont plexus or fabrosaurid
basal stock should be restricted to the phylogeny of those ornithischians with an
obturator process.
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 201
The significance of the obturator process
The existence of a fundamental evolutionary dichotomy within the
ornithischia, based on the presence or absence of the ischial obturator process
would be controverted, at least in part, if it could be shown that some non-
ornithopod had an ornithopod (sensu stricto) ancestry. The case in point is the
Ceratopsia. It has been speculated that Psittacosaurus and Protiguanodon
represent the ancestral group (Romer 1966) of the ceratopsians or at least a
related group (Maryanska & Osmdlska 1975). However, by the definitions
proposed in this paper, Psittacosaurus and Protiguanodon are clearly not
ornithopods and their assumed ancestry to ceratopsians proves nothing about a
supposed ornithopod ancestry of ceratopsians. Maryariska & Osmdlska (1975)
even place the psittacosaurids within the suborder Ceratopsia which makes the
question of ‘ornithopod’ ancestry moot.
This, however, merely throws the question back to the origin of psittaco-
saurs. Thulborn (19715) stated that psittacosaurs resemble hypsilophodonts in
postcranial anatomy but gave no specifics. Unfortunately, Thulborn included
both heterodontosaurids and hypsilophodonts (sensu stricto) in his category
Hypsilophodontidae. In postcranial structure, H. tucki clearly resembles the
psittacosaurs as much as the hypsilophodonts (sensu stricto) do. For instance,
and most importantly, the psittacosaurs and H. tucki lack the obturator process
which all hypsilophodonts have; the precaudal vertebral count (27) is reduced
relative to Hypsilophodon (30) but is the same as H. tucki; the ossified tendons of
psittacosaurs extend only from the anterior dorsal to the anterior caudal region,
not through the entire caudal region as in Hypsilophodon; and the tibiotarsus is
closely joined, though not united, in psittacosaurs, but completely free in
hypsilophodonts and fused in H. tucki. At this simplistic level of analysis,
psittacosaurs are no more similar to hypsilophodonts than to H. tucki.
In a further attempt to derive ceratopsians from hypsilophodonts, Thulborn
derived the protoceratopsids from hypsilophodonts on the basis of certain
“primitive characters, the only one of which he mentioned was the presence of
premaxillary teeth. However, such similarities mean nothing since they are
symplesiomorphies. Other characters Thulborn used to join ceratopsians with
hypsilophodonts also fall into this category, i.e. a nasal-maxilla contact. In fact,
no sound evidence exists to support a hypsilophodont (sensu stricto) ancestry
of ceratopsians in preference to a non-hypsilophodont ancestry.
The existence of a fundamental evolutionary dichotomy within the
Ornithischia would also be controverted if it could be shown that the absence of
-an obturator process were due to secondary loss. However, the hypothesis of
_ secondary loss of the obturator process in non-ornithopod Jurassic—Cretaceous
ornithischians is but an assumption; the fact is, no evidence exists that these
forms have ever possessed such a process. But the hypothesis will be examined
anyway; it will be shown that secondary loss is less plausible than a hypothesis
of original absence for several reasons.
Of the five major divisions within the Ornithischia, only the ornithopods
202 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
possessed an obturator process; according to the loss hypothesis, therefore,
stegosaurs, ceratopsians, ankylosaurs and pachycephalosaurs first possessed and
then lost this trait. For a structure which must have had some adaptive
significance to develop in the first place, this is a poor record of adaptive value.
It could be assumed that the process was lost because it was not necessary for
quadrupedal forms but was for bipedal forms. However, if the obturator
process were important for bipedal progression, why did it first appear and then
disappear in the lineages represented by pachycephalosaurs, psittacosaurs,
H. tucki and Microceratops which were all bipedally adapted ornithischians?
The most plausible, logical and evolutionarily sound answer is that the obturator
process never existed in these forms. According to the loss hypothesis, the only
reason the obturator process would have disappeared was that an animal had
taken up a quadrupedal mode of locomotion; the bipedal ancestors of these
animals should, therefore, have possessed an obturator process. However, in the
only test case available, the Ceratopsia, all the related bipedal forms (psittaco-
saurs and Microceratops) do not have an obturator process. This is certainly
contradictory; it is more plausible to assume that the obturator process never
existed in these forms than to assume it was lost secondarily.
The obturator process is clearly related to bipedalism within the
Ornithischia since no known quadrupedal form possesses this process. While
some bipeds did not have an obturator process, the most successful bipedal
ornithischians (in terms of diversity) did have this process. In addition, the only
large bipedal ornithischians (e.g. Jzwanodon, Camptosaurus and hadrosaurs) all
possessed the process. Bipedal ornithischians without the obturator process,
H. tucki, Microceratops, psittacosaurs, and the pachycephalosaurs of Mongolia,
are all relatively small dinosaurs. If the obturator process were really functionally
important in an efficient bipedal gait in larger animals, then, as descendants of
the small bipedal forms increased in size, they assumed a quadrupedal gait. This
is presumably what occurred during the evolution of ceratopsians; thus, the lack
of an obturator process was not due to secondary loss.
H. tucki and ornithischian classification
While the ornithischian status of H. tucki cannot be questioned, its sub-
ordinal classification is problematical. As defined and used, the Ornithopoda are
bipedal ornithischians (Romer 1956: 627-628). The inadequacy of placing all
bipedal ornithischians within the Ornithopoda has become apparent recently as
more varied ornithischian types are discovered and described. For example,
both the pachycephalosaurs and Microceratops differ greatly from typical
ornithopods such as Hypsilophodon yet they are certainly bipedal. Should these
forms be included in the Ornithopoda, the meaning of this category in terms of
representing ornithischian evolution would be almost nil.
H. tucki presents the same classificatory difficuity as pachycephalosaurs,
Microceratops, Protiguanodon and Psittacosaurus. Since the ancestors of the
quadrupedal non-ornithopods were very likely bipeds, as Microceratops
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 203
indicates for the ceratopsids, then bipedalism is not limited to any one phylo-
genetic lineage in the Ornithischia but is distributed throughout the various
phyletic lines. Consequently, to classify all bipedally adapted ornithischians as
ornithopods only confuses the phylogeny of the Ornithischia by creating a
paraphyletic group. Since H. tucki is phylogenetically divergent from orni-
thopods such as hypsilophodonts and iguanodonts, then it makes little sense to
classify H. tucki as an ornithopod. Furthermore, since H. tucki could not have
been derived from a fabrosaurid, it is even less desirable to classify it as an
ornithopod.
However, the real problem here is not H. tucki, but rather the definition of
the Ornithopoda and this should be dealt with first. The Ornithopoda could be
defined as only those ornithischians which possess an obturator process on the
ischium. This basic dichotomy in the ornithischians should finally be recognized,
particularly since pelvic structure has tremendous taxonomic value for both
groups of dinosaurs. The Ornithopoda would thus be defined on the basis of a
probable derived character and approximate a natural group much more than
under the other definition. The obturator process is usually considered a
primitive structure for the ornithischians, while its absence has usually been
attributed to loss. However, the converse seems more likely: the obturator
process is a new, derived structure, not present in other archosaurs; conse-
quently, the presence of the process must be explained, not its absence. The
Ornithopoda thus defined could be placed in two infraorders, one comprising a
lineage represented by hypsilophodonts and related forms such as fabrosaurids,
the other comprising the lineage represented by iguanodonts and hadrosaurs.
The non-ornithopods such as stegosaurs and ankylosaurs could be included
in a single suborder as separate infraorders, but this would define the suborder
on the basis of a symplesiomorphy (lack of an obturator process) and would not
be equivalent to the suborder Ornithopoda. It would be preferable to leave
these groups as separate suborders since these can be defined on the basis of
- derived characters and are thus equivalent to the suborder Ornithopoda.
As aconsequence of this redefinition, H. tuckiis certainly not an ornithopod,
yet it does not clearly fit into any other suborder. This should not cause surprise
since the cranial and postcranial material for the heterodontosaurids and
Triassic ornithischians is still somewhat limited. The family has been known
only for a short time; until further material is found which defines the extent of
the heterodontosaurid radiation, the family should simply be ‘incertae
subordinis’. The situation is like that of pachycephalosaurs which were too
- poorly known to classify for a long time.
SUMMARY
H. tucki was a very small Late Triassic ornithischian dinosaur about 1 m
long. The postcranial skeleton combines an elongate hind limb adapted to
bipedal locomotion and a moderate but not reduced forelimb adapted to
204 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
quadrupedal locomotion and/or grasping movements of the hand. H. tucki was
undoubtedly a facultative biped; a quadrupedal gait was probably used during
slow locomotion, perhaps while foraging. The elbow structure suggests that a
semi-sprawling attitude of the forelimb was possible. The pelvic structure
indicates that the femur was both abducted and protracted, creating a stance
similar to, but not the same as, that of birds.
The hind limb proportions of H. tucki show an elongated tibia and meta-
tarsus relative to the femur. This is usually interpreted as a cursorial adaptation
(e.g. Galton 1974), though no sound evidential basis exists for this inference.
Certainly, to infer cursorial habits in a bipedal reptile from the hind limb
proportions of living quadrupedal mammals is questionable. Different taxa have
different base levels from which cursorial limb proportions develop; thus,
comparisons across groups may mean very little. H. tucki may or may not have
been cursorial: this inference could only be substantiated by comparisons with
the hind limb proportions of other heterodontosaurids; these, however, are
presently unknown. 3
The classification of H. tucki within the Ornithischia is complicated by the
inadequate definition of the Ornithopoda. Once it is accepted that not all bipeds
must be classed as ornithopods, then a better definition can be given based on
the presence or absence of the obturator process. H. tucki need not be placed in
the Ornithopoda; rather, it is taken as a representative of an early non-
ornithopod radiation which is presently too poorly known to warrant subordinal
or infraordinal distinction. However, if H. tucki is representative of other
heterodontosaurids, then they are more likely structural and phyletic precursors —
to at least some non-ornithopods than are the fabrosaurids.
H. tucki seems to represent a basic cleavage in the Ornithischia. The only
two well-known Triassic ornithischians fall on either side of this division which
mirrors the differences in pelvic structure of Jurassic-Cretaceous ornithopods
and non-ornithopods. Though H. tucki probably represents an early non-
ornithopod radiation, it does not itself seem to be ancestral to any known later
ornithischian. Similarities with primitive ceratopsians are suggestive but
difficult to interpret. Nor does H. tucki help in the search for ornithischian
origins, because its structure is already typically ornithischian. Its features do
not point to any special group in the thecodonts. This implies a considerable but
indeterminate independent phylogenetic history for the Ornithischia.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I wish to thank Dr T. H. Barry, Director of the South African Museum,
Cape Town, for permission to study the material described here. I am very
grateful to Dr A. W. Crompton, Director of the Museum of Comparative
Zoology, Harvard University, for the use of the material, permission to photo-
graph it and for many valuable discussions and comments during the prepara-
tion of this manuscript. Dr A. J. Charig, British Museum (Natural History),
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 205
also offered valuable criticisms. The postcranial material described here was
prepared by Mr Arnie Lewis (now of the U.S. National Museum, Washington,
D.C.), and by Mr Chuck Schaff and Mr Bill Amaral of the Museum of Com-
parative Zoology. The skull was prepared at the South African Museum. The
drawings were prepared by Ms M. L. Estey at the Museum of Comparative
Zoology, Harvard University; the stereophotographs were taken by Mr Alan
Coleman, also of the Museum of Comparative Zoology. The photograph of
the skull was taken by Mr Neville Eden of the South African Museum. The
remaining photographs were prepared by the author. This research was con-
ducted while the author was in the Department of Anthropology, Peabody
Museum, Harvard University, and later in the Department of Anatomy,
Harvard Medical School. The Department of Celi Biology, The University of
Texas Health Science Center at Dallas, provided funds for the completion of
the manuscript.
REFERENCES
BAKKER, R. T. 1971. Dinosaur physiology and the origin of mammals. Evolution, Lancaster, Pa.
25: 636-658.
BAKKER, R. T. & GALTON, P. M. 1974. Dinosaur monophyly and a new class of vertebrates.
Nature, Lond. 248: 168-172.
BONAPARTE, J. F. 1976. Pisanosaurus mertii Casamiquela and the origin of the Ornithischia.
J. Paleont. 50: 808-820.
Broom, R. 1911. On the dinosaurs of the Stormberg, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 7:
291-308.
Brown, B. & SCHLAIKJER, E. M. 1940. The structure and relationships of Protoceratops.
Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 40: 133-266.
CASAMIQUELA, R. M. 1967. Un nuevo dinosaurio ornitisquio tridsica (Pisanosaurus mertii;
Ornithopoda) de la Formacion Ischigualasto, Argentina. Ameghiniana 5: 47-64.
CHARIG, A. J. & CrompTON, A. W. 1974. The alleged synonymy of Lycorhinus and Hetero-
dontosaurus. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 64: 167-189.
Coomss, W. P., Jun. 1978a. The families of the ornithischian dinosaur order Ankylosauria.
Palaeontology 21: 143-170.
Coomss, W. P., Jun. 1978b. Forelimb muscles of the Ankylosauria (Reptilia, Ornithischia).
J. Paleont. 52: 642-657.
CroMpPTON, A. W. & CHARIG, A. J. 1962. A new ornithischian from the Upper Triassic of
South Africa. Nature, Lond. 196: 1074-1077.
GALTON, P. M. 1969. The pelvic musculature of the dinosaur Hypsilophodon (Reptilia:
Ornithischia). Postilla 131: 1-64.
GALTON, P. M. 1972. Classification and evolution of ornithopod dinosaurs. Nature, Lond.
239: 464-466.
GALTON, P. M. 1974. The ornithischian dinosaur Hypsilophodon from the Wealden of the
Isle of Wight. Bull. Br. Mus. Nat. Hist. (Geol.) 25(1): 1-152.
GALTON, P. M. 1977. The ornithopod dinosaur Dryosaurus and a Laurasia-Gondwanaland
connection in the Upper Jurassic. Nature, Lond. 268: 230-232.
GALTON, P. M. 1978. Fabrosauridae, the basal family of ornithischian dinosaurs (Reptilia:
Ornithopoda). Paldont. Z. 52: 138-159.
GILmMoreE, C. W. 1909. Osteology of the Jurassic reptile Camptosaurus, with a revision of the
species of the genus, and descriptions of two new species. Proc. U.S. natn. Mus. 36:
197-332.
GiLmorE, C. W. 1914. Osteology of the armored dinosauria in the United States National
Museum, with special reference to the genus Stegosaurus. Bull. U.S. natn. Mus. 89: 1-143.
206 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
GiILMorE, C. W. 1915. Osteology of Thescelosaurus, an orthopodous dinosaur from the Lance
formation of Wyoming. Proc. U.S. natn. Mus. 49: 591-616.
GINSBERG, L. 1964. Découverte d’un scélidosaurien (dinosaure ornithischien) dans le Trias
supérieur du Basutoland. C. r. hebd. Séanc. Acad. Sci., Paris 258: 2366-2368.
Gow, C. E. 1975. A new heterodontosaurid of the Red Beds of South Africa showing clear
evidence of tooth replacement. Zool. J. Linn. Soc. 57: 335-339.
GREGORY, W. K. & Camp, C. L. 1918. Studies in comparative myology and osteology. No. III.
Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 38: 447-563.
HAINES, R. W. 1939. A revision of the extensor muscles of the forearm in tetrapods. J. Anat. 73:
211-233.
Haines, R. W. 1946. A revision of the movements of the forearm in tetrapods. J. Anat. 80:
1-11.
HAINES, R. W. 1952. The shoulder joint of lizards and the primitive reptilian shoulder
mechanism. J. Anat. 86: 412-422.
HATCHER, J. B., MARSH, O. C. & LULL, R. S. 1907. The Ceratopsia. Monogr. U.S. geol. Surv.
49: 1-300.
HAuGHTON, S. H. 1924. The fauna and stratigraphy of the Stormberg Series. Ann. S. Afr. Mus.
12: 323-497.
Hoo ey, R. W. 1925. On the skeleton of Iguanodon atherfieldensis sp. nov., from the Wealden
shales of Atherfield (Isle of Wight). QO. J] geol. Soc. Lond. 81: 1-60
Hopson, J. A. 1975. On the generic separation of the ornithischian dinosaurs Lycorhinus and
Heterodontosaurus from the Stormberg Series (Upper Triassic) of South Africa. S. Afr.
J. Sci. 71: 302-305.
JOHNSON, A. 1883. On the development of the pelvic girdle and skeleton of the hindlimb in the
chick. Q. JI Microsc. Sci. 23: 399-411.
Kuan, O. 1966. Die Reptilien, System und Stammesgeschicte. Krailling bei Mitinchen: Oeben.
LuLL, R. S. 1933. A revision of the Ceratopsia or horned dinosaurs. Mem. Peabody Mus.
Yale 3: 1-135.
LULL, R. S. & WRIGHT, N. E. 1942. Hadrosaurian dinosaurs of North America. Spec. Pap.
geol. Soc. Am. 40: 1-242.
MARSH , 0. C. 1877. Notice of some new vertebrate fossils. Amer. J. Sci. 14: 249-256.
MARYANSKA, T. & OSMOLSKA, H. 1974. Pachycephalosauria, a new suborder of ornithischian
dinosaurs. Palaeont. pol. 30: 45-102.
MaryANnskA, T. & OsmorsKA, H. 1975. Protoceratopsidae (Dinosauria) of ee Palaeont. pol.
33: 133-181.
OsBORN, H. F. 1923. Two Lower Cretaceous dinosaurs of Mongolia. Am. Mus. Novit. 95:
1-10.
OsBorn, H. F. 1924. Pssitacosaurus and Protiguanodon: two Lower Cretaceous iguanodonts
from Mongolia. Am. Mus. Novit. 127: 1-16.
OwEN, R. 1861. On the fossil Reptilia of the Wealden and Purbeck formations: Part 5.
Palaeontogr. Soc. (Monogr.): 31-39.
RaatH, M. A. 1969. A new coelurosaurian dinosaur from the Forest Sandstone of Rhodesia.
Arnoldia 4 (28): 1-25.
Romer, A. S. 1927a. The pelvic musculature of ornithischian dinosaurs. Acta Zool., Stockh. 8
225-275.
Romer, A. S. 1927b. The development of the thigh musculature of the chick. J. Morph. 43:
347-385.
Romer, A. S. 1942. The development of tetrapod limb musculature—the thigh of Lacerta.
J. Morph. 71: 251-297.
Romer, A. S. 1956. Ostenlogy of the Reptiles. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Romer, A. S. 1966. Vertebrate Paleontology. 3rd ed. Chicago, London: University of Chicago
Press.
SANTA Luca, A. P., CROMPTON, A. W. & CHARIG, A. J. 1976. A complete skeleton of the Late
Triassic ornithischian Heterodontosaurus tucki. Nature, Lond. 264: 324-328.
THULBORN, R. A. 1970a. The skull of Fabrosaurus australis, a Triassic ornithischian dinosaur.
Palaeontology 13: 414-432.
THULBORN, R. A. 1970b. The systematic position of the Triassic ornithischian dinosaur
Lycorhinus angustidens. Zool. J. Linn. Soc. 49: 235-245.
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 207
THULBORN, R. A. 197la. Toothwear and jaw action in the Triassic ornithischian dinosaur
Fabrosaurus. J. Zool., Lond. 164: 165-179.
THULBORN, R. A. 19715. Origins and evolution of ornithischian dinosaurs. Nature, Lond. 234:
75-78.
THULBORN, R. A. 1972. The post-cranial skeleton of the Triassic ornithischian dinosaur
Fabrosaurus australis. Palaeontology 15: 29-60.
THULBORN, R. A. 1974. A new heterodontosaurid dinosaur (Reptilia: Ornithischia) from the
Upper Triassic Red Beds of Lesotho. Zool. J. Linn. Soc. 55: 151-175.
THULBORN, R. A. 1978. Aestivation among ornithopod dinosaurs of the African Trias.
Lethaia 11: 185-198.
WALKER, A. D. 1977. Evolution of the pelvis in birds and dinosaurs. Jn: ANDREWS, S. M..,
Migs, R. S., & WALKER, A. D. Problems in Vertebrate Evolution: 319-358. London:
Academic Press.
ABBREVIATIONS
ap acromial process
ar anterior ridge of cervical centra
at avian-like antitrochanter
C coracoid
Cc calcaneum
ca capitulum
ch chevron
cn cnemial crest
cp coronoid process
cr calcaneal ridge
ct coracoid tubercle
d diaphophysis
de deltopectoral crest
dt _ distal tarsal
ee entepicondyle
i. vertical flange, ventral surface of metatarsals
ft flexor tubercle
gt glenoid tubercle
hh humeral head
if ischial flange: possible attachment of flexor tibialis internus and ischio-trochantericus
IL _ilium
ir _ iliac ridge: attachment of ilio-tibialis and ilio-fibularis
IS = ischium
it infra-acetabular tubercle: possible attachment of accessorius
met metacarpal tubercle
ms neural spine
odp odontoid process of axis
op olecranon process
ot _ ossified tendons
p pubis
pa parapophysis
pd pit on dorsal surface of metacarpal or metatarsal
pi _ pisiform
pr posterior ridge of cervical centra
poz postzygapophysis
prz prezygapophysis for atlantal neural arch
pt tubercles on prepubic process
R radius
if ridge above radial condyle of humerus
re __radiale
tt _— radial tubercle
208
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
scapula
sulcus between cnemial crest and lateral buttress of tibial shaft
tuberculum
fourth trochanter
greater trochanter
lesser trochanter
tuberosity medial to humeral head
ulna
ulnare
ulnar ridge
ventral keel
ventral ridge delimiting fossa beneath transverse process
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 209
APPENDIX 1
Measurements of the postcranial skeleton of H. tucki (SAM-—K1332), in mm.
(NA = not available; the lengths of some vertebral centra were determined from radiographs
and these are noted in the table; parentheses indicate approximate measurements.)
SCAPULA
Max. length
Max. proximal width
Max. distal width .
Min. blade breadth
CORACOID
Max. length
Max. width
Min. width
HUMERUS
Max. length : :
Proximal transverse width
Max. distal width (transverse)
Least shaft diameter :
Length: deltopectoral crest .
RADIUS
Max. length
Max. proximal width
Max. distal width .
Least shaft diameter
ULNA
Max. length :
Max. proximal width
Max. distal width .
Least shaft diameter
Length: base of sigmoid notch-distal end .
ILIUM
Max. length : ;
Length: anterior end to middle of acetabulum
Length: posterior end to middle of acetabulum
Min. height above acetabular rim
ISCHIUM
Max. length
Max. height
Least shaft diameter
PUBIS
Max. length A
Height at anterior end of prepubic process
Length: to anterior wall of obturator foramen.
Length: from anterior wall of obturator foramen to
distal end
FEMUR
Max. length a
Proximal transverse width
Distal transverse width
Least shaft diameter 2
Max. proximal A-P width .
Max. distal A—P width .
LEFT
67,7
15,2 including
coronoid process)
210 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
FEMUR (cont.) LEFT RIGHT
Distal attachment of 4th trochanter to proximal end
of femur ~ -. : A f : : . 46,1 NA
Length of 4th trochanter : 5 ; 2 : i OBS 14,0
(broken)
TIBIA
Max. length . . . (144) 145,0
Max. proximal transverse width (without fibula) . NA 11,7
Max. distal transverse width : : ; : hs 9:8 2D
Max. proximal A—P width . : ; : ‘ . 30,6 NA
Max. distal A—P width . : ; : : ; a Sst 13,9
Least shaft diameter . : ; ’ : ; Br RED. 8,3
MANUS— RIGHT
DIGIT I MC Ph 1 UNGUAL
R L R L R L
Max. length .. mire een ea UNleeD 17,6 16,6 16,5 16,5 18,2
Proximal transverse width Se, Acoma es Lee Ors 9,1 6,6 NA 4,6 NA
Distal transverse width Sith ee ee | 16,0 NA 4,8 NA NA NA
Length along outer curve . ; : 23 23
DIGIT II MC Ph 1 -— Ph UNGUAL
R L R L R Ec R L
Max. length . ees. NA 15,6 isa 16,7 NA (18) NA
Proximal transverse
Width. 3° es 2) °6.0 a3 6,1 NA 5,0 NA 4,0 NA
Distal transverse ,
width . ae OO NA Syl NA 4,2 NA NA NA
Length along outer
CULVE” © eee (21) NA
DIGIT III MC Ph 1 Ph 2 Ph 3 UNGUAL
R L R L R L R EL R &
Max. length .. . 21,4 22.4 14,1. 13,0 12,1 12,6 “NA GSS Nee ig0
Proximal transverse
width . : . 58 5,7. 62 NA 47 NA. “4,05 INAS =o
Distal transverse width . 64 NA °5,0 NA ° 4,2’ -_NA -NA© NASSNARINA
Length along outer curve NA_ (20)
DIGIT IV MC Ph 1 Ph 2 UNGUAL
R L R IG R L R L
Max. length . . 14:5 (15) 6,8 6,6 4,6 4,6 PIG | NA
Proximal transverse
width . Pets AGS 5,8 NA 3,3 NA 2,6 1,8 NA
Distal transverse
WiGthi i.e = "5 sae3h7, 3,8 NA 2,6 NA NA NA NA
PES—RIGHT ONLY
DIGIT I MT Ph 1 UNGUAL
Max. length 5 eis 3 Sl wad ee ONL 173 17,6
Proximal transverse width i 5 . . NA NA NA
Distalitransverse width- ~~ * - <2,“ =6:1 4,7 NA
Length along outer curve ee ees 20
DIGIT II MT Ph 1 Ph2 UNGUAL
Max. length see Nie BOS o 2 + peepee 351) | 19,4 155 20,9
Proximal transverse width ; : ‘ . NA NA NA NA
Distal transverse width °° 5) 575° 2) (8) NA NA NA
Length along outer curve eee 24
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI 21]
DIGIT III
Max. length “ee ae
Proximal transverse width
Distal transverse width
Length along outer curve
DIGIT IV
Max. length . , ;
Proximal transverse width
Distal transverse width
Length along outer curve
Vertebra No.
Presacrals
Axis
MT Ph Ph 2 Ph 3 UNGUAL
67,9 21,8 15,6 14,4 (18)
5,9 (9) 7,8 6,7 (5,5)
8,9 7,4 6,5 57 NA
(20)
MT Ph 1 Ph 2 Ph 3 Ph 4 UNGUAL
61,4 16,8 i Psee2 10,6 oN 16,0
(6) NA 6,2 5,5 5,0 NA
(6) 339 39 5,0 NA NA
VERTEBRAL COLUMN
Max. length Vertebra No. Max. length
of Centrum Sacrals of Centrum
16,2 1 14,2
14,2 D, (13)
15,9 3 NA
(15,5) 4 NA
13,4 5 NA
13,0 6 14,2
Set Caudals*
NA Al 14,2
(13) A2 NA
Be? A3 14,8
13:5 A4 (15)
(13) A5 15.5
14,5 A6 15,8
15,2 A7 16,0
15,0 A8 17,0
15 AQ 17,8
14,8 A10 17,8
NA All 18,2
(15) Al2 fragmentary
14,6
* Sequentially numbered on each block of matrix, A and B.
Vertebra No. Max. length
Caudal of Centrum
Bl 16,0
B2 16,0
B3 16,2
B4 16,5
B5 16,4
B6 16,7
B7 16,3
B8 16,3
B9 16,3
B10 tI
Bil 16,4
B12 16,0
B13 NA
B14 tS55
B15 15,6
B16 fragmentary
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nOv., sp. nov., comb.
nov., SyN. Nov., etc.
An author’ Ss name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name ‘(and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
a punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes shou!d be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference te the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
- “Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
A. P. SANTA LUCA
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF
HETERODONTOSAURUS TUCKI (REPTILIA,
ORNITHISCHIA) FROM THE STORMBERG
OF SOUTH AFRICA
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
CAPE ‘TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowiedgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 X 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and yea of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) aerate
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; ae ti, ee
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927).
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FISCHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg oe and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 79 ~~ Band
April 1980 April
Part 8 Deel
:
SSS
CoO ES ID
SS
Q S
Sour wow
FOSSIL BOVIDAE (MAMMALIA)
FROM LANGEBAANWEG
SOUTH AFRICA
By
LOW. GENTRY.
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
1, 2(1=3,-5-8); 31-2, 4-5, 8; t—pi)s 5(1=3, 5: 79
6(1, t--p.i.), 7(1—-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t—p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 908407 89 0
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
FOSSIL BOVIDAE (MAMMALIA) FROM LANGEBAANWEG,
. SOUTH AFRICA
By
A. W. GENTRY
British Museum (Natural History), London
(With 63 figures and 6 tables)
[MS. accepted 4 September 1979]
ABSTRACT
Fossil Bovidae are described from the Quartzose Sand Member and Pelletal Phosphorite
Member of the Varswater Formation in ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg. The new genus Damalacra
and the new species Simatherium demissum, Kobus subdolus, Damalacra neanica, D. acalla and
Raphicerus paralius are named. The bovids best fit a very late Miocene age of about 6 million
years B.P. according to faunal correlations with other sites for some of which radiometric
dates are available. Evidence from other mammalian groups present in ‘E’ Quarry may suggest
alternative ages.
_ The Bovidae of Baard’s Quarry, Langebaanweg, are also discussed. The lower assemblage
is younger than the ‘E’ Quarry faunas, perhaps even of Pleistocene age; the upper assemblage
is of Middle Pleistocene age or later.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction , ; : : : i et
Bovidae from ‘E’ Quarry 4 : , ; SAS
Tribe Tragelaphini . ‘ ‘ 3 on 2h
Tribe Boselaphini F ; : : Vt be
Tribe Bovini : : : ‘ : Pee,
Tribe Reduncini . : ; ; : oe a DaT
Tribe Alcelaphini : : ; : poe!
Tribe Neotragini : : : 5 299
Tribe Antilopini . : : : ‘ «2 SO
Tribe Ovibovini . ‘ : : : ero
Enigmatic horn-cores : Sst: Sad, PLUS eL
Bovidae from Baard’s Quarry . F : eal
Tribe Boselaphini : ; 3 : ni et
Tribe Reduncini . : ‘ : : eo
Tribe Hippotragini . é : : bee S24
Tribe Alcelaphini ; : 3 ; . ~324
Tribe Neotragini ; 5 : : PACs Pe
Tribe Antilopini . ‘ 326
Age of the Bovidae from Baard’s s Quarry sh S27
Discussion . , : z S328
Acknowledgements . : : d i ses? 333
References . 5 é 5 : 3 : . 334
213
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 79 (8), 1980: 213-337, 63 figs, 6 tables.
214 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
The late Tertiary fossil vertebrate site of Langebaanweg is situated 105 km
north-north-west of Cape Town and about 15 km inland from Saldanha Bay at
32°58’S 18°09’E. Faunal and geological studies of the site have been made by
Hendey (1970, 1973, 1974, 1976) and Tankard (1974). Commercial mining for
phosphates led to the opening of a number of quarries in which Tertiary gravels,
sands and clays were exposed beneath the covering of Pleistocene and Recent
sands. Most of the abundant remains of freshwater, marine, terrestrial and
flying vertebrates have come from deposits constituting the Varswater Forma-
tion in the New Varswater Mine or ‘E’ Quarry. A smaller number came from
unnamed deposits in Baard’s Quarry, but this has now been backfilled and the
relationships of its deposits to those in ‘E’ Quarry are uncertain. All unqualified
references to Langebaanweg fossils are to those from ‘E’ Quarry. ‘E’ Quarry is
the type locality for the Varswater Formation, and its stratigraphy is as follows:
Largely or entirely Pleistocene/ Surface bed
Holocene
Latest Miocene/early Pliocene Varswater Formation:
Pelletal Phosphorite Member
Quartzose Sand Member
Gravel Member
Miocene Saldanha Formation
The Varswater Formation is only about 10 m thick in ‘E’ Quarry, but ©
elsewhere it can reach 39-43 m. Its deposition was initiated bya marine trans-
gression probably in the late Miocene during which the Gravel Member was
deposited in a rocky and sandy marine beach environment. This member
consists of boulders, cobbles and pebbles of phosphate rock in sands and has
yielded marine invertebrates and vertebrates. Terrestrial vertebrates are rarer
and their bones have usually been heavily rolled, evidently the result of wave
action.
There followed a stillstand in the transgression, during which the Quartzose
Sand Member was accumulated in a variety of depositional environments in
and near an estuary. Lithologically it is the most complex of the Varswater
members in ‘E’ Quarry and the demarcation of its upper and lower limits has
been difficult. Three main facies are recognized within the Quartzose Sand
Member. The first, of which there are extensive exposures, is composed of
largely non-phosphatic quartz sands, believed to represent a floodplain environ-
ment. This unit contains vertebrate fossils which accumulated both subaerially
and subaqueously. The second is an horizon of carbonaceous sand and clay
(the ‘peat bed’), which probably represents a marsh environment. The third
facies is a muddy silt rich in invertebrate fossils but without significant verte-
brates, which apparently represents a tidal mudflats accumulation. Exposures
of the marsh and tidal mudflats facies are limited in extent.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 215
The final phase of the transgression was the period of accumulation of the
Pelletal Phosphorite Member—medium grade phosphatic sands whose base
truncates the Quartzose Sand Member. The lowermost part of it in ‘E’ Quarry
was laid down in shallow marine water, and the remains of both terrestrial and
aquatic vertebrates are numerous in restricted areas in, and immediately
adjacent to, a river channel. It is believed that the course of the river shifted
northward as the transgression progressed and two distinct channels have been
exposed. These deposits are informally termed bed 3aS and bed 3aN (Hendey
1976: 226), the former being the older. The duration of the intervals between
deposition of the Quartzose Sand Member and bed 3aS and between beds 3aS
and 3aN are not known.
The mammal fauna from ‘E’ Quarry has been discussed by Hendey (1976:
231-243). The larger mammals of the Quartzose Sand Member are those on
which the relative dating originally depended, and Hendey (1973: 13; 1974:
61, 62) inferred an age of about 4,5 m.y. by correlation with dated east African
faunas. There is now more uncertainty about the age, and the Varswater
Formation may have accumulated over an appreciable period. It is, however,
generally agreed that none of the sediments is likely to be younger than 3,5 m.y.
and none older than about 7 m.y. (Hendey 19785: 267-269). The varied her-
bivores suggest a more luxuriant vegetation than exists in the area at the present
time, and there is evidence of fire damage to some of the bones in the Quartzose
Sand and Pelletal Phosphorite Members.
Other African localities
African localities other than Langebaanweg which are mentioned in this
paper are:
Afar, Ethiopia, comprising mainly the Hadar Formation which appears by
radiometric methods to date from 3,1 to less than 2,6 m.y. (Taieb et al.
1978; Aronson et al. 1977). The Amado Formation is of unknown age.
Beglia Formation, Tunisia, aged about 12-13 m.y. (Robinson & Black
1969).
Elandsfontein, near Langebaanweg, a rich site of Middle Pleistocene age
with some later fossils (Klein 1978; Hendey 1974: 26).
Fort Ternan, Kenya, dated to 14 m.y. (Gentry 1970a; Bishop, Miller &
Fitch 1969).
Kaiso Formation, Uganda, thought to span about 5,0-2,5 m.y. and to have
an earlier and a later faunal level (Cooke & Coryndon 1970).
Karmosit Beds, Kenya, probably a little older than 3,4 m.y. (Bishop et al.
1971):
Laetoli, formerly called Laetolil, Tanzania. The Laetolil Beds date from
3,59 to 3,77 m.y., and the later Ndolanya Beds are older than 2,4 m.y.
(M. D. Leakey et al. 1976; M. D. Leakey & Hay 1979).
Lothagam, Kenya. The Logatham 1 fauna may be about 5,5 m.y. (Behrens-
meyer 1976; Smart 1976).
216 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Lukeino Formation, Kenya, 6,0-6,7 m.y. (Pickford 1975, 1978b; Thomas
1979b). ,
Makapansgat Limeworks, Transvaal, South Africa, where the bovids
appear to come between Langebaanweg and Olduvai middle and
upper Bed II. The fauna derives from more than one stratigraphic level
(Wells & Cooke 1956; Gentry & Gentry 1978: 66; Vrba 1977).
Mpesida Beds, Kenya, about 7 m.y. (Bishop et al. 1971; Thomas 19795).
Mursi Formation, Omo, Ethiopia, where a basalt overlying the fossili-
ferous levels has been dated to 4,05 m.y. (Butzer & Thurber 1969).
Ngorora Formation, Kenya, spanning 12-9 m.y. (Bishop & Pickford 1975;
Pickford 1978a.)
Olduvai Gorge, Tanzania, where Beds I to IV span 2,1-0,6 m.y. (M. D.
Leakey 1971; Gentry & Gentry 1978).
Peninj, Tanzania, which correlates faunally and radiometrically with
Olduvai middle and upper Bed II (Gentry & Gentry 1978: 292, 62-63).
Sahabi, Libya, of latest Miocene age, perhaps slightly younger than Wadi
Natrun (Maglio 1973: 68, 70; Boaz et al. 1979).
Shungura Formation, Omo, Ethiopia, with an approximate time span from
3,2-0,8 m.y. (Coppens et al. 1976; Brown et al. 1978). Member B has
an age of about 2,8 m.y. and member G an age slightly younger than
2 m.y.
Sterkfontein Type Site or Main Quarry, Transvaal, South Africa, at which
most of the mammalian fauna comes from member 4 with a probable
age of about 3,0-2,5 m.y. (Vrba 1976, fig. 20; Partridge 1978).
Swartklip, southern Cape Province, South Africa,- of Upper Pleistocene
age (Hendey & Hendey 1968; Klein 1975).
Wadi Natrun, Egypt, with a poorly known vertebrate fauna, perhaps about
6 m.y. (Andrews 1902; Maglio 1973: 70).
The most frequently mentioned locality outside Africa is the Siwaliks Group
in India and Pakistan, which has a sequence of deposits ranging from Miocene
to Pleistocene. Pilbeam et al. (1977) give a condensed history and much new
information on these deposits. At present it appears likely that the bulk of
known Lower and Middle Siwaliks faunas fall into two groups. An earlier
fauna comes from the upper two-thirds of the Chinji Formation at its type
locality and from Ramnagar. It best resembles Astaracian faunas of Europe
and west Asia and its age is judged to be about 12-13 m.y. It contains the lopho-
dont pig Listriodon but no Hipparion. A later fauna comes from the middle
part of the Nagri Formation at Nagri, the upper part of the same Formation
in the Dhok Mila—Gandakas area and Haritalyangar, and continues through
the succeeding Dhok Pathan Formation in its type and adjacent areas. (The
Dhok Pathan Formation is known only from its upper levels in the type area.)
This later fauna agrees best with Vallesian and Turolian faunas elsewhere and
has a likely age range from about 10 to 7,5 m.y. ‘Dhok Pathan’ fossils collected
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 217
in the Hasnot area are somewhat younger, perhaps about 7,0 m.y. Hipparion
enters the sequence at the poorly fossiliferous base of the Nagri Formation.
Classification
The classification of bovids used here is modified from that of Simpson
(1945), with some improvements from Ansell (1971) and some new features:
Family Bovidae
Subfamily Bovinae
Tribe Tragelaphini
Tribe Boselaphini
Tribe Bovini
Subfamily Cephalophinae
Tribe Cephalophini .
Subfamily Hippotraginae
Tribe Reduncini
Tribe Hippotragini
Subfamily Alcelaphinae
Tribe Alcelaphini
Subfamily Antilopinae
Tribe Neotragini
Tribe Antilopini
Subfamily Caprinae
Tribe ‘Rupicaprini’ .
Eland, bongo, kudus, mountain nyala, sita-
tunga, nyala, bushbuck. Mainly browsers
in bush and forest.
Now represented by only the nilgai and
four-horned antelope in India, but formerly
occurred in Africa
Cattle and buffaloes, the largest bovids
Duikers, mainly small forest antelopes
which are rarely fossilized
Waterbuck, lechwes, kob and reedbucks.
Grazing antelopes always found in the
vicinity of water
Roan, sable, oryxes and addax
Wildebeests, hartebeests, bastard harte-
beests, Hunter’s antelope or Tana River
hartebeest. Grazing, cursorial antelopes of
open country. Includes Aepyceros, the
impala, usually placed in the Antilopini
Royal antelope, Bates’ dwarf antelope, suni,
dik-diks, steenboks, grysbok, klipspringer,
oribi, beira. Small antelopes not found in
such dense cover as duikers
Gazelles, springbok, blackbuck, gerenuk
and dibatag. Also includes tribe Saigini
(containing Saiga and Pantholops of Asia).
Small to medium sized, cursorial antelopes
often adapted to conditions of water
shortage
Goral, serow, Rocky Mountain goat. Rupi-
capra itself, the chamois, might be better
placed in the Caprini. Not found in Africa
218 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Tribe Ovibovini ; Musk ox and takin. More abundant earlier
in bovid history than they are today
‘Fribe Caprint =yoex: Sheep, goats, tahrs
The first three subfamilies have been thought to comprise a group called
the Boodontia and the second three the Aegodontia (Gentry 19785: 564;
Simpson 1945: 270; Pilgrim 1939: 10), but these groups are not used in the
formal classification adopted here.
Abbreviations
The present report covers Bovidae which had been incorporated into the
collections of the South African Museum by early 1977. All fossils from Lange-
baanweg are in the South African Museum. Catalogue numbers of these
specimens begin with the letters SAM-—PQ-L, in which SAM refers to the
South African Museum, PQ is a departmental prefix, and L stands for Lange-
baanweg. Other abbreviations in the text are:
QSM Quartzose Sand Member of the Varswater Formation
PPM Pelletal Phosphorite Member of the Varswater Formation
3aS bed 3aS of the Pelletal Phosphorite Member
3aN bed 3aN of the Pelletal Phosphorite Member
BM(NH) British Museum (Natural History), London
BPI Bernard Price Institute for Palaeontological Research,
Johannesburg
KNM Kenya National Museum, Nairobi
m.y. millions of years
Specimens from the Omo and Afar in Ethiopia have yet to be lodged
permanently in an institution, and only locality and field catalogue numbers
are given for them.
Measurements
Measurements are given in millimetres. Tooth measurements were taken
on specimens in the earlier or later parts of middle wear. They were not taken
on specimens in early or late wear unless this is stated.
Length measurements of limb bones were taken as follows:
Femur—from the lateral end of the articular head to the lowest level of
the distal medial condyle
Tibia—from the lowest point of the top medial facet to the projecting tip
of bone behind the medial malleolus
Metatarsal—from the highest point behind the medial part of the ecto-
cuneiform facet to the medial side of the most projecting part of the
distal medial condyle
Humerus—from the top of the lateral tuberosity to the lowest point of
the medial side distally
Radius—from the centre of the medial edge of the proximal medial facet
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 219
to the lowest point of the ridge on the scaphoid facet medially
Metacarpal—from the edge of the proximal articular facet above the
insertion for the extensor carpi radialis to the median side of the most
projecting part of the distal medial condyle
Terms
Five terms used frequently in the text need explanation:
The basal index of a horn-core is a pair of measurements given in the form
46,9 x 37,2 in which the first is the anteroposterior diameter at the
base and the second the mediolateral diameter at 90° to the first
Horn-cores are said to be obliquely inserted when their inclinations are low
in side view. It is the opposite condition from upright insertions
Horn-cores with any degree of curvature frequently have torsion. This
may be clockwise or anti-clockwise and is described as it exists in the
right horn-core
A basal pillar, when it occurs, is found in the centre of the medial side of
upper molars or the lateral side of lower molars, completely or partly
separate from the rest of the occlusal surface. In the Cope—Osborn
nomenclature it is the entostyle of an upper and ectostylid of a lower
molar
A goat fold is a transverse flange at the front of the lower molars.
BOVIDAE FROM ‘E’ QUARRY
Tribe Tragelaphini
Tragelaphus spp indet.
Figs 1-4.
Material
A number of tragelaphine horn-cores from ‘E’ Quarry at Langebaanweg
belong to a species about the size of the living nyala, Tragelaphus angasi. They
are:
L5252—basal half of a right horn-core
L5868—base of a left horn-core
L5922—base of a right, index 42,1 x 41,4
L5924— base of a right, index 39,1 x 38,8
L6568— basal half of a right, index 40,1 x 42,3 (Fig. 1)
L6574— basal half of a left
L40056— base of a right, index 39,2 x 41,6
L4620, L5255, L6079, L6081, L6083, L6084, L6379, L6571, L6576, L41039
—parts of left horn-cores
L5253, L5716B, L5920, L6435, L6569, L6570, L6575, L6583, L6584, L13983
—parts of right horn-cores
In addition, there is an occipital surface, L5085, of appropriate size to be
conspecific with the horn-cores. The height of the occipital, measured from the
dorsal edge of the foramen magnum, is 41,3.
220 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 1. Tragelaphus sp. L6568, anterior view of right horn-core.
Scale = 50 mm.
L40056 and L41039 of the above listed material are definitely from bed 3aS
of the PPM. The rest is probably also from 3aS but a few may be from the QSM.
Parts of left and right horn-cores, L13164 and L22556 additional to the
above list, do come from the QSM.
Parts of two left and right horn-cores, L33779 and 133833, come from
bed 3aN of the PPM. Also probably from 3aN is L40759 (Fig. 2), the greater
part of a left horn-core with a rather damaged base and an index of 42,2 x 46,3.
Horizon
Tragelaphus is much better represented in bed 3aS than in either 3aN or
the QSM. Nearly all the horn-cores were picked up by mine workers, many in
1966-7, and were not recovered from controlled excavations.
Description
On horn-core L6574 the posterolateral keel is weaker than the anterior one
and can hardly be seen at all. This may have been an unusual individual in
life or the fossil may have suffered water rolling after death. In the other horn-
cores the posterolateral keel is always strong. The anterior keel is rarely as
strong as the posterolateral one, but it can be seen to be so at the very bases of
L5252, L5868 and L6568. A part of a left horn-core, L33779, is about 140 mm
long and has a strong groove alongside, or instead of, a keel. In comparison
with the living, similarly sized species Tragelaphus angasi and T. spekei, the
horn-cores are less compressed anteroposteriorly, inserted more uprightly, and
look as if they were inserted less far behind the orbits. The insertions must
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 221
Fig. 2. Tragelaphus sp. 40759, lateral view of left horn-core.
Scale = 50 mm.
have been wider apart than at the present day, and this could be linked with the
anteroposterior level of the insertions above the back of the orbits rather than
just behind them. L6568 and L44056 certainly show a greater width of frontals
on the medial side of the horn bases than can be seen in living Tragelaphus. The
degree of basal divergence can be seen in anterodorsal view on the horn-cores
L5922, L6568 and L40056, and it was greater than in 7. angasi and T. spekei
or any other tragelaphine alive today. The degree of spiralling in the Langebaan-
weg horn-cores is about as strong as in J. angasi and spekei. There are no
sinuses within the horn pedicels. Most of the characters whereby this species
differs from equivalent sized living species can be paralleled in the smaller
horn-cores of an extinct bushbuck, L144—1 and 2 from member C of the Shun-
gura Formation. (However the width apart of the insertions and the basal
divergence are not known in the Omo fossils.) Such characters appear to be
primitive in the small and medium sized lineages of Tragelaphus.
Two of the three horn-cores from bed 3aN deserve particular mention.
_ L40759, probably from 3aN, is larger than the main mass of 3aS horn-cores
(Fig. 3) and has a preserved length of about 280 mm. It is strongly spiralled,
in fact, almost as much as in the living greater kudu, Tragelaphus strepsiceros.
Its anterior keel is stronger basally than the posterolateral one, unlike other
‘E’ Quarry Tragelaphus, but by the tip of the preserved part of the horn-core
the posterolateral keel has become strong and sharp. Through being more
spiralled, the line of the posterolateral keel near the base is more strongly concave
than in the other horn-cores. Finds from the Shungura and Mursi Formations
(Gentry 1976: 276-7, 288; a fuller account is awaiting publication) suggest that
T. strepsiceros evolved from ancestors of smaller size and with horn-cores
showing a stronger posterolateral keel and a weaker anterior keel, no medio-
lateral compression, weaker spiralling and less upright insertions. One could
anticipate difficulties in distinguishing members of this lineage from relatives
or ancestors of T. spekei at sites coeval with, or earlier than, the Mursi Forma-
tion. Possible kudu horn-cores from the Mursi Formation, particularly the base
222 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Mediolateral
diameter re)
60
50
40
50
Anteroposterior diameter
20 30 40 30mm
Fig. 3. Basal dimensions of Tragelaphus horn-cores. X = E Quarry Langebaanweg,
O = extant T. spekei, M = Mursi Formation YS 68.2078, L = Makapansgat Limeworks
BPI M 490, S=T. ?pricei from Shungura Formation, U = Lukeino Formation (from
Thomas 19795). The highest X is L40759. The lower diagonal line is that along which medio-
lateral diameter is 100 per cent of anteroposterior diameter; the upper line is 125 per cent.
A cross-section of the right horn-core L6568 is shown, taken 20 mm above its base, with lateral
side to the left and anterior side to the base. Scale = 10 mm.
of a right horn-core YS 1968-2078 with a basal index 38,7 x 44,3 (Fig. 3), are
about the same size as L40759, have a posterolateral keel stronger than the
anterior one, weaker spiralling than L40759, and about the same inclination
and degree of compression. Thus, if L40759 were a different species from other
Langebaanweg horn-cores and on the kudu lineage, it would be at about the
level of member E or F of the Shungura Formation by its keels and even later
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 223
by its strong spiralling. If it is a different species from the other ‘E’ Quarry
horn-cores, it is probably a precocious southern Cape development unrelated
to the 7. strepsiceros lineage.
L33833, the fragment of a large right horn-core from bed 3aN, has an
index of 48,5 x 49,5 at its lowest level which is not known to be the original
base. This is larger than other tragelaphine horn-cores likely to be from 3aS.
It appears to have little spiralization, but its large size makes the comparison
difficult. The posterolateral keel is the most prominent as in most Langebaan-
weg horn-cores, and the anterior keel is also well developed. Either or both
L40759 and L33833 could represent additional species of tragelaphines in the
Langebaanweg fauna.
The occipital surface L5085 shows its tragelaphine affinities in its rather
flat surface, a median vertical ridge without flanking hollows, traces of a small,
narrow mastoid and a horizontal top edge centrally.
One of the interesting features of the Langebaanweg assemblage is the
problem of finding teeth which might be conspecific with the tragelaphine
horn-cores. This question will be taken up later and all that need be stated here
is that only a few teeth such as the right M, L4628 (Fig. 4) are candidates for
being tragelaphine. This tooth probably comes from the PPM, is in middle
wear, and has an occlusal length of 29,2. It resembles M,s of Mesembriportax
acrae except in being rather small. A moderately developed metastylid is present,
there is a tiny basal pillar, and the medial wall of the back lobe of the tooth is
set obliquely. The wear is abnormal in that the occlusal surface slopes steeply
down towards the buccal edge.
Comparisons
The base of a tragelaphine right horn-core, BPI M490 with basal index
37,6 < 38,3, and possibly another fragment, M491, from Makapansgat Lime-
works are about the size of the Langebaanweg species, and agree with it in
- having the anterior keel no better developed than the posterolateral one and in
being less compressed anteroposteriorly than in living 7. angasi and T. spekei.
Dentitions of appropriate size to go with the horn-cores have already been
assigned to 7. cf. angasi by Wells & Cooke (1956: 10).
A right horn-core of a Tragelaphus, BM(NH) M 26402, from the early
assemblage of the Kaiso Formation (Cooke & Coryndon 1970: 200; Gentry
& Gentry 1978: 305) is about the same size as the Langebaanweg species but
more anteroposteriorly compressed, having a basal index of 41,0 x 50,0. The
early Kaiso assemblage has been thought to have an age of about 5 m.y. (Cooke
& Coryndon 1970: 220, fig. 17; Maglio 1973: 70), but Gentry & Cenlty (1978:
64) thought that the bovids Sold as easily fit a later age.
Thomas (19798, fig. 2) has recorded a fine frontlet and two partial horn-
cores of Tragelaphus cf. spekei from Lukeino which are very like the Langebaan-
weg horn-cores, but slightly less compressed anteroposteriorly. He gives basal
indices of 38 x 37 and 44 x 41. Tragelaphine teeth are also present at Lukeino
224 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 4. Tragelaphus sp. L4628, occlusal and lateral
views of right M3. Scale = 10 mm.
and Mpesida (Thomas 1979), pl. 2 (figs 4, 8-9, 11, 14)). Gentry (1978a: 297)
pointed to the appearance of tragelaphine-like teeth as early as Ngorora.
Tribe Boselaphini
Genus Mesembriportax
Type species
Mesembriportax acrae Gentry, 1974.
Mesembriportax acrae Gentry, 1974
Figs 5-6
Remarks
Since Gentry (1974) described Mesembriportax acrae from Bed 2 (= QSM)
of ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg, a number of new specimens have come to light
from both the QSM and PPM. The two chief ones (Figs 5-6) are:
L25870—cranium with both horn-cores attached, other fragmentary skull
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 225
Fig. 5. Mesembriportax acrae. L40071, dorsal view of cranium; L25870, lateral view of cranium
Scales = 50 mm.
bones, the maxillary tooth rows, both mandibles, and parts of cervical
vertebrae. It comes from the QSM
L40071—cranium with right horn-core attached, much of the left horn-
core, and fragmentary skull bones. This comes from bed 3aS.
Other remains include the partial frontlets and skull fragments L20918 and
L22005, both from the QSM. The latter has some upper teeth as well as quite
a lot of other dental remains.
In both L25870 and L40071 the frontals are preserved further forward than
in the holotype L13101. Thus it can easily be seen that their horn-core insertions
226 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 6. Mesembriportax acrae. 25870, occipital and ventral views of cranium.
Scales = 25 mm.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG p94 |
PPM: 3aN x x9 x x X
PPM: 3aS 0 x x
QSM ‘ KX SR Gs. 0 +
0 cy sn yee an BSP wen ga 40mm
Fig. 7. Occlusal length of M; in Mesembriportax acrae. X = right side, O = left side,
+ = both sides. Dotted readings are in later wear.
are slightly closer than on the holotype (Gentry 1974, fig. 2). Moreover, the
divergence of the horn-cores is much less, the torsion is less strong, and the
dorsal parts of the orbital rims project more strongly. These characters bring
L25870 and L40071 closer to Miotragocerus, especially M. amalthea, a fairly
large and advanced species from Pikermi, Greece, and other sites of Turolian
age.
Other characters show the variation among the Langebaanweg specimens
but do not correlate with the geology of the site. Compared with L13101,
L25870, likewise from the QSM, shows a stronger approach to a posteromedial
keel, more oblique horn-core insertions, a more sharply localized raising of the
frontals between the horn-core bases, almost certainly a less sloping braincase
roof, and a braincase which does not widen posteriorly. However, L40071,
which is more like the QSM holotype for these characters, itself comes from
the PPM. Besides L40071, there are other, less well preserved, remains of
Mesembriportax acrae from the PPM. No valid differences between them and
the remains from the QSM were found, but it appears from a comparison of
Ms; occlusal lengths that there could have been a size increase (Fig. 7). This is
also shown by a statistical comparison of both M, and Ms; occlusal lengths:
Number Standard Standard
measured Mean Range deviation error
MemrOsM - . 12 2371 208-259 1055) 0,42
PPM :3aS 3 24,5 23,9-25,3 0,7 0,42
PPM :3aN 3 24,7 23,8-25,7 1,0 0,55
M; QSM 9 32,3 oh p292= 35:3 2,0 0,66
PPM :3aS 2 32,0 30,2-33,8 — —-
PPM :3aN 6 SO VCR 233 0:92
The values of T for M,s and M,s in the QSM and bed 3aN were 1,14 and
228 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
2,65, the latter alone being significant at the 5 per cent level. The measurements
were confined to teeth in middle wear, and each sample was from either the left
or right side alone.
Gentry (1974: 180) compared the dental characters of Mesembriportax
acrae and Miotragocerus and stated that the former had straighter medial walls
of its lower molars. In addition, the P, of the Mesembriportax acrae holotype
had a more massive metaconid with less differentiation into a neck and strong
anterior and posterior flanges, the paraconid had the form of a low protuberance
from the parastylid rather than a flange, and the hypoconid projected more
strongly than in many Miotragocerus. In the P, of L20508 only the last differ-
ence appeared valid. This statement can be modified now that more is known of
variation during wear in Mesembriportax acrae. Of a dozen mandibles of
M. acrae with P,, six were held to be in early or early middle wear and the
remainder in late middle or late wear. Five P,s out of the six in earlier wear had
flanges anteriorly and/or posteriorly on the metaconid, while four of the six
in later wear had scarcely any traces of flanges. Again, four of the first group
had the paraconid of P, in the form of a flange and five of the second group had
it merely as a low protuberance from the parastylid. Seven out of the whole
twelve had a fairly projecting hypoconid on P, and four had a fusion between
paraconid and metaconid (the latter character not mentioned by Gentry 1974),
but these characters were uncorrelated with wear. A similar loss of definition
of the various flanges can be seen during wear in Miotragocerus amalthea from
Pikermi, but it does seem that the paraconid flange is more marked in this
species. In the author’s revised opinion this becomes one of two good differences
in the P,s of the two species. The other is that paraconid—metaconid fusion is
far more infrequent in M. amalthea; it occurred in only one out of twenty-six
examples from Pikermi. The straighter medial walls of the lower molars in
Mesembriportax acrae appear to be present in only about a third of the speci-
mens—seven out of twenty-four.
Revised diagnosis
The diagnosis of Mesembriportax acrae (Gentry 1974: 148) should there-
fore be modified and reduced to the following. A moderate to large boselaphine
with short to fairly long horn-cores. Horn-cores with varying insertion angle,
basal divergence and width apart of insertion positions. Horn-cores compressed
mediolaterally and with a posterolateral keel and a strong slightly helical
anterior keel in their lower part, the anterior keel being stepped at its top and
the succeeding distal part of the horn-core being of small circular cross-section.
In so far as any torsion exists, its direction is anti-clockwise in the right horn-
core. Divergence of the horn-cores lessens distally, and there is little or no
backward curvature. Frontals extensively hollowed internally, and their top
surface raised much above the level of the top of the orbits; braincase in line
with or slightly angled on the face axis; top of braincase not curved downward
posteriorly above the occipital surface; strong temporal ridges on braincase
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 229
roof not approaching closely posteriorly and with a rugose surface between
them; orbits sometimes without a projecting dorsal rim; small supraorbital
pits; nasals long and narrow with large central flanges anteriorly but no lateral
flanges; large preorbital fossa; infraorbital foramen low and situated above the
posterior margin of P?; premaxillae narrow anteriorly but with strong ascending
rami of approximately even width throughout and with a wide contact on the
nasals; palate very wide; median indentation at the back of the palate well
behind the level of the lateral indentations; occipital surface with a squared
outline; large mastoid exposure of periotic; anterior tuberosities of basioccipital
fairly wide apart and not very large.
Brachyodont or only moderately hypsodont cheek teeth, with not very
rugose enamel; small basal pillars on upper and lower molars; medial lobes of
upper molars not joined to one another or to the lateral side of the tooth until
late in life; mesostyles quite strong on upper molars; central cavities of upper
molars not very complicated in outline; medial walls of lower molars sometimes
rather flat; lower molars sometimes with a small goat fold (a transverse flange
at the front of the tooth); M, often with a large central cavity in the rear lobe
during early wear and often with a rear flange; long premolar rows with large
anterior premolars; paraconid and metaconid more often unfused than fused
on P,; paraconid of P, has the shape of a low protuberance or small flange on
the back of the parastylid; hypoconid sometimes projecting on P,; I,s not
greatly enlarged.
Measurements
Measurements on the two most complete new crania of M. acrae are:
L25870 L40071
Length of horn-core along anterior keel . . 310 420
Anteroposterior diameter at base of horn-core . 66,3 12,2
Lateromedial diameter at base of horn-core : 47,2 51,2
Minimum width across lateral sides of horn
PE iecisong orate ~ osmium” | reuee’ be code TAO) —
Occipital height from dorsal edge of foramen
magnum . : ; : i : : 49,5 47, ooo
Skull width across mastoids behind external
auditory meatus cs cute ats gi eracanteg in cle wean een ee eee 124,6
Width across anterior tuberosities of basioccipital 28-2 28,0
Width across posterior tuberosities of basioccipital 46,0 40,6
Weelusat lensth:Me=Me 67,9 —
Mechs lense Me ee. us cee ee 24,3 —
Meeinsanienetae Ps =o 8. re eee al eB oe meee 14,7 —-
230 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Measurements on new more fragmentary skull remains are:
n
en a eee SS
a3 85 82 82 Sz $2
HO WO YO 12
Length of horn-core along
anterior keel . : — — — — — 330
Anteroposterior diameter
at base of horn-core. 60,1 — — 69,5 — 79,8
Lateromedial diameter at
base of horn-core . 43,6 — — 41,6 — 38,5
Width across anterior
tuberosities of basi-
occipital . : et QO 27-6 *- BAsG — 28,0 —
Width across _ posterior
tuberosities of same 37,7 36,1 39,6 o 42,9 —
Some measurements on the more complete dentitions in middle wear are
shown in Table 1. All are likely to be from different individuals.
TABLE |
Measurements of boselaphine dentitions.
L20985 125870 L28327 L46059 L20542 L21744
QSM QSM QSM 3aN QSM QSM
Occlusal length M,—-M, : ; 4 69,0 70,8 76,8 81,6 — —
Occlusal length M, ; 3 : : 21,6 23,0 25,0 Dip! — —
Occlusal length M, ; ; \ d DD 30,6 BO 33,7 — —
Occlusal length P,-P, . 3 : : 48,7 Sy OSes SS)57/ 53,225, aeoihes Saal
Occlusal length P, . : : : Shae Se 16,2 15:5 7. PeROre = 12.9
Occlusal length P, . , : ; : 17,4 Leg) — 20,3 729509 or 2D, |
Ramus depth below P, . ; : ; 34,8 36,9 — 31,9 — —
Ramus depth below M, : ‘ 3 39,7 39,3 37,8 — — —
Ramus depth below M; - : 5 44,0 41,1 39,2 —_— — —
L25033 L25870 L32401
QSM QSM 3aN
Occlusal length M1—-M? ‘ : : 70,1 67,9 68,4
Occlusal length M? : ; : é D5), 3) 24,3 230),
Occlusal length P?—-P* . : : , — — S515 /i
Occlusal length P* . ‘ ; : ; 15,3 14,7 ISS)
* — deciduous dentition
Occlusal lengths of other teeth in middle wear are as follows:
L14253 left P4 15,7 QSM; L20982 right P* 15,4 QSM; L22253 right P4
15,2 QSM; L41720 left P* 17,9 PPM
L21828 left dP? 20,9, dP* 20,2 QSM
£11350: left. P,- 21593 1.22369 left PP, 20,6 QSM; 132792 emehim yy 13:0
PPM; L40976A right P, 19,4 PPM; L41689 left P, 15,4 PPM; L41720
right P, 21,4 PPM.
L24651 left dP, 25,3 QSM; L30948 left dP, 29,9 PPM; L31076 right dP,
27,5 PPM
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 231
Comparisons
Because of the resemblances of the new material to Miotragocerus it is neces-
sary to revise the account of differences between Mesembriportax acrae and
other boselaphines from that given in Gentry (1974: 179-181). The most
important comparison lies with Miotragocerus amalthea, a species which has
considerable variation of its horn-cores (Pilgrim & Hopwood 1928: 46-49).
The Langebaanweg species is now seen to have differences in its larger size,
less mediolateral compression of the horn-cores, even less backward curvature
of its horn-cores, a longer terminal portion of its horn-cores distal to the top
of the anterior keel, horn-cores usually more divergent, frontals raised to a
higher level between the horn-core bases relative to the dorsal part of the
orbital rims and hence with a more extensive system of internal sinuses, perhaps
a better rugose surface on the braincase roof behind the horn-cores, and a
squarer outline of the occipital surface. For most of the differences the South
African species can be plausibly supposed to be more advanced.
Another Miotragocerus species at Samos is larger than M. amalthea, and
includes material named M. curvicornis and M. recticornis (Andree 1926). This
species is unlike both M. amalthea and the Langebaanweg species in that its
horn-cores have little or no demarcation of a distal portion with a rounded
cross-section.
The remaining principal species of Miotragocerus were listed by Gentry
(1974: 175). Among these M. gradiens is a small, primitive species and M.
pannoniae and M. leskewitschi are later but still small species. M. spectabilis
is a larger and later species from China similar to M. amalthea. M. valenciennesi
is a small to moderate sized species coexisting with M. amalthea at Pikermi,
and M. browni is a moderate sized Siwaliks species, perhaps descended from
the earlier M. gradiens.
The only fossils of Miotragocerus from Africa are the record from Lothagam
(Smart 1976: 365) and a frontlet with much of its horn-cores from Sahabi, now
-in Rome. The latter was taken by Thomas (1979a: 268, pl. 1 (figs 5a—5b)) as
holotype of a new species M. cyrenaicus. It differs from the Langebaanweg
species by being probably somewhat smaller and its horn-cores more strongly
compressed mediolaterally, slightly curved backward, and with no sharp
diminution of anteroposterior diameter distally. This last character causes it
to resemble the Samos examples of M. curvicornis and M. recticornis rather than
M. amalthea. Its horn-cores are strongly divergent and with little sign of a
posteromedial keel as in the Mesembriportax acrae holotype, but their insertion
- angle is lower and they have less torsion. It also differs from the holotype by
_ having projecting rims to its orbits dorsally. It is not likely to belong to the
caprine Pachytragus which occurs in the earlier pre-Hipparion and Hipparion
levels of the Beglia Formation (Robinson & Black 1969; Robinson 1972)
because of the wider insertion of its horn-cores, and the anterior keel extending
low on the pedicel to below the level of the lateral and medial sides. The low
inclination and wide divergence of the horn-cores are also unlike Pachytragus.
232 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Mesembriportax acrae differs from Miotragocerus browni by its greater
size, wider skull and the horn-cores being shorter, not curved backward and
with the anterior keel terminating well below the horn-core tip.
The characters distinguishing Mesembriportax acrae from Protragocerus as
a whole are fewer than given by Gentry (1974: 179). They now comprise greater
size, sinuses in the frontals, braincase roof not curved downward posteriorly,
presence of a rugose surface between the temporal ridges, and a larger basi-
occipital with stronger anterior tuberosities. These differences continue to be
more impressive than those separating M. acrae from Miotragocerus.
It seems that in Europe Miotragocerus does not usually occur as early as
Protragocerus. It is known back to the Vallesian and has one late Astaracian
record (M. monacensis Stromer, 1928, of ‘Sarmatian’ age, the type species of
Miotragocerus). Thus, according to the biozones set up by Mein (1975), it
occurs from zones 12 or 13 back to 9 or perhaps 8. Protragocerus, as recorded
from such sites as Belomechetskaya, Despotovac, Atzgersdorf, Hollabrunn,
Sommerein, and La Grive St Alban (Thenius 1956, 1959), is of Astaracian (= late
Vindobonian and ‘Sarmatian’) age, equal to Mein’s zones 6 to 8. In the Siwaliks
Miotragocerus gradiens occurs together with Protragocerus in the Chinji fauna,
thought to be of Astaracian-equivalent age, but Miotragocerus also survives
until the Dhok Pathan Formation (Pilbeam et.al. 1977). Thus, Miotragocerus
is generally younger than 12 m.y. whereas Protragocerus is from 12 to 14 m.y.
Relationships of these early boselaphines are poorly understood, but it seems
that Protragocerus could well be a stem genus from which Miotragocerus and
other genera took their origins—cf. Gentry (1974, fig. 27) in which Miotrago-
cerus is shown having an ancestry independent of Protragocerus.
If Mesembriportax acrae were to be described as a new species in this paper,
one might well decide to put it into Miotragocerus as, indeed, Thomas (1979a:
273) has suggested. However, for the present Mesembriportax will be retained.
M. acrae is not very like the north African Miotragocerus cyrenaicus and it
is still possible that it is an independent line of descent from an African
Protragocerus.
Tribe Bovini
Simatherium Dietrich, 1941
Simatherium Dietrich, 1941: 221.
Simatherium Dietrich, 1942: 119.
Type species
Simatherium kohllarseni Dietrich, 1942: pl. 20 (figs 161, 163, 165).
Generic diagnosis
Extinct moderate to large sized African Bovini with short to moderately
long horn-cores, rather massive for the size of the skull. Horn-cores slightly
compressed mediolaterally or without compression, sometimes with an anterior
keel, of irregular or rounded rather than neatly triangular cross-section, inserted
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 233
just behind the orbits, inserted widely apart, with moderate to strong divergence,
gently curved backward in side view, and without torsion. Horn-cores some-
times with deep longitudinal grooves.
Frontals and horn pedicels with quite extensive, irregularly shaped internal
sinuses, braincase short, braincase roof sloping a little downward posteriorly,
temporal ridges present, a rugose raised area at the back of the braincase roof
where temporal ridges converge toward the top of the occipital surface, occipital
broad and low, with horizontal top edge and with some development of hollows
dorsally on either side of the median vertical ridge. Nuchal crests strong.
Moderate to large mastoid. Basioccipital wide posteriorly and triangular, with a
short central longitudinal valley between the posterior tuberosities, with a central
longitudinal ridge in the area just behind the anterior tuberosities, with small
localized anterior tuberosities and poor or no longitudinal ridges behind them.
Remarks
The single species hitherto known of Simatherium is represented by a
poorly preserved cranium from the Vogel River, Laetoli, kept in the Palaeonto-
logical Museum of Humboldt University, East Berlin, no. Vo 670. Its precise
stratigraphical provenance is unknown but Dietrich (1942; 1950: 49) assigned
it to the oldest of the faunas from this area. Some isolated bovine teeth (Dietrich
1950, pl. 1 (fig. 5), pl. 3 (figs 32, 36)) are probably of S. kohllarseni. By invitation
of M. D. Leakey, the writer has been able to see a bovine cranium recently
recovered from the Laetolil Beds (as defined by M. D. Leakey et al. 1976),
which appears to be a second specimen of S. kohllarseni. Simatherium is a
possible ancestor for Pelorovis, the extinct long horned ‘buffaloes’ of the African
Pleistocene (Gentry & Gentry 1978: 311). It is more primitive than Pelorovis,
and, therefore, has some similarity to Ugandax, a genus probably ancestral to
the extant Syncerus.
The choice for generic identity of the Langebaanweg bovine lay between
Ugandax and Simatherium and finally the latter was chosen, although with
mainly primitive forms the balance of evidence is not overwhelming.
Simatherium demissum sp. nov.
Figs 8-13
Holotype
L45001—nearly complete left and right cores with midfrontals suture,
left mandible with P,-Ms;, left M’*, right P?, parts of occipital surface, basi-
occipital, all found associated (Figs 8-11).
Referred material
The main specimens assigned to this species are as follows.
From QSM:
L20905—left M3, occlusal length c. 37,4, early middle wear
L21297—right dP?, dP*, M'-M®, left dP?+dP*; unworn right P?+ P? and
left P?—P4
234 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
L25861—right and left mandibles with P,-Ms, upper dentitions, early
middle wear. Skull fragments and postcranial parts (Fig. 10)
L28328—left mandible with M,+ Ms, early middle and distorted wear
Probably from QSM:
L23400—crushed cranium with horn-cores. Isolated teeth of upper denti-
tions in late middle wear. Fragments of skull, vertebrae and BED st:
cranial bones
From bed 3aS:
L40094—right mandible fragment with Ms, occlusal length 39,3, late
middle wear
L41709—left mandible with P,-M;, middle wear
L41736—left mandible with P,-M3, early middle wear
Probably from 3aS:
L11981—right M?, occlusal length 35,1, late middle wear
L12116—left mandible fragment with damaged Ms, occlusal length c. 43,0,
early middle wear
Probably from bed 3aS, but a few possibly from QSM:
L4615—fragment of right horn-core, index = 82,9 x c. 77,0. Piece of
horn-core about 160 mm long
L6586—fragment of left horn-core
L1843—left maxilla with dP?-dP4, right sendble with dP,-M,
L2051—right Ms, occlusal length 39,5, late middle wear
L4774—right M2, occlusal length 37,2, late middle wear
L6599—left mandible fragment with P,;+P,, occlusal length P, 2533, 1m late «
middle wear
L7255—left P*, occlusal length 18,7, early middle wear
From bed 3aN:
L30174—complete but weathered right horn-core, left horn-core incomplete
at base, basioccipital, back of braincase
L30175—frontlet with complete horn-cores, skull fragments, basioccipital
and part of sides of braincase, right and left maxillae each with P*-M?
in late middle wear (Fig. 9)
L30880—fragment of left horn-core
L30888, L30889—bases of horn-cores
L32609—left and right mandibles with P,-M;, middle wear
L33380—right mandible with dP,—M,, occlusal lengths dP,-dP, 65,2,
dP. 307
L33841—right mandible with P,-Ms, late middle wear
L45029—right mandible with P,, occlusal length 16,2, ramus depth below
Po 3n9
L46058—right mandible with M,—Msg, early wear
L46073—left mandible with P,-Ms, early middle wear
Locality
The holotype is from bed 3aN of the PPM. The provenance of other speci-
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 235
Fig. 8. Simatherium demissum. 145001, holotype. Dorsal view of left horn-core and frontal;
dorsal and occipital views of cranium. Scale = 25 mm.
236 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 9. Simatherium demissum. 30175, anterodorsal view of frontlet with cross-section of
right horn-core at level shown. Lateral side of cross-section to the left and anterior side to
the base. Scale = 50 mm for frontlet and 25 mm for cross-section. L45001, holotype. Lateral
view of right horn-core. Scale = 50 mm.
mens has already been given, and it can be seen that Simatherium demissum is
represented in the QSM and both beds of the PPM.
Diagnosis
Horn-cores with a strong anterior keel, without much tendency to a postero-
lateral keel, with some rounding of the cross-section on either side of the
anterior keel so that its shape, even near the base, is not neatly triangular,
horn-cores inserted at a low inclination in side view, strongly divergent basally
in anterodorsal view and curving strongly so that at the tips they are parallel
or even slightly convergent. Slight backward curvature of the horn-cores is not
confined to their basal sector. Sometimes with deep longitudinal grooves on
posterior surfaces of horn-cores. Localized rugose areas on the front of the
pedicels below and in line with the anterior keels.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 237
Fig. 10. Simatherium demissum. 25861, occlusal view of right upper cheek tooth-row.
L45001, holotype, occlusal view of left lower cheek tooth-row. Scale = 25 mm.
Fig. 11. Simatherium demissum. 45001, holotype. Lateral view of left mandible.
Scale = 25 mimi:
Internal sinuses of frontals and horn pedicels reaching as much as 15 mm
above the top of the pedicels, small supraorbital pits, frontals not raised between
horn-core bases and no higher than dorsal part of orbital rims, dorsal part
of orbital rims projecting quite strongly. The parietofrontals suture has a
shallow V-shaped outline pointing forward. Temporal ridges well marked.
Median vertical occipital ridge with some development of flanking hollows at
- the top. Mastoid moderate sized. Basioccipital long, narrowing fairly abruptly
_ just in front of the posterior tuberosities.
Cheek teeth large and only moderately hypsodont with rugose enamel,
basal pillars present and of moderate size but simple outline, diminishing in
size from front to back of the upper and lower tooth-rows, central cavities with
fairly simple outline, styles moderately strong on upper molars, ribs quite large
but not very localized on lateral walls between styles, transverse goat folds
238 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
practically absent at front of lower molars but mesostylid well developed, out-
bowings on front and back of parts of medial walls of lower molars quite well
localized as ribs, back lobe of M, often with a posterior flange and with only a
small or no central cavity, P, with hypoconid not projecting very far, metaconid
slanted diagonally backward but sometimes with an incipient forwardly directed
flange, paraconid quite distinct from parastylid.
Etymology
The name is from the Latin demissus, drooping, and refers to the low
inclination of the horn-cores.
Remarks
Most of the fossils of Simatherium demissum are fairly broken up, but the
parts which have survived are well preserved, and the total assemblage allows
one to acquire a good idea of much of the cranial morphology. The two horn-
core pieces L4615 and L6586 were previously misidentified as from a kudu of
similar size to the Olduvai Bed II Tragelaphus strepsiceros grandis (Gentry in
Hendey 1970: 114). Two characters in this species are primitive among bovines:
the rather low-crowned cheek teeth and the closeness of the horn-core insertions
to the back of the orbits, indicating that the insertions have not started their
evolutionary migration backward on the skull. Other characters which can
reasonably be taken as primitive are the backward curvature of the horn-cores
in profile, temporal ridges approaching relatively closely posteriorly on the
braincase roof, relatively high rather than low and wide occipital surface, and
rather smooth anterior tuberosities of the basioccipital.
Isolated teeth of Simatherium demissum are not always easily told from
the teeth of Mesembriportax acrae especially those of larger size from bed 3aN.
One may hope that bovine teeth will show all or many of the following
characters: larger size, more hypsodonty, larger basal pillars, more rugose
enamel, ribs stronger in relation to the mesostyles on the upper molars, less
flattened medial walls on the lower molars, stronger mesostylids (contrasting
with less of a tendency to goat folds on the lower molars), central cavity absent
or small and more restricted to the anterior part on the third (rear) lobe of M;
(Fig. 12).
A number of limb bones are likely by their size and morphology to belong
to the Bovini. Two associated sets are, firstly, distal left humerus L12764, distal
left radius L12762 and complete left metacarpal L12763 from the QSM, and,
secondly, distal left humerus and complete left metacarpal from the QSM or
bed 3aS, both numbered L41704 (Fig. 13). The two metacarpals have lengths
and least transverse thicknesses of 268 x 32,0 and 253 x 34,8 respectively,
and are less short and thick than in Pleistocene and Recent Bovini (Fig. 14).
A right calcaneum and left astragalus, L40773 from bed 3aS, are also associated
with one another. Other bovine limb bones are:
L9992—proximal right radius probably from PPM
L21306—proximal right radius from QSM (Fig. 13)
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 239
Fig. 12. Occlusal and lateral views of left M3s. From the left: Mesembriportax acrae L46592;
Bovini, presumably Simatherium demissum 50612, L50663. Scales in millimetres.
L6094, L9740—distal right radii probably from PPM
L20445—complete right metacarpal, probably from QSM, with length and
least transverse thickness of 225 x 35,0.
L12279—left proximal metacarpal probably from PPM
The distal humeri have slanted condyles, a fairly deep hollowing for the
lateral humeroradial ligament, a wide distal end of the lateral surface behind
the ridge demarcating the hollow for the humeroradial ligament, and a coronoid
fossa which is moderately deep. Both proximal radii show a moderately large
lateral tubercle which is set low, a rim on the medial side of the medial facet,
and a lateral facet which sticks well forward anteriorly. L9992 has an angled
edge to its medial facet, whereas L21306 is rounded, and L9992 is wider front
to back across its medial facet than L21306. The anterior flanges on the distal
radii are wide apart and not strongly developed, the posteromedial facet for the
scaphoid at maximum flexion is poorly hollowed, the anterior facets for lunate
and scaphoid and the posterior one for the lunate are, however, better marked,
that part of the articular facet for the cuneiform which lies on the radius is quite
_ wide, and the distal end as a whole is swollen in side view. The articular surfaces
of the metacarpal proximally do not fill the whole available area at the top of
the bone, and the edge of the magnumtrapezoid facet does not have a single,
clearly angled anteromedial corner. Distally there are poor hollows on the
anterior surface above the condyles. The outer edges of the condyles are nearly
parallel to one another.
240 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 13. Limb bones of Simatherium demissum, all shown as of the right side. A. Anterior
view of distal humerus L41704. B. Proximal articular surface of metacarpal L41704.
C. Proximal articular surface of radius L21306. D. Anterior view of same radius.
Anterior sides of B and C towards the base of the illustration.
a = ridge behind hollow for lateral humero-radial ligament, b = coronoid fossa, c = lateral
tubercle, d = medial rim of medial facet, e = lateral facet, f = medial facet, g = magnum-
trapezoid facet, h = unciform facet.
Measurements
Measurements on the three best preserved skulls are:
L45001 L30174 #130175
Total length of horn-core .. . 299 292 348
Anteroposterior diameter at base of ent i
core ; A ; : : 74,8 59,6 70,0
Lateromedial diameter at base ofhorn-core 58,2 50,4 64,5
Minimum width across lateral sides of horn
PIR GUCET Sie Oe ie ae oe 187 — 192
Width across lateral edges of aipeor itl
foramina ; : : ; 90,4 — —-
Minimum width across temporal lines on
skull roof ; : : ine 63D —_ 66,5
Skull width across mastoids behind
external auditory meati fe ed wa 170 —
Occipital height from dorsal edge of
foramen magnum ew . 61,4 — —
Width across anterior tuberosities of basi-
OCCHDIEA. 0 sg mer ng eee ey A: 28,8 23,0
Width across posterior tuberosities of basi-
occipital . ; : : : 60,9 c. 64,0 48,5
Tooth measurements of these and other specimens in middle wear are given
in Table 2
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 24]
oe Least peeine
60 4 thickness go
e ae
ee
ow |
ae :
@ &
50 > "
aa f
S e
S
s 4
S
100 200 300mm
Fig. 14. Proportions of bovine metacarpals. X = E Quarry Langebaanweg, e = Pelorovis
?antiquus from Elandsfontein, S = extant Syncerus caffer, O = S. acoelotus BK 1952.218
from upper Bed II Olduvai Gorge, at present in Nairobi, + = Pelorovis oldowayensis asso-
ciated skeleton from upper Bed II Olduvai Gorge.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
242
v6
6 LE
ZTE
0°76
JOMO}
12]
9‘TS
Orr 2
€‘LE
L‘€Z
CsI
Z'€9
47
ZTE
600T
JOMO]T
1J2]
9°19
v'Lb
v'LE
9°61
L'8€
ace
L'%6
JOMO]
JP]
ELO9VT LOOSVI SELIVI G6OLIVI Iv8ttel 609cET SLIOCT
0°Or
OLE
(GNIC6
CSE
6LZ
‘16
JOMO]
IPT
(KG
O16 2
IOMO]
yysII
yer = t
ys = |
S07 = rd WS “LEE =
GCC
scl
0°8¢
€°8E
9°87
8°76
JOMOT
12]
‘6 7 It
9°0€ 9°6€
9°67 7 87
9°78 a
Joddn JoMOj
yysiI 49]
uoIjUEp snonpidep =
aN 39] YISUI] [esN}D90 [OOSHT
y°S9
L‘9v
0‘Or
8°77
g*LI
16S
€‘Ep
TEE
L‘Sol
JOMO]
SII
7 AIAVL
Eale
6 £7
Eve
6 VE
TL6 9
Joddn
14311
Joddn
yYysI4
8ZE8TI T98S71 198S71 OOVECT crsi'l
‘SUOI}IJUSP SUIAOG JO S}UOWOINSPO|]
JOMO]
JST
Joddn
IJ9]
evs
SI MOjog WIdep snweYy
TA MOOG YIdop snueyY
®q MOloq YIdop snuIeY
bd YISUdN| [esn]s0O
* Zdq Yul [esn[s909
bd-Zd YIsUI] [esn[I9O
* €W YIsuUs] [esn[s9O
ZW Ui8uU9] [esn[s909
EW-TW Yisu9] [esnfs99
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 243
Comparisons
Simatherium demissum is obviously similar to other African and Eurasian
bovines of Miocene and Pliocene age, and comparisons must be made with the
following forms:
Leptobos syrticus Petrocchi, 1956, from Sahabi. It is a primitive species
but its generic attribution seems reasonable.
Parabos Arambourg & Piveteau, 1929, containing one or more species
from the Ruscinian of France. Among these are the boselaphine-like
P. cordieri Christol (Gervais), 1852, from Montpellier and P. boodon
(Gervais), 1853, from Perpignan, generally considered to be a later
site (Guérin 1975). In Europe Parabos predates Leptobos, but the
primitive L. syrticus in North Africa is likely to be still older.
Proamphibos Pilgrim, 1939, containing one or more species from the
Siwaliks. P. Jachrymans Pilgrim (1939: 271) is the type species from the
Tatrot Formation and P. kashmiricus Pilgrim (1939: 278) is apparently
a more advanced Hemibos-like species, either contemporaneous or
later. Simatherium demissum will not be compared with P. kashmiricus.
Ugandax gautieri Cooke & Coryndon, 1970, from deposits of unknown age
in the Kazinga Channel of the Kaiso Formation.
An unnamed species of Ugandax from the Hadar Formation.
Simatherium kohllarseni from Laetoli.
Simatherium demissum differs from Leptobos syrticus by being slightly
pealion its horn-core cross-section less clearly triangular (it has more expansion
on either side of the anterior keel), horn-cores less divergent, horn-cores curved
backward, supraorbital pits wider apart, braincase roof more strongly angled
(in the Sahabi bovine it is almost horizontal), less strong temporal ridges and
less of a temporal fossa, occipital surface probably less low and wide and
certainly with a less long top surface, mastoids smaller and without deep pit-like
excavations dorsomedially, median vertical ridge on occipital, and basioccipital
more triangularly shaped with a more definite valley between the posterior
tuberosities, narrowing more abruptly in front of the posterior tuberosities, and
with smaller anterior tuberosities. The two forms are similar only in having a
strong anterior keel, dorsal orbital rims which project well and horn-core
insertions above the back of the orbits. The last resemblance is certainly a
character which is primitive in bovines. Most of the differences can. be recog-
nized as being primitive or advanced in one or other of the species, and one is
aware of two bovine lineages showing different characters advancing at different
‘rates. More advanced Leptobos, like L. falconeri and the European Villa-
franchian species, have an almost horizontal braincase roof and very strong
temporal ridges, and it is clear that the Langebaanweg bovine cannot be assigned
to Leptobos.
A cranium of Parabos cordieri and a cranium and skull of P. boodon
(Depéret 1890, pl. 7 (fig: 4); Piveteau 1961: 1052 fig. 145) were examined in the
Institut de Paléontologie, Paris, and some horn-cores of P. cordieri in Basle.
244 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Simatherium demissum differs from the skull of P. boodon by its shorter horn-
cores, anterior keel stronger and posterolateral keel weaker, horn-core cross-
section not so clearly triangular in shape, horn-core divergence more strongly
diminished distally (i.e. a more curved course in anterior view), horn-cores
probably inserted closer behind the orbits, horn-cores curve slightly backward,
frontals not raised between the horn-core bases, better marked temporal ridges,
more development of a rugose raised area posteriorly on the braincase roof,
occipital surface with a horizontal top edge, teeth probably larger, styles larger
on upper molars, slightly more localized ribs on anterior parts of lateral walls
of upper molars. It seems likely that the facial part of the P. boodon skull has
been displaced downward and that this has reduced the apparent inclination
of the horn-cores in profile. Originally they would have been more upright than
in S. demissum.
The large cranium of P. boodon from Perpignan has horn-cores with no
posterolateral keel at all, more strongly diminished distal divergence and a
slight degree of backward curvature, flatter frontals, horn-cores set more
closely to the orbits, better temporal ridges, braincase roof less slanted, and
is thus less different from Simatherium demissum than is the complete skull.
It is possible that its frontals’ morphology is more representative of the species
than that of the complete skull, and its horn-cores are more uprightly inserted
than in the Langebaanweg bovine. The absence of a posterolateral keel is
puzzling. The basioccipital is preserved on this specimen. It is unlike that of
S. demissum by being wider anteriorly, not narrowing abruptly just in front of
the posterior tuberosities, not having a narrow and deep conta groove between
them, and not having a central longitudinal ridge.
The cranium of Parabos cordieri is well removed from resemblance to
S. demissum by its smaller size, and horn-cores which are less divergent basally
and less robust. It also has a more clearly triangular cross-section and sometimes
a better marked posterolateral keel. It agrees with the South African species
in having little compression of the horn-cores, horn-cores set widely apart
and close above the orbits, temporal crests present, a rugose area at the back
of the braincase roof, mastoids not very large, and basioccipital narrowed
immediately in front of the posterior tuberosities. The Basle examples have a
low inclination of the horn-cores.
It is interesting that the teeth of Parabos appear to have about the same
level of brachyodonty and occlusal complexity as S. demissum.
One can see Parabos cordieri to P. boodon as a bovine lineage evolving in
Europe before the appearance there of Leptobos which displaced it. From the
facts just given, one can sum up the differences of Parabos as a whole from
S. demissum. Parabos has variable development of the posterolateral keel and
generally an anterior keel, whereas S. demissum had already lost its supposed
ancestral posterolateral keel, but has a strong anterior keel. Again, S. demissum
has evolved horn-cores with strong basal divergence and distal recurvature.
Their low inclination is matched only by the Basle example of P. cordieri. The
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 245
upper molars on the Parabos skull had evolved rather small styles but retained
less localized anterolateral ribs than S. demissum. Such differences seem sufficient
to show that Parabos must have been a different lineage, and this is compatible
with the geographical circumstances.
Simatherium demissum differs from Proamphibos lachrymans as from Lepto-
bos syrticus and Parabos by its shorter and more robust horn-cores, their less
regularly triangular cross-section, greater basal divergence, and a more curved
course in anterior view. These can all be considered advanced characters. Other
differences are horn-cores inserted less widely apart in S. demissum, supra-
orbital pits less wide apart, more projection of the orbital rims, horn-core
insertions probably less far behind the orbits, occipital surface lower and wider,
presence of a central longitudinal ridge on the basioccipital, and smaller anterior
tuberosities. S. demissum agrees with P. /achrymans in the degree of mediolateral
compression and a strong anterior keel on the horn-cores, in the inclination of
the horn-cores in side view, and even in the slight swelling of the cross-section
laterally to the anterior keel. It also agrees in the not very large mastoids and
many cranial characters.
Simatherium demissum is more advanced than the Ugandax gautieri holo-
type by its larger size, horn-core insertions wider apart, horn-cores more
divergent basally and with a more curved course, probably a shorter braincase
and a more triangular basioccipital. It is more primitive in retention of a strong
anterior keel, horn-core insertions closer to the orbits, a rugose area on the
braincase at the top of the occipital, and smaller anterior tuberosities of the
basioccipital. Other differences lie in its transverse constriction of the basi-
occipital immediately in front of the posterior tuberosities, the valley between
the posterior tuberosities of the basioccipital, the central longitudinal ridge less
pronounced on the basioccipital and the smaller mastoids. It is similar in its
short to moderate horn-core length, degree of mediolateral compression, lack
of a very orderly triangular cross-section, inclination of the insertions, and
_ most of the other cranial characters. Thomas (19798, pl. 2 (figs 1, 3, 5)) has
identified bovine teeth at Lukeino as Ugandax cf. gautieri. They are very similar
to those from ‘E’ Quarry but a little smaller.
The Afar Ugandax is generally a more advanced species than U. gautieri.
It may have occurred later, although the time level of U. gautieri is unknown.
S. demissum has many differences from the Afar Ugandax sp. It is more primitive
in its horn-cores with a stronger anterior keel, usually more backwardly curved,
the horn insertions closer behind the orbits, the braincase less low and wide,
_ the smaller anterior tuberosities of the basioccipital, and the occlusal surface
of the cheek teeth less complicated both in the outline of the central cavities
and in the absence of constrictions across the lateral lobes of the lower molars.
It is more advanced in the greater divergence of its horn-cores, their insertions
being wider apart, the occipital with perhaps a straighter top edge, its longer
molars (Fig. 15), the relatively shorter premolar rows (Fig. 16) and in the
metaconids of P; and P, perhaps less diagonally slanted backwards. Other
246 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Elandsfontein KXXXXX XK X X
Olduvai middle a upper Bed I X KX MX X x
Shungura Fm. member 6G WOK X OOK XX OK KORE Oe
Shungura Fm. member C XXX XOX ROOHOKX
Shungura Fm. member B ja Sette
Hadar Formation x OOK XX
Langebaanweg ROOK XX
a a a ia a) a a i nna a) (arama nS Si SSCSCS*C~S~S
30 40 50 60mm
Fig. 15. Occlusal length of bovine M;s. Dotted Langebaanweg readings are QSM, others are
PPM. Elandsfontein sample is Pelorovis ?antiquus. The four largest readings for Olduvai
and for Shungura member G are likely to be P. oldowayensis. Other Olduvai and Omo readings
are Syncerus, and Hadar Formation ones are Ugandax sp. Not until Olduvai does Syncerus
become comparable in length with the Langebaanweg bovine.
differences from the Afar species are the strong projection of the orbital rims,
more of a median vertical ridge on the occipital, smaller mastoids, and a longer
-basioccipital with a central longitudinal ridge and a valley between its posterior
tuberosities. A comparison of skull measurements between the Afar and ‘E’
Quarry bovines is shown in Figure 17.
Simatherium demissum differs from the Berlin S. kohllarseni by its smaller
size, anterior keel, horn-cores inserted less extremely widely apart, lower
inclination of the horn insertions, less divergent horn-cores, horn-cores with
a slight backward curvature which is not confined to the basal sector, a less
irregular surface of the horn-core, no consistent shallow longitudinal groove
running along the horn-core, frontals not transversely arched between the
horn-core bases, clearer temporal ridges and no temporal fossa below over-
hanging horn-core insertions. It differs from the more recently recovered
example by an anterior keel, lower inclination of horn-cores, less divergent
horn-cores, horn-cores with slight backward curvature, a less irregular surface
of the horn-core and no deep longitudinal grooves anteroventrally, more of a
median vertical occipital ridge, and a smaller mastoid.
It is similar to both these Tanzanian fossils in its short robust horn-cores,
without compression, loss of a triangular cross-section, horn-cores inserted
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 247
9q 4 Length
70
50
Length M,-Mz
60 80 100 120 mm
Fig. 16. Occlusal lengths of lower premolar and molar rows in Bovini. X = bed 3aN Lange-
baanweg, X = QSM Langebaanweg, e = Pelorovis ?antiquus from Elandsfontein, n =
P. antiquus from Naivasha, Kenya, + = P. oldowayensis from upper Bed II Olduvai Gorge,
S = extant Syncerus caffer, S = S. caffer from latest Pleistocene Kibish Formation, Omo
(see Gentry & Gentry 1978: 308-322 for this and other bovine fossils), O = S. acoelotus
from upper Bed II Olduvai Gorge, O = S. ?acoelotus from Shungura Formation member G,
m = Syncerus sp. from Melkbos, a = Ugandax sp. from Hadar Formation. Lower diagonal
line = 50 per cent, upper one = 66,7 per cent as in Figure 3.
widely apart, the slope of the braincase, temporal ridges, a raised area on the
brain roof at the top of the occipital, occipital proportions similar, a flat-topped
- occipital with side edges formed by the nuchal crests, basioccipital with a
central longitudinal ridge in the area just behind the level of the anterior tubero-
sities, and a very deep, short groove between the posterior tuberosities.
A Simatherium such as the Langebaanweg species could be ancestral to the
Laetoli one. Nearly all its differences from the Laetoli examples can be thought
of as more primitive, and this contrasts with the comparisons previously made
with other bovines. It is interesting that at Langebaanweg the horn-core inser-
tions are more inclined. Either this character is primitive for the genus or it
- could be an indication of regional specialization at an early time level.
Tribe Reduncini
Kobus A. Smith, 1840
Type species
Kobus ellipsiprymnus (Ogilby, 1833).
248 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Anteroposterior diameter at horn core base
1
I
Mediolateral diameter at horn core base );
Width across supraorbital pits
Width across horn bases
Minimum width across temporal ridges
ie nas
Skull width across mastoids : : se
Fa
cg 3
\
\ e .
ee
60 80 100 120 140
Occipital height
Width across anterior tuberosities of basioccipital Js
ae
\,
Width across posterior tuberosities of basioccipital
Fig. 17. Percentage diagram of skull measurements in Bovini. The standard line at 100 per
cent is the holotype of Proamphibos lachrymans (M 26576, cast) and readings on other lines
are expressed as percentages of their values on the standard line. The second continuous line
is the holotype of Simatherium demissum, and the dashed line is Ugandax sp. AL 194-1 from
the Hadar Formation. The African forms are wider across the temporal ridges, have lower
occipitals, and have basioccipitals with relatively narrow anterior tuberosities.
Generic diagnosis
Larger sized reduncines; horn-cores usually long, their bases sometimes
curving backward instead of being concave anteriorly, usually with a flattened
lateral surface but no tendency towards a flattened posteromedial surface;
frontals sometimes with a small system of internal sinuses.
Remarks
A majority of the Kobus-like horn-cores and possibly the back of a
reduncine cranium from ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg, belong to a short-horned
species which is given a new name below. Two problems surround these remains.
A major one is that dentitions apparently associated with these horn-cores are
very unlike other known reduncines. If the association could be proved beyond
question, i.e. by the recovery of a skull with both horn-cores and teeth, then a
new generic name would be needed for this species. Meanwhile it is put into
Kobus. A lesser problem is that the two most completely preserved crania with
horn-cores show a small suite of character differences from the other horn-cores
and cranium. They may represent another species and are described under the
heading Kobus sp. 2.
Kobus subdolus sp. nov.
Figs 18—20.
Holotype
L30878—right horn-core with part of frontal, dorsal part of orbital rim
and supraorbital pit (Fig. 18).
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 249
Referred material
The main specimens assigned to this species are as follows:
From bed 3aS:
L41387—frontlet with nearly complete horn-cores. Index 48,7 x 41,0,
minimum width across lateral sides of horn pedicels 92,9, width across
lateral edges of supraorbital foramina 45,7
L40248—left horn-core, index 43,8 x 37,5; same individual as right horn-
core L40371
L40049—right horn-core, index 41,5 x 37,0
L40051—left horn-core, index 39,2 x 33,6
Probably from bed 3aS, but a few possibly from QSM:
L1847, L2609, L6076, L10672—left horn-cores, the second and fourth
with indexes 50,2 x 41,2 and 43,5 x 35,6
L2611, L2612—right horn-cores, indexes 46,5 x 35,9 and 41,4 x 36,6
L2604, a reduncine cranium preserved only from a level behind the horn
bases, may be conspecific with the horn-cores (Fig. 19). Its measure-
ments are:
Maximum braincase width . : ; : : 80,2
Minimum width across temporal lines on skull roof : oe 28,1
Skull width across mastoids behind external auditory meatus . 9253
Occipital height from dorsal edge of foramen magnum .__. 44.0
Width across anterior tuberosities of basioccipital . .. 31,0
Width across posterior tuberosities of basioccipital. . . 3559
From bed 3aN:
L40726—left horn-core, index 40,2 x 33,0; same individual as right
horn-core L40728
L40870—left horn-core, same individual as right horn-core L40872,
index c. 50,5 x 43,0
L46062—right and left horn-cores, index 50,3 x 46,0, length c. 190
L30879—index 46,7 x 40,3, L41754 45,7 x 39,8, L46044 41,1 x 36,3,
L46045 43,0 x 40,3, L46048, L46060 47,7 x 41,2 and length 197,
L46069 50,9 x 43,0 and length 159—left horn-cores
L30029—index 47,7 x 36,1, L30878 44,4 x 37,6, L33383 47,7 x 40,0,
33746 43,3-<-35,0, LA0873. 46,0 x 32,7, . LAI/55 -42,6 x 36,5,
L46049 39,7 x 35,6, L46070 44,4 x 36,6 and length 172, L46071
54,4 x 46,3 and length 178—right horn-cores
L32163—partial occipital surface and basioccipital
— Locality
The holotype comes from bed 3aN of the PPM. The provenance of other
specimens has already been given, and it can be seen that the species is not
definitely known from the QSM.
250 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 18. Kobus subdolus. 30878, holotype. Right horn-core in
lateral and anterior views. Scale = 25 mm.
Fig. 19. Kobus subdolus. 2604, cranium. From the left: occipital view, lateral
view, ventral view. Scale = 25 mm.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 251
Diagnosis
An antelope about the size of Kobus kob or K. leche. Horn-cores short,
little compressed mediolaterally, with a flattened lateral surface, their widest
mediolateral diameter lying rather anteriorly and the cross-section narrowing
behind this level to a posterolateral edge which does not quite assume the form
of a keel. Deep grooves run longitudinally just medial to this posterior edge.
A minority of horn-cores show transverse ridges which are V-shaped and close
together. Horn-cores inserted above the orbits, at a low inclination and close
together, not very divergent and with divergence perhaps lessening distally.
They show little curvature but the tips curve forward slightly. Anterior edge
of horn pedicels sometimes set uprightly in profile and thus at an angle to the
anterior edge of the horn-core proper. Postcornual fossa small and deep,
frontals little raised between horn-core bases, supraorbital pits large.
Etymology
The specific name taken from the Latin subdolus, is somewhat deceitful,
and refers to the species not having teeth which are clearly reduncine.
Remarks
The most striking features of Kobus subdolus horn-cores is that they are so
short. Transverse ridges may be seen on 5 out of 17 left horn-cores and 3 out
of 14 right ones. The tendency towards an upright anterior edge of the horn
pedicel can be seen in 5 among 16 and 6 among 15 right horn-cores. It is possible
that those from bed 3aN are larger than from 3aS (Fig. 20), but the difference
is not statistically significant, even if the two 3aN horn-cores of ‘Kobus sp. 2’
are, indeed, a separate species.
The reduncine cranium 12604 is presumably conspecific with the horn-
cores. There is no central indentation in the parietofrontals suture as it passes
across the top of the skull, the temporal lines approach fairly closely posteriorly,
the braincase widens posteriorly, its roof is inclined in profile and not curved
downward posteriorly, the nuchal crests are not very strongly developed, the
- occipital surface is fairly high and narrow and faces backward, its edge is not
evenly rounded, the median vertical ridge of the occipital appears to have been
present and had shallow depressions flanking it dorsally, the fairly small
mastoids lie mostly within the bounds of the occipital surface and do not have
a pronounced dorsal or ventral rim, the anterior tuberosities of the basioccipital
are very large, longitudinal ridges pass backward from the anterior tuberosities
and converge posteriorly (giving the appearance of a transverse constriction
_ across the centre of the basioccipital), the posterior tuberosities take the form
of posterolaterally directed transverse ridges, and the auditory bulla is large
and inflated. The large size of the auditory bullae is noteworthy. Another
fragmentary occipital surface with part of the basioccipital, L32163, appears
to be conspecific.
One or two limb bones from ‘E’ Quarry are identified as possibly reduncine.
L30392 from bed 3aN includes a distal right humerus with much of its shaft
252
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and an associated proximal right radius and reduncine dental remains. Two
distal humeri likely to be conspecific are L31937B and L32629 from bed 3aN
and two further proximal radii are L31937C from bed 3aN and L24932 from
the QSM (Fig. 21). The humeri show the following characters:
l.
Dep
3.
504 Mediolateral
40
50
The distal part of the lateral surface is wide behind the ridge bounding
the hollow for the lateral humeroradial ligament. |
The ridge on the distal part of the lateral side for the origin of the
extensor carpi radialis is marked, especially in L31937B.
The coronoid fossa is deep in L30392 and L32629 but not in L31937B.
In L31937B and L32629 the condyles are slanted but this is not true for
L30392.
. The medial groove on the condyles is deep in L30392 and L32629 but
shallow in L31937B.
The hollow for the lateral humeroradial ligament is deep in L30392
and L32629 but shallow in L31937B.
The medial condyle passes high into the coronoid fossa in L30392 and
L32629 but this is less clear in L31937B.
diameter
Anteroposterior diameter
20 30 40 50 60 mm
Fig. 20. Basal diameters of reduncine horn-cores. O = bed 3aS Langebaanweg, X = bed
3aN, X = Kobus sp. 2, + = Kobus sp. from Sahabi, r = K. ?porrecticornis from Baard’s
Quarry, S = K. sigmoidalis from members C-F inclusive of the Shungura Formation. Upper
diagonal line = 100%, lower one = 66,7 % as in Figure 3. A cross-section of the right horn-
core L2612 is shown, taken 20,7 mm above its base, with lateral side to the left and anterior
side to the base. Scale = 10 mm.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 253
Fig. 21. Limb bones of Reduncini, Alcelaphini and Neotragini, all shown as of the right side.
Anterior sides of proximal and distal views are towards the base of the illustration.
A. Anterior view of distal reduncine humerus L24932. B. Proximal articular surface
of associated radius L24932. C. Proximal articular surface of alcelaphine radius L41482.
D. Proximal articular surface of associated metacarpal L41482. EE. Distal articular
surface of neotragine tibia L41684. F. Proximal articular surface of associated metatarsal
L41684. G. Anterior view of distal neotragine humerus L40787. H. Proximal articular
surface of neotragine radius L40088 with part of its back edge taken from L40021.
a = medial malleolus, b = fibula facets, c = main facet for naviculocuboid, d = main
facet for ectocuneiform.
For the first four characters two or all three of the humeri are unlike
alcelaphines, but for the last three characters L30392 and L32629 resemble
them. None of the characters is definitely unlike later Reduncini, and although
the second and third could be held to resemble Tragelaphini, the last three do
not agree very well with that tribe.
Most characters of the proximal radii are unlike Alcelaphini: the lateral
facet is broader and longer (not in L31937C), not pointed anteriorly, and its
_ posterior edge is not stepped forward from the level of the back edge of the
medial facet. The lateral tubercle is small and low. The indent in the back edge
of the medial facet is less deep than in Alcelaphini, and the anteromedial part
of that facet is more extensive in L30392 (but not in L31937C or L24932) than
in Alcelaphini. It is interesting that there is no medial rim on the medial facet
—unlike later Reduncini or Tragelaphini.
Comparisons
The Langebaanweg fossils agree well with a frontlet and three horn-core
pieces from Sahabi, now in Rome. The Sahabi horn-cores are about the same
size, not very compressed mediolaterally, with some flattening of the lateral
surface, hardly any backward curvature basally but with some upward curva-
ture towards the tips, and their widest mediolateral diameter lying rather
anteriorly. The supraorbital pits are close together and may have been rather
large, the dorsal part of the orbital rim is strongly projecting, and the parieto-
254 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
frontals suture is transversely straight across the top of the skull. The Sahabi
horn-cores although short are less short than the Langebaanweg ones and they
diverge more. There are no transverse ridges on the horn-cores and no angling
of the front edge of the pedicel on the line of the horn-core proper, but the
condition of both these characters is variable in the Langebaanweg fossils.
The cast of a right horn-core, BM(NH) M 8200, from Wadi Natrun is a
little smaller than the Sahabi and Langebaanweg ones but similarly rather
short, little compressed and with its widest transverse diameter lying at rather
an anterior level.
Measurements on the Sahabi frontlet are: horn-core index 47,4 x 42,0,
horn-core length 218, minimum width across lateral sides of horn pedicels
c. 102, and width across supraorbital pits probably near 50. The basal index
for another Sahabi horn-core is 49,0 x 41,5, and for the Wadi Natrun cast
38,8 x 30,6. The length of the Wadi Natrun cast is c. 150.
Kobus subdolus is unlike the early reduncine K. porrecticornis of the middle
Siwaliks by its larger size, shorter and less divergent horn-cores which are
without backward curvature and are inserted at a lower inclination, and by its
occasional possession of transverse ridges. K. porrecticornis is discussed again
in the account of Baard’s Quarry fossils.
Compared with Redunca darti of Makapansgat Limeworks, the Langebaan-
weg species shows closer insertions of the horn-cores and probably closer
supraorbital pits as well, more oblique insertions, the tendency to have a front
edge of the pedicel at an angle to the front edge of the horn-core, and horn-cores
with a completely different cross-sectional shape. This last feature arises from
the horn-cores having a flattened lateral surface, narrowing posteriorly in
cross-section so that there is an approach to having a posterior keel, having
no hollowing or flattening posteriorly or posteromedially at the base, and being
slightly compressed mediolaterally. The Langebaanweg species also differs in
having no central indentation of the parietofrontals suture, a less pronounced
ventral rim of the mastoid, and possibly better marked hollows flanking the
median vertical ridge of the occipital surface. It must be a different lineage
from R. darti.
Kobus subdolus differs from undescribed reduncine crania and horn-cores
from the Hadar Formation, Afar, by its short horn-cores with flattened lateral
surfaces and a slight degree of mediolateral compression, less narrow mastoids,
larger bullae, larger anterior tuberosities of the basioccipital, less narrow
posterior tuberosities of the basioccipital, and no anterior indentation of the
parietofrontals suture. It is clear that the Afar species is a different lineage not
very closely related to the Langebaanweg form.
Compared with Siwaliks reduncines from the Pinjor Formation which
may be assigned to Sivacobus palaeindicus (BM(NH) 17437, 39559, M 487,
and M 2402 which Gentry & Gentry (1978: 337) discussed), Kobus subdolus
shows horn-cores with a flattened lateral surface, more mediolateral compres-
sion, their widest mediolateral diameter lying more anteriorly, and more of an
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 255
approach to a posterolateral keel. The cranium L2604 also has weaker temporal
ridges, no central indentation in the parietofrontals suture, not such pro-
nounced posterior widening of the braincase, and not such a strong median
vertical ridge on the occipital.
Despite a number of differences such as shortness and less mediolateral
compression (Fig. 20), the ‘E’ Quarry horn-cores recall the species Kobus
sigmoidalis and K. ancystrocera from the Shungura Formation, Omo, by their
cross-section with a flattened lateral surface and an approach to a posterolateral
keel, the very low insertion angle in side view, and the manner in which the
front of the pedicel is angled on the axis of the horn-core proper. The two
Omo species seem to belong to a ‘modern’ group of reduncines related to the
living waterbuck and Central African lechwe and to living and fossil kob.
On the Langebaanweg cranium L2604 the occipital is higher and narrower
than in the Shungura species, which one could imagine to be a primitive
character befitting a more ancient species. However, the evidence of the redun-
cine teeth at Langebaanweg must be considered before making a final assessment
of likely phylogenies.
The question of reduncine teeth at Langebaanweg
In 1975 the most northerly exposures of bed 3aN were excavated and
among the bovid horn-cores there was the following representation of
individuals: Tragelaphus two, Mesembriportax one, Simatherium three, Kobus
six, Damalacra one. No teeth were found which were unquestionably reduncine
in appearance, despite the predominance of Kobus horn-cores, but the com-
monest group of teeth, coming from at least seven individuals, appeared to be
most like Tragelaphini. They agreed with teeth found in earlier years in ‘E’
Quarry and assigned to Tragelaphini, and showed the following characters:
1. Dentition rather low crowned . like Tragelaphini, also a primi-
tive character
2. Hardly any development of ribs like Tragelaphini
between the styles on the lateral
walls of the upper molars
3. No basal pillars on upper molars like Tragelaphini
and only tiny ones on lowers
4. Anteromedial lobe of upper a primitive character
molars is not connected in early
wear to the junction of the
posteromedial with the antero-
lateral lobes
5. Premolar row moderately long . intermediate between Reduncini
and Tragelaphini (Fig. 22)
6. P® and especially P? large in com- like Tragelaphini
parison with P*
7. Central cavities of P? and P* sited like Tragelaphini, also a primi-
rather anteriorly tive character
=," *
256
40
30
20
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
40 50
Length M,-Mz
60 70mm
Fig. 22. Occlusal lengths of lower premolar and molar rows in Reduncini and Tragelaphini.
X = bed 3aN Langebaanweg,
a = extant Tragelaphus angasi, S = extant T. spekei,
e = extant Kobus ellipsiprymnus, O = extant K. kob, r = extant Redunca redunca. Lower
diagonal line = 50%, upper one = 66,7 % as in Figure 3.
10.
ee
13%
14.
Small goat folds present on lower
molars, presumably not a primi-
tive character
Medial walls of lower molars with
slight outbowings only
Lateral lobes pointed but not
narrowed in their lateral part
Medial wall of back lobe of M;
set more laterally than medial
wall of anterior lobes
Hypoconid of P, often not pro-
jecting laterally and never with a
deep valley in front of it
Paraconid-metaconid on _ P,
usually not fused but metaconid
growing forward
A backwardly directed flange is
usually present on P, metaconid
a tendency towards Reduncini
like Tragelaphini—flatter than
in 7. spekei and buxtoni*
like Tragelaphini
like Reduncini
like Tragelaphini, also a primi-
tive character
like Tragelaphini and Redunca
arundinum
frequent in Tragelaphini
* Extant Tragelaphus spekei and buxtoni have less flattened walls than T. imberbis, strepsi-
ceros and eurycerus and Taurotragus oryx. Tragelaphus angasi and scriptus are probably
intermediate.
Se _ ee
-S ers.
251
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG
Ee — rs ————
8°8 TOI 8°6 rOI "+ gd BUI] TeSNIDIO
601 ee == — " * gd YSU] [esN[I9O
0OE = — = j rd-zd YISUI] [esN{I90
(SHi\h LI gc 6°91 " * ZW Yi8u9] jesn[s90
€‘Ly 7 6r ply? S9p°2 ° WW YisuU9] [esn[s90O
Nee Nee Nee WSO
OS8cel LEEIEIL 6SpOel coOlell
0°97 €“LZ CLC OL =; ed ee €“LZ ae = — -- -- * £~w Moye ydep snuey
74 oar L°v7Z YANG = = =e BONSG aa — -- = — * Ty MOpOQG Ydep snueYy
EC a = 0°61 ae as ‘ST SVT == = — — = - 8g Mojaq ydep snuey
vil ee Lc a) Sb Ge ra EZ ay Oe] wal VC = 7 + Fg yysusy] [esnjooO
76 ie 78 €°8 ¢°8 cae = L3 = — — —- — "+ &y yySua] pesnjooO
y‘TE ae 60. 01602 O0CE = meee “Pile < = Se Re aa aa "dd Y}3u9] [esnjs9O
SEZ SEZ 6°€7 G6 SAG ee C356 eee Ober tee aCle 6° as 610C 7° SAT YASUI] [esN[I9O
GS S°LT OO} -°_ LV ‘Ol 781 =
0° 6°96 E“ys S‘6r Ors aE ra ae 9°€S L’8v 0°sS pw
Nee See Nee Nee Ne®e Nee Nee Nee Nee WSO See
L909VT IVEIVI €OCEET OS8ZET COLZET SI6GIET 990IET COEOET OO00ET 809771 SO9STT LE69ET CLSZT
"IBOM [PPI 932] Ul EOZEET PUL 99DTET “OOODET
ydeoxe ‘1eeM o[ppIw A[ies Ul o1e ASU] “(S1JO] POANSLOWTUN YPIA\ PO}BIDOSSe SJYBII JO IO) Opis Io] sy} JO oIe [JY ‘SUONMUOP suTOUNpeI Jo s}UDWOINsKO/
8°91 6 v1 eal = 6 SI : "SAL YIsUI] [esn[s9O
= FWA yysus] [esnjs9O
€ aTav LL
258 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 23. Kobus subdolus. L32850, occlusal view of right
upper tooth row. Scale = 10 mm.
Fig. 24. Kobus subdolus. L15605, occlusal view of left lower dentition. Scale = 10 mm.
Fig. 25. -Kobus subdolus. L32850, L46067, lateral views of right mandibles. Scale = 10 mm.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 259
Measurements for these teeth are given in Table 3 and they are illustrated
in Figures 23-25. Readings for occlusal length and metastylid crown height in
M,s in early middle wear are:
P7055); riecht 21,7 x 12,5 ESLIT) right «ce. 23,2:% 14,0
E20906 left 23,4 x 14,1 31916 left 25,6 x 17,4
Other readings of occlusal length are:
L1843C left P, 13,3 probably PPM, L10292 left dP, 18,4 3aS or QSM.
Some characters not mentioned in the list do not show a clear trend
towards one tribe rather than the other. For example, the anterior part of the
lateral wall of P, sometimes bends round to become almost transversely oriented
as in Reduncini, and sometimes remains mainly anteroposteriorly directed as
in Tragelaphini. Again, some of the mandibles, e.g. L32850, are rather shallow
anteriorly while others, e.g. L30392, are deeper, and it is not possible to say
which condition is more like Tragelaphini and which is more like Reduncini.
For assessment of the tribal affinity of these teeth, much depends on the
‘direction’ of their evolution. In some cases, for example the first character
in the list, one can feel confident that the brachyodonty of the cheek teeth
is not only more like Tragelaphini than Reduncini, but also that it is more
primitive than the high-crowned teeth of later Reduncini. In other cases it
is harder to guess whether or not a condition is primitive without a prior
knowledge of phylogeny.
The only indication of changes within the span of ‘E’ Quarry deposits is
that the measured mandible and maxilla from the QSM have relatively small
molar teeth, but one cannot know that larger samples would validate this
difference. The tooth assemblage cannot be assigned satisfactorily to more
than one species and if this species should be Kobus subdolus, one tooth only
(p. 223) is left to go with Tragelaphus.
It is possible that these teeth show an early stage in the evolution of redun-
cine characters. This implies that Reduncini had ancestors with tragelaphine-like
teeth, and that at Langebaanweg recognizably reduncine teeth had not yet
evolved. Hitherto it has seemed likely that Reduncini would have evolved from
boselaphine ancestors (Gentry 19785: 567) although Pilgrim (1939: 21) and
Simpson (1945: 272) were not definite about their boodont affinities. In the
Siwaliks succession one finds small boselaphines (Protragocerus gluten, Mio-
tragocerus gradiens) in the Chinji Formation, and then in the Nagri and Dhok
Pathan Formations boselaphines of varying but generally larger size—Pachy-
portax latidens, Selenoportax vexillarius, Miotragocerus punjabicus and Trago-
_ portax salmontanus. Towards the top of the Dhok Pathan Formation, or shortly
afterwards, these overlap or give way to the early bovine Proamphibos, Redun-
cini, and the supposed hippotragine teeth assigned to Sivatragus. Undoubted
boselaphines are rare in the Tatrot Formation (Pilgrim 1939: 6). In this suc-
cession it is easy to visualize the derivation of Tatrot reduncine teeth from
boselaphine ancestors without the need for any diversion towards a tragelaphine-
like morphology. Such a derivation clashes with that favoured by the Langebaan-
“ser
="
nent inetinetiieeemi
260 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
weg teeth in which characters 2, 3, 6, 9, 13 and perhaps 10 and 14 are unlike
either reduncines or early boselaphines.
A certain number of fossil reduncine teeth were examined for signs of
descent from Langebaanweg-like ancestors, but the results were not conclusive.
Among pre-Pinjor fossils from the Siwaliks were BM(NH) M 34568 a cast of
a palate B 815 with left P?-M® and right P®-M? (Pilgrim 1939: 107, fig. 11a);
M 15372, part of a left mandible with M,—M, and a fragment of M, (Pilgrim
1939, pl. 3 (fig. 13)); M 15385, various lower teeth; M 34569, a cast of part of a
right mandible B 816 with P,—P, (Pilgrim 1939: 119, fig. 11b). All come from
the Hasnot-Tatrot area and the first three were believed to come from the
Tatrot Formation. The last may be from deposits equivalent in age or slightly
younger than the type Dhok Pathan Formation but this is not certain. They
could belong to Kobus porrecticornis, a species known from horn-cores and
first known to occur in the upper Dhok Pathan Formation (Thomas 19795;
Pilbeam et al. 1977: 687). (A left P,, M 15371 (Pilgrim 1939, fig. 11c), was
earlier identified as reduncine but appears to be alcelaphine.) Other available
reduncine fossils came from the middle of the Hadar Formation and from
various parts of the Shungura Formation. The oldest reduncine teeth in Africa
are from Lukeino and Mpesida, and these, too, could belong to K. porrecti-
cornis or K. aff. porrecticornis (Thomas 19795, pl. 1 (fig. 6), pl. 2 (figs 6-7)).
Compared with living reduncines, these fossils showed that earlier members
of the tribe had lower crowned teeth, smaller basal pillars, less strong ribs on
the lateral walls of the upper molars, smaller goat folds and less narrowed
lateral lobes on the lower molars, longer premolar rows and the entoconulid
more distinct from the entoconid on the back of P,. There is also interesting
evidence for a closer approach of paraconid and metaconid on P,. The lower
part of the paraconid on the nearly unworn P, and P, of B 816 has a flange
growing backwards. Afar P,s have paraconid and metaconid growing very
close to one another (e.g. AL 153-3, AL 156-1A and AL 167-5) and a Shungura
example, L2-46B, shows a flange on the metaconid of P,. Among later redun-
cines only Redunca arundinum and ontogenetically older Kobus ellipsiprymnus
have an approach to fusion of paraconid and metaconid. In a sample of 31
Redunca arundinum P,s only 15 show close approach or fusion of paraconid and
metaconid. They effect this more by forward growth of the metaconid than by
backward growth of the paraconid, but in the Afar examples it looks as if
backward growth of the paraconid is the more important.
None of these characters is taken so far as to demand descent from a form
with teeth similar to those at Langebaanweg. Even the approach or fusion of
paraconid and metaconid on P, can evolve in boselaphines and its appearance
in some reduncines need not imply affinity with the Langebaanweg teeth.
Reduncine phylogeny
Returning to the question of possible phylogenies, one sees that Langebaan-
weg, Sahabi, and Wadi Natrun have one or more reduncine species with horn-
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 261
cores which would be good structural ancestors for modern Kobus and the
extinct Shungura species K. sigmoidalis and K. ancystrocera. However, tooth
morphology suggests that K. porrecticornis or K. aff. porrecticornis may be a
better ancestor. Its teeth are known back to Lukeino and Mpesida and perhaps
to the upper part of the Dhok Pathan Formation, so Langebaanweg could be
earlier than these sites, or its reduncine retained primitive teeth late in geological
time, or its reduncine teeth have been incorrectly identified.
The most interesting aspect of the Langebaanweg reduncine fossils is that
they are more like the aegodont Damalacra than the boodonts Tragelaphus sp.,
Mesembriportax acrae or Simatherium demissum. This is shown in their narrower
skull proportions, absence of keels other than the trace of a posterolateral one,
close insertions of the horn-cores, poor basal divergence of the horn-cores,
deep postcornual fossa, inclined cranial roof, absence of strong temporal
ridges, absence of a rugose area at the back of the braincase roof, and the
good-sized anterior tuberosities of the basioccipital. Only in the teeth can even
a few boodont characters be seen: basal pillars on the lower molars, retarded
joining of the lobes of the upper molars in ontogeny, and the long premolar
rows. However, poor development of ribs relative to styles on the upper molars
and rather flat medial walls of the lower molars could be seen as aegodont
characters. Some of the dentitions, e.g. L32850, show signs of transverse wear
ridges across the dentine of the upper molars, and this too parallels caprines.
One has to ask whether the Reduncini are properly to be considered as a
boodont group, and what the evolutionary relationship is between those of the
Siwaliks and of Langebaanweg, but for the present there seem to be no answers.
Kobus sp. 2
Figs 26-27
Material
Two reduncine crania with horn-cores from bed 3aN could belong to a
smaller, more kob-like species of Kobus. They are L30391 and L31287, which
-are both frontlets with almost complete horn-cores and separate, almost
complete crania (Figs 26-27). Their measurements are:
£30391. 131287
Anteroposterior diameter at base of horn-core. 43,8 37,6
Lateromedial diameter at base of horn-core . 3 39,7 30,1
Minimum width across lateral sides of horn pedicels Sor. 88,6
Width across lateral edges of supraorbital foramina. c. 45,0 52:1
Occipital height from dorsal edge of foramen magnum 37,6 37,8
Skuli width across mastoids behind external auditory
meatus. : : E ) : : . 93,3 94,0
Width across anterior tuberosities of basioccipital . 22,9 28,6
Width across posterior tuberosities of basioccipital . 27,0 35:0
Description
The horn-cores of L30391 differ from those of Kobus subdolus by being
“ser”
~~
——
<i, ee
\
;
j
262 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 26. Kobus sp. 2. L30391, anterodorsal view of frontlet. Scale = 25 mm.
Fig. 27. Kobus sp. 2. Top row from the left: L30391, cranium in dorsal, lateral and ventral
views. Bottom row: L31287, cranium in occipital and ventral views. Scale = 25 mm.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 263
smaller, less squat and short, more divergent, and with stronger backward
curvature at the base. The second specimen is also small and has not very squat
horn-cores, but may have been too ontogenetically young to have acquired a
basal backward curvature. Its horn-cores are also less divergent than in L30391,
which would fit its supposed youthful age, but they are already more divergent
than those of Kobus subdolus. It has no transverse ridges, unlike L30391. The
division of specimens between this ‘species’ and the larger Kobus subdolus
is not invariably clear cut. Two left and right horn-cores, L40870 and L40872,
also from bed 3aN, look as if they could have come from one individual and
have both been assigned to Kobus subdolus; however, they are strongly divergent
and have more basal backward curvature than normal in that species.
The two crania differ from the cranium L2604, believed to go with Kobus
subdolus, by the top of the braincase being convex instead of straight in profile
and by a more emphasized dorsal rim on the mastoid. Less certain but possible
differences are that the occipital surface may be relatively lower, the mastoid
may be more restricted to the occipital surface, and the posterior tuberosities
of the basioccipital are ridges directed laterally rather then posterolaterally.
An interesting character is that the central area of the frontals anteromedial
to the supraorbital pits is more nearly horizontal and less slanted than in extant
reduncines. It suggests that in complete specimens the conformation of the
face as a whole would have been somewhat like that of modern deer or tragela-
phines. Presumably such a state would be primitive for reduncines.
One expects a small Kobus to be kob-like, and it is interesting to compare
this Langebaanweg form with some horn-cores L1—24, L1—25, frontlet L1-189,
and a cranium, L1-291, from member B of the Shungura Formation which
appear to belong to the kob ancestry. Unfortunately ancient damage has
removed a number of key features of L1—291 such as the anterior tuberosities
of the basioccipital, part of the nuchal crests and the median vertical occipital
ridge. However, the Langebaanweg form can be seen to have horn-cores which
show a closer approach to a posterolateral keel and hence are less rounded in
- cross-section posteromedially. It also has a transversely narrower occipital
surface, a less rounded occipital edge, a narrower mastoid, and auditory bullae
which are perhaps larger. However, in general the morphological agreement is
good, and were it not for the problem of the teeth the east African and South
African fossils could be taken as members of the same lineage at different time
periods. The Langebaanweg horn-cores are those of a small Kobus with flattened
lateral surface and an approach to a posterior keel and not at all like Redunca.
In three of the characters by which they differ from Kobus subdolus, they resemble
~ the Omo form: the profile of the braincase roof is slightly convex longitudinally,
the mastoid is mainly confined to the occipital surface, and there is at least a
slight development of the dorsal rim on the mastoid.
The two Langebaanweg crania may also be compared with BM(NH)
M 35389, a cast of the holotype cranium, B798, of Kobikeryx atavus Pilgrim
(1939: 125, fig. 14). Pilgrim took this as reduncine and supposed it was from
+ SS ium
_ * -—_.
—<—
~> “se
“s76a0r°"
264 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the Nagri or Dhok Pathan stages of the Siwaliks succession. The Langebaanweg
fossils are larger and relatively wider across the occipital surface, but share with
the Siwaliks fossil a slightly inclined and anteroposteriorly convex cranial roof
and temporal lines which approach closely posteriorly and are not very promi-
nent. The anterior tuberosities of the basioccipital take the form of distinctive
longitudinal crests in both the Siwaliks fossil and L30391. The Siwaliks fossil has
a moderately sized and inflated auditory bulla, but the state of this character is
unknown in Kobus sp. 2. It is possible that B798 belongs to Kobus porrecticornis,
already mentioned in the discussion of reduncine teeth and to be mentioned
again in the account of Baard’s Quarry fossils. If this were so, its non-bosela-
phine characters (inclined braincase roof, poorly developed temporal lines)
would align it with the ‘E’ Quarry reduncine fossils in throwing doubt on the
close relationship or descent of reduncines from boselaphines.
Tribe Alcelaphini
There are two similar sized species of Alcelaphini at Langebaanweg. There
is no doubt of their tribal affinity on account of a suite of characters including
frontals set at a high level between the horn-core bases in comparison with the
dorsal parts of the orbital rims, extensive internal hollowing of the frontals and
a single large smooth-walled sinus extending into the horn-core pedicel, the
shallow and narrow postcornual fossa, small supraorbital pits, occipital surface
facing laterally as well as backward and having a median vertical ridge and
flanking hollows dorsally, basioccipital with a central longitudinal groove
having its sides formed by ridges behind the anterior tuberosities, hypsodont
cheek teeth, basal pillars on the teeth small or absent, and short premolar rows
often accompanied by reduction and disappearance of P,s. —
A nearly complete skull belonging to one of the species allows assessment
of its facial characters and they, too, are clearly alcelaphine as appears from its
diagnosis. For both species there are associations between horn-cores and
teeth and in some cases postcranial bones as well, but it was found impossible
to allocate teeth or postcranial bones at species level. There is no doubt of the
marked primitiveness of the teeth, and this is one of the most interesting charac-
teristics of these alcelaphines.
Damalacra gen. nov.
Type species
Damalacra neanica sp. nov.
Generic diagnosis
Moderate sized alcelaphines, a little smaller than the living Alcelaphus
buselaphus or Damaliscus lunatus. Skull rather narrow as in those species and
not wide as in Connochaetes. Horn-cores moderately long and without keels
or transverse ridges. Horn-cores inserted fairly uprightly and close together.
Shallow, elongated postcornual fossa. Frontals set at a high level between the
horn bases in comparison with the dorsal parts of the orbital rims, orbital
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 265
rims project quite strongly, little or no central indentation of the parietofrontals
suture, temporal lines on cranial roof do not approach closely posteriorly,
braincase sides parallel, small supraorbital pits set close together. Occipital
surface is wide and low and has a median vertical ridge, the mastoid has a large
exposed area and is entirely contained within the occipital surface, the basi-
occipital is only slightly narrowed anteriorly if at all, it has anterior tuberosities
of moderate size and a central longitudinal groove, the basisphenoid rises fairly
sharply in front of the basioccipital, and the auditory bullae are moderate to
large sized. :
Hypsodont cheek teeth with not very rugose enamel, small basal pillars on
M,s and dP,s and occasionally on upper molars, central cavities of upper
molars not very complicated in outline, upper molars with rather strong styles
but poor development of ribs between them, medial lobes of upper molars less
well rounded than in Pleistocene and Recent alcelaphines, medial walls of
lower molars with less pronounced outbowings and with more prominent
metastylids than in later alcelaphines, lower molars without goat folds, central
cavities of lower molars with hardly any transverse constrictions centrally,
P,s reduced and often absent in life. P,s with posterior part of tooth (behind
level of metaconid) less reduced than in later alcelaphines, generally with
transverse orientation of the valley between entoconid and entostylid, and with
paraconid and metaconid growing towards one another but not usually fusing.
The tibia has only a shallow posterior indentation in its distal articular
facet, the metatarsal has a strong anterior longitudinal groove, otherwise the
limb bones agree with those of later small or medium sized alcelaphines.
Etymology
The generic name comes from the Greek damalis, young cow or heifer,
and acra, a cape.
Damalacra neanica sp. nov.
Figs 28-30, 34, 37
_ Holotype
L7257—a complete skull with horn-cores and upper dentitions comprising
P?—M®? on the right and a broken M!—-M? on the left (Figs 28-29, 37).
Referred material
From bed 3aS:
L2573—cranium with horn-cores broken at their bases
L2680—cranium with the lower part of the left horn-core and base of the
right
L12694A —cranium with most of the right horn-core and the lower part
of the left; right maxilla with P*-M? (Fig. 30)
L40072—cranium with left horn-core
L40083—frontlet with basal half of horn-cores
L40154—cranium with basal half of right horn-core
“nner?
a
ed
a.
~wy, 44
266 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 28. Damalacra neanica. L7257, holotype. Dorsal and ventral views. Scale = 50 mm.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 267
gtr =» * “2”
ee
Fig. 29. Damalacra neanica. L7257, holotype. Lateral view.
Scale = 50 mm.
~~ “a0e>* —-
icien eateries
Fig. 30. Damalacra neanica. L12694A, cranium with horn-cores
in lateral view. Scale = 50 mm. .
aN ee
268 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
L40166—left horn-core with midfrontal suture (Fig. 34)
L40275—female frontlet with both horn-cores, possibly of this species
L40537—left and right horn-cores, back of skull, skull fragments
L41329—left horn-core and base of the right one from one individual
L41710—left horn-core with mid-frontal suture
L2608, L2614, L4617, L4618, L6590, L6595, L15720, L40054, 40055,
L40168, L40173, L40514, L40752, L40754, L40756, L41019, L2619
(immature)—left horn-cores
L2607, L2613 (Fig. 37), L2668, L2670, L15015, L15809, L40110A, L40750
—right horn-cores
L6582A —horn-core of indeterminate side
L40126A—left horn-core, a female, possibly of this species
From bed 3aN:
L41414, L45085—left horn-cores
Of uncertain origin (picked up by mine workers):
140761—cranium preserved from behind the level of the horn-cores
L41330—back of cranium 5
Dental and postcranial remains wili be considered under the next species.
Horizon
The holotype and nearly all the other material of Damalacra neanica
comes from bed 3aS of the PPM. No remains are known from the QSM.
Etymology
The specific name comes from the Greek neanicos, youthful, and refers
to the place of this species early in the history of Alcelaphini.
Diagnosis
A species of Damalacra in which the horn-cores are without compression or
slightly compressed anteroposteriorly, have no flattened lateral surface, taper
fairly sharply from base to tip, show much increased divergence distally, have
either slight backward or slight forward curvature in profile, and are inserted
behind or above the back of the orbits. They have no very apparent torsion
but it would have been anti-clockwise on the right side. The boundary between
the pedicel top and the base of the horn-core is higher on the medial than on
the lateral side of the horn-cores. It is probable that female horn-cores are
smaller than those of males as in extant alcelaphines.
Frontals set at a notably high level between the horn bases in comparison
with the dorsal part of the orbital rims, braincase roof strongly angled on face,
straight in profile, and without a parietal boss. Nasals transversely domed,
without lateral flanges anteriorly, wider relative to their length than in living
Alcelaphus and Damaliscus, preorbital fossae moderately large and deep and
with an upper rim, ethmoidal fissure absent, zygomatic arch somewhat deepened
in its anterior parts, infraorbital foramen set high above the back of P®, pre-
maxillae contacting the nasals and narrowing only slightly as they rise, median
indentation at back of palate passing further anteriorly than the lateral ones,
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 269
cheek tooth-row less anteriorly positioned than in living Alcelaphus and Dama-
liscus lunatus, palatine foramina wide apart. The large mastoid exposure is
especially expanded in its medioventral part, and the moderate to large auditory
bullae are little inflated.
Remarks
The holotype skull is well preserved and lacks only the anterior parts of
the premaxillae. The posteroventral surfaces of the skull around the basioccipital
have been worn smooth by water rolling (Hendey 1970, fig. 3). The paired right
and left mandibles, L7257C and D, were once thought to have come from the
same individual as the skull, but their wear states are too early. However, it is
possible, although not definite, that another right mandible, L7257B with teeth
in a later state of wear, is from the same individual as the holotype.
The holotype and L12694A are specimens in which there is an association
between horn-cores and teeth.
The cranium L40761 has the largest mastoid exposure seen in any Dama-
lacra of either species, and it has also preserved its auditory bulla.
1 cranium, 3 frontlets and 33 horn-cores in the collection of Damalacra
were taken as females. Of these, only the left horn-core L40126A and the
frontlet L40275 are thought to be possibly of D. neanica. The insertion of their
horn-cores is such that the longest cross-sectional diameter does not lie more
or less parallel to the longitudinal midline of the skull. The remaining pieces
will be considered under the next species.
The combination of a suite of specialized characters with a number of
primitive characters is notable in this species. Among its primitive characters
are the transversely straight parietofrontals suture, supraorbital pits set closely
together, the large preorbital fossa, the nasals not very long or narrow, the
tooth-row not positioned very anteriorly, and most of the tooth characters
mentioned in the diagnosis. Against this one sees the specializations of horn-
cores compressed anteroposteriorly if at all, without much backward curvature
- but with some distal divergence, inserted behind the orbits, the frontals well
raised between the horn-core bases, and the shortness and steep inclination of
the braincase roof. The shortness and steepness of the braincase roof must be
a consequence of the short posterior migration of the horn-core bases, and one
can appreciate that all the specialized characters are a simple unified set of
changes.
The cranium L12694A is interesting as having the most primitive aspect of
_ any specimen of this species. Its horn-cores are less anteroposteriorly com-
pressed, their distal divergence is less, they still show appreciable backward
curvature, and the braincase roof is longer.
A cranium, L40761, preserved forward to just behind the horn-cores, has
a very large mastoid with the greatest expansion lying in the medioventral part
of the bone. This matches D. neanica crania in which the mastoids are more
expanded medioventrally than in D. acalla. Of six specimens of D. neanica,
wy’
~ tee
rani
a ee
waster"
270 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
only one, L40072, has mastoids apparently both small and not expanded medio-
ventrally. Hence L40761 may be assigned to D. neanica, and it has the largest
mastoid known in that species. The top of the braincase is less smooth in profile
in L40761 than in other D. neanica, but straight enough to fit this species. The
anterior tuberosities of its basioccipital are fairly narrow and this, too, may
fit D. neanica better than D. acalla. L40761 has an auditory bulla and becomes
the only specimen of D. neanica with this structure preserved. It is moderately
large but not very inflated, and thereby differs from that of D. acalla, as seen
in L40474, which is only slightly larger but much more inflated.
Measurements
Measurements on L7257 other than those shown in Table 4 are as follows.
Length of nasals 133, breadth of nasals 32,8, length of frontals 128, minimum
width of palate between medial borders of M?s 55,2. Both L7257 and L12694A
had upper tooth rows with the following respective measurements: occlusal
lengths M1—M? 61,5, 55,4; occlusal lengths M? 23,2, 21,0; occlusal lengths P#
dO eri:
Measurements on the horn-cores and frontlets of D. neanica from bed 3aS,
including specimens shown in Table 4, are:
Number Standard Standard
measured Mean’ Range _ deviation error
Anteroposterior dia-
meter at base of
horn-core, left side 17 40,8 35,6-45,2 Bl 0,75
Mediolateral diameter
at base of horn-
core, left side gue igh 41,5 36,2-51,3 4,6 0,99
Horn-core length. 4 218 199-232 14,3 viel
Minimum width across
lateral sides of
horn pedicels ; 6 99,9 95,8-107,3 4,7 1,92
Width across lateral
edges of supra-
orbital foramina . 4 49,3 44,4-55,3 4,5 Dy
The female horn-core L40126A has an index 33,3 x 28,8.
Horn-core indices for L41414 and L45085 from bed 3aN are 43,3 x 433,
and 39,8 x 44,5 respectively.
Comparisons
The only extant genus of alcelaphine which might be thought to resemble
Damalacra neanica is Beatragus. The single living species, B. hunteri, had
become restricted to a very small area of northern Kenya by the time of its
discovery by Europeans in the last century (Ansell 1971). B. antiquus L. S. B.
Leakey, 1965, is a larger extinct species known from Beds I and II at Olduvai
Gorge and from uppermost member G of the Shungura Formation, Omo.
AIA PD.
271
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG
v0S
€°78
0°67
rar
o[eugy
SLCOVI OFEIVI I9LOVI LESOVT STOP €800V1 CLOOVI P69TIT 08971
ee
Ft 1 i
OLE L‘°9€
VTE I‘SZ
€“CE OSE
TOIL = 9°ZOL
= IpL
ze €“8p
See 6‘LV
ae OSE
(lS 1‘6€
9IZ =
vry
0°66
69
9°CE
708
VLp
E“Ss
6 £01
90
ULE
tT 1 = EL me Qo
TEE CVE €*€€ =
OLZ 9°97 = —
OEE €°O€ OCE * —
OLOL O‘OOT — S601
9°78 76L DVL p78
0°E9 pes ae C*€S
os = = b6r
¢‘L6 8°C6 sts €*LOL
ZOE L‘9€ Ss Orr
L‘@p I‘8¢ as (AS 7
TET =a ae C7
CST -LSCLT
‘DIIUDAU DAIDIDUUDG JO SJUSWIOINSeOU |[NYAS
p I1aV
tA IEP a. Boo
[eqd1990
ede jo pepeoroa TOPOS SSOIOW YIPIM
[e1Id1950
“IS¥q JO SOI}ISOIOqn} JONINJUe SSOIDe YIPIAA
ee 1a DerEZO go do} wody WYSIOY [eWdI09G
Tyeour AroyIpne
ARE PUIYOq SPIO}SeL SSO1OR YIPIM ][NyS
hee OSvouIeIg WINWIxeLy
s[ejuory JO
yorq 0} do} jeydi090 wiosy do} [Nys Jo yIsuST
sjid TeyqreRians ge SPE [¥19} 8] SSOIOV YIPIAA
; s[oorpod
UIOY JO SOOBJANS [8.1972] SSO1OV YIPIA WINUITTUTPT
9109-U1OY JO 9Seq 7B JOJOWIVIP [eID L[OIPo|]
EMO BOI | jo a 7@ IOJOWVIP IOLN}sodo19jUy
: : : YISUds] 9109-UWIOF{
272 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The anteroposterior compression of so many of the horn-cores of Damalacra
neanica causes them to resemble the horn-cores of B. antiquus and, less closely,
the larger horned males of B. Aunteri. The torsion of D. neanica horn-cores,
in so far as it exists at all, is anti-clockwise on the right side, and this, too, is a
resemblance to Beatragus. However, the Langebaanweg alcelaphine is. too
primitive to be satisfactorily related to Beatragus. It is difficult to visualize two
horn-core characters being held relatively steady over several million years
while all other skull characters underwent evolutionary advance. Further com-
parisons with other alcelaphines will be made in the discussion of Damalacra
acalla.
Damalacra acalla sp. nov.
Figs 31-35, 37-38, 40
Hippotragini sp. Gentry in Hendey, 1970: 115.
Holotype
L40001—a cranium with much of the right and the lower part of the left
horn-core (Fig. 31).
Referred material |
The major specimens assigned to this species are as follows:
From bed 3aS:
L1799—frontlet with skull fragments
L1836—frontlet with some isolated, partly fragmented left and right
upper teeth, skull fragments, vertebrae (Hendey 1970, pl. 4,
fig. C). (Figs 32, 37)
L12427—frontlet with horn-core bases, occipital surface, braincase roof,
basioccipital, two atlas vertebrae and a crushed palate with
P?-broken M?
L20187—frontlet with both horn-cores, back of skull with basioccipital
L40096—cranium with horn-core bases (Fig. 35)
L40225—female cranium with both horn-cores (Fig. 38)
L40319—frontlet with complete horn-cores, right and left maxillae with
_ P8_M8, metatarsal, atlas and axis
L40474—cranium with parts of both horn-cores
L41832—frontlet with horn-cores, vertebrae
L2615, L15928, L40288, L40493—frontlets
L2616 (Figs 34, 37), L2622, L2624, L2625, L2632, L2649, L3587, L16280,
L40025, L40120A, L40155A, L40163, L40165, L40167, L40171,
L40172, L40178, L40278, L40723, L41327, L41368—left horn-cores
L2622, L2623, L2628, L2629, L2633, L2638, L2665, L3489, L6592, L40048,
L40050, L40074, L40123A, L40161, L40177, L40187, L40248, L41092,
L41202, L41706—right horn-cores
L10563—female left horn-core
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 273
Fig. 31. Damalacra acalla. L40001, holotype. Cranium in dorsal and lateral views.
Scale = 25 mm.
From QSM or bed 3aS:
L12856—damaged cranium with base of right horn-core
L22278—left horn-core, basioccipital, atlas, vertebral fragments, left
maxilla with P?-M?® and right mandible with P,-M; (no P, in life).
(Fig. 39)
L24809—right horn-core, part of the left horn-core, basioccipital, skull
fragments, three left upper molars, two right upper molars
From bed 3aN:
L46075—cranium with horn-cores
L33832, L41412, L46040 (Fig. 33)—frontlets
146042, L46061, L46072—left horn-cores
L30215, L45012, L46039, L46043, L46047, L46061, L46068—right horn-
i cores
_ From beds 3aS or 3aN:
L40751, L40757—left horn-cores
L40758, L40793—right horn-cores.
L46072 and L40793 may belong to Damalacra neanica.
Associations between horn-cores and teeth are provided by L1836, L12427,
122278, L24809, and L40319.
a’ // ved
rTy
“h/t
.
“M4
274 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 32. Damalacra acalla. 1836, frontlet in anterior view. Scale = 50 mm.
QE PIE LER a oe
ET GIT ey OT Hite ET: ae
— nee ae
4
ieee. Winco.
1 TN te Np AOS a AN a IA * 9 ee
Oo!
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 275
Fig. 33. Damalacra acalla. 46040, frontlet
in anterior view. Scale = 25 mm.
Fig. 34. From the left: Damalacra neanica 40166, left horn-core in anterior and lateral
views. D. acalla L2616. same views. Scale = 25 mm.
276 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 35. Damalacra acalla. 40096, cranium in occipital and ventral views. Scale = 25 mm.
Horizon
The holotype comes from bed 3aS of the PPM. Most of the other material
comes from 3aS, but this species is better represented in bed 3aN than is D.
neanica and three fossils are possibly from the QSM. A left mandible, L12883,
is from the QSM, but it cannot be ascertained to which species of Damalacra it
belongs.
Diagnosis
An alcelaphine in which the cranial size and proportions are similar to
Damalacra neanica. Horn-cores differ from those of D. neanica by being com-
pressed in the mediolateral plane if at all, often with a localized, usually medial,
swelling at their bases, sometimes tending to have a flattened lateral surface
‘along part of their length, with more definite backward curvature and less
marked distal divergence, inserted closer behind the orbits, and with a more
nearly horizontal boundary between the top of the pedicel and the horn-core
proper. Other differences from D. neanica are that the braincase roof is less
steeply inclined, more curved in profile, and with an insignificant parietal hump
which is about as well developed as in living Damaliscus; the mastoid exposure
large but less expanded especially medioventrally, and the auditory bullae
slightly larger and much more inflated.
Female horn-cores are smaller than those of the males as in extant alcela-
phines. Tooth characters are taken not to differ from D. neanica.
Etymology
The specific name is from the Greek acalles, without charms, and refers to
the primitive state of nearly all the characters in this species.
Remarks
No fossil has been preserved with a face, so no facial characters appear in
the diagnosis. One cannot assume that the face would differ very much from
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 9 |
that of Damalacra neanica.
’ There can be little doubt that the two alcelaphine species are closely related.
It is interesting that D. acalla has many characters which appear to be primitive
just as in D. neanica, but hardly any which are specialized. Primitive characters
are the transversely straight parietofrontals suture, the supraorbital pits not
set wide apart, most of the characters of the horn-cores, the fairly long brain-
case and its not very inclined roof, and the characters of the cheek teeth. Fig-
ure 36 shows the difference in horn-core compression between D. acalla and
D. neanica, and also that D. neanica has different cranial proportions in the
form of a shorter braincase and a lower and wider occipital surface. The extant
Damaliscus dorcas, shown on the same figure, has cranial proportions similar
to Damalacra acalla, but rather small horn-cores and a relatively narrow width
across the anterior tuberosities of the basioccipital. Figure 37 shows cross-
sections of Damalacra horn-cores.
Anteroposterior diameter at horn core base
Mediolateral diameter at horn core base aN :
SS
me
~
Width across horn core bases
ae
Braincase length ; : !
Ce
Skull width across mastoids ees
ve
Occipital height : : a
7
Width across anterior tuberosities of basioccipital “a
Width across posterior tuberosities of basioccipital
80 90 100 110
Fig. 36. Percentage diagram of skull measurements in Alcelaphini. The standard line at
100 per cent is for seven Damalacra acalla from bed 3aS. The other continuous line is for
six D. neanica including L12694A, and the dashed line is for four male Damaliscus dorcas.
Not all measurements were available on all the fossils.
Among the female remains of Damalacra only a horn-core and a frontlet,
L40126A and L40275, are thought to be of D. neanica. Another two are thought
to be definitely of D. acalla; these are the cranium L40225 and the left horn-
core L10563. The remaining horn-cores appear to be attenuated versions of
D. acalla male horn-cores, but one cannot be certain that the females of
D. neanica might not have more primitive horn-cores than the males.
278 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
OOO
Fig. 37. Cross-sections of Damalacra horn-cores at a distance above the pedicel top equal to
half the anteroposterior basal diameter. All are shown as if they were of the right side. Lateral
sides are towards the left and anterior sides towards the base of the illustration. From the
left: D. neanica L7257 (holotype) and L2613, D. acalla L1836 and L2616. Scale = 10 mm.
Fig. 38. Damalacra acalla. 140225, female cranium in lateral and anterior views.
Scale = 25 mm.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 279
L46075 is an alcelaphine cranium with horn-cores from bed 3aN, apparently
belonging to D. acalla, but differing from those in bed 3aS by its horn-cores
being slightly less compressed mediolaterally, the braincase roof shorter, and
the anterior tuberosities of the basioccipital wide apart. Its most instructive
comparison is with L12694A which has the most primitive aspect of any
D. neanica cranium. L46075 is larger, its horn-cores differ little in their degree
of compression, they diverge distally but less than in L12694A, they have a slight
backward curvature but less than L12694A, their insertion is less upright in
side view than in L12694A, the pedicel is not higher on the medial than the
lateral side of the horn-core as in L12694A (and other D. neanica), the braincase
roof has a slightly curved profile, whereas L12694A is straight, and the mastoid
is not expanded medioventrally and is certainly less so than in L12694A. The
anterior tuberosities of the basioccipital are much wider apart than in L12694A
or any other examples of D. neanica. It is interesting that the relative lack of
backward curvature of the horn-cores makes them more like D. neanica than
are those of L12694A.
The total sample of horn-cores of D. acalla does not show that antero-
posterior compression has increased in bed 3aN in comparison with 3aS, but
a size increase has taken place (Fig. 39). The differences between the 3aS and
3aN samples of horn-cores for both anteroposterior and mediolateral diameters
(measurements given below) are significant at the 5 per cent level. The values
of T were 2,39 and 2,88 for 27 degrees of freedom, and confirm the size increase.
Samples for the measurement of minimum width across the lateral sides of the
horn-core pedicels were smaller but similarly showed a size increase from
bed 3aS to 3aN. The value of T was 3,13 for 10 degrees of freedom which is
significant at the 5 per cent level. Measurements also suggest that the horn-cores
decreased in length from 3aS to 3aN but in this case the difference was not
statistically significant. In general the D. acalla in bed 3aN looks more robustly
built across the frontals and horn-core bases than in bed 3aS, and the frontals
- are more raised between the horn-core bases. As the horn-cores and their
supporting pedicels become larger, so the projection of the dorsal part of the
orbital rims becomes less obvious. On the paired horn-cores L46061, the
localized basal swelling is confined to the middle part of the medial side and the
top of the sinus in the pedicel comes level only with the junction of the pedicel
top and horn-core proper. Their basal index is 55,3 x 50,3. Numbers of such
horn-cores are coming to light in the material being processed from bed 3aN
(Q. B. Hendey, pers. comm. 29 August 1978).
The characters of the teeth of Damalacra have been mentioned in the
generic diagnosis and the teeth are illustrated in Figures 40-42. They are about
the size of the teeth of Damaliscus lunatus, whereas the size of horn-cores,
crania and postcranial bones of Damalacra is in closer agreement with Dama-
liscus dorcas, a species smaller than D. Junatus. Even the mandibular rami of
Damalacra are only about as large as in Damaliscus dorcas. It was not found
possible to differentiate between the two species of Damalacra on their teeth.
280 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Mediolateral x
504 diameter x A
Anteroposterior diameter
30 Ai 50 60mm
Fig. 39. Basal diameters of Damalacra horn-cores. X = D. neanica lefts from bed 3aS,
X = the same from bed 3aN, O = D. acalla rights, the solid ones from bed 3aN and the rest
from bed 3aS, + = D. neanica 22278 and L24809 from QSM, C = Damalacra female
left horn-cores, the underlined one from bed 3aN and the rest from 3aS, Upper diagonal.
line = 100%, lower one = 75% as in Figure 3. _
Fig. 40. Damalacra acalla 22278, occlusal view of left upper dentition. Damalacra sp.
L40534, occlusal view of right lower dentition. Scale = 10 mm.
ee
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 281
Fig. 41. Damalacra sp. L41482, lateral view of left mandible.
Scale = 50 mm.
Fig. 42. Damalacra sp. L11612, occlusal view of immature right lower
dentition with dP;—M,, alveoli for dP, and a fragment of Mbp.
Scale = 10 mm.
20 30 40 mm
Fig. 43. Dimensions of unworn and almost unworn M;s of Alcelaphini. X = PPM Lange-
baanweg, the lowest one being bed 3aS and the other two bed 3aN, O = Cape Province sites
of Middle Pleistocene and later age, the underlined ones being not completely unworn,
S = Sterkfontein Type Site, n = Wadi Natrun. Diagonal lines = 200%, 150% and 100%
as in Figure 3.
282 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
40 4 Length
30.
20
Length M—M,
40 50 60 70 mm
Fig. 44. Occlusal lengths of lower premolar and molar rows in Alcelaphini and in bovidS
from Fort Ternan. X = Damalacra rights, O = lefts, + = both sides, underlined readings
are bed 3aN, the rest are bed 3aS, solid circle is L12883 from QSM. a = extant AlcelaphuS
buselaphus, c = extant Damaliscus dorcas, u= extant D. lunatus,. s = ?Pseudotragus
potwaricus from Fort Ternan, t = Oioceros tanyceras from Fort Ternan. Upper diagonal
line = 50%, lower one = 40% as in Figure 3. The readings for all species below the 40 per cent
line are those without P, in life.
The most interesting feature of the teeth is the primitive state of so many of
their characters. Figure 43 shows how their hypsodonty is less than in extant
and other fossil alcelaphines. In Langebaanweg times unworn M,s were only
about two-thirds as high crowned as in the Middle Pleistocene and later. The
difference much exceeds that between Sterkfontein Type Site and the most
recent sample.
It is interesting against this background that trends to the reduction and
loss of P, were already present. Out of 36 specimens in which its presence or
absence could be ascertained, 21 had it and 15 were without. Of the 21 with it
only 4 were in later middle or late wear, while of the 15 without it 10 were in
later middle or late wear. The trend to reduction and loss of P, may exist about
as much as in Parmularius altidens of Bed I, Olduvai Gorge, in which three out
of eight specimens lacked it, and is certainly in advance of modern Damaliscus
lunatus and Alcelaphus in which P, is practically always present. However,
Parmularius has reduced its whole premolar row more than in Damalacra
(Fig. 44) and hence P, is smaller relative to M, (Fig. 45).
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 283
Alcelaphus buselaphus aetna ae sie
2 6
Damaliscus dorcas re
; :
Damaliscus agelaius [J J
Parmularius altidens values
Parmularius sp (Laetoli) Sax X
Damalacra aes een eee
: 18
Oioceros tanyceras Ss SE ES ]
50 60 70
Fig. 45. Occlusal length of P, expressed as a percentage of that of M, in alcelaphines. For each
species the range is shown by a horizontal line, mean value by a short vertical line, standard
deviation by squared brackets, and the number of specimens by the figure adjacent to the mean.
The Langebaanweg alcelaphine teeth are the earliest known which are
definitely of this tribe, and they make an interesting comparison with those of
the much earlier Caprini, Oioceros tanyceras and Pseudotragus? potwaricus
which are candidates for alcelaphine ancestry (and might eventually have to
be transferred to that tribe to preserve monophyly). These forms are from
Fort Ternan and Ngorora (Gentry 1970a, 1978a). The Langebaanweg teeth are
larger, more hypsodont than the Ojoceros if not also than the Pseudotragus ?,
the basal pillars are much less evident, the paraconid and metaconid of P,
are either growing toward one another or fused, the entoconid and entoconulid
remain separate on P, later in wear, the medial wall of the back lobe of Msg is
perhaps more clearly offset laterally in earlier wear, and the central cavities of
the lower molars show less sign of being transversely constricted centrally. The
first four of these characters are more advanced at Langebaanweg, the next two
may be linked with larger size and the last appears to be more primitive. Some
characters are unchanged: the degree of rounding of the walls of the medial
and lateral lobes on the lower molars, the shape of the medial lobes of the upper
molars, and the level of development of styles on the upper molars. Some
examples of both Fort Ternan species are already without P,s in life (Gentry
1970a: 265, 285) but this trend has been taken further at Langebaanweg. More-
over, there is less tendency to reduction of P, at Fort Ternan, as can be seen in
Figure 45 where the relatively small size of P, is a consequence of the relatively
unreduced P,. Overall the Fort Ternan premolar rows are as long as at Lange-
baanweg (Fig. 44). Some of the morphological differences between Langebaan-
284 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
weg alcelaphine teeth, those of other alcelaphines and the Fort Ternan caprines
are shown in Figure 46.
Alcelaphine postcranial bones from ‘E’ Quarry are of appropriate size to be
conspecific with the cranial and dental remains of the Damalacra species. The
following notes are based on an associated skeleton, L41482 (Figs 21, 47-48),
from bed 3aS with complete examples of all the long limb bones, as well as on
other examples. The lengths and least transverse thicknesses of the long limb
bones of L41482 are as follows: femur 224 x 22,2, tibia 269 x 22,7, metatarsal
223 x 16,9, humerus 195 x 20,4, radius 226 x c. 23,6, metacarpal 201 x 17,9.
Chief among the other limb bones are the following:
From bed 3aS:
L12456—much of right humerus, proximal and distal right radius
L12463—distal right tibia, associated with above
L15000—complete right metacarpal with length and least transverse
thickness of 226 x 19,1
L15031—right scapula
L15075, L15155—complete left and right uation with lengths and least
transverse thicknesses of 197 x 22,0 and 176 x 19,3
L15271—most of right humerus
L15276—distal metatarsal
L15963—distal right humerus
L40279—complete left metacarpal with length and least transverse thick-
ness of 199 x 17,3
L40319—complete metatarsal with length and least transverse thickness
of 224 x 17,9, atlas vertebra
L41216—distal left humerus, distal left radius, proximal left metacarpal,
left and right proximal metatarsals
Probably from bed 3aS:
L1848, L3037—distal left and distal right femora
L2189, L3042—complete left and right metatarsals with engi and least
transverse thicknesses of 220 x 16,8 and 228 x 17,4
L2167, L12280—distal right and distal left tibiae
From bed 3aN:
L30769—distal left humerus, distal right radius; probably alcelaphine
L31388—distal right humerus
L31684—distal right tibia and proximal right metatarsal
L32707—distal left tibia and complete left metatarsal with length and least
transverse thickness of c. 237 X c. 18,6
Generally the Langebaanweg bones show the typical characters of alcela-
phines, most of which are cursorial adaptations (Gentry 1970a: 277-282), but
often less sharply defined than in extant species. The metapodials may be
thicker than in the similarly sized Damaliscus dorcas and are about as thick as
in later, larger alcelaphines (Fig. 49). The metacarpals are not as long relative
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 285
ey
GY
Si
Fort
Ternan Langebaanweg Omo Extant
Fig. 46. Occlusal views of M? (top row), M, (middle row) and P, (bottom row) of Caprini
from Fort Ternan, Damalacra from E Quarry Langebaanweg, Alcelaphini from the Shungura
Formation Omo, and extant Alcelaphus buselaphus. All teeth are of the right side and the
anterior direction lies to the right.
Fig. 47. Damalacra sp. L41482, long limb bones of hind leg. From the left: right femur in
lateral and anterior view, left tibia in medial and anterior view, right metatarsal in lateral and
anterior views. Scale = 25 mm.
286 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 48. Damalacra sp. 41482, long limb bones of foreleg. From the left: left humerus
in lateral and anterior view, right radius in medial and anterior view, left metacarpal
in posterior and anterior view. Scale = 25 mm.
Least
= thickness
20
200 250 mm
Fig. 49. Proportions of alcelaphine metacarpals. XK = bed 3aS, E Quarry Langebaanweg.
a = extant Alcelaphus buselaphus, c = extant Damaliscus dorcas, u = extant D. lunatus,
o = Parmularius altidens, rights underlined. Upper diagonal line = 10%, lower one = 7%
as in Figure 3.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 287
to the metatarsals as in extant Damaliscus lunatus or Alcelaphus buselaphus.
The only characters in which they are definitely different or less advanced have
been mentioned in the generic diagnosis. The femur shows an anteroposteriorly
long lateral part of the articular head, a deep hollow between the articular head
and the great trochanter, well-marked insertion positions for muscles and
ligaments on the distal lateral condyle, and a medial condyle which projects
well anteriorly. However, it is possible that the patellar fossa distally is less
extremely wide and the lateral roughened fossa less deep than in living alcela-
phines. The tibia shows a strong central swelling on the top articular surface
and a depression medial to it just in front of the level of the paired flanges,
themselves well marked. There is an upcurved edge of the lateral facet at the
proximal end, and the medialmost muscle scar at the top of the posterior surface
is long, strong, high on the shaft and in a relatively medial position. Distally the
medial malleolus is not clearly shorter than in living alcelaphines, and the front
fibula facet is well outlined and distinct from the rear one. The presence of a
patellar groove at the front of the proximal articular surface is like Conno-
chaetes rather than Alcelaphus and Damaliscus. The back edge of the distal arti-
cular facets is less indented centrally than in most extant alcelaphines in L2167,
L41482 and L32707, but L31684 does not appear to be different. The metatarsal
has the posterior part of its top articular surface transversely narrower than
_ the central parts, a small main facet for the naviculocuboid, no deep hollow
between the anterior and posterior naviculocuboid facets, parallel outer edges
of the distal condyles, deep hollows above the distal condyles anteriorly, and
strong paired flanges distally on the anterior surface. The ridges on the condyles
pass high posteriorly. However, the posteromedial part of the main naviculo-
cuboid facet may have been more strongly raised than in living alcelaphines,
the hollow deeper around the foramen at the top of the posterior surface (a
character as in Connochaetes), and the distal condyles frequently have the
appearance of being less high and narrow overall. The single complete metatarsal
from bed 3aN is larger than examples from 3aS.
In the scapula the tuber scapulae is situated near to the lateral side in
ventral view, the area for the origin of the teres minor muscle is well hollowed,
and there is a slight flattening of the posterolateral edge of the glenoid facet.
In the humerus the bicipital groove is wide and set back from the front edge of
the lateral tuberosity, and a sharp ridge down the front of the tuberosity is
variably developed. The distal end is completely alcelaphine with upright con-
dyles of the articular surface, a strong medial groove, an indentation in the top
of the medial condyle and a V-shaped prolongation of the lateral surface.
However, the last character is not well marked in L15075, L31388A or L41482;
it is better in L12456 and L41216. Two other possible differences from living
alcelaphines are that the top of the medial tuberosity forms a less upstanding
point and that the lateral tuberosity rises higher above the top of the infra-
spinatus scar in lateral view. In the radius the proximal lateral tubercle is large
and set high, there is no rim on the medial side of the proximal medial facet,
——— ae
288 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the back of the lateral facet is set forwards, and distally the anterior flanges are
strong and set close together. However, L41216 has rather a poor medioposterior
hollowing for the scaphoid and L12456A is rather swollen distally in side view
for an alcelaphine. The metacarpal of L41482 shows an angled anteromedial
corner to its magnumtrapezoid facet as is usual in Alcelaphini but the unciform |
facet is perhaps larger. Another metacarpal, L15000, shows the converse con-
ditions for these characters.
In the two atlas vertebrae, L40319 and L41482 (Fig. 50), the side edges are
not concave over a very great length, and the front edge of the dorsal surface is
not very indented. An alcelaphine character which both do show is a forwardly
directed spike centrally at the front of the ventral surface.
SSS
Fig. 50. Damalacra sp. L41482. From the left: atlas vertebra in dorsal and ventral views,
axis vertebra in left lateral view. Anterior sides towards the left. Scale = 25 mm.
Measurements
Measurements on three frontlets of D. acalla are:
L1799 L1836 L15928
Skull width across posterior side of orbits — 133,8 —
Length of horn-core along its front edge — 265 —
Anteroposterior diameter at base of
horn-core . ; : : : : 45,2 42,9 44,4
Mediolateral diameter at base of horn-
core. f ; . i ‘ ce 38,8 38,2 37,0
Minimum width across lateral sides of
horn pedicels. 2 . : ; 90,3 90,3 94,3
Width across lateral edges of supra-
orbital foramina : f : : — 46,3 51,3
— ews tittten an _ — FNS w am Fin) 0 YP ia MéMdhbhs es <7. fist
—_——— ca aaaae soe a“: om Swe Oe
289
oO
5 oe COE CSE 6°0€ (6165 VCE 8°ZE SOF : ; ‘ ; " — [eyIdos0Iseq JO SaIjIsOIogn} IOLI91sod sso10e UIPIM
Zi — 9°ZE 767 9°97 WG 9°TZ =< ClEZ 7 5 Ft JeyEdIOo0Iseq JO SarIsoJaqn} JOFI9}Ue sso1Oe YIPIAA
2 = eer €°9€ viv a €“9€ 9°9€ 7 OV "7 Fs wnuseuT UoUTeIOy Jo do} wouy WyStey eydI009
Hu ie a oa ae ae 0669 — OOOW <r 2s yeu Aropne [eU1o}xe PUIYaq SPIOIseU ssosow YIPIA [[NYS
> = — — o COO eee 2 " * YYPIM osevouresq wunUIxeEy
< +09 8°rS 8°TS ae = — — 6°€9 "51 syesuoay Jo eed 0} doy Eidine Hoy do} [[nys Jo yI3ueT
a = FE: = ae == — 8 eee "syd [eyIqroeidns Jo sospa [e19}e] SSOIDe YIPIAA
a 9°8L (0) a as £°96 a 8°96 aa 0°66 es ee A Sleoiped UJOY JO SOdBJINS [e19}e] SSOIOV YIPIM WINUTTUTY
Ee £6 8S a 0°6€ O*EE v°6E lig ‘bb ee egos * * 9109-UJOY JO eseq 7 JO}OUIRIP [eIOIL[OIPSW,
4 S*vE 60S er Ly O'Er L’vv L‘Or [LASS ey ee re SS SOTOae “urOY JO aseq ye JoJoUILIP JO}1e}sodos9}Uy
2 ae 917 ce ar CST =a ae a : i ; z : : i : YJsus[ 9109-UIOH{
g[euray
fe)
A Ssccovt SLoorT plow 9600VT 608771 L8IOZI LZ@PZIT 1000r1
S|
B ‘DI[VIV DAIDIDUIDG JO SyUoWOINSeOUL |[NyS
e)
Ik ¢ ATEVL
290 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The widths across the anterior and posterior tuberosities of the basi-
occipital of L12856 are 26,9 and 30,9. Additional measurements on L12427,
not shown in Table 5, are occlusal lengths of M? 24,8, of P?-P* 39,4, of P2
10,9, of P* 12,2. The female horn-core L10563 has an index of 32,9 x 27,4.
Measurements on horn-cores and frontlets of D. acalla, including specimens
listed in Table 5, are:
Number Standard Standard
measured Mean Range deviation error
Anteroposterior dia-
meter at base of
horn-core, bed
34S, rishtsides . 21 47,5 40,7-53,7 aS 0,72
Mediolateral diameter
of above . eae | 39,3 = 31,7-44,3 2,9 0,63
Anteroposterior dia-
meter at base of
horn-core, bed
3aN, right side . 8 51,4 44,7-58,2 5,3 1,89
Mediolateral diameter
of above . 8 43,4 36,7-49,9 4,6 1,63
Horn-core length,
bed 3aS_. : 4 240 216-265 216 10,8
Minimum width
across lateral
sides of horn
pedicels, bed 3aS 9 96,4 90,3-101,7 4,1 1,35
Width across lateral
edges of supra-
orbital foramina,
bedasaSh sie] (ae 5 49,3 44,1-54,2 4,1 1,81
Readings on the female horn-cores of Damalacra from bed 3aS, apart
from the four assigned to species, are:
Number Standard Standard
measured Mean Range deviation error
Anteroposterior dia-
meter at base of
horn-core . sek XG) 34,3 28,9-38,9 2,6 0,51
Mediolateral diameter
at base of horn-
core bu MENS ES ce) 29,0 22,4-32,6 22 0,44
Individual readings for specimens from bed 3aN were:
Horn-core lengths PS PAKS
Minimum width across lateral sides of horn pedicels 98,9, 107,9 111,9
Width across lateral edges of supraorbital foramina 55,7
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 291
Readings for occlusal lengths of alcelaphine lower teeth in middle wear are:
‘=|
= 6
5 2 Ue ee ee
25 o aie S Be
Zee es fe Bee oe eS
M,-Ms;, bed 3aS,
Ponte wets il 669s 59029743 ~ 3:48 O75) 0510
M,-Ms, bed 3aN,
Fee eh oS 65,9 60,6-68,9 3,1 140° 24570
M,, bed 3aS, right 29 18: SHO 225 0 Gas OA. 5196
M,, bed 3aN, left 5 D2 Wier OLD8 Sire TS eI ISOH 2155.88
M,, bed 3aS, left. 49 28,8 25,7-32,3 1,7 0,24 5,90
M,, bed 3aN, left 8 DBA 96:8230:4e 00,4 048 4893
P,-P, (with P,),
bed 3aS, right 11 28,00 2153-3333" 139 1S aa (SS
P,—P, (without P,),
bed 3aS, right 6 24,2 22,6-29,9 2,9 |e) cya PALE)
P,-P, (with P,),
bed 3aN, left 2 31,6 31,2-32,.0 — — —
P,, bed 3aS, right. 8 6:8 VSB CNE! eG 20230 RS
P,, bed 3aN, left. 2 Tih COONS snus ue
P,, bed3aS, right. 40 13.9}. M2655. Ou! OF oom S04
P,, bed 3aN, left. 5 14.00 128215,00 0,9 2426408 » 6,43
The coefficients of variation show that measurements of the occlusal
lengths of P,P, and P, are particularly variable. Either the reduction in size of
P, or the difficulty of identifying measuring points at the front and back of
the premolar row may have an effect here, but it is also possible that the large
coefficient of variation shows that one of the two species of Damalacra has a
shorter premolar row than the other one. There is no indication that tooth size
increased from bed 3aS to 3aN, in contrast to the indication from horn-cores.
_ Comparisons
It is informative to compare both species of Damalacra with a number of
alcelaphine specimens from the Hadar Formation, Afar, which may represent
an early member of the group in which Parmularius, Damaliscus and Alcelaphus
evolved. The conclusion reached will be that Damalacra represents a still more
primitive stage of alcelaphine evolution and is of uncertain relationship to the
292 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Afar remains. The main Afar remains are:
AL 208-7 largely complete skull from SH-3 surface
AL 353-3 cranium with left horn-core from SH-2 surface
AL 16125 cranium with base of left horn-core from DD-3 surface
AL 120-2 pair of horn-cores and parts of | from DD-3 surface
associated skeleton
AL 310-18 — cranium with base of right horn-core
The Afar alcelaphine shows the following characters: size about equal to
extant Damaliscus lunatus and Alcelaphus; horn-cores of short to moderate
length, without much compression, without a flattened lateral surface, without
Keels or transverse ridges, base often squared off posteromedially, thickness
of cross-section often diminishing rapidly above the base and producing a
tapered appearance, inserted close together above the back of the orbits, little
divergent basally but more so distally, boundaries between pedicel tops and
horn-core bases higher on the medial than the lateral sides; postcornual fossa
long and shallow, parietofrontals suture with little central indentation, frontals
raised between horn-core bases, orbital rims not projecting as a separate
structure from the descending lateral surface of the horn pedicels, braincase
roof short and inclined, near absence of a Parmularius-like parietal boss,
braincase widening posteriorly, a deep face, long and narrow nasals, a large
and fairly deep preorbital fossa, occipital surface with a strong median vertical
ridge, and ventral border of the mastoid angled instead of straight. It is possible
that horn-core shape evolves during the Hadar Formation from the condition
of rather low insertions, little curvature or distal divergence and slight medio-
lateral compression to more upright insertions, a forwardly curved course with
clockwise torsion on the right side, stronger distal divergence, and slight antero-
‘posterior compression. It is also possible that the braincase shortens and that
the slight indication of a parietal boss disappears altogether, but these are not
very certain. There also seem to be evolutionary changes at the back of the
skull in the Afar alcelaphines. In AL 208-7 and AL 353-3 the junction between
the base of the nuchal crest and the back of the zygomatic arch is not posteriorly
placed, each side of the occipital surface faces partly laterally as well as back-
wards, there is a strong median vertical ridge on the occipital, and the mastoid
is wholly contained within the occipital surface. These characters are all linked
and the converse conditions are found in AL 161-5 and AL 310-18 in which
the junction of nuchal crest and zygomatic arch is more posterior, the occipital
faces more wholly backwards and has less of a median vertical ridge, and the
lateral parts of the mastoids have the appearance of being deflected to face
laterally just in front of the occipital edge. AL 161-5 and AL 310-18 are
Closer to extant Alcelaphus and many Damaliscus and one imagines that they
are more highly evolved.
These Pliocene alcelaphines differ strikingly from extant Alcelaphus by the
absence of extreme braincase shortening and face lengthening, more extensive
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 293
preorbital fossae, and the absence of horn-core specializations as well as by
more minor characters. They also show differences from Damaliscus: transverse
ridges usually absent on the horn-cores, the horn-core compression evolving
to become slightly anteroposterior rather than slightly mediolateral, horn-
cores not curved backward, horn-cores more divergent distally (not a difference
from D. lunatus lunatus), the diminishing parietal boss, the braincase roof not
curved in profile, the external auditory meatus set lower in relation to the
occipital surface behind it than in male D. Junatus, a narrower basioccipital,
and the suture at the back of the parietal protruding further forwards in its
central parts (not a difference from D. dorcas). They differ from both Alcelaphus
and Damaliscus by the angled ventral border of the mastoid.
The teeth of the Afar alcelaphines differ from extant alcelaphines by their
more primitive characters. They are probably less hypsodont; on the upper
molars the central cavities are less complicated, the ribs are less prominent
in relation to the styles, the medial lobes are perhaps less rounded; on the
lower molars the central cavities are less curved and the medial walls perhaps
less outbowed; on P, the rear part (the region of the hypoconid, entoconid and
entostylid) is less reduced, and the valley between entoconid and entostylid is
perhaps oriented more nearly transversely. Insufficient of them are known for
the reduction or otherwise of P, to be assessed.
Both species of Damalacra differ from the Hadar Formation species by
slightly smaller size, horn-cores probably longer and with bases not usually
squared off posteromedially, dorsal orbital rims more strongly projecting,
braincase sides parallel and supraorbital pits closer together. Both species would
probably also differ in shorter and wider nasals, a less deep face and a more
posterior setting of the tooth-row—characters which are so far known only
from a unique face of D. neanica.
Nearly all the characters mentioned so far are likely to be primitive.
D. neanica differs additionally from the Afar species in the more posterior
insertions and weak anti-clockwise torsion of the horn-cores, and the more
inclined braincase roof without a hint of a parietal boss. These characters
remove D. neanica from likely ancestry to the Afar species. D. acalla differs
additionally by sometimes showing a flattened lateral surface of its horn-cores,
sometimes having a localized swelling at the base of the horn-cores, with more
definite backward curvature and pedicels of about equal height on their lateral
and medial sides. The last two characters are probably primitive in the Lange-
baanweg form and the first two, even if advanced, do not appear very imposing.
The Langebaanweg alcelaphine teeth as a whole differ from the Hadar
Formation ones by being still more primitive. They are definitely less hypsodont,
small basal pillars exist on M,s and dP,s and occasionally on upper molars, the
central cavities of the upper molars are even less complicated, the ribs still
weaker in relation to the styles, and the medial lobes are pointed rather than
rounded. The medial walls of the lower molars are straighter, the central cavities
not very curved and with almost no transverse constriction centrally (except
294 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
perhaps in later wear), and the lateral lobes are more pointed. The P, has poorer
fusion between metaconid and paraconid, a larger rear part, and the valley
between entoconid and entostylid is oriented transversely.
Some characters of horn-cores and braincase were mentioned earlier as
possibly undergoing change during the span of the Hadar Formation. Dama-
lacra acalla is more like the earlier than the later form except in its more upright
horn-core insertions. D. neanica is more like the earlier in its occipital characters
but more like the later in its horn-core characters and complete absence of a
parietal boss.
A partial cranium from the Laetolil or Ndolanya Beds, 1959.233 (Gentry &
Gentry 1978, pl. 22 (fig. 1)) at present in Nairobi, could be conspecific or a close
relative of the Afar species, and Damalops palaeindicus (Falconer), 1859, from
the Pinjor Formation of the Siwaliks and Tadzhikistan (Dmitrieva 1977) could
also be a close relative. Details of D. palaeindicus are given in Lydekker (1886,
pl. 4 (figs 3, 3a, 5)) and Pilgrim (1939: 67-70), and it was discussed by Gentry &
Gentry (1978: 406, 412) in comparison with Olduvai alcelaphines. D. palae-
indicus differs from the Afar species in that its horn-cores curve backward, they
show no rapid tapering above the base and the sides of the braincase appear
to be parallel instead of showing posterior widening. The horn-cores may be
longer, the braincase shorter, and the tooth-row positioned more anteriorly,
but this is not certain. So far as can be seen, the Laetoli specimen agrees more
closely with the Afar species than with D. palaeindicus. It is apparent that both
species of Damalacra will differ from Damalops about as much as from the
Afar alcelaphine. .
Apart from the Afar alcelaphine and its possible close relatives, a smaller
alcelaphine is represented at Laetoli by a cranium with horn-cores, 1959.277
at present in Nairobi, discussed by Gentry & Gentry (1978: 382, pl. 21, pl. 22
(fig. 2)) who thought it was an early Parmularius. Since 1974 some conspecific
horn-cores have been recovered from the Laetolil Beds by M. D. Leakey, so it
can be taken as a member of the fauna dating from before 3,5 m.y. It differs
from the Hadar Formation species by smaller size, possibly longer horn-cores,
backward curvature and little distal divergence of the horn-cores, less definite
posteromedial squaring off at the horn-core bases, occipital perhaps facing
even more strongly laterally on each side, closer supraorbital pits with a more
concave area of the frontals in between them, and dorsal orbital rims projecting
more strongly as a separate structure from the lateral sides of the horn pedicels,
all of which could be conceived as primitive. The slight mediolateral compres-
sion and absence of rapid tapering of the horn-cores is more like earlier than
later Afar specimens and could also be primitive. Such primitive characters
can be attributed either to the greater geological age of the Laetoli species or
to its smaller size. Other differences are quite a sharp backwards bend of the
horn-core just over half-way from base to tip, a posterolateral basal swelling
on the horn-core, higher pedicels, parallel sides of the braincase and a more
prominent parietal boss. Some of these may be advanced and others primitive.
‘-
t
il
}
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 295
The parietal boss and the sharp bend, basal swelling and high pedicels of the
horn-cores could all foreshadow Parmularius and suggest ancestry to it.
Damalacra neanica horn-cores differ from the Laetoli species by the slight
anteroposterior compression, their more posterior insertions, no backward
curvature and more distal divergence which appear to constitute their own set
of advanced characters. They also lack the sharp alteration in course, a localized
basal swelling and high pedicels—the supposed advanced characters of the
Laetoli species. The cranial roof is also quite different in D. neanica by being
shorter, more inclined, straight and without a parietal boss. Damalacra acalla
horn-cores differ by sometimes having a flattened lateral surface, which may be
advanced but is unlikely to be a constant or evolutionarily irreversible character.
They also lack some advanced characters of the Laetoli species: the sharp
alteration in course, high pedicels, and a strong difference between the heights
of the pedicel on its medial and lateral sides. Their basal swelling is not always
present nor is it localized posterolaterally. The parietal boss is less obvious.
It should also be reiterated that alcelaphine teeth from Langebaanweg are
definitely more primitive than those from the Laetolil Beds. Once again D. acalla
is better fitted for ancestry than D. neanica.
The condition of the alcelaphine teeth at Langebaanweg indicates that
Damalacra is more primitive than the alcelaphines hitherto considered from the
Hadar Formation, Siwaliks or the Laetolil Beds. The clear implication is that
Damalacra at Langebaanweg existed in an earlier time span. D. neanica had
acquired some specializations of its own which make it unlikely to be ancestral
to these forms. It was probably the end of an evolutionary line and it would
be unwise to use its advanced characters to look for relationships with later
alcelaphines (cf. Gentry in Hendey 1970: 116 in which D. neanica was con-
fused with advanced Parmularius). The combination of some specializations
of the horn-cores with an otherwise primitive skull is analogous to the living
Connochaetes gnou which, despite its advanced horn-cores, has a short face and
teeth which are occlusally simpler than other comparably-sized extant alcela-
phines. One imagines that such combinations may have arisen with some
frequency in alcelaphine evolution.
There is some reason to believe that alcelaphine horn-core characters can
change relatively rapidly. A possible interpretation of events in the Hadar
Formation is the evolution of more upright insertions, more forward curvature,
more distal divergence and a small degree of anteroposterior compression, all
of which are a repeat of characters which had already appeared in Damalacra
- neanica. Even at Langebaanweg itself D. acalla horn-cores of bed 3aN seem to
be losing their backward curvature and acquiring more divergence distally,
almost in imitation of the D. neanica which had been so abundant in bed 3aS.
It is interesting that a Damalacra acalla horn-core such as L30215 in
bed 3aN not only has a degree of distal divergence and little backward curvature,
but also a base which has become squared off posteromedially, all of which
foreshadow the Afar alcelaphine. The tendency of horn-cores to become
296 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
shorter from 3aS to 3aN could also be a means for them acquiring a more
tapered appearance like the Afar alcelaphine. It is wise not to read too much
into these supposed tendencies. More material from Langebaanweg is still
being accessioned at the South African Museum and will provide a basis for a
more thorough examination. One can have little confidence that all alcelaphine
horn-core characters are stable or that, once acquired, they need be irreversible.
However, it is unquestionable that Damalacra acalla, particularly as known
from bed 3aS, is better fitted than D. neanica to be an ancestor of later alcela-
phines by reason of its lack of specialized characters. Its only known locality
at the southern end of Africa is an unlikely venue for evolutionary enterprise,
but D. acalla or a closely related species further north in Africa is potentially
an ancestor for the Afar alcelaphine and even for other species such as the
Laetoli species represented by the cranium 1959.277.
As yet there is little evidence of Damalacra-like alcelaphines further north
in Africa. But there is some. A horn-core cast from Wadi Natrun, BM(NH)
M8199, is the base of a much damaged horn-core, probably of the right side,
and appears to be the one mentioned by Studer (1898: 76) and Andrews (1902:
438). It is labelled Hippotragus ?cordieri, but could belong to a Damalacra.
A left upper molar from Garet el Muluk at Wadi Natrun figured by Stromer
(1907: 120, pl. 20 (fig. 1)) and identified by him as perhaps tragelaphine, appears
to represent an alcelaphine at an evolutionary level comparable with Dama-
lacra. Its basal length is given as 21 mm. A cast of a left M; also from Wadi
Natrun, BM(NH) M 12361, which Andrews (1902: 439, p. 21 (fig. 9)) thought
was from a large gazelle-like form, could also represent an alcelaphine at the
Damalacra \evel. Its occlusal length is 28,3 and its height (early wear) is c. 32 mm.
It begins to look as if the evolutionary history of medium sized alcelaphines
has been of successive replacements of one dominant group by another. One
could conjecture that the living Alcelaphus and Damaliscus have replaced the
various Parmularius species and Damaliscus niro of the Pleistocene. (They
could also have come close to replacing Beatragus which seems to be a lineage
on the verge of extinction.) Now it looks as if Parmularius and Damaliscus niro
themselves had replaced earlier Pliocene alcelaphines such as the Afar species
and Damalops, while Damalacra is giving us the first intimation of a still older
stratum of alcelaphines. The actual phylogenetic path from one dominant
group to its successor is still a conjectural matter. Parmularius can be con-
vincingly derived from Laetoli 1959.277, but Damaliscus and Alcelaphus may
come either from this species or from the stock containing the Afar species and
Damalops palaeindicus. There is a possibility that the Afar species and Damalops
palaeindicus are a Pliocene dispersal not ancestral to any later forms. It has been
noted above that they could be descended from Damalacra acalla or some more
northern Damalacra species, and it is also possible that 1959.277 has a similar
ancestry.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 297
Fig. 51. Lateral views of skulls and horn-cores of Damaliscus lunatus (left) and Alcelaphus
buselaphus (right), shown at their normal inclinations when not feeding.
_ Functional skull morphology and evolution in alcelaphines
The two functions which mainly lead to variation of skull morphology
among bovids are feeding (ingestion and mastication) and horn support. Other
functions, such as breathing or input of sensory information, must not be
impaired by changes in feeding habits or horn support, but are not themselves
the cause of larger scale morphological changes. In living Damaliscus and
Alcelaphus (Fig. 51) the most notable feature of the skull is the long face. The
most likely explanation for this is that animals grazing at ground level need to
have eyes as high as possible to avoid being surprised by predators. In line
with this requirement they also show long diastemata, tooth-row forward of
orbital level (especially in Alcelaphus), and the brain cavity becoming realigned
diagonally instead of horizontally. When not feeding, Alcelaphus, and to a lesser
extent Damaliscus, hold their heads more nearly vertical than non-alcelaphine
antelopes. (When asleep while standing (Plessis 1972, fig. 11) their heads can
swing even further to an almost inverted position.) This is mechanically more
298 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
convenient with long skulls in which the entire weight has to be supported on
the rest of the body at the occipital condyles, and it also causes less obstruction
to the field of vision. It is desirable in bovids for the horn-core insertions to be
as high as possible on the skull, presumably to ensure maximum visual effect.
Consequently, an antelope with a long face held vertically could well have
insertions in an extreme position behind (now = above) the orbits. This has
happened in Alcelaphus buselaphus where the insertions are close together on a
united pedicel, and in A. lichtensteini where they are wide apart but also high.
The changed position of the insertions is also linked with horn-core curvature
being forward rather than backward. This is a means of ensuring that the
distribution of weight in relation to the condyles continues to be balanced.
If a Damaliscus evolved posterior/high insertions like Alcelaphus, then it would
have to evolve either a more vertical carriage of its head or forward curvature
of its horn-cores to avoid a weight imbalance on the occipital condyles. It is
difficult to assess how the different structure of the horns in Alcelaphus and
Damaliscus affects dominance-testing encounters between conspecific males. In
high intensity exchanges Damaliscus kneels on its carpal joints, may even hold
its forehead to the ground and the horns of the opponents interlock (David
1973, fig. 11f; Lynch 1974: 37; Monfort-Braham 1975, fig. 6). Alcelaphus also
locks horns but they do not appear to get to the stage of pressing their foreheads
to the ground. The tips of all Alcelaphus horn-sheaths are turned backward,
unlike Damaliscus, so in this position Alcelaphus would more readily injure one
another. Walther (1972: 403) notes that hartebeests do injure themselves more
often than most other horned ungulates, so perhaps this is what actually happens.
It is apparent from the foregoing comments that the major differences
between Damaliscus and Alcelaphus skulls are a single suite of functionally and
mechanically linked characters. This must apply also to the differences of
Damalacra neanica from D. acalla. There must have been ecological opportunity
for two species to coexist, just as at the present day, and one of them evolved
similar but less extreme differentiating characters of posterior horn-core inser-
tions, shortened and inclined braincase roof, horn-cores curving less backward
and even forward, and horn-core compression being more anteroposterior than
mediolateral. It may be that pairs of sympatric alcelaphines have repeatedly
evolved similar differentiating characters. In middle and upper Bed II at Olduvai
Gorge Parmularius angusticornis had a very short braincase and horn-cores
which lack backward curvature. Damaliscus niro in the same deposits had
backwardly curved horn-cores and may also have had a longer braincase. If the
above reasoning is correct then early alcelaphines at Langebaanweg had already
become grazers at ground level. This conclusion is compatible with the presence
of horn-cores in female Damalacra. It seems from extant bovids that. horned
females are more characteristic of larger than smaller species and that in Africa
horned females are more frequent in species living in open habitats.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 299
Comparison of Langebaanweg alcelaphines with early caprines
_ The early caprine Pachytragus is known from the Turolian fauna of Samos,
Greece, where it has two species, P. crassicornis and P. laticeps, discussed by
Gentry (1971). Pachytragus shares with Damalacra the basic characters of
aegodont antelopes such as the rather narrow skull, inclined braincase roof,
hypsodonty of the cheek teeth, reduction of basal pillars on the molars and
shortening of the premolar row. P. crassicornis and D. neanica are easily dif-
ferentiated by a number of individual specializations, but P. Jaticeps and
D. acalla are morphologically more primitive, and it is necessary to point out
how they differ enough to avoid being placed in one genus. D. acalla shows:
1. A tendency to basal thickening of its horn-cores usually on the medial
surface |
2. Its horn-cores are less compressed mediolaterally
3. Their distance apart, measured across the lateral sides of the pedicels,
is greater; this character is probably linked with the last
4. The internal hollowing of the horn pedicels has been carried much
further
5. The frontals are more raised between the horn-core bases (linked with
the last character)
6. The midfrontals suture is less complex and less raised into a ridge
7. The supraorbital pits are smaller
8. The supraorbital pits are situated more widely apart
9. The back of the braincase is wider
10. The occiput is lower
11. The mastoid is probably larger
12. The lower molars have less flattening of their medial walls
13. The P, is more strongly reduced
Characters 1, 4, 5 and 13 look like specializations in D. acalla and, on the
hypothesis that Langebaanweg is the younger site, could have been acquired
_ during descent from an earlier Pachytragus. Characters 2, 3, 6, and 12 seem
to be specializations in P. Jaticeps and to indicate a different direction of evolu-
tion from Damalacra. In the case of 7 to 11 either species could show the more
advanced condition, nevertheless the characters add to the ‘morphological
distance’ between the two species. The total morphological difference between
the two species is too great for them to be regarded as congeneric. Their common
ancestry, if one assumes the monophylety of aegodont antelopes, must lie
_ further back in time.
Tribe Neotragini
Genus Raphicerus H. Smith, 1827
Type species
Raphicerus campestris (Thunberg).
Generic diagnosis
Moderate sized to large neotragines. Horn-cores short to moderately long
300 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
with little mediolateral compression, inserted widely apart above the back
of the orbits, parallel to one another, and having a slightly concave front edge
in profile. Postcornual fossa present. Supraorbital pits wide apart, back of
braincase roof not very strongly turned down, temporal lines wide posteriorly
on cranial roof, preorbital fossa moderate sized to large, premaxilla wide and
rising to contact nasals, auditory bulla inflated, median indentation at back of
palate level with or forward of lateral ones, palatal ridges on maxilla anterior
to the tooth row approach one another closely. Upper molars with quite small
styles, central cavities of lower molars disappear early in wear, medial walls
of lower molars fairly flat and metastylids not strong, M,s with moderate to
large back lobes. Metaconid of P, passes transversely then backwards, front of
lateral wall of P, bends round into a transverse plane, P, not greatly reduced.
Remarks
The type species occurs in most of southern Africa and Rhodesia, and also
in Tanzania and Kenya. There are two other living species, R. melanotis (Thun-
berg) which is largely confined to the Cape Biotic Zone of South Africa, and
R. sharpei O. Thomas found in Mozambique, Malawi, Rhodesia, Zambia and
parts of surrounding countries. Klein (1976) has shown that R. melanotis and
R. campestris were already separate species in the early Upper Pleistocene of
the southern Cape Province. R. campestris lives in more open country than the
other two species and grazes more frequently (Klein 1976: 171-172 and
references).
Raphicerus paralius sp. nov.
Figs 52-53, 55-57
?Madoqua sp. Gentry in Hendey 1970: 116.
Holotype
L12238—right horn-core, index 15,5 x 15,2, and associated right maxilla
with P?—M® in early middle wear (Fig. 52).
Referred material
From QSM:
L21143, L21146 (Fig. 53)—left horn-cores, 18,1 < 14,7 and length c. 53,0,
753, Xone
L22504, L41606—right horn-cores, 15,7 x 16,0, 17,6 x 17,2
L41643—left and right horn-cores, the left with an index 17,4 x 15,6,
also another left horn-core with index 19,7 x 19,2
L12513—left and right maxillae with P?-M® and P?—P* respectively in
early middle wear
L22635—left upper molar
L41607—right maxilla with damaged P?-M?
L41645—right mandible with M, and Mg in early middle wear
L41666—left mandible with dP, in early middle wear
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 301
Fig. 52. Raphicerus paralius. L12238, holotype. Ventrolateral view
of right horn-core. Ventral view of most of right palate and
right cheek tooth-row. Scale = 10 mm.
Fig. 53. Raphicerus paralius. L21146, L6565, anterior
views of left horn-cores. Scale = 10 mm.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Probably from QSM:
L41703—right horn-core, 17,8 x 13,4 and length 67,6
From bed 3aS:
L40413—right horn-core, 17,3 x 16,7
L40132A—left maxilla with dP?—M?
L40270—left mandible with dP,-M,
L40443—left maxilla with P?-M®? and associated right upper teeth in late
middle wear
L41245—left mandible with M,—Msg, part of right mandible in early wear
(Figs 55, 57)
L41320—right mandible with P,—M, in early middle wear (Fig. 56)
L41526—two left upper molars, left lower molar, other teeth
L40088—right radius with proximal surface and most of shaft (Fig. 21)
L40021—complete left radius with length and least transverse thickness of
145 x 14,9 mm
Probably from bed 3aS:
L10788, L10789, L10931—right upper molars
L10790—left upper molar
L11008—right M,
L11197, L11198—left lower molar, right dP®
Probably from bed 3aS, but a few possibly from QSM:
L5412, L6565 (Fig. 53), L6566, L6573—left horn-cores, 20,1 x 16,2,
20,4 <8. 7 1505 13,7... 16:3 > 16
L6567—left horn-core
L2931—right horn-core, 18,4 x 18,2
L3132—right upper molar
L5312—right mandible with damaged M,—M,
L6600—left mandible with M, and M,
From QSM or bed 3aS:
L11157—right horn-core, 17,1 < 15,7
L11978—left mandible with M,
L41686—fragmentary right and left dP?s
L9939—distal left humerus
L41684—distal right tibia, partial left naviculocuboid, proximal left meta-
tarsal, much of distal right radius, fragmentary distal metacarpal,
terminal phalanx (Fig. 21). All associated with a pair of Raphicerus
horn-cores but the distal tibia, naviculocuboid and proximal meta-
tarsal are from a larger animal than the distal radius and metacarpal.
Also one side of a juvenile distal metapodial which must be a third
individual
From bed 3aN:
L45170—right mandible with remains of dP,-dP, in early middle wear
above P,-P,, M, and M,
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 303
From QSM or bed 3aN:
- L40787—distal left humerus (Fig. 21)
Horizon
The holotype comes from the QSM. The species is almost confined to the
QSM and bed 3aS of the PPM.
Diagnosis
A Raphicerus considerably larger than the three living species. Horn-cores
short and thickened basally, generally with a posterolateral keel, a tendency
towards a longitudinal concavity in front of it on the posterior half of the
lateral surface, sometimes a medial or anteromedial keel and other irregular
ridges all of which combine to give an irregularly shaped cross-section. Insertions
of horn-cores at a lower angle than in living Raphicerus. Postcornual fossa
well marked. Supraorbital pits not obscured by overgrowth of the frontals.
Preorbital fossa large and deep. Infraorbital foramen above P? or the front
part of P®. Basal pillars present on M, and traces of them on other lower molars.
Premolar row long. P? and P?® larger than in living Raphicerus. Short diastema.
Etymology
The specific name comes from the Greek paralios, by the sea, and refers
to the type locality for this species being in a coastal region.
Remarks
These fossils are larger than any living neotragine. There is no evidence
from the horn-cores (Fig. 54) of a size increase having taken place from the
QSM to the PPM. The horn-cores are nearly as short as in R. sharpei. Their
keels and irregular cross-section are more pronounced than in any other Raphi-
cerus, but this may be an allometric feature of large horn-cores in the Neo-
tragini, as indicated more faintly in larger examples of Neotragus, Dorcatragus
and Oreotragus. The large and deep or moderately deep postcornual fossae are
most like R. campestris among living species. There are no sinuses in the frontals.
The triangular supraorbital pit is large but shallow round the two foramina
in L12238A, but in L6565 and L41643 the pits are smaller and have more
resemblance to later Raphicerus. The absence of overgrowth by the frontals
is like R. sharpei and unlike R. campestris or melanotis. The lowness of the
horn-core insertions is only apparent from a few specimens, e.g. L21146, L41606,
and the left side of L41643, in which sufficient of the frontals posteromedially
to the horn-core has been preserved to show a somewhat Madoqua-like aspect
of the insertion. Such low insertion angles are more unlike R. campestris than
R. melanotis or sharpéi.
The maxillae L12238 and L12513B show that there was probably a large
and deep preorbital fossa which evidently passed low on the face and far
anteriorly. This large fossa would be a resemblance to R. melanotis. The infra-
orbital foramen is low over the back of P? or front of P’, unlike most R. sharpei
but resembling R. campestris and melanotis. The palatal ridges in front of the
304 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
207 Mediolateral
diameter
Anteroposterior diameter
ne I5 20 mm
Fig. 54. Basal diameters of neotragine horn-cores. O = Raphicerus paralius from QSM,
X = the same from bed 3aS; underlined readings are lefts, others rights. a = Raphicerus
from lower assemblage in Baard’s Quarry, m = Makapansgat Limeworks, s = R. melanotis
from Swartklip, c = extant R. campestris, dots = Elandsfontein Raphicerus sp. of the right
side. Upper diagonal line = 100%, lower one = 66,7 % as in Figure 3.
tooth-row on the maxilla L12238 converged and touched at the midline. Judged
by its sockets, the missing P? was a large tooth on L12238, as it is on L12513B
where it is still present. P? was also large. The large size of these anterior pre-
molars is reminiscent of Madoqua or Raphicerus melanotis and sharpéi.
It is not easy to distinguish the teeth of Raphicerus paralius from those
of the gazelle at Langebaanweg. This problem will be discussed on page 313.
The teeth accepted as neotragine show the following characters. They are large
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 305
19: CE oe: Ci en eeinaene ean NTE EO . a
Fig. 55. Raphicerus paralius, L41245, left lower dentition in occlusal view. Gazella sp., L40603,
right lower dentition in occlusal view. Scale = 10 mm.
se ath sm myn. ath ie pT Meee My om Oe a lanai ee Sl te
Fig. 56. Raphicerus paralius. L41320, right
lower dentition in occlusal view.
Scale = 10 mm.
MG a TE AS A
nego
Fig. 57. Raphicerus paralius, L41245, left mandible in lateral view. Gazella sp., L40603, right
mandible in lateral view. Scale = 10 mm.
306 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
307 Length
p¢_p4 ;
Length M'-m>
20 25 30 35mm
Fig. 58. Occlusal lengths of upper premolar and molar rows in Neotragini. X = Raphicerus
paralius L12513 from QSM Langebaanweg, C = extant R. campestris, m = extant
R. melanotis, S = extant R. sharpei. Upper diagonal line = 100%, lower one = 75% as in
Figure 3.
compared with living neotragines (Fig. 58). The upper molars have quite small
styles. On the lower molars the central cavities disappear early in wear, the
lateral lobes are only drawn out a little in a transverse direction, the medial
walls are fairly flat, and metastylids are not strong. There are small basal pillars
on M, and sometimes persistent traces of the basal pillars on other molars as
in L11978. The rear lobe on Mg is small to moderate sized and in three out of
four specimens it shows a flange posteriorly. The premolar row is rather long
as deduced from a number of incomplete specimens. On P, the hypoconid
projects slightly, the metaconid tends to be oriented transversely in its lateral
part, the paraconid is joined to the parastylid and shows no approach towards
the metaconid behind it, and the front of the lateral wall of the tooth tends
to bend round into a transverse plane. The metaconid tends to be in a trans-
verse plane (at least in early wear) in P, as well. The P, is large and shows little
sign of having been reduced in size. The diastema is short and curved upwards
and the lower edge of the mandible is curved. Nearly all these characters are
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 307
very similar to those of living Raphicerus. The tendency for the metaconid to
be oriented transversely on P; as well as P, is one of the few resemblances to
R. campestris. The curved lower edge of the mandible and the long premolar
row are both resemblances to R. melanotis and sharpei. Otherwise the Lange-
baanweg species differs from Raphicerus only in its large size, the presence of
basal pillars on M, and possibly on more posterior teeth as well, and in its shorter
diastema. It differs from other living neotragines as follows. Compared with
Madoqua it is much larger, basal pillars are present at least on M,, M3; always
has a third (rear) lobe, the hypoconid on P, projects less than it sometimes can
in Madoqua, and P, is less reduced. It differs from Neotragus by much larger
size, poorer styles on upper molars, basal pillars present at least on M,, normally
a flange on the back of M;, longer premolar row, the metaconid of P, less
clearly diagonal, and a short diastema. It differs from Oreotragus by being a
little larger, basal pillars present at least on M,, normally a flange on the back
of M.,, and the metaconid of P, less clearly diagonal. It differs from Dorcatragus
by larger size, longer premolar row, absence of a slight tendency for metaconid
and paraconid of P, to approach, and a short diastema.
The distal tibia, L41684, has a long medial malleolus in side view; however
its main facets are not greatly indented in the middle of their posterior edge so
it is unlikely to be of the gazelle. The front facet for the fibula is small but not
minute in comparison with the back one, more or less in front of the back one
instead of anteromedial to it, and without a deep indentation between it and
the back facet. The back of the rear fibula facet is not much anterior to the rear
edge of the bone as a whole. The tibiae of three out of four representatives of
extant Raphicerus campestris were more indented at the back of the articular
facets, two of them were more deeply indented between the fibula facets, and
one had the front fibula facet sited anteromedially rather than anteriorly to
the posterior one. A single example of Dorcatragus megalotis, the living beira
of Somalia which is about the size of R. campestris, has a very small front
fibula facet but is otherwise like R. campestris. Three examples of Oreotragus
oreotragus, another living neotragine of about the size of R. campestris, tend to
have more massive medial malleoli and more attenuated central ones than in
either R. campestris or the fossil Raphicerus. O. oreotragus has rather distinctive
limb bones, presumably because its preferred habitat is rocky slopes and
outcrops.
The metatarsal associated with the tibia L41684 has no longitudinal groove
on its anterior surface but some development of a posterior longitudinal groove.
- The foramen at the top of the posterior surface is set very deeply. The main
facet for articulation with the naviculocuboid curves rather strongly upwards
at the back and in side view the top articular surface appears far from flat. There
is no groove between the front and back naviculocuboid facets. there are clear
anterior and medial sides of the main ectocuneiform facet, and there is a swollen
rugose area at the top of the medial side of the shaft. The bone may not have
been very long when complete. The metatarsals of three R. campestris show
308 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
more differences from the Langebaanweg fossil than did the tibiae. There is
perhaps less development of the posterior longitudinal groove, the foramen at
the top of the posterior surface is set less deeply, the main ectocuneiform facet
does not show clear medial and anterior edges, there is no swollen rugose area
at the top of the medial side of the shaft, and the top of the articular surface as
a whole is anteroposteriorly longer. The single Dorcatragus megalotis is like
the living Raphicerus except that the rear of the main naviculocuboid facet is
less upcurved and the articular surface consequently appears flatter in medial
profile. The three Oreotragus oreotragus metatarsals are notably short and have
more of a groove behind the main naviculocuboid facet. However, two of them
have distinct anterior and medial edges to the main ectocuneiform facet as in
the Langebaanweg fossil, and in all three of them the articular surface is even
more compressed anteroposteriorly.
On the distal radius L41684 the back of the medial facet for articulating
with the scaphoid is not very deep and hence is unlike a gazelle. The cuneiform
articulation has quite a large area on the radius. The distal end as a whole looks
a little swollen in side view, and the flanges on the anterior surface are wide
apart and the surface between them not very hollowed.
The distal end of the complete radius L40021 is larger than that of L41684,
but its characters are similar. The articular surface for the lunate is not deeply
excavated.
The proximal radius L40088 has hardly any development of a medial rim
to its medial facet, the back edge of the lateral facet is not set anteriorly, and
the tubercle at the top of its lateral surface is small and situated below the level
of the articular facets. The radii of four available examples of R. campestris
and the single D. megalotis have the distal flanges on the anterior surface closer
together than in the Langebaanweg fossils but are otherwise similar. The three
‘O. oreotragus have even less of a rear medial facet for the scaphoid and a very
small or non-existent radial articulation for the cuneiform. However, the anterior
flanges are wide and little pronounced as at Langebaanweg.
The distal humeri L9939 and L40787 have slanted not upright condyles, a
deep coronoid fossa, only a shallow hollow for the o11gin of the lateral humero-
radial ligament, the posterior ridge for this hollow situated well forward from
the rear edge of the bone, and a moderately developed ridge on the lateral
surface marking the origin of the extensor carpi radialis.
The humeri of R. campestris and D. megalotis have a deeper hollow for
the lateral humeroradial ligament. Less certain differences are the possibility
of more upright condyles, a higher medial condyle, and the ridge demarcating
the posterior limit of the origin of the lateral humeroradial ligament being less
anteriorly placed. O. oreotragus has a distinctive appearance in anterior view
by being transversely wide across the medial condyle and by having a low
lateral condyle. However, it does have a shallow hollow for the humeroradial
ligament and the posterior ridge to this hollow is situated anteriorly.
309
TOC SI SLLOT'T 405 "WW Mojeq yidop snuey “HTT "AW 9680IT {9'PI ‘2 IW SOLS sore “ds D1J2ZDH JO Syysus] [esnjs00 J9yIO
OEL "AP OLISVT ‘ECE "AP 999TH ‘0°91 “WW SOOTIT sore smposvd snaaoiydoy JO syydug] [esnfd90 JOyIO
o “smijpddd Snaaaiydoy OJ SULUN[OD se14} 4SI OY} ydooxo suOTUEp JAMO] 9B [[V
Bee Ie ee Ge ee ES ee og == 7° SW 4ojeq yidep snuey
< LS = .9n => VL ef 61. Z81 = hie, 6L9. SPE = " "TAL Mojeq yidep snuey
ee Gy Saec Ul = =" 406 LS == 9'6 ras. aL 6 Sy SC 78 9°L 7% * pe YBUA] [eSN[INO
O = = ie oe ey ee. = ee lb i PY aster TEsNIa9@
Ze = a eee Ce. = = a oe Se = =z -5.0'6¢ = " * * pd-Zd YSU] [esn[s99
- ay ae 5 a | = =o BC bh =i. OPI =P Fle Sl = = = "7 * WW y8ue] [esnjs99
2 OcCl-wicel , “Let - Uri a — <0 2 LOL -CCh Sil Orel ae Ie « Orel SCC 7 "ZW yisusy Tesnjs9O
e rae e CY regen. Ger. = = = Gs Le eee ao. CVE EOE 2 OSCE " "EWTN Wi8u9] [esnjs99
= te ea ew ey ea S Es Hel el Is
fee See ee eee Se 2 ee Bee Ge
Q No) Oo (ore) Vo) o a Q NS R S S g 1S G2 e8
> fo) Ww 1oS) \O Nn [=e) NH [e.2) Oo (oS) (oe)
2
=|
2 ‘ds pjjazvy Snyosod snsaaiydoy
fy
‘SuUOI}USp ouIdo][Ue pue sUISeIJOOU JO s}UOWOINSLO;|
9 AIEV
310 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Measurements
Measurements of horn-cores have already been given. Those of teeth are
given in Table 6.
Comparisons
The Langebaanweg Raphicerus is larger than the living species of that genus.
As has been seen, it differs most from R. campestris among living species, and
rather less from R. melanotis or sharpei.
It would not be very convincing to link the Langebaanweg with Mcderh
Raphicerus except by way of congeneric Elandsfontein fossils, comprising one
or two crania, some frontlets, many horn-cores and many dentitions. Most
of the Elandsfontein horn-cores differ from living species only by their larger
size (Fig. 54) and less upright insertions. They often have an approach to a
posterolateral keel and the right horn-core on the frontlet SAM—PQ-E14153
has a mid-lateral keel with a longitudunal hollow between it and the postero-
lateral keel which suggests a link with the Langebaanweg species. Another
Elandsfontein horn-core, SAM-—PQ-E927, has an anterolateral keel.
A right horn-core from Makapansgat Limeworks, BPI M478, is like those
at Langebaanweg and may be identified as Raphicerus ?paralius. Its basal index
is 16,0 x 17,5 and length is 80 mm. It was published as Cephalophus pricei
by Wells & Cooke (1956: 12, fig. 6), but the tooth-rows assigned to this species
by the same authors are from a bushbuck-sized tragelaphine and one of them is
the holotype.
A pair of large neotragine horn-cores from member G of the Shungura
Formation, Omo 280 71-1168 and 1169, have an index of 18,7 x 15,9 and are
like R. paralius in their shortness, poor degree of compression and irregularly
shaped cross-section arising from strong longitudinal ridging and grooving.
‘However, their insertion is at a less low inclination, they show slight backward
curvature and the postcornual fossa is weak, so their identification as Raphicerus
is not very secure. Moreover, neotragine tooth-rows from low in member G
which may or may not be conspecific with the horn-cores, e.g. Omo 75i 70-1106
and L 5044, have smaller teeth than at Langebaanweg and the former specimen
is complete enough to show that the premolar row is much shorter.
Tribe Antilopini
Gazella sp.
Figs 55, 57, 59
Material
A number of horn-cores and dentitions belong to a gazelle. The horn-cores
and their basal indices are as follows:
From QSM:
Left Right
L13208 14,3 x 11,4 (female) L13984 part of horn-core
L20510 13,5 x 11,8 (female)
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 311
From bed 3aS:
Left Right
140324 26,4 x 20,5 L40097 = 32,1 x 24,3
L40390 =31,8 x 24,0 L40179 30,2 x 24,3
P41325 30,8 x’ 22,] LA0277 © 2836 < 20,5;
L41528 distal part only length c. 130
L40389 14,7 x 13,0 (female)
Probably from bed 3aS, but a few possibly from QSM:
Left Right
Weest -25,3' x 18:5 E261 ae 295222
L3491 B07 < 2032 (Fig. 59) L2620 26,6 x 19,9
Mai? ~ 27;7. x 22,6 MSU25 PZ S222
Ha07s ~ 28,3) :23;1 L3196
Rose! 243°< 19,1 £3206)" 28) <x. 203
L9149 = 26,3 x 18,4 L3588
£11985 16,4 x 13,7 (female) [E4740 27,2 :21;3
15971
LG6578" "26:2. x 1951
E6580". 249° 1971
L10694 31,5 x 21,4, length 155
L11622 28,0 x 21,4
LIQ 2236 X 18:9
Fig. 59. Gazella sp. L3491, left horn-core in anterior and lateral views. Scale = 25 mm.
312 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
From bed 3aN:
Left
L30209 28,4 x 19,8
L46041 16,0 x 13,0 (female)
L46066 31,6 x 21,4
A right horn-core L40036, with index 33,1 x 23,1, is of unknown
provenance. 7
The dental remains are as follows:
From bed 3aS:
L13385—left upper molar
L40226B—two left upper molars
L40383—left mandible with M,—M, in early middle wear
L40603—left and right mandibles, the right with P,-M, in early middle
wear (Figs 55, 57)
L41690—left mandible with P,—M, in late middle wear
Probably from bed 3aS:
L10289—right upper molar with occlusal length 15,4
L10290—right upper molar with occlusal length 13,8
L10291—right P*
(The last three are probably from one individual. The P* is unworn,
while L10289 which is probably the M? is still in early wear)
L10342—right upper molar with occlusal length 13,4
L10778—left mandible with M, and no central cavities on M,
L10797—left upper molar with occlusal length 14,6
L10896—right mandible with M,—M, in late wear
Probably from bed 3aS, but possibly from QSM:
L5765—right mandible with damaged M,—M, in early middle wear
L6286—right mandible with P,—M, in late middle wear (no central cavities
on M,)
L6605—right mandible with P,-M,; wear as for preceding specimen
From bed 3aN:
L32089—left upper molar
L32899—right mandible with M,—M; in early middle wear
L33624—left upper molar
Horizon
This species is much more abundant in bed 3aS than in bed 3aN or the
QSM.
Description
The horn-cores are moderately long, mediolaterally compressed, with a
tendency to flattening of the lateral surface, without keels or transverse ridges,
inserted fairly uprightly in side view and not far apart in anterior view, not very
divergent, and with rather a strong backward curvature. The widest diameter
is situated centrally or slightly anteriorly, the deepest longitudinal grooves are
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 313
found mainly anteriorly but some are posterior, the boundary between pedicel
and horn-core on the lateral surface has a more noticeably diagonal course than
in most gazelles, and the postcornual fossa is shallow or only moderately deep.
The frontals contain no internal sinuses and the supraorbital pits are moderately
sized and narrowly triangular in shape.
One example, L9149, could be less backwardly curved and more medio-
laterally compressed than normal, but to place it in a separate species would be
too conjectural.
Most of the horn-cores with any preservation of the surrounding area of
the frontals, e.g. L40097, L3491 and L9149, show that divergence from the base
was less than one would expect, as if pressure had been applied from the antero-
lateral side to give a slight inward tilt to the horn-core base. This may be a
feature of early gazelle and neotragine horn-cores.
The only male horn-core definitely from the QSM, L13984, is too frag-
mentary for any conclusions to be drawn about changes from one member to
another.
The upper molars have a strong mesostyle with a concave lateral wall
between mesostyle and metastyle, and there is an indentation into the central
cavity in the rear lobe. The lower molars are not easy to distinguish from those
of Raphicerus paralius at Langebaanweg and samples are not large.
Those assigned to Gazella are only slightly larger than the neotragine. The
back lobe of M; is probably relatively larger, and it has a central cavity which
is lacking in the neotragine. The medial walls of the lower molars are perhaps
flatter, and small basal pillars are visible only on M,, neither of which are
striking differences from the neotragine. The metaconids on P,; and P, tend to
be more diagonally aligned and it is not clear that the front of the lateral wall
of P, bends round transversely. Judged by the size of its root-sockets, P, may be
more reduced.
Measurements
Measurements on gazelle lower dentitions are given in Table 6.
Comparisons
It is interesting that ‘E’ Quarry is a site where Gazella is quite common but
Antidorcas is unknown. The Gazella is noteworthy in being rather large for
its Miocene/Pliocene age. This makes it unlikely to be related to the only other
fossil gazelle recorded from the Cape Province—a species from Elandsfontein
identical with one at Olduvai Gorge, Tanzania, taken by Gentry & Gentry
(1978: 439, 443) to be closely related or ancestral to the living G. thomsoni and
G. rufifrons. Its horn-cores also differ from those of the Elandsfontein species
by being more mediolaterally compressed (Fig. 60), more strongly curved
backward, and having the pedicel/horn-core boundary set more diagonally on
the lateral surface. The supraorbital pits are sometimes narrower.
Since Gazella is a long-lasting bovid in the fossil record and has conserva-
tive horn-cores, it is difficult to come to conclusions about the relationships of
314 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
30 Mediolateral
diameter
20
Anteroposterior diameter
30 40mm
Fig. 60. Basal dimensions of Gazella horn-cores. X = bed 3aS Langebaanweg, X = bed 3aN,
V =G. vanhoepeni, e = Gazella sp. from Elandsfontein, O = same species from Olduvai
Gorge and Peninj. The lower group of G. vanhoepeni are females, previously called G. gracilior
(see Gentry & Gentry 1978: 440). The lower group of Langebaanweg readings is also of
females; all are lefts except X. Male Langebaanweg horn-cores are rights except the two from
3aN. Upper diagonal line = 100%, lower one 66,7 % as in Figure 3.
newly discovered forms. However, it is plausible to relate the Langebaanweg
species to Gazella vanhoepeni (Wells & Cooke 1956) from Makapansgat Lime-
works. This latter species was originally put in Phenacotragus, a name later
recognized to be a junior synonym of Antidorcas (Gentry & Gentry 1978: 427).
Wells (1969) showed that G. vanhoepeni was a gazelle and probably related or
ancestral to the three large gazelles still living in Africa, G. dama, G. soemmer-
ringi and G. granti. The horn-cores of the Langebaanweg gazelle are slightly
smaller than G. vanhoepeni, less long, less markedly curved backward, less
strongly compressed, less uprightly inserted, and inserted less closely together.
In addition, there is no sign of internal hollowing in the frontals and the post-
cornual fossa is shallower. It will be noted that in all these characters the Lange-
baanweg gazelle can be regarded as less advanced than G. vanhoepeni and hence
a suitable ancestor for it. Moreover, the leading characteristic of the Langebaan-
weg gazelle is the strong backward curvature of its horn-cores, and this could
foreshadow the even more marked curvature of G. vanhoepeni. The diagonal
course of the boundary between the top of the pedicel and the base of the horn-
core in lateral view is another resemblance between the two species.
A right mandibular fragment with M, and partial M, from Mpesida
(KNM-MP 129) was attributed by Gentry (1978a: 302) to Antilopini, probably
Gazella, but Thomas (19798, pl. 2 (fig. 15)) believed that it was equally likely
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 315
to be a Raphicerus, i.e. neotragine. Its teeth are smaller than the Langebaanweg
gazelle and its mandibular ramus is shallower beneath M, than in either the
Langebaanweg gazelle or neotragine. It is not likely to be conspecific with either.
Tribe Ovibovini
Gen. et spp indet.
Figs 61-62
Gentry (1971: 289-290) pointed to two stocks of Ovibovini: an earlier
group known from the Turolian or equivalent faunas of Eurasia and centred on
Urmiatherium, and a later group known mainly from the Villafranchian or
equivalent faunas of Eurasia and Africa, centred on Makapania and Megalovis.
The second group could perhaps be descended from Palaeoryx, a Eurasian
contemporary of Urmiatherium (Gentry 1971: 281-283), and it also contains
the only two living ovibovines, the North American musk ox Ovibos moschatus
and the takin of Tibet and western China Budorcas taxicolor. The extinct group
of Turolian ovibovines had some very specialized characters of the horn-cores
and of the basicranial region of the skull, and Teilhard de Chardin & Trassaert
(1938: 91) have already noted that later ovibovines look less specialized. It is
thus difficult to frame a definition embracing both the groups of the tribe.
Among their major characters are that they are moderate to large bovids and
tend to have narrow and high rather than low and wide skull proportions. Horn-
cores are often short, have a tendency to become stumpy or abbreviated, and
develop insertion positions behind the level of the orbits. The frontals contain
cellular sinuses. The supraorbital pits are small. The braincase is short and its
roof usually steeply inclined. The auditory bulla is small. The teeth are hypso-
dont with reduced or absent basal pillars, and the premolar rows are short.
In the group of later ovibovines there are no keels or transverse ridges on
the horn-cores, the horn-cores are often very divergent, the frontals raised
between the horn-core bases, the orbital rims strongly projecting, the skull
wider across the orbits than across the occipital surface, the temporal lines
quite wide apart on the cranial roof, the mastoids usually large, and the basi-
occipital triangular shaped and with hollows on its surface between the anterior
and posterior tuberosities. There may be goat folds on the lower molars, para-
conid and metaconid are fused on P,, and there is a deep lateral indentation in
front of the hypoconid on P,.
The best known African ovibovine is Makapania broomi Wells & Cooke,
1956, from Makapansgat Limeworks and probably from Sterkfontein Type
Site (the teeth of M. cf. broomi Vrba, 1976: 48), which Gentry (19705) considered
was quite closely related to Megalovis latifrons Schaub of the later Villafranchian
of Europe. Unpublished or little-known fossils from other Pliocene and Pleisto-
cene sites, including Langebaanweg, show that one or more ovibovine lineages
had quite a wide distribution in Africa.
316 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
L13105—cranium preserved to just beneath and behind the horn-core
insertions and a separate piece of the same individual showing the
anterior parts of both frontals and the front surface of the base of the
left horn-core. From the QSM (Fig. 61) |
L13209—frontlet with horn-core bases, also from the QSM 3
L41144—shattered left mandible with M,, M, and unerupted M, and a P,
as a separate piece. It comes from bed 3aS of the PPM. (Fig. 62)
L45104—cranium preserved to a level just behind the horn-core bases. It
is unlikely to be conspecific with L13105 or L13209. It comes from
bed 3aN
Fig. 61. Ovibovini sp. L13105, from the left: cranium in lateral and ventral views, partial
frontlet in anterior view. Scale = 25 mm.
Fig. 62. Ovibovini sp. L41144, left M, and M, in occlusal view with M3;
out of alignment behind them. Scale = 10 mm.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 317
Description
On L13105 the horn-core insertions appear to have been close together, the
frontals have a well-developed system of internal sinuses, the braincase is
rather short and widens posteriorly, the flat-topped cranial roof is steeply
angied, the parietofrontals suture is not very complicated and has a forwardly
directed central indentation, the temporal ridges do not approach close to one
another posteriorly, the occipital has a tendency to a horizontal dorsal edge
and shows no median vertically running ridge but does have twin shallow
hollows dorsally, and the mastoids were probably of moderate to large size
although their lateral parts are now missing along with much of the nuchal
crests. The skull would have been wider across its orbits than across the occipital
surface. There is a narrow triangular basioccipital with small anterior tuberosi-
ties and no longitudinal ridges behind them. A central longitudinal ridge arises
just in front of a short groove between the posterior tuberosities and runs
through to the basisphenoid, the ridges on the posterior tuberosities are aligned
transversely not posterolaterally, the basioccipital is not constricted across its
central part, the basisphenoid is not greatly angled on the plane of the basi-
occipital, and the foramina ovalia are moderate to large sized and situated well
forward of the anterior tuberosities.
The separate piece of the same individual shows that there are small
supraorbital pits in front of the horn-core bases. The horn-core would have
been steeply inserted, the dorsal part of the orbital rim was horizontal and
projected quite strongly, and the midfrontals suture is not very complicated
at the level of the supraorbital pits.
The frontlet L13209 has the frontals between the horn-core bases raised
well above the level of the dorsal part of the orbital rims, and the midfrontals
suture is not very complicated. The horn-cores are inserted close together above
the back of the orbits and are compressed in the anterolateral to posteromedial
plane. They appear to have been moderately divergent and their basal part
ascended in a straight line if one can judge from the back surface of the right
horn-core. The braincase roof is steeply inclined.
The cranium L45104 is larger than L13105, the braincase roof is angled
by reference to the plane of the occipital but less steeply, the parietofrontals
suture is straight, there is less obviously a flat top to the occipital surface, there
is a median vertical ridge on the occipital, the back part of the frontals is less
upwardly slanted on the plane of the braincase roof so that the rise of the
(unpreserved) horn-core pedicel would have been further forward, and the
basioccipital has larger anterior tuberosities. This puzzling fossil is not definitely
ovibovine. It has a less narrowed appearance than L13105, and no information
is available about its horn-cores and the frontals area.
Measurements on L13105 and L45104 are:
Width across lateral edges of supraorbital foramina . 69,7 —
Maximum braincase width . é : : ; : : 93,4 107
Occipital height from dorsal edge of foramen magnum . 50,5 56,5
318 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Skull width across mastoids behind external auditory
meati ! A é ; ' : , ‘ : : 127,3 c. 149
Width across anterior tuberosities of basioccipital. . 19,8 21,2
Width across posterior tuberosities of basioccipital ; 45,1 50,0
Closest approach of temporal lines on cranial roof », eA0g 54,2
The minimum width across the lateral sides of the horn pedicels on L13209
is 126,7.
The lower molars of L41144 are rather large to agree with the Alcelaphini
from ‘E’ Quarry and too hypsodont to belong to the boselaphine. A goat fold
is seen on M,, one will appear in later wear on Mg, but none exists on M3.
These goat folds are more pronounced than in the Alcelaphini but less than
in Makapania broomi. Tiny basal pillars occur on M, and M,; they are too
tall and thin to match the boselaphine and agree better with some individuals
of the Langebaanweg alcelaphines than with M. broomi which has no basal
pillars. The medial walls of the molars are somewhat outbowed between the
stylids, agreeing both with Alcelaphini and M. broomi. The P, has a projecting
hypoconid and fusion of paraconid with metaconid, as in the alcelaphines and
M. broomi. At Makapansgat Limeworks lower molars of M. broomi can be
distinguished from alcelaphines by their more pointed lateral lobes and flatter
medial walls, but these criteria are unavailable with the more primitive alcela-
phine teeth at Langebaanweg. It seems very probable that L41144 does belong
to the Ovibovini. The occlusal lengths of its teeth are: P, 14,4, M, 21,8, M, 25,8
and M, 34,6. The crown height of the metastylid of Ms is c. 40,3.
Comparisons
It can be seen that the combination of characters cited for the QSM fossils
fits them to belong to the Ovibovini: moderate size, rather a narrow cranium,
greater skull width across orbits than occipital, frontals raised between the
horn bases and having cellular sinuses, small supraorbital pits, short braincase
with an inclined roof, temporal lines quite wide apart and mastoids probably
moderate to large sized.
The most interesting comparison for the QSM ovibovine is naturally with
Makapania broomi. The latter is fairly well preserved and its localities are not
that far across the continent from Langebaanweg. M. broomi is about the same
size as the Langebaanweg form and similar in that its horn-cores are antero-
posteriorly compressed, its frontals raised between the horn-core bases, the
braincase short, the parietofrontals suture centrally indented, the supraorbital
pits small, the sinuses in the frontals extend to the top of the pedicels, and there
is a valley between the posterior tuberosities of the basioccipital which widens
posteriorly. M. broomi differs by its horn-cores being inserted transversely
(= a divergence of nearly 180°) and wider apart, the braincase roof less
steeply inclined, the horn-cores inserted further behind the orbits, probably
by the presence of a ridge between horn-core and orbital rim, a shorter wider
basioccipital, the more complicated morphology of the anterior tuberosities
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 319
of the basioccipital, and localized deep hollows posterolaterally to the anterior
tuberosities. The divergence and relatively posterior insertion of the horn-cores
and the basicccipital characters are probably advanced in Makapania, but the
steeply inclined braincase of the Langebaanweg ovibovine looks more advanced
than Makapania.
An unpublished ovibovine skull from the middle or upper Hadar Forma-
tion, AL 136-5, agrees with Makapania broomi and the QSM form in size. Other
similarities to the Langebaanweg form, lacking in M. broomi, are the steeply
sloping braincase roof (perhaps even more inclined than at Langebaanweg), and
insertions above the back of the orbits. However, it differs from Langebaanweg
by having massive horn-cores which emerge transversely, frontals even more
raised between the horn-cores, a parietofrontals suture which is straight or
only slightly indented in its centre, the braincase narrowing instead of widening
posteriorly, a median vertical ridge on the occipital, a wider basioccipital,
anterior tuberosities of the basioccipital with long sharp ridges converging
anteriorly, a central longitudinal groove on the basioccipital, no widening of
this groove between the posterior tuberosities, and hollows on the basioccipital
surface anterolateral to the posterior tuberosities.
The European species with which the QSM ovibovine can be compared are
Megalovis latifrons Schaub (1923: 292, fig. 5; 1943: 281, figs 5-6) from the
upper Villafranchian of Senéze, France, and Hesperoceras merlae Villalta &
Crusafont-Pairo (1955: 431, figs 1-3) from the lower Villafranchian of Villa-
roya, Spain. They differ from the Langebaanweg ovibovine by the braincase
not widening posteriorly, its roof being less inclined, the basioccipital being
wider and having larger and more rugose anterior tuberosities, and by having
hollows on the basioccipital surface. H. merlae differs by having the horn-core
bases compressed in the anteromedial to posterolateral plane. It also has a
median vertical ridge on the occipital and the central longitudinal groove on
the basioccipital does not widen posteriorly between the posterior tuberosities.
M. latifrons differs by the dorsoventral compression of its horn-cores, their
more transverse emergence, the ridge between the horn-cores and orbital rims,
the frontals not very raised between the horn bases if at all, the more posterior
horn-core insertions, the braincase not widening posteriorly and the central
longitudinal groove of the basioccipital being present but constricted between
the anterior tuberosities.
It likely that the QSM ovibovine is less advanced than the other forms with
which it has been compared, in the horn-cores being little divergent and their
insertions being less far behind the orbits. Other apparently primitive characters
are the basioccipital not being very wide, its small anterior tuberosities, and
the absence of hollowings on the surface between the anterior and posterior
tuberosities. The basioccipitals of Ovibovini look as if their abundance of
morphological detail ought to be informative, but the difficulty with fossils is
to guess how much of the variability is individual rather than between species.
In essence their basioccipitals are short, wide and triangular and have a central
~~ J ese
UI
=-2 0 SEE ee Se ce
320 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
longitudinal groove. The groove widens posteriorly in the Langebaanweg
species, Makapania broomi and Ovibos moschatus but not in the Afar species,
Hesperoceras merlae or Budorcas taxicolor. It often becomes constricted between
the anterior tuberosities, as in Megalovis latifrons, and may even become only
a minor feature on a longitudinal ridge as in Makapania and Ovibos. The Lange-
baanweg species has the ridge alone and not the anterior part of the groove,
and the Afar species has no constriction between the anterior tuberosities. The
anterior tuberosities are poorly developed in Budorcas, perhaps secondarily so,
otherwise they are more strongly developed in later ovibovines than in the
Langebaanweg species, as also are the surface hollowings between anterior and
posterior tuberosities. The morphology of the anterior tuberosities differs much
between the species.
At present it looks as if the Afar species is a form in which the raising of
the frontals and inclination of the cranial roof has become more accentuated,
the horn-cores more massive, at least basally, and the basioccipital has evolved
somewhat differently from Makapania broomi. The position of the horn inser-
tions above rather than behind the orbits probably arises from the exaggerated
raising of the frontals and need not be primitive. That the Langebaanweg form
appears so primitive in its basioccipital probably denotes that it is from a fauna
earlier than either Afar or Makapansgat Limeworks. The relationships of the
Olduvai ovibovine horn-core (Gentry & Gentry 1978: 445, pl. 41) and ‘Bos’
makapaani Broom (1937: 510) are still puzzling. The relationships of the African
Ovibovini as a whole to those of the Villafranchian and later periods in Eurasia
also need clarifying.
Two associated limb bones from bed 3aS at Langebaanweg, a right femur
and tibia, both numbered L40274, may be ovibovine. They are smaller than in
living Ovibos or Budorcas, with lengths and least transverse thicknesses of
249 x 24,6 and 291 x 23,8 respectively. The femur shows no indentation
between great trochanter and articular head in anterior view, as is also the
case in both living species. It also has an anteroposteriorly narrowed lateral
part of the articular head, which has, however, reduced the articular head to
less of a ball than in either living species. Unlike either living species the great
trochanter is not mediolaterally thickened in dorsal view, the vastus lateralis
crest passes backwards and is quite sharply outlined, and there is a prominent
vertical ridge at the centre top of the anterior surface marking the lateral edge
of the vastus medialis and intermedius insertions. The anterior edge of the
lateral roughened fossa at its distal end is situated rather posteriorly, but no
other characters are like Budorcas rather than Ovibos. The tibia shows a poorly
developed central tubercle and flanking hollows on the proximal articular
surface, the lateral edge of the lateral facet is not upturned and distally the
medial malleolus is long, like both living ovibovines. Neither the proximal
articular surface nor the astragalar facets distally are as wide as in the living
ovibovines. A small knob of the proximal articular surface overlaps the top of
the posterior surface centrally, unlike the living species. For both bones the
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 321
specialized goat-like characters of Budorcas limb bones are largely absent.
Enigmatic horn-cores
In any sizeable collection of fossil bovids there are always a few horn-cores
difficult or impossible to identify. One pair of such horn-cores in the Lange-
baanweg collection is L41695 which is long and thin with a basal index of
39,3 x 32,6 and a length of 195 mm. One could imagine them as females of
one of the alcelaphine species except that they are disproportionately thick at
their bases.
Another group of horn-cores (L30885, L40084, and others) remain unidenti-
fied. They have rather large internal sinuses passing far up the pedicels and
could belong to Mesembriportax acrae at an immature growth stage before the
anterior keels appear.
BOVIDAE FROM BAARD’S QUARRY
A small number of bovid remains come from Baard’s Quarry but are
clearly not all from the same time level. By examination of matrix, bone pre-
servation, and from what is known of the geology of the quarry, Hendey (1978a)
has separated the fossils as a whole into a ‘lower level’ assemblage and an
appreciably younger ‘upper level’ one. Both assemblages are younger than the
‘E’ Quarry fossils. It must be stressed in Hendey’s (1978a: 4) words that ‘almost
all the fossils from Baard’s Quarry were collected after the deposits in which
they occurred had been moved by the mining operation and consequently the
provenance of specimens has for the most part to be inferred’.
Tribe Boselaphini
Lower assemblage
L1588A is a left horn-core fragment about 90 mm long, not distinguishable
on what has been preserved from Mesembriportax acrae. The top of the anterior
keel is present and there are deep longitudinal grooves on the posterior surface.
Tribe Reduncini
Lower assemblage
The following horn-cores are reduncine:
L565 _sileft, 32,7 x 26,4 (Fig. 63) L564 right, probably the same
individual as L565
15218 left; 316 <.27,6 L1378A right, could be the same
individual as L1603
L1570A left L1521A right, probably the same
individual as L1521B
(Fig. 63)
L1588B left, 30,9 x 26,2
E1603) . lett, 32,5. x 27.0
About eighteen poorly preserved fragments of horn-cores, the majority
of the total known from Baard’s Quarry, are also likely to be of this species.
v
~~ J th ss
322 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Se)
Fig. 63. Kobus ?porrecticornis from Baard’s Quarry. L564, anterior view of right horn-core.
L1521A, lateral view and cross-section of right horn-core. Lateral side of cross-section towards
the left and anterior side towards the base of the illustration. Scale = 25 mm.
These horn-cores were wrongly described as inseparable from Redunca (now
Kobus) ancystrocera by Gentry (in Hendey 1970: 115).
These horn-cores would have been fairly long as shown by L1378A which
has a preserved length of 130-140 mm and may have been c. 180 mm when
complete. They show slight mediolateral compression and a tendency to a
flattened lateral surface. The level of the widest transverse diameter lies centrally
or anteriorly and there is an approach to a posterolateral keel. This, combined
with the slight mediolateral compression, gives the horn-cores a Kobus-like
rather than a Redunca-like aspect. They are inserted close together on low
pedicels above the orbits, with a moderately strong divergence and gentle,
even backward curvature. The divergence lessens from the base upwards.
L1378A has greater initial divergence than the other specimens. They have a
moderate angle of insertion in side view. There are no transverse ridges, the
frontals are slightly higher than the dorsal parts of the orbital rims but not by
much, the supraorbital pits are small, the postcornual fossae narrowly triangular
but deep, no sinuses are visible within the frontals, and the sulci of the brain
surface are like Reduncini rather than Antilopini.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 325
The nearest resemblance of these horn-cores is to a reduncine from the
Lukeino Formation (Gentry 1978a, 302; Thomas 19798, fig.3) as well as to
some Siwaliks Group horn-cores, namely a left horn-core, BM(NH) M 15473,
of Dorcadoxa porrecticornis (Lydekker 1878: 158), a right horn-core, BM(NH)
M 15474, of Gazella? superba Pilgrim (1939: 36), and others illustrated by
Lydekker (1878, pl. 25 (fig. 4); 1886: 11, fig. 2) and Pilgrim (1939, pl. 1 (figs 4,
4a—b)). The Siwaliks horn-cores were supposed by Pilgrim to be from the Dhok
Pathan stage. They were collected at Hasnot, an area where many of the fossils
may be from levels slightly younger than the type Dhok Pathan Formation.
They can best be referred to Kobus porrecticornis and Thomas (19795) notes this
species as first appearing in the type zone (= upper part) of the Dhok Pathan For-
mation. The Lukeino reduncine belongs to the same or a closely related species,
and Thomas (19796, pl. 2 (fig. 13)) further records it at Mpesida on horn-
cores which Gentry (1978a: 302) had taken as tribe indeterminate. The Baard’s
Quarry examples differ from K. porrecticornis and the African K. aff. porrecti-
cornis only by being slightly smaller and having smaller supraorbital pits. An
unpublished pair of horn-cores, AL 99-3, 43, from the Amado Formation,
Afar, are very similar to the Siwaliks horn-cores, but their midfrontals suture
is deeper in section. Their supraorbital pits also are larger than at Baard’s
Quarry. If the Baard’s Quarry fossils were conspecific with the Lukeino and
Siwaliks ones, there would be an implication of a geological age between
3,0 and 6,7 m.y., but the small supraorbital pits may denote a different species.
The Baard’s Quarry specimens differ from some horn-cores of a supposed
early kob in member B of the Shungura Formation, e.g. L1-24 and L1-189,
by being more compressed mediolaterally, without transverse ridges, inserted
closer together and more uprightly, with less divergence basally and with
lessening divergence distally. They differ from Kobus subdolus and Kobus sp. 2
of ‘E’ Quarry by being smaller, without transverse ridges, more uprightly
inserted in side view, with more of a backward curvature, and with smaller
supraorbital pits. They are longer and more divergent than K. subdolus and
have a more definite distal lessening of their divergence than in Kobus sp. 2.
One does not know whether or not the Baard’s Quarry and similar Lukeino
and Siwaliks horn-cores are related to modern reduncines. It is difficult to
decide about the primitive and advanced conditions for the characters of trans-
verse ridges, inclination and divergence, and it would be presumptuous to
assert that evolutionary sequences for such characters had been ‘once only’
transitions from the supposed primitive to the advanced. Perhaps Kobus por-
- recticornis was a not very distinctive early relative of K. kob, which existed with
little change during a long span of time from the latest Miocene to mid Pliocene
and, therefore, is of limited use for correlations. Teeth likely to belong to it are
more typically reduncine than those of the ‘E’ Quarry Kobus, suggesting either
that K. porrecticornis occurred later or that, if its early records were contempo-
raneous with ‘E’ Quarry, it is a more plausible ancestor of modern species.
A left lower molar, L1487, from the lower assemblage, is similar to the
“7 #2474777
f
Se Oa
324 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
teeth numbered L21 and discussed below. It is in early middle wear, its occlusal
length is 15,8, and it is a typically reduncine tooth.
Upper assemblage
Two right and two left upper molars and a right lower, L21, belong to a
reduncine about the size of a large Redunca or small Kobus. They are little
advanced in the characters of the pinching of the medial lobes of the upper
molars and the lateral lobes of the lowers, the outbowing of the ribs between
the styles, the complexity of outline of the central cavities, and tendency towards
an appearance of anteroposterior compression. Such characters fit a late
Pliocene to Pleistocene time level, but it is possible to match them with a
minority among dentitions of late Pleistocene and extant reduncines, including
Redunca cf. arundinum from Swartklip (Hendey 1978a: 7). They are, of course,
much advanced on the reduncine teeth from ‘E’ Quarry.
Tribe Hippotragini
Upper assemblage
Four teeth or fragments thereof agree in size and morphology with Hippo-
tragus gigas from Elandsfontein. These are left lower molars L1491A and F,
a part of an unworn left lower molar L1464J, and part of a left upper molar
L1491D. Hendey (1978a: 7) points out that they could also belong to Oryx
gazella.
Two teeth from the upper assemblage are assignable to Hippotragus
leucophaeus, the extinct blaauwbok of the southern Cape Province. These are
a right Ms, L2129B, and part of a left lower molar, L2110. The first is in middle
wear and has an occlusal length of 28,8 and a height of 19,8. It matches M,s of
H. leucophaeus from Swartklip and Elandsfontein. Such teeth are difficult to
distinguish from those of Kobus of waterbuck size, although it has to be
remembered that for fossils at least back to Upper Pleistocene age in the
southern Cape Province H. leucophaeus is a more likely identification than a
large Kobus. Certainly L2129B has a large anterior goat fold and a second basal
pillar between its middle and rear lobes, characters which in themselves tell
against identification as Kobus. A second basal pillar is present in Elandsfontein
H. leucophaeus SAM-PQ-E3463 and 6323, and in Swartklip SAM—PQ-ZW375,
2254 and 2256A, all of which are from different individuals, and no example of
H. leucophaeus has been seen in which it is definitely absent. The lower molar
L2110 does not give any additional information.
Tribe Alcelaphini
Lower assemblage
A fragmentary right horn-core base with the medial part of its pedicel, L9,
belongs to an alcelaphine. It was inserted close to its partner of the other side
and the pedicel was higher than in ‘E’ Quarry alcelaphines. Like Damalacra
_neanica, it was compressed anteroposteriorly, or more accurately, antero-
laterally to posteromedially, with a basal index in the region of 37,0 x 50,0,
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 325
and it curves slightly forward and outward from the base upward. Differences
from D. neanica are that it may have been inserted less uprightly, its divergence
is less, it tapers less rapidly, i.e. it is less thick basally, and the front surface is
flatter. The poor divergence is as in D. acalla, and this species is a more probable
ancestor than D. neanica. A flattening of the medial surface near its base may be
connected with the lack of divergence of closely inserted horn-cores. This
character and the slight outward curvature can be matched within D. acalla
by L30215. It is almost impossible to guess at a relationship for this form if
it were not a Cape descendant of D. acalla. Its rather high pedicel could align
it with a Parmularius species, or the likely course and cross-section of the horn-
core could align it with the Hadar Formation alcelaphine and Damalops
palaeindicus.
L1491E and other alcelaphine teeth from the lower assemblage are of a size
to go with L9 and are considerably more advanced than the ‘E’ Quarry alcela-
phine teeth. A larger species is represented by L2112, part of an alcelaphine
lower molar rather larger than in living Connochaetes taurinus.
Upper assemblage
L1491H is an upper molar of a large alcelaphine of similar size to L2112.
Other alcelaphine teeth are from one or more smaller sized species, e.g. L1292,
L1373, L1460C, L1464G and K, and L1491B and C.
Tribe Neotragini
Lower assemblage
Some Raphicerus horn-cores from Baard’s Quarry are smaller than those
from ‘E’ Quarry and small even in comparison with Elandsfontein fossils.
They comprise:
179/77 right. 12,6 x 11,1
bisa leit. 11,2 x 9,2
L1663 right 11,4 x 9,7
eto70, left. 13,8 x 12,5, length c. 59,0
Others are L179/6, L905, L906, L1369A, and L1369B
These horn-cores are about the size of those of living R. campestris. They
are less bulky and do not taper rapidly above the base like those of “E’ Quarry.
They are slightly compressed mediolaterally, and their course is more or less
straight or with slight forward curvature. L1670 is the most nearly complete
and best preserved and it shows an approach to a posterolateral keel. The
insertion of L179/7 may be more upright than at Elandsfontein. The postcornual
fossa is not as large as in ‘E’ Quarry horn-cores.
Since the size of Raphicerus or Raphicerus-like horn-cores declines in the
southern Cape from ‘E’ Quarry to Elandsfontein to extant species, one would
imagine that these Baard’s Quarry horn-cores came from a time level later
than Elandsfontein. They are also small in comparison with the supposed
Raphicerus horn-core, BPI M 478, from Makapansgat Limeworks. Klein
A, a J SS,
f
—-. . + i. waa a
= Va. TA Oe Se oe
326 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(1976: 181, figs 2-3) demonstrated size fluctuations of the teeth of Middle
and Upper Pleistocene Raphicerus in the Cape Biotic Zone, and, if these reflect
overall size changes, one can imagine that decline in size has not been steady.
However, there is as yet no evidence of Raphicerus having such small horn-
cores as the Baard’s Quarry ones at or before the time level of the Elands-
fontein main fauna.
Upper assemblage
Two incomplete horn-cores, L1523 and L1643A, and two unnumbered
mandibular fragments are of a size to belong to Raphicerus. The latter comprise
a fragment of a right mandible with M, and part of Ms, and a fragment of a
left with P, and part of P;. The P, has a tendency to transverse orientation of
the metaconid as in Raphicerus.
The occlusal lengths of the M, and P, are 10,0 and 7,5 respectively. These
may be compared with other samples of Raphicerus:
Number ? Standard Standard
measured Mean Range deviation error
Recent
R. campestris M,. 21 9,56 8,7-10,7 0,60 0,13
Beacece L AG -7,0-8,5 0,39 0,08
Recent
R. melanotis .M, . 10 Sad 7,8-9,3 0,52 0,16
Py 2c, 520 8,24 7,4-9,3 0,53 0,17
Swartklip |
R. melanotis M, . 9 9,41 8,9-10,0 0,34 0,11
Py = 5) 8,06 7,2-9,1 0,68 0,30
Elandsfontein
Raphicerus M,. 38 10,37 9,0-11,9 O72 0,12
Pie e160 9,18 8,3-10, 1 0,52 0,13
The Baard’s Quarry M, is within the range of all except the sample of
Recent R. melanotis, and it is marginally closer to the mean for Elandsfontein
than to that for Recent R. campestris. The P, is within the range of all except
the Elandsfontein Raphicerus and is closest to the mean of Recent R. campestris.
It may be that the Baard’s Quarry teeth come from Upper Pleistocene or
Recent R. campestris. According to the findings of Klein (1976: 179), both
R. melanotis and campestris are known in the Cape biotic zone from the earlier
Upper Pleistocene onwards, but R. campestris occurred with any abundance
only at certain times within the Holocene.
Tribe Antilopini
Lower assemblage
The bases of right and left antilopine horn-cores, L179/8 and L179/10,
appear to belong to Antidorcas since they possess sinuses in their pedicels.
The absence of any backward curvature, the oval transverse section and deep
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 327
longitudinal grooves on the posterior surface match A. australis Hendey &
Hendey (1968: 56, pls 3-4) as known from Swartklip and other late Pleistocene
sites of the southern Cape Province. The rather small size (basal
index = 18,7 Xx 16,4) suggests that the animal would not have been adult. Three
teeth are large by comparison with the ‘E’ Quarry gazelle and could belong to
the Antidorcas: L179/4C a right Mg with occlusal length 21,8, L179/4F a right
lower molar, and L179/4G part of a left M;. The Ms; occlusal length is within
the range of both A. australis and A. marsupialis but is small for the latter
species.
Five horn-cores from Baard’s Quarry belong to Gazella:
Pisso8 25,4 x 16,5 L1492 right
Miess left 28,0 x c. 19,4 LISs2iC-* right
rset left 26,3 x 19,2
The last one, L1521D, is the best, or only adequately preserved, one and
has a supraorbital pit and a small part of the frontals.
They differ from the gazelle horn-cores of ‘E’ Quarry by being smaller,
more compressed mediolaterally, less curved backward, and the level of the
greatest transverse diameter being situated centrally or slightly posteriorly.
They agree with the ‘E’ Quarry form in characters common to many gazelles:
a tendency to flattening of the lateral surface, fairly upright insertions in side
view, little divergence, and narrowly triangular supraorbital pits. They differ
from the Elandsfontein gazelle by being more mediolaterally compressed and
more uprightly inserted. Their closest resemblance is to Gazella praethomsoni
Arambourg (1947) of the Shungura Formation, represented by the holotype
in Paris and by three horn-cores from members G and H: L35-35 from GS—a
left horn-core with an index of 27,9 x 18,7; F516—2 from G27—a right horn-
core with index 30,0 x 20,8; and F255-73 from H—a right horn-core with
index c. 27,5 x 20,0. A similar horn-core, BM(NH) M 14508, comes from
Bed I at Olduvai Gorge, and has an index of 27,6 x 21,0. However, it should
be remembered that gazelle horn-cores are not very distinctive, and that a
correlation over so long a distance as that from the southern Cape Province
to Ethiopia is not very reliable.
AGE OF THE BOVIDAE FROM BAARD’S QUARRY
If one accepts that the fossils from Baard’s Quarry come from two distinct
assemblages, then the bovids can contribute to assessing their age. The lower
assemblage contains a boselaphine not separable, on what we have of it, from
the ‘E’ Quarry Mesembriportax acrae, a reduncine which could be as old as
7,0 m.y. yet has teeth, or more correctly a tooth, more advanced than in ‘E’
Quarry, a Raphicerus with horn-cores of a size matched back to the Middle
Pleistocene only, an Antidorcas apparently akin to the late Pleistocene
A. australis, and a gazelle different from the ‘E’ Quarry species. The Raphicerus
is a problematical species and one needs new provenanced material in order to
ascertain that such small horn-cores could be older than the Middle Pleistocene
SS Pa oe ee es
328 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and so match the date of some of the other fossils. Dental remains apparently
of Raphicerus occur in the Laetolil Beds and are slightly smaller than extant
R. campestris, but horn-core or skull remains are as yet unknown. In all it
looks as if the lower assemblage is younger than ‘E’ Quarry but only the Raphi-
cerus and Antidorcas suggest, or are compatible with, so young an age as the
Pleistocene.
The upper assemblage has a reduncine with teeth more advanced than in
‘E’ Quarry, one hippotragine possibly of Middle Pleistocene age and another of
Upper Pleistocene or later age, two alcelaphines with teeth more advanced
than those of ‘E’ Quarry, and a Raphicerus with teeth of a size appropriate for
Middle Pleistocene or later age. Fauna from the Middle Pleistocene onwards
is obviously represented in Baard’s Quarry.
DISCUSSION
The Langebaanweg bovids
The ‘E’ Quarry bovids evidently existed at a time level by which they were
sufficiently evolved for their tribal affinities to be clear, but when traces of
their shared ancestry were less obliterated than at the present day. Thus the
Tragelaphus sp., Mesembriportax acrae, and Simatherium demissum all have
horn-cores with fairly wide insertions, some degree of basal divergence and at
least one good keel. The last two species also share the characters of strong
temporal ridges and a horizontal cranial roof with a rugose surface in its
posterior part. Such characters indicate satisfactorily the evolutionary unity
of the boodont antelopes. However, it is more difficult to assess the infratribal
relationships of the Langebaanweg bovids than of Pleistocene or late Pliocene
antelopes. It has therefore been useful to try to assess which character states are
primitive and which advanced. It became apparent with the bovine, for example,
that Simatherium is the only genus with which it can be matched in its supposedly
advanced characters of large horn-cores with strong basal divergence and few
traces of a (presumed) ancestral shape of cross-section. However, it is important
not to lose sight of the subjective and hypothetical element involved in judge-
ments of ‘primitive’ and ‘advanced’. One must also be aware that functional
connections within suites of characters may embrace both ‘primitive’ and
‘advanced’ characters, as in the bovine Leptobos, for example, in which the
persistence of the primitively horizontal plane of the braincase roof seems to
be linked with the compensatory evolution of very large temporal ridges
(Pilgrim 1939: 149). The evidence for paraconid—metaconid fusion on the P, of
early Reduncini, as discovered during work on the Langebaanweg bovids,
is also instructive. One doesn’t know if this apparently advanced character
should really be taken as primitive for reduncines, whether it is advanced and
thus evidence for the view that the ‘E’ Quarry reduncine is not related to living
reduncines (except Redunca arundinum ?), or, more elaborately, whether it
indicates a character reversal in tooth evolution from early bovids to early
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 329
reduncines and then to later reduncines. One cannot have a final opinion on
this question.
The bovid species lists for Langebaanweg are:
‘E’ Quarry
Varswater Formation QSM PPM :3aS PPM :3aN
Tragelaphus spp indet. O
Mesembriportax acrae -. .. xX
Simatherium demissum sp. nov. Xx
Kobus subdolus sp. nov.
Kobus sp. 2
Damaltacra neanica sp. nov.
Damalacra acalla sp. nov.
Raphicerus paralius sp. nov.
ees. 2 ° 2: oe
Ovibovini gen. et spp indet.
O=rare, X= abundant, — = absent
It is probable that more than one tragelaphine species is present in bed 3aN,
and the ovibovine of bed 3aN is definitely different from that of the QSM.
Baard’s Quarry
||
OM ddd | we OX
COOK00eKxKO
OO 3-0 |
Lower assemblage Upper assemblage
Mesembriportax acrae Reduncini sp. indet.
Kobus ?porrecticornis ? Hippotragus gigas
Alcelaphini, larger sp. Hippotragus leucophaeus
Alcelaphini, smaller sp. Alcelaphini, larger sp.
Raphicerus sp. Alcelaphini, smaller sp.
Antidorcas aff. australis Raphicerus sp.
Gazella sp., not conspecific with ‘E’ Quarry
species
Mesembriportax acrae is the only species common to Baard’s and
‘E’ Quarries, and it is not known whether the alcelaphines or Raphicerus are
the same in the lower and upper assemblages of Baard’s Quarry.
The ‘E’ Quarry list is not long in comparison with some well-worked sites
of later Pliocene or Pleistocene age, e.g. Olduvai Gorge (Gentry & Gentry 1978:
54, table 11) in which any one bed has between twelve and twenty-two species.
Since Langebaanweg is a rich locality for mammals as a whole, the relative
paucity of bovids probably indicates an antiquity of more than, say, 3 m.y.
There are some indicators of changes in the bovids within the span of the
deposits present in ‘E’ Quarry. Two of the three Tragelaphus horn-cores from
bed 3aN or probably from 3aN are larger than those from 3aS or, possibly, the
QSM. One of them (L40759) differs morphologically as well and probably
belongs to a different species. It looks as if the size of Mesembriportax acrae,
or at least of its teeth, may have increased from the QSM to the PPM. Within
the PPM Damalacra neanica is more strongly represented in bed 3aS, and
2, Ga, WE a ee em ue.
x wenmnaman
= ts
=a * ©
330 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
D. acalla horn-cores and an alcelaphine metatarsal reach a larger size in bed 3aN
than in 3aS. Raphicerus is rare or absent in bed 3aN and the gazelle is also
rare there. The supposedly ovibovine cranium from the PPM is very different
from that in the QSM. It is possible that reduncine dentitions have larger
molars in the PPM than in the QSM and that their horn-cores increase in size
between 3aS and 3aN, but neither change can yet be substantiated. Again it is
possible that Damalacra acalla horn-cores become shorter, the braincase
length shortens and the anterior tuberosities of the basioccipital become wider
apart, but these differences, too, cannot be substantiated.
Although not rich, the ‘E’ Quarry bovid fauna appears to be well balanced
ecologically. It has one or two species from most tribes, and one cannot see
any marked bias in representation comparable with the abundance of Alcela-
phini at Olduvai Gorge (Gentry & Gentry 1978: 53, 55) or of Tragelaphini,
Reduncini and Aepyceros in members B to G of the Shungura Formation
(Gentry 1976: 289, tables 2-3). Cephalophini are absent, which is a regular
feature of most African fossil localities. So, too, are Hippotragini. Two of the
tribes represented, Boselaphini and Ovibovini, are now extinct in Africa and
of restricted distribution elsewhere.
Comparisons with other sites
The bovids from one or two east African sites may be compared with those
from ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg. The list for the Laetolil Beds, Laetoli, is:
Tragelaphus sp.
Simatherium kohllarseni
Cephalophini sp. indet.
*Praedamalis deturi
* ?Hippotragini sp. nov.
*Parmularius sp. nov.
*Alcelaphini sp. indet.
* Madoqua avifluminis
?Raphicerus sp.
*Gazella janenschi
*Sp. indet. aff. Pelea
* — common species
The list provides an interesting contrast with Langebaanweg ‘E’ Quarry in
that it has almost the same number of species—11 instead of 12, no boselaphine,
2 hippotragines (the fourth and fifth entries) but no reduncines, 2 alcelaphines
of different sizes, and no ovibovine. Antidorcas is absent as at Langebaanweg.
One can imagine that the ecological bias of Langebaanweg lies towards more
closed vegetation and less dry conditions, although the first three species of the
Laetoli list indicate that some habitats in which such conditions prevailed must
have been present there also.
The Lothagam 1 bovids as listed by Smart (1976: 363) comprise Bosela-
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 331
phini 1 species, Tragelaphini 2, Hippotragini 2, Reduncini 2, Alcelaphini 1,
Aepyceros 1, Neotragini 1, Antilopini 3. There are 13 species here but weaker
alcelaphine representation than at Langebaanweg. The Lothagam list also
draws attention to the absence of Aepyceros at Langebaanweg. The extant
impala does not come south of the northern Cape Province, and fossil evidence
has yet to be found that it ever did so.
Thomas (19795) has given a valuable account of the bovids at Mpesida and
Lukeino, extending and modifying the preliminary remarks of Gentry (1978a).
A Tragelaphus as well as Kobus aff. porrecticornis are known from both these
sites. The Tragelaphus could be conspecific with the main ‘E’ Quarry species,
unless its horn-cores are insufficiently compressed in the anteroposterior plane,
and something close to Kobus aff. porrecticornis occurs in Baard’s Quarry. The
absence of a boselaphine at either site and the presence of distinguishable
reduncine and tragelaphine teeth are noted by Thomas. A bovine and Aepyceros
appear at Lukeino, but, apart from Aepyceros, no definite Alcelaphini are
present at either site. The questionably alcelaphine tooth at Mpesida,
KNM-MP 077, of Gentry (1978a: 302) is interpreted by Thomas (19798, pl. 2
(fig. 11)) as tragelaphine and the questionably alcelaphine horn-core, KNM-MP
068, as being tribe indeterminate (Thomas 19798, pl. 2, (fig. 12)). The single
record for a gazelle or Raphicerus is an indication of the difficulty of distinguish-
ing antilopine from neotragine teeth at Mpesida, a situation reminiscent of
‘Langebaanweg.
Faunal correlations
The bovids make some contribution to the problem of correlating Lange-
baanweg with other sites. One can summarize the conclusions from each species
in turn, noting that these conclusions are not always consistent with one another.
The characters whereby the horn-cores of Tragelaphus sp. differ from living
species of that genus are primitive and suggest considerable antiquity. A similar
horn-core is known from Makapansgat Limeworks, while those from Lukeino
and the early assemblage of the Kaiso Formation are more primitive and more
advanced respectively.
Mesembriportax acrae belongs to a tribe otherwise recorded in Africa from
Sahabi, Lothagam | (Smart 1976: 363, 365), Ngorora (Gentry 1978a) and Fort
Ternan. It is like a large and late Miotragocerus, and this could suggest
a date somewhat younger than those in the region of 7 to 9 m.y. for Eurasian
Turolian sites wherein M. amalthea and kindred species occur (Van Couvering
& Miller 1971; Erdbrink et al. 1976: 98). The most probable age indicated by
Smart for Lothagam | is a little older than 5 m.y., although the deposits are
framed by K-Ar dates of 3,7 and 8,3 m.y. (Behrensmeyer 1976: 166). Ngorora
and Fort Ternan are certainly much older and the age of Sahabi is as yet con-
jectural. Thus, somewhere about 5,5 m.y. is a likely age for the latest known
boselaphine in Africa. Boselaphini become rare or locally extinct everywhere
after the Turolian or equivalent stages. In Pakistan Miotragocerus disappears
-_ o-~ oe oe Se ot = . . ——
332 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
towards the top of the Dhok Pathan Formation at a level where Reduncini
make their first appearance (Pilbeam et al. 1977: 687), perhaps about 7,5 m.y.
Simatherium demissum is less advanced than the Simatherium in the Laetolil
Beds, so may be older than 3,5-3,75 m.y. The bovine Parabos boodon, which is
at a comparable evolutionary level on a different lineage, comes from Perpignan,
which is given an age of about 4,8 m.y. by Berggren & Van Couvering (1974:
92, fig. 11) and Delson (1975). The earliest bovine fossils yet known in Africa
are the Lukeino teeth which Thomas (19795) assigned to Ugandax. In the
Siwaliks Group, Bovini first appear in the Tatrot stage.
The temporal lines on the braincase roof of Kobus subdolus are much
weaker than in Pinjor Formation reduncines and no close relationship with these
animals is likely. Kobus subdolus horn-cores are not like those of either
K. porrecticornis or K. aff. porrecticornis from the Tatrot and/or upper Dhok
Pathan Formations, Lukeino, Mpesida, and the Amado Formation, Afar. The
teeth which seem to belong to K. subdolus are unlike any other known redun-
cines including the K. porrecticornis stock, so either ‘E’ Quarry is older than
about 7 m.y. or one has to suppose that K. subdolus retained primitive teeth
longer than did the smaller K. porrecticornis. The horn-cores of K. subdolus do
have similarities to others from Sahabi and Wadi Natrun, but as yet no redun-
cine teeth are known from these sites.
Kobus sp. 2 looks more like an earlier member of the kob lineage than the
species found in member B of the Shungura Formation, but this appearance
may be a misleading parallel. It has an interesting conformation of its frontals
which could well be primitive, as already suggested.
The small Kobus of Baard’s Quarry does not occur in ‘E’ Quarry but appears
to be very close to K. porrecticornis and K. aff. porrecticornis. It is kob-like and
may be related to later reduncines.
The alcelaphines of Langebaanweg support the age interpretations arising
from consideration of the reduncines. It is difficult to relate them to east African
fossil alcelaphines, but a much damaged horn-core, an upper molar, and an M,
from Wadi Natrun look as if they could be similar. Alcelaphine teeth at Lange-
baanweg are markedly more primitive than those known from either the Hadar
Formation or the Laetolil Beds and are much less hypsodont than at the Sterk-
fontein Type Site. They are more advanced than teeth of ?Pseudotragus in the
Ngorora Formation which may belong to a species ancestral to later Alcelaphini.
The horn-cores of Raphicerus paralius are similar to one from Makapansgat
Limeworks. A pair from member G of the Shungura Formation have some
similarities to R. paralius, but neotragine dentitions in member G are dissimilar.
Raphicerus paralius is the largest known neotragine and appears to be much
older than the Raphicerus from Elandsfontein. Neotragine dentitions at Lange-
baanweg are at so early an evolutionary level that it is difficult to tell them from
dentitions of Antilopini. The same difficulty is found at Mpesida.
If it were accepted that the Langebaanweg gazelle was ancestral to the one
from Makapansgat Limeworks, it would follow that Langebaanweg was an
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 333
older site.
The ovibovine is likely to be older than those from Makapansgat Lime-
works and the Hadar Formation, mainly on the indication of the primitive
state of its basioccipital. It is definitely not a member of the Turolian-aged group
of ovibovines centred on Urmiatherium.
Conclusions
Sahabi is perhaps the site with bovids most akin to Langebaanweg. It has
a boselaphine of Turolian aspect coexisting with a primitive bovine as at Lange-
baanweg, and its reduncine horn-cores, too, are similar to those of Langebaan-
weg. One is uncertain without the benefit of K-Ar dating whether to rely on the
boselaphine and favour a date back to somewhere near 7-8 m.y. for. both sites,
or to emphasize the affinities of the bovines with their more advanced relatives
in middle and late Pliocene faunas and thus favour a date nearer to 4 m.y.
Sahabi has generally been allotted to a position about 6 m.y. (Maglio 1973: 70)
or 6,5 m.y. (Delson 1975).
The Kobus aff. porrecticornis at Mpesida and Lukeino suggests that these
sites could be younger than ‘E’ Quarry, but the Tragelaphus suggests, less
forcefully, that Lukeino could be older. The neotragine or antilopine dentitions
suggest that Mpesida could be about the same age as ‘E’ Quarry.
The reduncine and alcelaphine teeth at Langebaanweg favour an early
date, perhaps even earlier than 7 m.y. in the case of the reduncines. However,
securely dated alcelaphine teeth of ‘advanced’ pattern are not known earlier
than from Laetoli (3,5-3,75 m.y.), and one can envisage that alcelaphine teeth
may have evolved at an accelerated rate, i.e. crossed a threshold, shortly before
this time. With a site in the extreme south of Africa there is always the possibility
that evolutionary advances lagged behind those in other parts of Africa. At the
present time the teeth of Connochaetes gnou and Damaliscus dorcas are less
occlusally complex than in other living alcelaphines. Allometry may be involved
in either case and especially in D. dorcas, but it is also possible that C. gnou has
retained a primitive condition. However, it would be unwise to introduce the
idea of a South African evolutionary lag into palaeontological correlations in
the absence of evidence of its independence from allometric effects or of its
persistence over a period of several hundred thousand years.
As a whole one can say that the bovids best indicate an age of about
6 m.y. for the fauna of ‘E’ Quarry at Langebaanweg, near the end of the Turolian
Stage in Europe, and near the base of the Tatrot Formation in India and
Pakistan. The bovids of the lower assemblage in Baard’s Quarry suggest a
pre-Pleistocene age younger than ‘E’ Quarry, and the upper assemblage a
Middle Pleistocene or later age.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Dr Q. B. Hendey of the South African Museum first invited me to work
on the bovids of Langebaanweg and has given me a great deal of help during
7. «| +s. a 2 2
.——_—. *- | => wae a
+ Si settee
a a
=o
334 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the preparation of this paper. I also thank my wife for much help. Financial
support for visits to Cape Town was given by the Wenner Gren Foundation for
Anthropological Research, New York. Dr H. Thomas kindly allowed me to
quote from an unpublished paper.
REFERENCES
ANDREE, J. 1926. Neue Cavicornier aus dem Pliocan von Samos. Palaeontographica 67:
135-175.
ANDREWS, C. W. 1902. Note on a Pliocene vertebrate fauna from the Wadi-Natrun, Egypt.
Geol. Mag. (4) 9: 433-439.
ANSELL, W. F. H. 1971. Artiodactyla. Jn: MEESTER, J. & SETZER, H. W., eds. The mammals
of Africa: an identification manual. 15: 1-93. Washington D.C.: Smithsonian Institution
Press.
ARAMBOURG, C. 1947. Contribution a l’étude géologique et paléontologique du bassin du lac
Rodolphe et de la basse vallée de ’'Omo. Mission scient. Omo 1 Géol. Anthrop. (3):
232-562.
ARAMBOURG, C. & PIVETEAU, J. 1929. Note préliminaire sur un Ruminant du Pliocéne inférieur
du Roussillon. C.r. somm. Séanc. Soc. géol. Fr. 10: 144-146.
ARONSON, J. L., SCHMITT, T. J., WALTER, R. C., TAIEB, M., TIERCELIN, J-J., JOHANSON, D. C.,
NAESER, C. W. & Nairn, A. E. M. 1977. New geochronologic and palaeomagnetic data
for the hominid-bearing Hadar formation of Ethiopia. Nature, Lond. 267: 323-327.
BEHRENSMEYER, A. K. 1976. Lothagam Hill, Kanapoi, and Ekora: a general summary of
stratigraphy and faunas. Jn: CoppENs, Y., HOWELL, F. C., ISAAC, G. Ll. & LEAKEY,
R. E. F., eds. Earliest man and environments in the Lake Rudolf basin: 163-170. Chicago:
University of Chicago Press.
BERGGREN, W. A. & VAN COUVERING, J. A. 1974. The late Neogene. Palaeogeogr. Palaeoclimat.
Palaeoecol. 16: 1-216.
BisHop, W. W., CHAPMAN, G. R., HILL, A. & MILLER, J. A. 1971. Succession of Cainozoic
vertebrate assemblages from the northern Kenya Rift Valley. Nature, Lond. 233: 389-394.
BisHop, W. W., MILLER, J. A. & Fitcu, F. J. 1969. New potassium-argon age determinations
relevant to the Miocene fossil mammal sequence in East Africa. Am. J. Sci. 267: 669-699.
BisHop, W. W. & PICKFORD, M. H. L. 1975. Geology, fauna and palaeoenvironments of the
Ngorora Formation, Kenya Rift Valley. Nature, Lond. 254: 185-192.
Boaz, N. T., GAziry, A. W. & EL-ARNAUTI, A. 1979. New fossil finds from the Libyan Upper
Neogene site of Sahabi. Nature Lond. 280: 137-140.
Broom, R. 1937. Notices of a few more new fossil mammals from the caves of the Transvaal.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (10) 20: 509-514.
Brown, F. H., HowELL, F. C. & Eck, G. G. 1978. Observations on problems of correlation
of late Cenozoic hominid-bearing formations in the North Lake Turkana Basin. Jn:
BisHop, W. W., ed. Geological background to fossil man: 473-498. Geol. Soc. Spec. Publ.
no. 6. Edinburgh: Scottish Academic Press.
BUTZER, K. W. & THURBER, D. L. 1969. Some late Cenozoic sedimentary formations of the
Lower Omo Basin. Nature, Lond. 222: 1138-1143.
CooKkE, H. B. S. & CorYNDON, S. 1970. Pleistocene mammals from the Kaiso Formation and
other related deposits in Uganda. Jn: LEAKEY, L. S. B. & SAVAGE, R. J. G., eds. Fossil
Vertebr. Afr. 2: 107-224. London: Academic Press.
CopPENS, Y., HOWELL, F. C., IsAAc, G. LI. & LEAKEY, R. E. F., eds. 1976. Earliest man and
environments in the Lake Rudolf basin. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Dav, J. H. M. 1973. The behaviour of the bontebok, Damaliscus dorcas dorcas (Pallas, 1766),
with special reference to territorial behaviour. Z. Tierpsychol. 33: 38-107.
DELson, E. 1975. Paleoecology and zoogeography of the Old World monkeys. Jn: TUTTLE,
R. H., ed. Primate functional morphology and evolution: 37-46. The Hague: Mouton.
DEPERET, C. 1890. Les animaux pliocénes du Roussillon. Mém. Soc. géol. Fr. Paléont. 3: 1-194.
DieTRIcH, W. O. 1941. Die sdugetierpalaontologischen Ergebnisse der Kohl-Larsen’schen
Expedition 1937-1939 im n6rdlichen Deutsch-Ostafrika. Zentbl. Miner. Geol. Puldont.
(B) 8: 217-223.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 335
DietricH, W. O. 1942. Altestquartare Saugetiere aus der siidlichen Serengeti, Deutsch-
Ostafrika. Palaeontographica 94A: 43-133.
Dietricu, W. O. 1950. Fossile Antilopen und Rinder Aquatorialafrikas. Palaeontographica
99A: 1-62.
DItTRIEVA, E. L. 1977. Tajikistan’s and India’s fossil Alcelaphinae. J. Palaeont. Soc. India 20:
97-101.
ERDBRINK, D. P. B., PRieM, H. N. A., HEBEDA, E. H., Cup, C., DANKERS, P. & CLOETINGH,
S. A. P. L. 1976. The bone bearing beds near Maragheh in N.W. Iran. Proc. Kon. Ned.
Akad. Wet. (B) 79, 2: 85-113.
FALCONneER, H. 1859. Descriptive catalogue of the fossil remains of Vertebrata... in the museum
of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. Calcutta.
GENTRY, A. W. 1970a. The Bovidae (Mammalia) of the Fort Ternan fossil fauna. In: LEAKEY,
L. S. B. & SAVAGE, R. J. G., eds. Fossil Vertebrates of Africa 2: 243-324. London: Aca-
demic Press.
GENTRY, A. W. 19705. Revised classification for Makapania broomi Wells & Cooke (Bovidae,
Mammalia). Palaeont. afr. 13: 63-67.
GENTRY, A. W. 1971. The earliest goats and other antelopes from the Samos Hipparion fauna.
Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 20: 229-296.
GENTRY, A. W. 1974. A new genus and species of Pliocene boselaphine (Bovidae, Mammalia)
from South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus 65: 145-188.
GENTRY, A. W. 1976. Bovidae of the Omo Group deposits. Jn: CopPENS, Y., HOWELL, F. C.,
Isaac, G. LI]. & LEAKEY, R. E. F., eds. Earliest man and environments in the Lake Rudolf
basin: 275-292. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
GENTRY, A. W. 1978a. The fossil Bovidae of the Baringo area, Kenya. Jn: BisHop, W. W.., ed.
Geological background to fossil man: 293-308. Geol. Soc. Spec. Publ. no. 6. Edinburgh:
Scottish Academic Press.
GENTRY, A. W. 19785. Bovidae. In: CooKE, H. B. S. & MAGLIO, V. J., eds. Evolution of African
mammals: 540-572. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press.
‘GENTRY, A. W. & GENTRY, A. 1978. Fossil Bovidae (Mammalia) of Olduvai Gorge, Tanzania.
Parts I-II. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 29: 289-446; 30: 1-83.
GERVAIS, P. 1852. Zoologie et paléontologie Frangaises. Paris.
GERVAIS, P. 1853. Description des ossements fossiles de mammiféres rapportés d’Espagne par
M M. de Verneuil, Collomb et de Loriére. Bull. Soc. géol. Fr. (2) 10: 147-167.
GUERIN, C. 1975. Les rhinocéros (Mammalia, Perissodactyla) des gisements Pliocénes Frangais:
intérét biostratigraphique et paléoécologique. Colloques int. Cent. natn. Res. scient. 218
Problémes actuels de paléontologie (évolution des vertébrés): 739-747.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1970. A review of the geology and palaeontology of the Plio/Pleistocene
deposits at Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 56: 75-117.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1973. Fossil occurrences at Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Nature, Lond. 244:
13-14.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1974. The late Cenozoic Carnivora of the south-western Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 63: 1-369.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1976. The Pliocene fossil occurrences in ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg, South
Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 215-247.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1978a. The age of the fossils from Baard’s Quarry, Langebaanweg, South
Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 75: 1-24. ;
HENDEY, Q. B. 19785. Late Tertiary Hyaenidae from Langebaanweg, South Africa, and their
relevance to the phylogeny of the family. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 265-297.
HENDEY, Q. B. & HENDEY, H. 1968. New Quaternary fossil sites near Swartklip, Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 52: 43-73.
KLEIN, R. G. 1975. Palaeoanthropological implications of the nonarchaeological bone assem-
blage from Swartklip I, south-western Cape Province, South Africa. Quartern. Res. 5:
275-288.
KLEIN, R. G. 1976. The fossil history of Raphicerus H. Smith 1827 (Bovidae, Mammalia) in
the Cape biotic zone. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 71: 169-191.
KEIN, R. G. 1978. The fauna and overall interpretation of the “Cutting 10’ Acheulean site at
Elandsfontein (Hopefield), south-western Cape Province, South Africa. Quatern Res. 10:
69-83.
Ye
| med AH wi
/
‘a7 £ 4 Sa
i >,>SL_e eee > FF
a7. «| + Ss 2 wa
Ta. * | = Mani
”* I seeeesaa!
—-P)
~~
SS
336 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
LEAKEY, L. S. B. 1965. Olduvai Gorge 1951-61.1 Fauna and Background. Cambridge: University
Press.
LEAKEY, M. D. 1971. Olduvai Gorge 3 Excavations in Beds I and II, 1960-1963. Cambridge:
University Press.
Leakey, M. D., Hay, R. L., Curtis, G. H., DRAKE, R. E., JackEs, M. K. & Wuite, T. D.
1976. Fossil hominids from the Laetolil Beds. Nature, one 262: 460-466.
LEAKEY, M. D. & Hay, R. L. 1979. Pliocene footprints in the Laetolil Beds at Laetoli, northern
Tanzania. Nature Lond. 278: 317-323.
LYDEKKER, R. 1878. Crania of ruminants from the Indian Tertiaries, and supplement. Mem.
geol. Surv. India Palaeont. indica (10) 1: 88-181.
LYDEKKER, R. 1886. Siwalik Mammalia, Supplement I. Mem. geol. Surv. India Palaeont.
indica (10) 4: 1-21.
Lyncu, C. D. 1974. A behavioural study of blesbok, Damaliscus dorcas phillipsi, with special
reference to territoriality. Mem. natn. Mus. Bloemfontein 8: 1-83.
Maa1uio, V. J. 1973. Origin and evolution of the Elephantidae. Trans. Am. phil. Soc. (n.s.)
63, 3: 1-149.
MEIN, P. 1975. Proposition de biozonation du Néogéne Méditerranéen a partir des mammi-
féres. Trab. Neogeno-Cuaternario 4: 112-113.
MOoNFORT-BRAHAM, N. 1975. Variations dans la structure sociale du topi, Damaliscus korrigum
Ogilby, au Parc National de l’Akagera, Rwanda. Z. Tierpsychol. 39: 332-364.
PARTRIDGE, T. C. 1978. Reappraisal of Sterkfontein hominid site. Nature, Lond. 275: 282-287.
Petroccui, C. 1956. I Leptobos di Sahabi. Boll. Soc. geol. Ital. 75, 1: 206-238.
PICKFORD, M. 1975. Late Miocene sediments and fossils from the northern Kenya Rift Valley.
Nature, Lond. 256: 279-284.
PICKFORD, M. 1978a. Geology, palaeoenvironments and vertebrate faunas of the mid-Miocene
Ngorora Formation, Kenya. Jn: BisHop, W. W., ed. Geological background to fossil man:
237-262. Geol. Soc. Spec. Publ. no. 6. Edinburgh: Scottish Academic Press.
PICKFORD, M. 19785. Stratigraphy and mammalian palaeontology of the late-Miocene Lukeino
Formation, Kenya. Jn: BisHop, W. W., ed. Geological background to fossil man: 263-278.
Geol. Soc. Spec. Publ. no. 6. Edinburgh: Scottish Academic Press.
PILBEAM, D., BARRY, J., MEYER, G. E., SHAH, S. M. I., PickForD, M. H. L., BisHop, W. W.,
THOMAS, H. & JAcoss, L. L. 1977. Geology and palaeontology of Neogene strata of
Pakistan. Nature, Lond. 270: 684-689.
PILGRIM, G. E. 1939. The fossil Bovidae of India. Mem. geol. Surv. India Palaeont. indica
(n.s.) 26: 1-356.
PILGRIM, G. E. & Hopwoop, A. T. 1928. Catalogue of the Pontian Bovidae of Europe in the
Department of Geology. London: British Museum (Natural History).
PIVETEAU, J., ed. 1961. Traité de paléontologie 6 (1) Mammiferes, origine reptilienne, évolution.
Paris: Masson.
PLEssis, S. S. Du 1972. Ecology of blesbok with special reference to productivity. Wildl. Monogr.
30: 1-70.
ROBINSON, P. 1972. Pachytragus solignaci, a new species of caprine bovid from the late Miocene
Beglia Formation of Tunisia. Notes Serv. géol. Tunisie 37: 73-94.
ROBINSON, P. & BLACK, C. C. 1969. Note préliminaire sur les vertébrés fossiles du Vindo-
bonien. Notes Serv. géol. Tunisie 31: 67-70.
ScHAvuB, S. 1923. Neue und wenig bekannte Cavicornier von Senéze. Eclog. geol. Helv. 18:
281-295.
ScHAuB, S. 1943. Die oberpliocaene Sdugetierfauna von Senéze (Haute-Loire) und ihre
verbreitungsgeschichtliche Stellung. Eclog. geol. Helv. 36: 270-289.
SIMPSON, G. G. 1945. The principles of classification and a classification of mammals. Bull.
Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 85: 1-350.
SMART, C. L. 1976. The Lothagam 1 fauna: its phylogenetic, ecological and biogeographic
significance. In: COpPPENS, Y., HOWELL, F. C., Isaac, G. LI. & LEAKEY, R. E. F., eds.
Earliest man and environments in the Lake Rudolf basin: 361-369, Chicago: University of
Chicago Press. ‘é
STROMER, E. 1907. Fossile Wirbeltier-Reste aus dem Uadi Faregh und Uadi Natrun in Agypten.
Abh. sencken. naturforsch. Ges 19: 99-132.
STROMER, E. 1928. Wirbeltiere im obermiocanen Flinz Munchens. Abh. bayer. Akad. Wiss. 32:
1-71.
FOSSIL BOVIDAE FROM LANGEBAANWEG 337
STUDER, T. 1898. Ueber fossile Knochen vom Wadi-Natrun Unteregypten. Mitt. naturf. Ges.
. Bern 1451-1462: 72-77.
TalEB, M., JOHANSON, D. C., CopPpeNns, Y. & TIERCELIN, J-J. 1978. Expédition internationale
de l’Afar, Ethiopie (4° et 5° campagnes 1975-1977): chronostratigraphie des gisements a
Hominidés pliocénes d’Hadar et corrélations avec les sites préhistoriques du Kada Gona.
C. r. hebd. Séanc. Acad. Sci., Paris (D) 287: 459-461.
TANKARD, A. J. 1974. Varswater Formation of the Langebaanweg-Saldanha area, Cape
Province. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 77: 265-283.
TEILHARD DE CHARDIN, P. & TRASSAERT, M. 1938. Cavicornia of south-eastern Shansi. Palaeont.
sin. (n.s.C) 6: 1-98.
THENIUS, E. 1956. Zur Entwicklung des Knochenzapfens von Protragocerus Depéret (Bovidae,
Mammalia) aus dem Miozdn. Geologie 5: 308-318.
THENIUS, E. 1959. Handbuch der stratigraphischen Geologie III Tertidr, 2 Wirbeltierfaunen.
Stuttgart: Ferdinand Enke.
Tuomas, H. 1979a. Miotragocerus cyrenaicus sp. nov. (Bovidae, Artiodactyla, Mammalia)
du Miocéne supérieur de Sahabi (Libye) et ses rapports avec les autres Miotragocerus.
Geobios Lyon 12: 267-281.
Tuomas, H. 1979b. Les bovidés du Miocéne supérieur des couches de Mpesida et de la
formation de Lukeino (District de Baringo, Kenya). In: LEAKEY, R. E. F., ed. Proc.
pan-afr. Congr. Prehist. 1977 Nairobi.
VAN COUVERING, J. A. & MILLER, J. A. 1971. Late Miocene marine and non-marine time scale
in Europe. Nature, Lond. 230: 559-563.
VILLALTA, J. F. & CRUSAFONT-PaIRO, M. 1955. Un nuevo Ovicaprino en la fauna villafran-
quiense de Villaroya (Logrono). Actes 4th Congr. int. Ass. quatern. Res.: 426-432.
VrRBA, E. S. 1976. The fossil Bovidae of Sterkfontein, Swartkrans and Kromdraai. Transv.
Mus. Mem. 21: 1-166.
Vrs, E. S. 1977. New species of Parmularius Hopwood and Damaliscus Sclater & Thomas
(Alcelaphini, Bovidae, Mammalia) from Makapansgat, and comments on faunal chrono-
logical correlation. Palaeont. afr. 20: 137-151.
WALTHER, F. 1972. Hartebeests, roan and sable antelopes and waterbucks. Jn: GRZIMEK, B.,
ed. Grzimek’s Animal Life Encyclopaedia 13, Mammals IV: 399-430. New York: Van
Nostrand.
WELLS, L. H. 1969. Generic position of ‘Phenacotragus’ vanhoepeni. S. Afr. J. Sci. 65: 162-163.
WELLS, L. H. & Cooke, H. B. S. 1956. Fossil Bovidae from the limeworks quarry, Makapans-
gat, Potgietersrus. Palaeont. afr. 4: 1-55.
es Sf Mitts oz
\) Pn” ow 7s
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed. by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., Syn. nov., etc.
‘An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new Species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. ‘Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
‘Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
- 6
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
’ (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but. A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman’ numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
- book or article, such as
“Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
- Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
ie
CC) ea
rr
DN ee te A
\U wee —1
A. W. GENTRY
FOSSIL BOVIDAE (MAMMALIA) FROM
LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA
_y oh a al ae Leh De en) Ee, A. SN ey AP |) <O) Wr Le 1 Se), Ce litt. QD frericmeAUN — Lil’ PS
‘Wuvugia_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLINS
‘ 2 ” 2 1) z 7)
es = < = : = =
E 2 2 Ng 3 _z :
tice ee 2 yy WE B hs ]
E 2 = AS zy = =
NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S3JIYVHYGIT LIBRARIES INSTITUT
” ae ” = ” =
= — = 4 = =
fag anf paar] Ge mars
o of a 4 Ge =
a 5 S Oo = fe) :
_ z= pa | = ef = ——
1tuvudit LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOJLOLILSNI NVINOSHLINS $3! YVay
i z om Zz Ws : = !
— re) Nex ro) c=: we fe)
ow = 40 = wo . =
5 2 E ACE
> I : > be > =
ie — a i= 2 ra
STITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3SIYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN |
io o- z 2] = we “” z
| WS = < = ~x = <
: A hh = = z =e z
2 Vy = z = z 3
See ga = > = a = ’
oy eee ; Ww) Pad 77) patina 7)
iYVYUSIT_ LIBRARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOLILSNI_NVINOSHLIWS S23 buVas
é = .o a \\e
a oe. a oc a a
= :
S = c . a =
=i is = oo = o
: (@) os ore” oe) —_ (@) oop
z oF = _! z Saat
STITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS. SS'1¥YVYdIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
Zz — ~ = - = as
re) | Oo ae °
=e a \ 2 0 5 3
> | > SS a > = >
= a \\ ro a - ps
b = W's = ae =
z ao m= Z e z ao
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS |
Z ” eo nw z 7)
< = < = pes =
z = 2 + es on
8 3 : 3 8 :
= z i 2 = 2.
= aN. > = a >" = >
77) = 77) sp 2 ” z
NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS S3IYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
on ei 7 z of =
isl ” ne 7 us no
ae = a =a, a , a
eS = a = o = '
ca rs) ee re) ra o
ituvud!it LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1YVY
E 3 = 5 ae
w Baie = iE ce . r=
A = ,Y i a ED | A d czy
> E: Y > i | > - :
2 6 2 - 2 = y
NOILNLILSNI S3J!IYVYUGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN | UT
w Ld = awe w es Oe
= = ‘= NSS = ae = CAS
= 5 => WSS 5 4 NZ .
a x. D9 MK ZF mm) 5 ’
a O % Sm oOo ke) SS] +r
is SS
FVAST 4 © ene or > Nast nm Nanos = nee m ores " wv SWASni
f ae Ww — w —_
BRARIES. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3luyygi7] LIBRARI
P = = 7h —g Fe 2 ?
= z= \ =| ie =|
= 5% Ny = i Oo x
: 2 SN 3 e
z = \S 2, = Pak
oe ab seer Sse a 2
ILSNI
NVINOSHLINS S3!IYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
*e
=
<
z=
Oo
ae
ake
F
=
Ww)
> w — w ~_
G : é : a “
4 poe = < | <x
—_ on = a c a
rs} jee) = a. = ©
as 3 s 3 S a
BRARIES_ SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION NOLLNLILSNI_NVINOSHLIWS | S3 IYVUdIT LIBRARI
ARSON, Dy ° _— Oo oo OK. re) w
= 0 = x % - 0
Ey = e > = “2
oe 2 = a sad
oo ial zZ : Z o
— — w . pa
ILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN NOILALIL
: = g ee Z =
‘'Z = = Ws § Fa a! ee
9 a BN & : bY
j re = = igi E 2G
[= 2 : z ie = 2
BRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3INVUSIT_LIBRARI
uw 2 ws = ES 2
ons te wt OO es wn =e ”
ae. ¢Y Z ea a = a za
qt *°Yy =I < + <x a
« Ye = oc Cc oc =
un YY = co a os a
=) rr 5 g © 2
LNLILSNITNVINOSHLINS S3INVUGIT LIBRARIES INSTITUTION NOILNLILS
ae = s = S eS
Ss & = = oe =
> = = <> a
me > he *. -
= = = ae = i
-— os = 2 m 2" m g
BRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S31uvygIT_LIBRARI
. g = Fe wn = n y =!
= ae a Ly, = =|
= 2 My. O
FORA. F216 :
LO » >
2 rr a = z
* oe
_NVINOSHLIWS saiuvygi LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
=e aes
-
=
77
2. aa ix 2 a
a : a ul - us
= aw S w pa a
= . << = < <Tes | x
<P & ad @ = @ - = wo
: Asis ° 7 oO ms (@) —
= =! za J z a
BRARI ES _ SMITHSONIAN, INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3!IYVYURG 17 LIB RARIE
RS =
AGASON; o a Ss) ni Ae 5 =
AM, 5 2 = 2 = ra
=9 = = = S
= x ED = - ya
2 m 2 m “” m
— w = w < “
Te NOSHLINS (Sa iuyvug Mul BRARI ES. INSTITUTION | NOILNLILS
5 tapi ee ee Bem. Gc 5
lo go . : ee a
IBY 3S FMS F
O % Lid = RN oO SQ] = AN WN ra
SMITHSONIAN IN
TT,
3 9088 01206 6718
2 BAY AUN wee,